DEIE

C-18 - CURRICULUM
FOR DIPLOMA PROGRAMMES IN TELANGANA
I. PREAMBLE
The State Board of Technical Education and Training, Telangana under the aegis of the Department of
Technical Education, Telangana regularly reviews the Curricula in tune with the developments both in
academic and industry side. However, recognizing the changing needs as stated by the catchment industries,
the Board has decided to bring about the revision of curriculum. Thus, the Board, with the assistance of senior
faculty of the branches concerned, has reviewed C-16/C-16S Curriculum in force. On finding the merits and
shortcomings of C-16/C-16S Curriculum, the faculty has made a thorough assessment of the curricular changes
that have to be brought in. It was felt that there is an urgent need to improve hands-on experience among the
students pursuing diploma courses. Further, the urgency of enhancing communication skills in English has
also been highlighted in the feedback and suggestions made by the user industries. Keeping these in view, a
number of meetings and deliberations were held at State level, with experts from industry, academia and senior
faculty of the department. The new Curricula for the different diploma courses have been designed with the
active participation of the members of the faculty teaching in the Polytechnics of Telangana, besides
reviewed by Expert Committee constituted with eminent academicians.
The new C-18 curriculum is designed, duly taking into consideration the Outcome Based Education
model as per NBA norms and Credit system has also been introduced.
This new Curriculum has taken the Telangana State Industrial Policy in the course of Industrial
Management and Entrepreneurship. Skill Upgradation is given importance by allotting 2.5 grade points per
semester.
The primary objective of the curriculum change is to produce best technicians in the country by
correlating growing needs of the industries with the academic inputs.
The revised New Curriculum i.e., Curriculum – 2018 or C-18 is planned and designed by making 6
months industrial training is mandatory.
Salient Features:
1. Duration of course is 3 years of Regular Academic instruction.

 The Curriculum is Outcome based, Semester Pattern, more practical oriented, Flexible, Relevant to
the industry needs and oriented to develop entrepreneurship skills in Diploma students.
 A maximum of 20% credits be permitted in specialized electives offered in VI semester that can be
pursued through MOOC like SWAYAM / NPTEL
 To start with a robust curriculum structure is designed
1
 Course structure contains 5 theory courses and 5 Laboratory courses per semester
 All theory courses will be of Lecture -Tutorial-Practicals (L:T:P) pattern
 In order to ensure continuous evaluation, total course content is divided into 3 parts i.e., Mid
Semester- I should be conducted for 20 marks from part I and Mid Semester- II should be conducted
for 20 marks from part II, End Examination shall be conducted for 40 marks of which 20 marks
should be covered from part III, 20 marks covered from overall course content.
 The sessional marks of 20 are assigned to slip tests, assignments, seminars, quiz etc.
 The question paper pattern is comprising of short answer questions, Essay questions, Application
based Questions covering the attributes of understanding, remembering and Application.
 Scoring of the candidate in the examination is reflected in terms of grade points blending with
relative grade point award system.
2. Keeping in view the increased need of communication skills that is playing a vital role in the success of
Diploma Level students in the Industries, emphasis is given for learning and acquiring listening, speaking,
reading and writing skills in English. Communication Skills lab and Life Skills lab are therefore introduced
in III Semester and Advanced Communication Skills lab and Life Skills lab as lab electives from IV
Semester for all the branches.
3. Latest topics relevant to the needs of the industry and global scenario suitable to be taught at Diploma level
are also incorporated in the curriculum.
4. CAD specific to the branch has been given more emphasis in the curriculum. Preparing drawings using
CAD software has been given more importance.
5. Every student is exposed to the computer lab at the 1 styear itself in order to familiarize himself/herself with
skills required for keyboard/mouse operation, internet usage and e-mailing.
6. The number of teaching hours allotted to a particular topic/chapter has been rationalized keeping in view the
past experience.
7. Upon reviewing the existing C-16 curriculum, more emphasis is given to the practical content of Laboratories
and Workshops, thus strengthening the practical skills in C-18 Curriculum.
8. With increased emphasis for the student to acquire Practical skills, the course content in all the courses is
thoroughly reviewed and structured as outcome based than the conventional procedure based. While the
course content in certain courses felt overloaded is reduced, in rest of the courses the content has been
enhanced as per the need.
9. Curriculum of Laboratory and Workshops have been thoroughly revised based on the suggestions
received from the industry and faculty, for better utilization of the equipment available at the
Polytechnics. The experiments /exercises that are chosen for the practical sessions are identified to
conform to the field requirements of industry.
10. The course of skill up-gradation in each semester is incorporated in the time table for one complete
2
day consisting of 7 periods..
11. The student shall be awarded satisfactory through RUBRICS only if he/she puts in at-least 75%
attendance in the skill up-gradation course apart from the satisfactory performance in the activities
allotted.
12. The activities suggested for skill up-gradation in the curriculum at the end of each course will be
assessed by the respective course teacher through RUBRICS and duly certified by the HOS/Principal.
13. The Members of the working group are grateful to Sri Navin Mittal I.A.S., Commissioner of
Technical Education & Chairman, S.B.T.E.T.(TS) for his constant guidance and valuable inputs in
revising, modifying and updating the curriculum.
14. The Members acknowledge thanks for cooperation and guidance extended by Sri. U.V.S.N. Murthy,
Secretary and his team of SBTET, Telangana, Dr C. Srinath, Additional Secretary, SBTET and Sri A.
Pullaiah, RJD and other officials of Directorate of Technical Education and the State Board of
Technical Education, Telangana.
15. The Members acknowledge thanks for cooperation and guidance extended by Dr.Uma Shanker
Sahu of NITTTR, Hyderabad and experts from industry, academia from the universities and
higher learning institutions and all teaching fraternity from the Polytechnics who are directly and
indirectly involved in preparation of the curricula.
II. RULES AND REGULATIONS

1. ADMISSION PROCEDURES:
1.1 DUR ATION AND PATTERN OF THE COURSES
All the Diploma programs run at various institutions are of AICTE approved 3 years duration of
Academic Instruction.
All the Diploma courses are run on semester-wise pattern.
1. 2 PROCEDURE FOR ADMISSION INTO THE DIPLOMA COURSES:

Selection of candidates is governed by the Rules and regulations laid down in this regard from time to
time.
i) Candidates who wish to seek admission in any of the Diploma courses will have to appear for
Common Entrance Test for admissions into Polytechnics (POLYCET) conducted by the State Board
of Technical Education and Training, Telangana, Hyderabad.
The candidates satisfying the following requirements only are eligible to appear for the Common
Entrance Test for admissions into Polytechnics (POLYCET).
a) The candidates seeking admission should have appeared for the X class examination, conducted by
3
the Board of Secondary Education, Telangana or equivalent examination at the time of making
application to the Common Entrance Test for Polytechnics for admissions into Polytechnics
(POLYCET). In case of candidates who apply with pending results of their qualifying examinations,
their selection shall be subject to production of proof of their passing the qualifying examination in
one attempt or compartmentally at the time of counselling for admission.
b) Admissions are made based on the merit obtained in the Common Entrance Test (POLYCET) and
the reservation rules stipulated by the Government of Telangana from time to time.
c) For admission into the Diploma in Pharmacy Course for which entry qualification is 10+2,
candidates need not appear for POLYCET. A separate notification will be issued for admission into
these courses.
d) Admission into DHMCT Course shall be based on the Merit in Intermediate for which admissions are
made by DOST conducted by TSCHE.
1.3 MEDIUM OF INSTRUCTION
The medium of instruction and examination shall be English.
1.4 PERMANENT IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (PIN)
A cumulative / academic record is to be maintained of the Marks secured in sessional work and end
examination of each year for determining the eligibility for promotion etc., a Permanent Identification
Number (PIN) will be allotted to each candidate, which is computer generated so as to facilitate this
work and avoid errors in tabulation of results.
1.5 NUMBER OF WORKING DAYS PER SEMESTER:
a). The Academic Year for all the Courses usually shall be from June 1 st week of the year of admission to
the 31st March of the succeeding year.

b). The Working days in a week shall be from Monday to Saturday
c). There shall be 7 periods of 50 minutes duration on all working days.
d). The minimum number of Instructional working days for each semester shall be 90 days excluding
examination days/ Public holidays/ orientation programme/ Sports and games Period. If this
prescribed minimum is not achieved due to any reason, special arrangements shall be made to conduct
classes to cover the syllabus.
1.6 ELIGIBILITY OF ATTENDANCE TO APPEAR FOR THE END EXAMINATION
Note: Student attendance is recorded, twice a day using Aadhar Based Attendance System with Bio
metric Device.
a). A candidate shall be permitted to appear for the end examination in all courses, if he or she has
4
attended a minimum of 75% of Instructional working days during the Semester.
b). Condonation of shortage of attendance in aggregate upto 10% (65% and above and below 75%) in
each semester may be granted on medical grounds.
c). Candidates having less than 65% attendance shall be detained.
d). Students whose shortage of attendance is not condoned in any semester are not eligible to take their
end examination of that class and their admissions shall stand cancelled. They may seek re-admission
for that semester when offered next.
e). A stipulated fee shall be payable towards condonation for shortage of attendance.
1.7 READMISSION
Readmission shall be granted to eligible candidates by the respective Principal of the institutions
concerned. 10% of approved intake are eligible for Readmission and preference will be given to first-
cum-first-serve basis, while according permission for re-admission of the Diploma candidates:-
1. The percentage of attendance to a readmitted candidate is to be calculated from the first day
of beginning of the class work of that year / semester, but not from the date, a readmitted
candidate reports for class work, after given readmission.
No. of working
No. of working
S No. of days required
Year/Semester days required for
No Working days for 65%
75% attendance
attendance
Any Semester
1 (Except for 90 67.5 58.5
Industrial Training
2. The Principals of all Polytechnics shall ensure that the readmission cases should considered
and granted:-
a) Within 15 days after commencement of class work in any semester

Otherwise such cases should not be considered for readmission for that Semester/year, and the
candidates concerned may be advised to seek readmission in the next subsequent semester/year.
Before issuing readmission orders, an undertaking letter from the student is to be obtained,
stating that he/she will agree to the rule that the percentage of attendance to him/her shall be calculated
from the first day of beginning of the regular class work for that year / semester, as officially
announced by DTE/SBTET but not from the day on which he/she has actually reported to the class
work, after readmission is granted, and that he/she will complete the Diploma in twice the duration of
5
the course from the date of the first admission, otherwise he/she will forfeit the claim for qualifying for
the award of Diploma.
2. SCHEME OF EXAMINATION
2.1 I, II, III, IV, V and VI Semesters:
THEORY EXAMINATION: Each semester end examination carries 40 marks in respect of

specified courses of 2 hours duration, along with 60 marks for continuous evaluation.
 The Semester End Examination paper shall be set for 40 marks
 PRACTICAL EXAMINATION: Each laboratory course carries 40 marks of 2/3 hours
duration and 60 sessional marks for continuous internal evaluation.
2.2 ASSESSMENT SCHEME

I. Assessment: In order to ensure continuous evaluation the examination pattern is formulated as
End 40 marks
Examination
Mid Sem 1 20 marks
Mid Sem 2 20 marks
Tutorials 20 marks
/Sessionals
Total marks 100 Marks
 Total course content shall be divided into three parts as Part 1, Part 2, Part 3
 Mid sem 1 Exam should be conducted from Part 1
 Mid sem II Exam should be conducted from Part 2
 End Examination to be conducted for 40 marks of which
 20 Marks should be covered from Part 3
 Remaining 20 marks covered from over all course contents
 The tutorial/sessionals shall consist of following marks division
1. Slip test 1 -- 5 marks
2. Slip test 2 -- 5 Marks
3. Assignments -- 5 Marks
4. Seminar/paper presentation/group discussion -- 5 Marks
II. Mid semester Question paper pattern
6
 Part A shall consist of ‘Remember’ based questions
 Part B shall consist of ‘Understanding’ questions
 Part C shall be of ‘Application’ based Questions
III. Semester End Examination:
 The Regular Examinations and Backlog Examinations shall be conducted separately.

 Backlog examinations should be held before the commencement of Academic Year to give
sufficient time for the student to prepare for Backlog examinations.
IV. Examination Pattern (End Semester Examination):
Part 3 Unit 5&6 ‘Remember’ based questions V.

Part A
Entire syllabus ‘Remember’ based questions
Part 3
Part B ‘Understanding’ based questions
Unit 5&6
Entire syllabus ‘Understanding’ based questions
Part 3
‘Application’ based questions
Part C Unit 5&6
Entire syllabus ‘Application’ based questions
Award of Grades and Grade points criteria for C-18 Curriculum
1. Marks : In order to ensure continuous evaluation the examination pattern is formulated as:
Theory Practical
End Examination 40 marks End Examination 40 marks
Mid Sem-I 20 marks Mid Sem-I 20 marks
Mid Sem-II 20 marks Mid Sem-II 20 marks
Internal 20 marks Internal 20 marks
Total marks 100 Marks Total marks 100 Marks
2. Hybrid grading system for regular students:

Absolute Grade Cut off Hybrid Grade Cut off
Grade Relative Grade
Grade Practical &
Point Theory Subjects Cut off
Drawing
Min of
A+ 10 > 90% > 90% Min of Top 1/8 Abs. or Rel. grade %
Min of
A 9 > 80 to < 90% > 82.5 to < 90% Min of Top 2/8 Abs. or Rel. grade %
Min of
B+ 8 > 70 to < 80% > 75 to < 82.5% Min of Top 3/8 Abs. or Rel. grade %
Min of
B 7 > 60 to < 70% > 67.5 to < 75% Min of Top 4/8 Abs. or Rel. grade %
Min of
C+ 6 > 50 to < 60% > 60 to < 67.5% Min of Top 5/8 Abs. or Rel. grade %
7
Min of
C 5 > 40 to < 50% > 55 to < 60% Min of Top 6/8 Abs. or Rel. grade %
Min of
D 4 > 35 to < 40% > 50 to < 55% Min of Top 7/8 Abs. or Rel. grade %
E 0 Rest of the Candidates
Based on the minimum of Absolute Grade cut off and Relative Grade cut off, a Hybrid grade cut off
shall be arrived and the appropriate grade shall allotted to the student and based on the Grade, a Grade point
shall be allotted in each subject provided the Candidate passes in the subject.
Pass Criteria for Regular Candidate: The Candidate is declared pass only if he/she secures above
the Hybrid Grade cut off of ‘D’ grade and 35% or above in Theory Examination and 50% or above in
Practical and Drawing Examinations, as per the formula below in Sem End Examination:-
End semester marks secured X 100
End semester Topper marks
Grades for backlog subjects : The Candidate shall be awarded ‘P’ or ‘F’ Grade based on ‘Pass’ or
‘Fail’ respectively in the Backlog Subjects. The ‘P’ or ‘F’ Grade has no Grade point but P grade will count
towards credits earned for awarding Diploma. The Candidate shall get P Grade if he/she secures 35% or
above in Theory Examination and 50% or above in Practical and Drawing Examinations, as per the formula
below in End Sem Examination:-
End semester marks secured X 100
End semester Topper marks of Regular exam of that batch
VI. Credits:
For theory courses-- 3 Credits
For Laboratory courses- 1.5 Credits
Skill up-gradation 2.5 Credits
Total credits per semester 25 Credits
 CGPA will be calculated for Regular Examinations only and not for backlog exams.
 Backlog exams will count for credits.
 Skill up gradation course will not count for CGPA but for Credits.
 Minimum credits for obtaining Diploma are 130 out of 150
VII. Electives:
a) The students are permitted to choose two electives in V semester.

Or
8
Specialized electives related to V semester course contents offered in MOOCs, like
SWAYAM/NPTEL
b) The student has to complete one Project in V Semester
Industrial Training (VI Semester)
Swapping of Industrial Training in C-18 Curriculum in V and VI Semesters

(50% of each Polytechnic students undergo Industrial Training in V Semester and remaining in
VI Semester).
 Evaluation and assessment of Industrial Training, shall be done and marks be awarded in the
following manner, provided the candidates concerned have put up minimum 90% attendance of
Industrial Training.
Industrial assessment at Industry : 600 marks (in two spells of 300 marks each)
Institutional Evaluation : 300 marks
Semester End Examination : 100 marks

(Seminar/viva-voce at Institution)
_________
TOTAL 1000 marks
9
Assessment parameters at Industry
Assessment
Assessment
I
Sl No II (Second
Learning Parameter (First
Quarter)
Quarter)
1 Attendance and punctuality 20 20
2 Familiarity of tools and material 30 30
3 Engineering skills 50 50
Application of knowledge & Problem solving 50

4 skills 50
5 Comprehension and observation 10 10
6 Professionalism/Professional ethics 20 20
7 Safety and environmental consciousness 10 10
8 Communication skills 20 20
9 Supervisory skills 50 50
10 General conduct during the period 40 40
Total marks for Industry Evaluation 300

300
600 marks
Assessment parameters at Institution (End Examination)
Institution Level Evaluation Scheme

Sl Criteria Marks Time
No
1 1st Report Submission 50 within 4 Weeks
2 Seminar-I 50 9th to 10th week
nd
3 2 Report Submission 50 Within 12 weeks
4 Log book 100 --
5 Seminar-II 50 Before Viva-Voce
Institute Evaluation 300
Total
Semester End Examination
1 Viva-Voce 50 After 24 weeks
2 Presentation/Demonstration 50
of skills
Total 100
10
 The assessment at the institute level will be done by a minimum of three members i.e. Internal
Faculty, Industrial Experts/External Examiner and H.O.D. and the shall be averaged
a) Theory Courses: Theory Courses carry 20 marks for Mid Sem I and 20 marks for Mid Sem II and 20
marks for Tutorials which consists of Slip Test-I 5 Marks, Slip Test-II 5 Marks, Assignment-5 Marks
and Seminar -5Marks. Mid Sem examinations will be conducted on the dates specified by SBTET.
The remaining 40 marks of theory will be conducted as End Semester Exam.
b) Practicals: Student’s performance in Laboratories / Workshop shall be assessed during each semester
of study for 40 marks in end practical course and internal assessment carries 20 marks for Mid Sem I
and 20 marks for Mid Sem II and 20 marks for Tutorials. Each student has to write a record / log book
for assessment purpose. In the course of Drawing, which is also considered as a practical paper, the
same rules hold good. Drawing exercises are to be filed in seriatim.
c) Internal assessment in Labs / workshops / Survey field etc., during the course of study shall be done
and sessional marks shall be awarded by the concerned Lecturer / Senior Lecturer / Workshop
superintendent with the concurrence of concerned HOS as the case maybe.
d) For practical examinations, there shall be two examiners. External examiner shall be appointed by
the Principal in consultation with respective head of the department preferably choosing a person
from an Industry/Academician. At least one External Examiner from Industry should be
appointed for core labs.The Internal examiner shall be the person concerned with internal
assessment as in (c) above. The end examination shall be held along with all theory papers in
respect of drawing.
e) Question Paper for Practicals: Question paper should cover all the experiments / exercise
prescribed.
f) Records pertaining to internal assessment marks of both theory and practical courses are to be
maintained for official inspection.
g) In case of D.C.C.P., though the pass mark for typewriting and short hand is 50% in the end
examination, equivalency will be given for the students who got 45% with the examinations held by
SBTET, TS.
11
3 RULES OF PROMOTION FOR NEXT LEVEL:
3.1 For Diploma Courses for 1st ,2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5thand 6thSemesters:
1. A candidate shall be permitted to appear for first Semester examination provided he / she puts the
required percentage of attendance (i.e., 75%) and pays the examination fee. However, attendance can
be condoned by the Principal on Medical grounds upto 10% (i.e. attendance after condonation on
Medical grounds should not be less than 65%) and he/she has to pay the condonation fee along with
examination fee as prescribed by SBTET from time to time.
2. A candidate shall be promoted to 2ndsemester if he/she puts the required percentage of attendance (i.e.,
75% in general and 65% on medical grounds) in the first semester and pays the examination fee. A
candidate who could not pay the first semester examination fee has to pay the promotion fee as
prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training from time to time before
commencement of 2nd semester.
A candidate is eligible to appear for the 2nd semester exam if he/she puts the required
percentage of attendance (i.e., 75% in general and 65% on medical condonation) in the 2nd semester.
3. A candidate shall be promoted to 3rdsemester if he/she puts the required percentage of attendance
(i.e., 75% in general and 65% on medical grounds) in the 2nd semester and pays the examination fee
and earned more than 25 credits (upto regular End Semester Exams of 2 nd semester). A candidate who
could not pay the 2nd semester examination fee has to pay the promotion fee as prescribed by State
Board of Technical Education and Training from time to time before commencement of 3rd semester.
A candidate is eligible to appear for the 3rd semester exam if he/she puts the required
percentage of attendance (i.e., 75% in general and 65% on medical condonation) and pays the
examination fee in the 3rd semester and earned 25 credits up the end of 2nd Semester.
4. A candidate shall be promoted to 4th semester provided he/she puts the required percentage of
attendance (i.e., 75% in general and 65% on medical condonation) in the 3rdsemester and pays the
examination fee and earned 25 credits up the end of 2 nd Semester. A candidate, who could not pay the
3rdsemester exam fee but fulfilling all other conditions has to pay the promotion fee as prescribed
by State Board of Technical Education and Training from time to time before commencement
of 4th semester. IVC pass out students admitted into 3 rd semester through lateral entry shall be
promoted to 4th Semester, if he/she Puts the required percentage of attendance (i.e., 75% in general
and 65% on medical grounds) and pays examination in the 3rd semester.
5. A candidate shall be promoted to 5thsemester provided he / she puts the required percentage of
12
attendance (i.e., 75% in general and 65% on medical grounds) in the 4 thsemester and pays the
examination fee and earns 75 Credits (upto regular End Semester Exams of 4 th semester). A candidate,
who could not pay the 4thsemester examination fee but earned 75 credits has to pay the promotion fee
as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training from time to time before
commencement of 5thsemester as the case may be.
6. A candidate shall be promoted to 6thsemester provided he / she puts the required percentage of
attendance (i.e., 75% in general and 65% on medical grounds) in the 5 thsemester and pays the
examination fee and earned 75 credits upto the end of 4 th Semester. A candidate, who could not pay
the 5thsemester examination fee, has to pay the promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of
Technical Education and Training from time to time before commencement of 6thsemester as the case
may be.
(a) A candidate is eligible to appear for the 6th semester (Theory) exam if he/she
i) Puts the required percentage of attendance in the 6th semester
ii) Should have appeared for 5th semester examination.
(b) A candidate is eligible to appear for 6th (Industrial Training) semester examination if he/she
i) Puts the required percentage of attendance i.e., 90% in 6thsemester (Industrial Training)
ii) Should have completed the Industrial Training
iii) Should have submitted Industrial Training assessment report.
(c) In case a candidate does not successfully complete the Industrial training, he / she will have
to repeat the training at his / her own cost.
Promotion rules for C-18
S From To Cumulative
Attendance Remarks
No. Sem Sem Credits
75%
1 I II -
(65% on medical grounds)
Cumulative credits are
2 II III -do- 25
applicable from the
3 III IV -do- 25
A.Y. 2021-22 onwards
4 IV V -do- 75
5 V VI -do- 75
Note: Ineligible candidates are not permitted to next higher semester classwork till he/she fulfills the
above eligibility criteria.
Promotion rules for C-18 (IVC)
S No. From To Attendance Cumulative Remarks
13
Sem Sem Credits
75% (65% IVC candidates should be
1 III IV on medical - allotted 50 credits during
grounds) admission into 3rd semester
2 IV V -do- 75 From A.Y. 2021-22
3 V VI -do- 75 -do-
Note: Ineligible candidates are not permitted to next higher semester classwork till he/she fulfills the
above eligibility criteria.
4.1 EXAMINATION FEE SCHEDULE:

The examination fee should be paid as per the notification issued by State Board of Technical
Education and Training from time to time.
4.2 ISSUE OF GRADE CARD:

All candidates who appear for the end examination will be issued Grade Card without any payment of
fee. However, candidates who lose the original Grade Card have to pay the prescribed fee to the
Secretary, State Board of Technical Education and Training, Telangana for each duplicate Grade
Card.
4.3 MAXIMUM PERIOD FOR COMPLETION OF DIPLOMA COURSES:
Maximum period for completion of the course is twice the prescribed duration of the course from the
date of First admission (includes the period of detention and discontinuation of studies by student etc)
failing which they will have to forfeit the claim for qualifying for the award of Diploma. (They will
not be permitted to appear for examinations after that date). This rule applies for all Diploma courses
of 3 years of engineering and non-engineering courses including candidates seek admission under
lateral entry. In respect of Pharmacy courses the completion period s 4 years as the prescribed
duration of the course is 2 years.
4.4 ELIGIBILITY FOR AWARD OF DIPLOMA
A candidate is eligible for award of Diploma Certificate if he / she fulfill the following academic
regulations.
i. He / She pursued a course of study for not less than 3 academic years & not more than 6 academic
years.
ii. He / she should have earned 130 credits out of 150 credits.
Students who fail to fulfill all the academic requirements for the award of the Diploma within 6
academic years from the year of admission shall forfeit their seat in the course & their seat shall
stand cancelled.
4.5 RE-VALUATION / ISSUE OF PHOTO COPY:
14
4.5.1 a) As per the SBTET notification.
A candidate desirous of applying for Revaluation / issue of Photocopy of valued answer
scripts should submit the application online to the Secretary, State Board of Technical Education
and Training, Telangana., Hyderabad – 500 063 as per the notification issued for Revaluation /issue
of Photo copy of answer Script.
4.5.2 MALPRACTICE CASES:
If any candidate resorts to any Mal Practice during examinations, he / she shall be booked and the
Punishment shall be awarded as per rules and regulations framed by SBTET,TS from time to time.
4.5.3 DISCREPANCIES/PLEAS:
Any Discrepancy regarding results etc., shall be represented to the Board within one month from the
date of issue of results. Thereafter, no such cases shall be entertained in any manner.
4.6 EQUIVALENCE:
In general there is no equivalency of CGPA and marks percentage:
However : 60% is insisted a CGPA of 6.50
55% is insisted a CGPA of 6.00
50% is insisted a CGPA of 5.50
With respect to the intermediate vocational candidates, who are admitted directly into diploma course
at the 3rdsemester (i.e., second year) level, the CGPA over 4 semesters shall alone be taken into
consideration for award of Diploma.
5 ISSUE OF CERTIFICATES :
5.1 ISSUE OF DUPLICATE DIPLOMA:
If the candidate desires for a duplicate certificate of Diploma, he/she may obtain on payment of
prescribed fee, duly following the procedure.
5.2 ISSUE OF MIGRATION CERTIFICATE AND TRANSCRIPTS:
The Board on payment of prescribed fee will issue these certificates for the candidates who intend to
pursue Higher Studies in India or Abroad.
5.3 GENERAL
i. The Board may change or amend the academic rules and regulations or syllabi at any time and
the changes or amendments made shall be applicable to all the students, for whom it is
intended, with effect from the dates notified by the competent authority.
15
ii. All legal matters pertaining to the State Board of Technical Education and Training are within
the jurisdiction of Hyderabad.
iii. In case of any ambiguity in the interpretation of the above rules, the decision of the Secretary,
SBTET (TS) is final
16
Diploma in Electronics and
Instrumentation Engineering
I SEMESTER
17
Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme
Instruction Total Continuous internal Semester end examination
Credits
Periods per Periods evaluation
Course week per Min
Course Name Max
Code Internal Total marks for
Mid Mid marks
L T P Evaluatio Mark passing
Sem1 Sem 2 Min
n s including
marks
internal
18EI- 14
1 Basic English 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 100 35
101F
18EI- Basic Engineering 14 35
2 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 100
102F mathematics
18EI- 14 35
3 Basic Physics 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 100
103F
18EI- General Engineering
60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
4 3 1 0
104F Chemistry
18EI- Basics of Electrical and 14 35

5 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 100
105C Electronics Engineering
18EI- Basic Engineering 20 50
6 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 100
106P Drawing
18EI- Basic Computer aided 2 45 20 50
7 1 0 1.5 20 20 20 40 100
107P Drafting
18EI- Basics of Electrical and 2 45 20 50
8 1 0 1.5 20 20 20 40 100
108P Electronics lab Practice
18EI-
2 45 1.5 20 50
9 109P- Basic science lab Practice 1 0 20 20 20 40 100
A+B
Computer
18EI- 2 45 1.5 20 50
10 fundamentals Lab 1 0 20 20 20 40 100
110P
Practice
7 2.5 -
11 Academic activities 0 0 105 0 0 Rubrics --
20 5 17 630 25 200 200 200 400 170 1000 425

TOTAL
Activities: student performance is to be assessed through Rubrics
Diploma in Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
I semester
18
Basic English
Course Title : Basic English Course Code : 18EI-101F
Semester : I Course Group : Foundation
Teaching Scheme in Periods (L:T:P:) : Credits :3

45:15:00
Methodology : Communicative Language Total Contact Periods : 60 periods
: Lecture + Tutorial
CIE : 60 Marks SEE : 40 Marks
Prerequisites: Basic knowledge of English Language
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, the students will have the ability to:
101.1 communicate effectively, express their likes, dislikes and feelings and
make requests
101.2 listen and reciprocate appropriately
101.3 use a dictionary and acquire vocabulary for social interaction
101.4 speak and write grammatically correct sentences
101.5 analyse and evaluate the written material
101.6 convey ideas in the form of paragraphs and letters
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT – 1: SPEAKING Duration: 12 Periods
1. Need For English
2. Classroom English
3. Expressing Feelings
4. Expressing Likes & Dislikes
5. Making Requests
19
UNIT - 2: LISTENING Duration: 6 Periods
6. Describing Words
UNIT –3: VOCABULARY Duration: 8 Periods
7. How to use a Dictionary
8. Words Often Confuse
UNIT -4 : GRAMMAR Duration: 16 Periods
9. Tenses
10. Basic Sentence Structures
11. Voice
12. Asking Questions
UNIT - 5: READING Duration: 6 Periods
9. The Mighty Mountain and Little Lads of Telangana
10. The Adventures of Toto
11. Tiller turns Engineer - An Innovation
UNIT- 6: WRITING Duration: 12 Periods
16. Paragraph Writing - I
17. Paragraph Writing - II
18. Letter Writing – I
19. Letter Writing – II
Suggested Learning Outcomes:
On completion of the course the students will be able to
 express feelings, likes and dislikes and make requests.
20
 communicate fluently.
 use dictionary
 use describing words and distinguish between confusing words.
 read, comprehend and answer the questions.
 use appropriate tenses, voices, structures and ask questions.
 write paragraphs and letters.
Internal evaluation
Test Units Marks Pattern

Mid Sem 1 Speaking Part A 4 short answer questions
Listening 20 Part B 2 short essay questions with internal
choice
Part C 2 essay questions with internal
choice
Mid Sem 2 Vocabulary Part A 4 short answer questions
Grammar 20 Part B 2 short essay questions with internal
choice
Part C 2 essay questions with internal
choice
Slip Test 1 Speaking 5 2 questions out of 3 questions
Listening
Slip Test 2 Vocabulary 5 2 questions out of 3 questions

Grammar
Assignmen One assignment per 5 Different group assignments of higher
t one semester order questions that develop problem
solving skills and critical thinking should
be given
Seminars One seminar per one 5 Oral presentations using audio –visual
semester equipment, charts, etc.
Total 60
Suggested Student Activities
 Setting short term goals for learning English
 Identifying the suitable solutions for the skill gap
 Listen to a passage / conversations / dialogues / speeches and answer the questions
 Self introduction
21
 Talking about routines
 Talking about one’s emotions
 Debates
 Elocution
 Role Plays
 Quiz
 Reading a selected text / news paper for specific purpose
 Reading aloud with proper pronunciation and intonation
 Describing people
 Describing places
 Describing events
 Creating Advertisements
 Selling a product with appropriate vocabulary
 Interpreting advertisements
 Writing short messages
 Writing a bio note / paragraph / letter
 How to use translate using Google application
 Using a dictionary
 Vocabulary games
Textbook: English for Polytechnics
(English Textbook for First-Year Diploma Students)
REFERENCES:
1. Practical English Grammar by A.J Thomson and A.V. Martinet
22
2. A Course in Phonetics and Spoken English by J. Sethi and P.V Dhamija
3. Word Power Made Easy by Norman Lewis
4. Games for Language Learning by Andrew Wright, David Betteridge and Michael Buckby
5. Five Minute Activities by Penny Ur
6. English Dialogues by M. Martin
e-learning:
1.www.duolingo.com
2. www.bbc.co.uk
3. www.babbel.com
4. www.merriam-webster.com
5. www.ello.org
6. www.lang-8.com
7. youtube.com
8. Hello English (app)
9. mooc.org
10. https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in
CO-PO Matrix
CO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 Mapping POs

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
101.1 2 1 1 - - 2 - 3 3 3 1,2,3,6,8,9,10
101.2 2 2 -- 2 -- 2 -- 3 3 3 1,2,4,6,8,9,10
101.3 2 2 -- -- 1 1 2 3 3 3 1,2,5,6,7,8,9,10
101.4 2 2 2 -- 2 1 2 3 3 3 1,2,3,5,6,7,8,9,10
101.5 2 2 -- -- 2 -- 2 3 3 3 1,2,5,6,7,8,9,10
101.6 2 2 -- -- -- -- -- 3 3 3 1,2,8,9,10
23
MID SEM-I EXAM
S.No Unit Name R U A Remarks
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
Total Questions 4 4 4
MID SEM –II EXAM
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
Questions to be set for SEE Remarks

Sl No Unit No.
R U A
1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 II
3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 IV
9(b) 13(b)
4
5 V 5, 6 11(a) 15(a)

11(b) 15(b)
3
10(b) 14(b)
6 VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)

12(b) 16(b)
24
Remembering (R) 1 Mark
Legend: Understanding (U) 3 Marks
Application (A) 5 Marks
BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION (C-18)

FIRST SEMESTER COMMON-101F
BASIC ENGLISH
Mid Sem -I
Time : 1 Hour Total Marks: 20 Marks
PART - A 1X4=4
Instructions: Answer all the questions. Each carries one mark.
1. Rewrite the following as requests.
a. Pass the milk.
b. Give me your cell.
2. Write your feelings in the given situations.
a. Your mother scolded you.
b. Your friends gave you a surprise party.
3. Describe your classroom in a couple of sentences.
4. Fill in the blanks with the suitable describing words.
My friend is ________. She bought a _______ house.
(dirty, clever, rich, fat, intelligent, big)
PART - B 2X3=6
Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries three marks
5. a.) What are the advantages of learning English?
(Or)
b). Write three situations in which you feel the following emotions.
i. Anger ii. Jealousy iii. Worry
25
6. a) Identify the describing words in the following sentences.
Harry Potter series is very interesting and popular. He is very sensitive and brave. The
author was once poor. But now she has become rich.
(Or)
b) Fill in the blanks with the appropriate words of description given below in brackets.
The Sun was shining brightly. It was a ___ day. The sky was ___. There were no clouds in
the sky. A __ girl came out of her house. She was very ___. Suddenly a ___ cloud loomed over.
There was ___ rain.
( large, dark, pretty, young, sunny, clear, heavy. silly)
PART-C 2 X 5 = 10
Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries five marks.
7 a) Mention any five problems you faced in learning English?
(Or)
b) Write any five expressions used by the teacher in the classroom.
8 a). Describe your friend using appropriate describing words.
(Or)
b) Use the following words and write a paragraph on your town.
(spacious, big, beautiful, narrow, clean, dirty, wide, small, tall, polluted)
26
BASIC ENGLISH
Mid Sem -II
PART - A 1X4=4
Instructions: Answer all the questions. Each carries one mark.
1. Use the following pair of homonyms in your own sentences to bring out the difference in meaning.
a. Watch
b. Watch
2. Write any three basic uses of a dictionary?
a. He always ____ (visit) his parents on Sunday.
b. She ___ (be) late yesterday.
3. Change the voice.
a. Cats chase mice.
b. The wires were cut by him.
4. Change the following into yes / no questions.
a. Satish likes sweets.
b. Desserts are hot.
PART - B 2X3=6
5 a). Write about different kinds of dictionaries.
(Or)
27
b). Fill in the blanks with the appropriate homophones given below in brackets.
I tell _______ (stories, storeys) to my friends. My hobby is to tell _______ ( tales, tails) with animal
characters in them. _______ (Two, Too) of my friends like to listen to my stories always. I told them a
story about a ______(bear, bare). I bought it for them at a _______ (fair, fare). I became very
_______ (week, weak) as I suffered from fever.
6 a). Frame three ‘wh-’ questions for the following passage.
One of the most famous monuments in the world, the Statue of Liberty was presented to the U.S.A.by
the people of France. It took ten years to complete it. It was made of copper with a metal frame to
support it. The sculptor Auguste Bartholdi made it.
(Or)
b). Change the voice.

a. He plays hockey.
b. The novel had been written by him.
c. We will be helped by them.
PART-C 2 X 5 = 10
7 a). How will you locate a word in a dictionary?
(Or)
b). Write the following pairs of words in your own sentences.
i. Son, Sun
ii. Live, Live
iii. Hair, Hare
iv. Meet, Meat
v. Air, Heir
8 a). Write five sentences about your childhood using past tense.
(Or)
b). Write one sentence each for the given structures.
i. S.V.
ii. S.V.O.
28
iii. S.V.SC.
iv. S.V.O.OC.
v. S.V.IO.DO.
29
BASIC ENGLISH
SEMESTER END EXAMINATION
Time: 2 Hours Total Marks: 40
PART – A 8 X 1 = 08
Instructions: 1. Answer all the questions.
2. Each question carries one mark.
1. Fill the blanks with suitable expressions of feelings:
a) I feel _________ when I get a first class in diploma first semester.
b) The teacher was ________ with me when I was late to class.
2. Use raise and rise in your own sentences.
3. Write at least four supporting sentences for the following topic sentence:
I want to become an engineer.
4. Write one sentence each for the following structures:
a. S V IO DO
b. S V SC
5. Read the following passage and answer the questions that follow:
Communication is the process of transmitting ideas from a human communicator to a human

communicate, directly or through a medium. Technical communication, which is concerned with the
transmission of technical information, uses a variety of graphics, such as charts, diagrams, pictures and
tables to illustrate the information presented in a language. Every illustration communicates facts
clearly, concisely, attractively and accurately. A technician should shape his ideas into language as well
as graphics. It must also be possible for a technician to convert the ideas available in the form of
language into graphics and vice versa.
a) What is technical communication concerned with?
b) Why does technical communication use graphics?
6. Read the above paragraph and answer the following questions:
30
a) How should the technician develop his ability of communication?
b) Suggest a suitable title for the passage.
7. Write any three complimentary closures used in official letters.
8. Write a short paragraph on your long term goal.
PART- B 4 X 3 = 12
Instructions: 1. Answer the following questions.
2. Each question carries three marks.
9 a. Write any five expressions used by your teacher in classroom.
(or)
b). Read the following paragraph and answer the questions that follow:
Jalagam Vengal Rao open caste mine is located in Sathupally in Khammam district. When coal
deposits were discovered in Sathupally, it was tested by its owners – Singareni Collieries Company
Limited, to determine the quality. Surveys showed that coal available underneath Sathupally area
would last for about 50 years.
The farmers who had to leave their lands were compensated with lands elsewhere
and some of them were given jobs in mines. Open cast mining started at Sathupally in 2005.
Almost all the work at this mine are done using machines such as bulldozers, motor
graders, shovels, drills, water sprinklers, tipper trucks, dumpers and different trucks which can carry
heavy loads of coal. Shovel and bulldozers are first used to remove top soil or overburden and rocks.
Then a series of benches are made (benches are vertical sections of a mine from where the coal or
overburden is removed). Roads have been laid in the mining area all the way down to the bottom of
the mine, connecting all the benches. Over burden and waste rocks are removed from sides of benches
by blasting. Coal blasted in benches is then lifted using shovels and dumpers and transported through
tipper trucks. Coal is transported to the coal handling plant and through railway wagons to power
plants, cement factories and other industries. Every day, about 10,000 tonnes of coal is mined and
transported from JVR Open Cast Mine.
Questions:
a) Where is Jalagam Vengal Rao Open Cast Mine located?
b) Why were the farmers compensated with land or given jobs in mines?
c) What is a bench in a coal mine?
31
10 a). Rewrite the following sentences changing the voice.
a) I was helped by her.
b) She cleaned the house.
c) Windows have been painted by Ramesh.
(or)
b) Write a letter to your principal requesting him to issue a duplicate hall ticket.
11 a). Read the following paragraph and answer the questions that follow:
Subhash Chandra Bose was born on 23 January 1897 in Cuttack, Orissa. He studied in Cuttack and
then moved to Presidency College in Calcutta for further studies. He did his B.A. in Philosophy and
went to England to appear for the Civil Services examination Although he did well in the exam he
soon resigned from the services because it meant working against the interests of his country. .He
returned to India and started a newspaper called Swaraj. His mentor Chittaranjan Das was active and
open in his criticism of British rule. Bose followed his footsteps and was arrested and sent to prison in
Mandalay. He joined the Indian National Congress. Later he parted ways with the Congress. He
revived the Indian National Army. He is believed to have coined the slogan Jai Hind.
Questions:
a) What was Chittaranjan Das's attitude towards the British?
b) How did Bose fight against the British?
c) Why did Bose resign from the Civil Services?
(or)
b) Read the following paragraph and answer the questions that follow:
What influenced Asuthosh most was the company of the brilliant friends of his father. They were
eminent men in their several walks of life, and they fired the boy’s ambition. He was especially
impressed by Mr. Justice Dwarka Nath Mitter who often visited their house. In his heart he wanted to
emulate him in all ways. Thus at a very early age Asutosh formed the ambition of being a judge of the
Calcutta High Court. He also wanted to be a scholar and win the Premchand Roychand Studentship
which is held to be the most coveted academic distinction in Bengal. It will be seen later how he was
able to realize both his ambitions.
But he had to cut his studies short because he fell seriously ill. The doctors said that he suffered
from palpitation of the heart and advised him to have a complete rest and change. His father sent him
to Muttra for a holiday. The change had a very beneficial effect on him, for Muttra had a fine climate
and beautiful scenery, and Autosh returned fully restored in health and sprits.
32
Mathematics attracted Asutosh most, and he came to be looked upon as a prodigy in this subject.
One day one of his teachers thought of testing his ability in mathematics and set the class very difficult
problem. All the other students looked blank on reading the problem, but not so Asutosh. He solved it
correctly in a few minutes and showed it to the teacher, who was amazed at the evidence of his ability.
As time went on he developed much originality in solving other mathematical problems.
Questions:
a) What was Asutosh’s ambition?
b) What did he want to win?
c) Why did doctors advise him to take rest?
12 a). Write a paragraph using the hints given below.
Library in our polytechnic – a big hall – several tables and chairs – newspapers – journals – visiting
hours – two computers with internet – three cards to each student – 20000 books – many reference
books
(or)
b). Write a letter to your friend describing your first day in your institute.
PART-C 4 X5 = 20
Instructions: 1. Answer the following questions.
2. Each question carries five marks
13 a). List any five problems you face in learning English and suggest solutions.
(or)
b). Read the following paragraph and answer the question given below it.
In1920, the Congress meeting was held at Nagpur under the leadership of Gandhiji. It was attended by
15000 delegates and the Congress Constitution was amended and resolutions were taken to fight for
Swaraj by nonviolent methods and undo the injustice done to Punjab and Turkey.
This movement was called Non-Cooperation Movement. Renunciation of

honorary titles like ‘Sir’ given by British, boycott of legislatures, schools and colleges, courts,
tendering resignation to government jobs nonpayment of taxes to government were the important
programmes of this movement. Gandhi returned his Kaiser-i-Hind title in August, 1920. There were
strikes, hartals and burning of foreign goods all over the country. Many Indians were killed in firings
and many others were jailed.
33
In Kerala, a rebellion broke out by Mophlah peasants and it was suppressed
brutally. Though Gandhiji warned the people many times not to resort to violent methods, on 5th
February, 1922 in Chauri-Chaura in Uttar Pradesh people resorted to violence. When policemen
opened fire on peaceful demonstrations, the angry people set ablaze the police station and 22 policemen
were killed. Gandhiji stopped the movement because it lost its nonviolent nature. On 10th March, 1922
Gandhiji was arrested for six years.
Questions:
a) What resolutions were taken at the Congress meeting held at Nagpur?
b) Why was the movement called Non-Cooperation Movement?
c) Why did Gandhiji return his Kaiser-i-Hind title?
d) Why did people set ablaze the police station at Chauri-Chaura?
e) Why did Gandhiji stop the movement?
14 a). Write the basic uses of a dictionary.
(or)
b). Write a letter to the Principal of your institute requesting him to provide you admission into
hostel.
15 a). Read the passage given and answer the questions.
It was way back in 1972 that NASA began developing a space shuttle that could launch like a rocket
but fly and land like an airplane—a unique transportation system for deploying satellites and payloads
into outer space. It was indeed a technological wonder as it was reusable unlike the earlier , one shot
disposable rockets, which were used to place astronauts and equipment into the Earth's orbit.
Basically , a space shuttle consists of an orbiter that carries astronauts and payload attached to solid
rocket boosters and an external fuel tank.To lift the space shuttle , weighing about 2 million kg, from
the launch pad to its orbit that is about 185 to 643 km above the Earth , the shuttle uses two poweful
solid rocket boosters, which provide a thrust of about 11.7 million N. In addition the SRB's support the
entire weight of the space shuttle orbiter and fuel tank on the launch pad.
Questions:
a) Why is the space shuttle unique?
b) What are the parts of the space shuttle?
34
c) What are the functions of the solid rocket boosters?
d) What is the space shuttle used for?
e) Find one word in the passage that means throw away after use.
(or)
b). Read the following paragraph and answer the questions given below it.
Another important environmental movement is the Chipko Movement which started in the early 1970s
in the Garhwal Himalayas of Uttarakhand by Sunderlal Bahuguna. Like the tribal people of Narmada
valley, the forests are a critical resource for the subsistence of people in hilly and mountainous areas.
This is both because of their direct provision of food, fuel and fodder and because of their role in the
stabilizing soil and water resources. As these forests were being increasingly felled for commerce and
industry, villagers sought to protect their livelihoods through non-violent resistance. The name of the
movement comes from the word ‘chipko’ meaning ‘embrace’: the villagers hugged the trees, saving
them by interposing their bodies between them and the contractors’ axes. Village women were the
main force of this movement. It inspired many people to look closely at the issue of environment
sustainability.
Questions:
1. Where was Chipko movement started?
2. Why did the villagers want to protect the trees?
3. How did the villagers protect the trees?
4. What is the synonym of the word, ‘important’?
5. What do you think of this movement?
16 a). Write a letter to your uncle about your plan to visit his place during summer.
(or)
b). Write a paragraph in 150 words about the importance of following traffic rules.
BASIC ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS
Course Title : BASIC ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS Course Code : 18EI-102F

SEMESTER : I Course Group : Foundation
Teaching Scheme in periods ( L : T : P ) : 45 :15: 00 Credits : 3 Credits
Methodology : Lecture + Tutorial Total Contact Periods : 60
35
Program : Common to all Engineering Diploma Programs
Pre requisites :
This course requires the basic knowledge of Algebra, Trigonometry in Mathematics at Secondary
school level
Course Outcomes: COs
At the end of the course, the student will have the ability to:
CO 1 Solve the problems on Logarithms

CO 2 Resolve a given fraction into Partial Fractions
CO 3 Find the Sum, Product of Matrices, Value of the determinant and Inverse of a Matrix
.
CO 4 Solve simple problems using concepts of Trigonometric Functions
CO 5 Solve simultaneous Linear Equations using Matrices and Determinants
CO 6 Solve a Triangle and an Inverse Trigonometric Equation.
Course Content:
Algebra
Unit-I Duration: 06 Periods (L: 4.5 – T: 1.5)
1. Logarithms:
Definition of logarithm and its properties, natural and common logarithms; the meaning of e and
exponential function, logarithm as a function and its graphical representation – Solve some simple
problems.
2. Partial Fractions:
36
Rational, proper and improper fractions of polynomials. Resolving rational fractions in to their partial
fractions covering the types mentioned below:
f ( x) f ( x)
i) ii) 2
( x  a)( x  b)( x  c) ( x  a ) ( x  b)( x  c)
f ( x) f ( x)
iii ) 2
iv)
( x  a )( x  b) ( x  a)( x 2  b) 2
Unit – II Duration: 12Periods (L: 9.0 – T:3.0)
3. Matrices and Determinants: Definition of matrix, types of matrices-examples, algebra of matrices-

equality of two matrices, sum, difference, scalar multiplication and product of matrices. Transpose of a
Matrix- Symmetric, Skew symmetric matrices- Minor, cofactor of an element-Determinant of a square
matrix up to 3rd order -Laplace’s expansion, properties of determinants. Singular and non-singular
matrices- Adjoint and multiplicative inverse of a square matrix –related problems.
Trigonometry:
Unit-III Duration: 12Periods (L: 9.0 – T:3.0)
4. Compound angles: Formulae of Sin (A±B), Cos (A±B), Tan (A±B), Cot(A±B), and related
identities with problems - Derive the values of sin150, cos150 , sin750 , cos750 , tan 150 , tan750 etc.-
Derive identities like sin(A+B) sin(A-B) = sin 2 A –sin2 B etc.,
5. Multiple and sub multiple angles: Trigonometric ratios of multiple angles 2A,3A and submultiples
angle A/2 with problems - Derive useful allied formulas like
sin 2 A= ( 1−cos2 2 A ) etc., - Solve simple problems using the above formulae
Unit – IV Duration: 08Periods (L: 6.0 – T: 2.0)
6. Properties of triangles: Statements of Sine rule, Cosine rule, Tangent rule and Projection rule
7. Hyperbolic functions: Definitions of hyperbolic functions – Sinh(x), cosh(x) ,tanh(x) etc., -

identities of hyperbolic functions, inverse hyperbolic functions and expression of inverse hyperbolic
functions in terms of logarithms.
8. Complex Numbers: Definition of a complex number, Modulus and conjugate of a complex number,
Arithmetic operations on complex numbers, Modulus- Amplitude (polar) form, Exponential (Euler)
form of a complex number.
37
Algebra & Trigonometry
Unit – V Duration: 12Periods (L: 9.0 – T: 3.0)
9. Transformations: Transformation of products into sums or differences and vice versa -
Simple problems - Solve problems by applying these formulae to sum or difference or product of three
or more terms.
10 Inverse trigonometric functions: Define inverses of six trigonometric functions along with their
domains and ranges - Derive relations between inverse trigonometric functions so that given A=sin-1x,
express angle A in terms of other inverse trigonometric functions - with examples - State various

properties of inverse trigonometric functions and identities like sin x+cos x = 2
-1 -1
etc - Derive
x+ y
−1 −1
formulae like tan x + tan y=tan
−1
( 1−xy ) where x ≥ 0 , y ≥ 0 , xy <1 etc., and solve simple problems.
Unit – VI Duration: 10Periods (L:7.5 – T:2.5)
11.Solution of Simultaneous equations using Matrices & Determinants.: System of linear equations
in 3 Variables-Solutions by Cramer’s rule, Matrix inversion method – Examples- Elementary row
operations on Matrices -Gauss-Jordan method to solve a system of equations in 3 unknowns.
12. Solutions of triangles: Solve a triangle when (i) three sides (SSS) (ii) two sides and an
Included angle (SAS) (iii) one side and two angles are given (SAA) - Simple problems.
References
1. Text Book of Matrices – by Shanti Narayan
2. Plane Trigonometry - by S.L.Loney
3. NCERT Mathematics Text Books Of ClassXI, XII .
4. Intermediate Mathematics Text Books (TeluguAcademy)
Suggested E-Learning references
1. www.freebookcentre.net/mathematics/introductory-mathematics-books.html
2. E-books:www.mathebook.net
38
Suggested Learning Outcomes
Algebra
UNIT – I
1.0 Use Logarithms in engineering calculations
1.1 Define logarithm and list its properties.
1.2 Distinguish natural logarithms and common logarithms.
1.3 Explain the meaning of e and exponential function.
1.4 State logarithm as a function and its graphical representation.
1.5 Use the logarithms in engineering calculations.
2.0 Resolve Rational Fraction into sum of Partial Fractions in engineering

problems
2.1 Define the following fractions of polynomials:
1. Rational
2. Proper and
3. Improper
2.2 Explain the procedure of resolving rational fractions of the type mentioned below
into partial fractions
f ( x) f ( x)
i) ii) 2
( x  a )( x  b)( x  c) ( x  a ) ( x  b)( x  c)
f ( x) f ( x)
iii ) 2
iv )
( x  a )( x  b) ( x  a )( x 2  b) 2
UNIT – II
3.0 Use Matrices for solving engineering problems
3.1 Define a matrix and order of a matrix.
3.2 State various types of matrices with examples (emphasis on 3rd order square
matrices).
3.3 Compute sum, difference, scalar multiplication and product of matrices.

39
3.4 Illustrate the properties of these operations such as associative, distributive,
commutative properties with examples and counter examples.
3.5 Define the transpose of a matrix and write its properties.
3.6 Define symmetric and skew-symmetric matrices.
3.7 Resolve a square matrix into a sum of symmetric and skew- symmetric matrices
with examples in all cases.
3.8 Define minor, co-factor of an element of a 3x3 square matrix with examples.
3.9 Expand the determinant of a 3 x 3 matrix using Laplace expansion formula.
3.10 Distinguish singular and non-singular matrices.
3.11 Apply the properties of determinants to solve problems.
3.12 Define multiplicative inverse of a matrix and list properties of adjoint and inverse.
3.13 Compute adjoint and multiplicative inverse of a square matrix.
Trigonometry:
UNIT – III
4.0 Solve simple problems on Compound Angles
4.1 Define compound angles and state the formulae of sin(A±B), cos(A±B), tan(A±B)
and cot(A±B)
4.2 Give simple examples on compound angles to derive the values of sin150, cos150 ,
sin750 , cos750 , tan 150 , tan750 etc.
4.3 Derive identities like sin(A+B) sin(A-B) = sin 2 A –sin2B etc.,
4.4 Solve simple problems on compound angles.
5.0 Solve problems using the formulae for Multiple and Sub- Multiple Angles
5.1 Derive the formulae of multiple angles 2A, 3A etc and sub multiple angles A/2 in
terms of angle A of trigonometric functions.
5.2 Derive useful allied formulas like sin A= (1- cos2A)/2 etc.,
5.3 Solve simple problems using the above formulae
UNIT – IV
40
6.0 Appreciate Properties of triangles
6.1 State sine rule, cosine rule, tangent rule and projection rule.
7.0 Represent the Hyperbolic Functions in terms of logarithm functions
7.1 Define Sinh x, cosh x and tanh x and list the hyperbolic identities.
7.2 Represent inverse hyperbolic functions in terms of logarithms.
8.0 Represent Complex numbers in various forms
8.1 Define complex number, its modulus, and conjugate and list their properties.
8.2 Define the operations on complex numbers with examples.
8.3 Define amplitude of a complex number
8.4 Represent the complex number in various forms like modulus-amplitude (polar)
form, Exponential (Euler) form – illustrate with examples.
UNIT – V
9.0 Apply Transformations for solving the problems in Trigonometry
9.1 Derive the formulae on transforming sum or difference of two trigonometric ratios
in to a product and vice versa- examples on these formulae.
9.2 Solve problems by applying these formulae to sum or difference or product of three
or more terms.
10.0 Use Inverse Trigonometric Functions for solving engineering problems
10.1 Explain the concept of the inverse of a trigonometric function by selecting an

appropriate domain and range.
10.2 Define inverses of six trigonometric functions along with their domains and ranges.
10.3 Derive relations between inverse trigonometric functions so that given A= sin-1x,
express angle A in terms of other inverse trigonometric functions - with examples.
10.4 State various properties of inverse trigonometric functions and identities like

sin-1x+cos-1 x = 2 etc.
10.5 Derive formulae like

tan
1
x  tan
1
y  tan
1
 
x y
1  xy
, where x  0, y  0, xy  1
etc., and solve simple problems.
41
UNIT – VI
11.0 Apply Matrices and Determinants in solving system of Linear Equations
11.1 Solve system of 3 linear equations in 3 unknowns using Cramer’s rule.
11.2 Solve system of 3 linear equations in 3 unknowns by matrix inversion method
11.3 State elementary row operations.
11.4 Solve a system of 3 linear equations in 3 unknowns by Gauss- Jordan method
12.0 Apply Properties of Triangles to solve a triangle.
12.1 Solve a triangle when (i) three sides (SSS), (ii) two sides and an included
angle(SAS), (iii) one side and two angles are given(SAA).
1. Student visits Library to refer Standard Books on Mathematics and collect related material.
2. Quiz
3. Group discussion
4. Surprise tests
5. Seminars
6. Home Assignments.
CO / PO - MAPPING
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 Mapped
POs
CO1 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO2 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO3 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO4 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO5 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO6 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
42
MID SEM-I EXAM
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM –II EXAM
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)

Sl No Unit No.
R U A
1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 II
3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 IV
9(b) 13(b)
4
5 V 5, 6 11(a) 15(a)

11(b) 15(b)
3
10(b) 14(b)
6 VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)

12(b) 16(b)
43
Understanding (U) 3 Marks
Legend:
Code: C18-Common-102F
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION & TRAINING, TELANGANA
BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATIONS
MID SEM –I, MODEL PAPER, I SEMESTER
TIME: 1: 00 Hour Max. Marks: 20
PART-A
Instructions: 1. Answer ALL questions 04 X 01 = 04
2 Each question carries ONE mark
1. Find the value of

log8 2
2. Define Proper fraction and give an example.
[ 1 2¿]¿¿¿
3. If A= ¿ Compute 3A+ 5B.
4. Find the value of |13 24|.

PART-B
Instructions: 1. Answer any TWO questions 02 X 03 = 06
2. Each question carries THREE marks
x
5(a) Resolve: in to partial fractions
( x−1 ) ( x−2)
Or
44
5(b) Find the value of log 2 16 + 3log 8 32
2 1 2
6 (a) If
( 1 3 2 )
1 4 1 , then Compute A2 +2 A−3 I , where I is a unit matrix of order 3 .
Or
1 0 0
6 (b) Find x , if
| 2 3 4 =48
5 −6 x |
PART C
2. Each question carries FIVE marks
9
Resolve into Partial fractions: ( x  1)( x  2)
2
7 a).
Or
75 5 32
7b) . Prove that log −2 log +log =log 2
60 9 243
1 1 2 2
8 a). If A=
3 [ ] −1
2 1 −2 , then show that A = A
−2 2 −1
T
Or
b +c a a
8 b). Show that
| b
c
c +a
c a+ b |
b =4 abc .
@@@
45
MID SEM –II, MODEL PAPER, I SEMESTER
TIME: 1: 00 Hours Max. Marks: 20
PART-A
1. Write the formulae for Sin (A - B) and Cos (A – B)
2. If Tan A = 2, Find the value of Cos2A.
3. Write the formula for Cosine rule.
2
4. Find the Modulus of 3  2i
PART-B
cos 12+sin 12
5 a) Show that = Tan570
cos 12−sin 12
Or
√3
5 b) Prove that Cos200 Cos300 Cos400 Cos800 = 16 .
6 a) Write any 3 formulae from Hyperbolic functions.

46
Or
1
6 b) Find the modulus of z=
2+4 i
PART C
1 1 π
7a). If TanA= ∧TanB= then show that A +B=
2 3 4
Or
7 b) If A+ B=1350 ,then prove that ( 1+CotA ) ( 1+ CotB )=2
8 a) Find the additive and multiplicative Inverse of 4 + 3i
Or
1+i
8 b) Express the complex number in Exponential form
1−i
@@@
47
MODEL PAPER
I SEMESTER EXAMINATION
Time: 2 hours [Total Marks: 40]
PART-A
1. Define proper fraction.
2. Write the formula for cos ( A+ B ) ∧cot ( A + B ) .
3. Define solution of a triangle.
4. Find the value of log 4 16.
5. Convert cos 4 A+cos 6 A into product.
−1 3
6. Ifsin =A then find cotA.
5
7. List the elements of a triangle ABC.
8. What is the formula for the solution of triangle ABC when three sides are given
PART-B
48
Instructions: 1. Answer any FOUR questions 04 X 03 = 12
1
9 (a) Resolve: into partial fractions.
( x+1 ) ( x+ 3 )
Or
sin 8 A+sin 6 A
9(b). Prove that =tan 7 A
cos 8 A+cos 6 A
9
10(a). Express in the form of a+ib .
4+ 3i
Or
10(b) Solve the triangle ABC with a=2, A=300 , C=300 .
11(a) Prove thatsin 500−sin70 0+ sin10 0=0 .
Or
−1 2 1 17
11(b) Prove that tan +tan −1 =tan−1 .
7 5 33
12(a) Solve [ 32 −32 ] [ xy ]=[ 47 ] .

Or
12 (b) Find the angle C in any triangle ABC if b=√ 2 ,c =√3 , B=450 .
PART C
1 2 2
13(a) Find the inverse of the matrix 2 1 2
2 2 1 [ ]
Or
13 (b) Prove that sinA +sin ( 1200 + A ) −sin ( 1200− A )=0
0 0 0 0 1
14 (a) Prove that cos 20 cos 40 cos 60 cos 80 = .
16
49
Or
14 (b) Solve x + y + z=6 , x+ 2 y +3 z=14 , x +4 y+ 9 z=3 by using Gauss Jordan methods.
15(a) In any triangle ABC prove that sin 2 A +sin 2 B+sin 2 C=4 sinAsinBsinC .
Or
15(b) if tan−1 x + tan−1 y+ tan −1 z=π then prove that x + y + z=xyz .
16(a) Solve x +2 y −z=−3 , 3 x+ y + z=4 , x− y +2 z=6 by Cramer’s Rule.
Or
16 (b) Solve the triangle ABC with a=1 b=2 c= √2.
@@@
Basic Physics
Course Title Basic Physics Course Code 18EI-103F

Semester I Course Group Foundation
Teaching Scheme in 45:15:00 Credits 3
Periods (L:T:P)
Methodology Lecture +Tutorial Total Contact 60
Periods
CIE 60 Marks SEE 40 Marks
Pre requisites: Basic High School Science, Basic Mathematics
Course Objectives: After studying this course, the student will be able to understand and appreciate
the role of Physics in different areas of engineering and technology.
Course Outcomes: On successful completion of the course, the student will have the ability to attain
below Course Outcomes (CO):
Course Outcomes Linked Teaching

POs Periods
Write the correct units and dimensions of physical

CO 1 PO1,PO2 10
quantities and know the concept of friction
Apply knowledge of vectors as a tool to solve
CO 2 PO1, PO2 10
engineering problems
Apply knowledge of mechanics to solve engineering
CO 3 PO1, PO2 10
problems
50
Apply knowledge of properties of matter to
CO 4 PO1, PO2 10
understand engineering problems
Apply Heat and thermodynamic processes to solve
CO 5 PO1, PO2 10
Apply conservation laws to engineering problems and PO1, PO2,
CO 6 10
utilization of energy sources PO3,PO6
Course Contents
1. UNIT – 1 UNITS, DIMENSIONS AND FRICTION
Duration: 10 periods (L: 7.5 – T: 2.5)
Physical quantity - Fundamental and derived quantities – Unit –definitions - S.I units - Advantages of
S.I. units - Dimensions and dimensional formula - definitions-units and dimensional formula for
physical quantities - Principle of homogeneity - Applications of dimensional analysis–Friction –
causes - types of friction - Normal reaction - Laws of static friction - coefficients of friction -
expression-rough horizontal surface - expressions for Acceleration, Displacement, Time taken to come
to rest and Work done - Advantages and disadvantages of friction - Methods to reduce friction –
Problems on friction only.
2. UNIT – 2 ELEMENTS OF VECTORS Duration: 10 periods (L: 7.5 – T: 2.5)
Scalar and vector quantities – definitions and examples –Graphical representation of a vector -
Classification of vectors (Proper vector, Unit vector, Equal vector, Negative vector, Collinear vector
and Position vector) Resolution of a vector - Triangle law of vector addition – Parallelogram law of
vectors – statement- expression for magnitude and direction of resultant vector –derivation-
illustrations (working of sling and flying bird) - Representation of a vector in unit vectors i, j and k–
Scalar product of vectors-definition- application to work done by force – properties of scalar product -
Vector product of vectors –definition – Right hand thumb rule and right hand screw rule - application
to moment of force - properties of vector product - area of parallelogram and triangle in terms of
vector product - related problems
3. UNIT – 3 MECHANICS Duration: 10 periods (L: 7.5 – T: 2.5)
Projectile motion – definition - examples - Horizontal projection – Time of flight and Horizontal range
– derivations - Oblique projection – Expression for path of a projectile in oblique projection -
derivation– Maximum height, Time of ascent, Time of descent, Time of flight, Horizontal range and
maximum horizontal range - derivations – Circular motion, angular velocity, time period and frequency
of revolutions–Definitions– Relation between linear velocity and angular velocity - derivation–
centripetal force – centrifugal force – definitions and expressions only- application (banking of curved
path) - angle of banking- expression only - related problems
4. UNIT – 4 PROPERTIES OF MATTER Duration: 10 periods (L: 7.5 – T: 2.5)
Elasticity and plasticity- definitions – examples - Stress and Strain – definitions and expressions -
elastic limit - Hooke’s law – statement - modulus of elasticity - Young’s modulus – Derivation –
51
Cohesive and adhesive forces - Surface tension - Illustrations - Capillarity –angle of contact –
definition- examples for capillarity- Formula for Surface tension based on capillarity (no derivation) –
Viscosity - Illustrations of viscosity - Newton’s formula for viscous force – derivation - Coefficient of
viscosity - Poiseuille’s equation - Effect of temperature on viscosity of liquids and gases– streamlines -
laminar flow - turbulent flow - Reynold’s number - equation of continuity – statement - related
problems.
5. UNIT – 5 HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS
Heat – expansion of gases - Boyle’s law –concept of absolute zero - Absolute scale of temperature –
Charles’ laws - Ideal gas equation – derivation - value of universal gas constant ‘R’ –Isothermal and
Adiabatic processes - Differences between isothermal and adiabatic processes - Internal energy and
external work done – Expression for work done – derivation – first law of thermodynamics –
application of first law to isothermal and adiabatic processes - second law of thermodynamics –
specific heat of a gas – molar specific heat of a gas – definitions – derive relation between C P and Cv -
related problems.
6. UNIT – 6 CONSERVATION LAWS AND ENERGY SOURCES
Work and Energy - Potential Energy and kinetic energy–examples – expressions for PE and KE
- derivations - Work-Energy theorem – derivation – Law of conservation of energy – examples - Law
of conservation of energy in the case of freely falling body – proof – Illustration of conservation of
energy in the case of simple pendulum– Non renewable and renewable energy sources – definition and
applications (solar cooker, wind mill and biogas) – Green house effect - related problems
References:
1. Engineering. Physics by R.K. Gaur, S.L. Gupta, Dhanpatrai Publications, New Delhi.
2. ISC Physics, Book I&II, P. Vivekanandan, DK Banerjee, S Chand, New Delhi.
3. Intermediate Physics, Vol. I&II, Telugu Academy, TS, Hyderabad.
4. Fundamentals of Physics by Halliday and Resnick.
Suggested learning outcomes:
Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to
1. know the concepts of units, dimensions and friction
1.1 Define Physical quantity, fundamental quantity and derived physical quantities
1.2 Define Unit.

52
1.3 S.I. Units. List the advantages of S.I. units.
1.4 Define dimensions and dimensional formula.
1.5 Write dimensional formulae of physical quantities.
1.6 State principle of homogeneity of dimensions.
1.7 State applications of dimensional analysis.
1.8 Define friction and state its causes.
1.9 State types of friction.
1.10 Explain normal reaction.
1.11 State laws of static friction.
1.12 Define coefficients of friction.
1.13 Derive expression for acceleration of a body moving on rough horizontal surface.
1.14 Derive expressions for displacement and time taken to come to rest and work done in the
case of a body moving on a rough horizontal surface.
1.15 List the advantages and disadvantages of friction.
1.16 Solve related numerical problems on friction only.
1.17 Explain the Methods to reduce friction.
2. know the concepts of Elements of Vectors
2.1 Define scalar and vector quantities with examples.
2.2 Represent a vector graphically.
2.3 Classify types of vectors – Proper vector, Unit vector, Equal vector, Negative vector, Collinear
vectors and Position vector.
2.4 Resolve a vector – Vector and Scalar components and relation between them.
2.5 State and explain Triangle law of vector addition.
2.6 State Parallelogram law of vectors – derive expressions for magnitude and direction of resultant
vector.
2.7 Illustrations of parallelogram law – working of sling and flying bird.
2.8 Representation of a vector in terms of unit vectors (i, j ,k)

53
2.9 Define Scalar product of vectors.
2.10 Application of scalar product for work done by force.
2.11 List the properties of scalar product.
2.12 Define Vector product of vectors.
2.13 Explain Right hand screw rule and right hand thumb rule.
2.14 Apply vector product in the case of moment of force.
2.15 Expressions for area of parallelogram and triangle in terms of cross product.
2.16 List the properties of vector product.
2.17 Solve related problems.
3. know the concepts of Mechanics
3.1 Define Projectile motion with examples.
3.2 Define Horizontal projection – Derive expressions for (a) Time of flight and (b)
Horizontal range
3.3 Define Oblique projection- Derive expression for path of a projectile in oblique projection.
3.4 Derive expressions for (a) Maximum height (b) Time of ascent (c) Time of descent
(d) Time of flight (e) Horizontal range and (f) maximum horizontal range in oblique
projection.
3.5 Define circular motion.
3.6 Define angular velocity, time period and frequency of revolutions in circular motion.
3.7 Derive the relation between linear velocity and angular velocity.
3.8 Define centripetal and centrifugal forces. Write their expressions.
3.9 Define angle of banking.
3.10 Explain banking of curved path and write the expression for angle of banking.
3.11 Solve related numerical problems.
4. know the concepts of Properties of matter
4.1 Define the terms Elasticity and Plasticity with examples.
4.2 Define Stress and Strain and write their expressions.
54
4.3 Define elastic limit and state Hooke’s law.
4.4 Define modulus of elasticity.
4.5 Define Young’s modulus.
4.6 Derive the formula for Young’s modulus.
4.7 Define cohesive force and adhesive force.
4.8 Define Surface tension. Give illustrations of Surface tension.
4.9 Define capillarity and angle of contact.
4.10 List the examples for capillarity.
4.11 Write the formula for Surface tension based on capillarity (T = ½ hdgr). Explain the terms.
4.12 Define Viscosity. Give illustrations of viscosity.
4.13 Derive Newton’s formula for viscous force.
4.14 Define coefficient of viscosity.
4.15 Write Poiseuille’s equation for coefficient of viscosity.
4.16 Discuss effect of temperature on viscosity of liquids and gases.
4.17 Define streamline flow and turbulent flow.
4.18 Define Reynold’s number.
4.19 State equation of continuity and explain the terms with diagram.
4.20 Solve related problems.
5. know the concepts of Heat and Thermodynamics
5.1 Explain expansion of gases.
5.2 State and explain Boyle’s law. Mention its limitations.
5.3 Explain concept of absolute zero using the relations Pt=P0(1+t/273) and Vt=
V0(1+ t/273)
5.4 Define Absolute scale of temperature.
5.5 State Charles’ laws in terms of absolute temperature.
5.6 Define Ideal gas and derive ideal gas equation.
5.7 Calculate the value of Universal gas constant (R).
55
5.8 State gas equation in terms of density.
5.9 Define Isothermal and Adiabatic processes.
5.10 Distinguish between isothermal and adiabatic processes.
5.11 Explain the terms internal energy and external work done.
5.12 Derive the expression for work done by the gas [W=P(V2-V1)].
5.13 State first law of thermodynamics.
5.14 Application of first law of thermodynamics to isothermal and adiabatic processes.
5.15 State second law of thermodynamics.
5.16 Define specific heat of a gas.
5.17 Define molar specific heat of a gas.
5.18 Derive the relation between CP, Cv and R.
5.19 Solve related problems
6. know the concepts of conservation laws and energy sources
6.1 Define work and energy.
6.2 Define potential energy and kinetic energy with examples.
6.3 Derive the expressions for Potential energy and Kinetic energy.
6.4 State and prove Work-Energy theorem.
6.5 State law of conservation of energy with example.
6.6 Prove law of conservation of energy in the case of a freely falling body.
6.7 Illustrate law of conservation of energy in the case of simple pendulum.
6.8 Define non renewable and renewable energy sources. Give examples.
6.9 Explain solar cooker, wind mill and biogas.
6.10 Explain briefly Green house effect.
56
MID SEM-I EXAM
S.N
Unit Name R U A Remarks
o
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM –II EXAM
S.N
Unit Name R U A Remarks
o
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)

Sl No Unit No.
R U A
1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 II
3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 IV
9(b) 13(b)
4
5 V 5, 6 11(a) 15(a)

11(b) 15(b)
3
10(b) 14(b)
6 VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)

12(b) 16(b)
57
COMMON-103F
BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION, (C-18)

MIDSEM – I
FIRST SEMESTER EXAMINATION
BASIC PHYSICS
TIME: 1 Hour TOTAL MARKS: 20
Important Note: Wherever any question has choice, marks will be allotted only to first attempted
question. No marks will be allotted for extra questions answered
PART - A (4x1 = 4M)
Note: Answer ALL the questions. Each question carries 1 mark.
The length of the answer shall not exceed 1/4 of page
1. Define unit.
2. State principle of homogeneity.
3. Define vector quantity.
4. Define position vector.
PART- B (2 x 3 = 6M)
Note: Answer the following questions. Each question carries 3 marks.

The length of the answer shall not exceed 1 page
5 (a). State three laws of static friction.

(OR)
(b). State three applications of dimensional analysis.
6 (a). State and explain triangle law of vector addition.
(OR)
(b). State any three properties of scalar product of two vectors.
PART-C (2×5=10M)
Note: Answer the following questions. Each question carries 5 marks
The length of the answer shall not exceed 2 pages
7 (a). Derive the expression for acceleration of a body moving on rough horizontal surface.
(OR)
(b). Explain any five methods of reducing friction.
8 (a). Derive the expression for magnitude of resultant of two vectors using parallelogram
58
law of vectors.
(OR)
(b). Find the area of parallelogram formed by two vectors
^ ^j+5 k^ ∧⃗
A=2 i+3
⃗ ^
B =2 i−3 ^j + k^ as two adjacent sides.
C-18 COMMON-103F
MIDSEM – II
BASIC PHYSICS
Important Note: Wherever any question has choice, marks will be allotted only to first attempted
question. No marks will be allotted for extra questions answered
PART - A (4x1 = 4M)
1. Define projectile.
2. Define centripetal force.
3. Define stress.
4. Write the formula for surface tension based on capillarity.
PART- B (2 x 3 = 6M)
5 (a). A body is projected into air with velocity of 20 ms-1 at an angle 300 with the earth surface. Find
the maximum height reached.
(OR)
(b). Explain banking of curved path.
6 (a). Distinguish between Cohesive force and Adhesive force.
(OR)
(b). Discuss the effect of temperature on viscosity of liquids and gases.
PART-C (2×5=10M)

7 (a). Derive the expression for path of a projectile in oblique projection.
59
(OR)
(b). Derive the relation between linear velocity and angular velocity.
8 (a). Derive the formula for Young’s modulus.
(OR)
(b). Derive Newton’s formula for viscous force.
C18 – COMMON 103F

MODEL PAPER
COMMON – I SEMESTER EXAMINATION
BASIC PHYSICS
Time: 2 Hours] [Total Marks: 40
PART – A
Instructions: 1. Answer ALL questions. 8X1=8
2. Each question carries ONE mark.
1. Write dimensional formula of Pressure.
2. Define modulus of elasticity.
3. Define non renewable energy source.
4. Define absolute zero.
5. State Charles’ constant pressure law.
6. Define molar specific heat of a gas.
7. Define Energy.
8. What is basic principle of wind mill?
PART – B
Instructions: 1. Answer any FOUR questions. 4X3=12
2. Each question carries THREE marks.
9(a). State any three laws of friction.
(or)
9(b). State first law of thermodynamics and write mathematical expression for it.
10(a). Distinguish between streamline and turbulent flow.

(or)
10(b). Derive an expression for Potential energy.
11(a). Derive formula for work done by the ideal gas.

(or)
11(b). Calculate the value of universal gas constant ( R ).
12(a). Prove work-energy theorem.
(or)
12(b). Explain briefly Green house effect.
PART – C 4X5 = 20
Instructions: 1. Answer any FOUR questions.
2. Each question carries FIVE marks.
13(a). Derive expressions for magnitude and direction of resultant of two vectors using
Parallelogram law of vectors.
(or)
13(b). Show that Cp - Cv = R.
60
14(a). Show that the path of a projectile is a parabola in case of oblique projection.
(or)
14(b). Prove law of conservation of energy in the case of a freely falling body.
15(a). Derive Ideal gas equation PV=RT
(or)
15(b). Distinguish between Isothermal and adiabatic processes.
16(a). Derive an expression for kinetic energy.
(or)
16(b). Explain solar cooker with neat diagram
General Engineering Chemistry
Course Title General Engineering Course Code 18EI-104F

Chemistry
Semester I Course Group Foundation
Teaching Scheme 45:15:00 Credits 3
in Periods (L:T:P)
Periods
Prerequisite: Basic knowledge of chemistry in secondary education.
Course Objectives: After studying this course, the student will be able to understand and appreciate
the role of Chemistry and environmental studies in different spheres of industries.
Course Outcome: On successful completion of the course, the students will have ability to attain
below Course Outcomes (CO):
CO Course outcome CL Linked PO Teaching

periods
CO1 Explain Bohr’s atomic model, the R/U/A 1,2,9 12

different types of chemical bonding in
certain molecules and concept of
oxidation, reduction and oxidation number
CO2 Understand and explain mole, molarity R/U/A 1,2,9 8
and normality and solve the problems and
colloids and their applications.
CO3 Explain the different theories of acids and R/U/A 1,2,3,9 12
bases, concept of pH, buffer solutions and
buffer action.
CO4 Compare the renewable and non R/U/A 1,2,5,6,7,9,10 8
renewable energy sources, to take
measures to protect the biodiversity and
also the environment.
CO5 Distinguish the temporary and permanent R/U/A 1,2,3,9,10 10
hardness, apply the different methods of
softening of hard water and desalination.
61
CO6 Explain electrolysis and applications of R/U/A 12,3, 4. 10
electrolysis, Solve the problems on
Faraday’s laws of electrolysis
Total Periods 60
Cognitive levels: R = Remember, U= Understand, A = Apply
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT-I: Fundamentals of Chemistry 12Periods (L : 9.0 Periods, T : 3.0 Periods)
Atomic Structure: Introduction – Atomic number – Mass number- Bohr's Atomic theory - Aufbau
principle - Hund's rule - Pauli's exclusion Principle- Orbitals, shapes of s, p and d orbitals - Electronic
configuration of elements
Chemical Bonding: Introduction – Electronic theory of valency - Types of chemical bonds - Ionic,
covalent and co-ordinate covalent bond with examples - Properties of Ionic and Covalent compounds
Oxidation-Reduction: Electronic Concepts of Oxidation-Reduction, Oxidation Number- calculations.
UNIT-II: Solutions and Colloids 8Periods (L : 6.0 Periods, T : 2.0 Periods)
Introduction-Classification of solutions based on physical state- Molecular weights ,Equivalent

weights- Expression of concentration – Mole concept, Molarity, Normality, Numerical problems on
Mole, molarity and normality - Colloids- Types of colloids- Lyophilic and Lyophobic- Industrial
applications of colloids.
UNIT-III: Acids and Bases 12Periods (L : 9.0 Periods, T : 3.0 Periods)
Introduction - theories of acids and bases and limitations - Arrhenius theory-Bronsted -Lowry theory -
Lewis acid base theory - Ionic product of water - pH and related numerical problems - Buffer solutions-
buffer action - applications of buffer solution.
UNIT-IV: Environmental Studies-I 8Periods (L : 6.0 Periods, T : 2.0 Periods)
Introduction - environment -scope and importance of environmental studies- important terms -

renewable and non renewable energy sources - Concept of ecosystem, producers, consumers and
decomposers - Biodiversity, definition and threats to Biodiversity- Forest resources- Over exploitation-
Deforestation.
UNIT-V: Water Technology 10Periods (L : 7.5 Periods, T : 2.5 Periods)
Introduction -soft and hard water - causes of hardness – types of hardness -disadvantages of hard water
- degree of hardness (ppm) - softening methods - permutit process - ion exchange
62
process - drinking water - municipal treatment of water for drinking purpose - Osmosis, Reverse
Osmosis - advantages of Reverse osmosis – Desalination by Electro -dialysis – Defluoridation –
Nalgonda technique.
UNIT-VI: Electrochemistry: 10Periods (L : 7.5 Periods, T : 2.5 Periods)
Conductors, insulators, electrolytes –Types of electrolytes - Arrhenius theory of electrolytic

dissociation - electrolysis –electrolysis of fused NaCl and aqueous NaCl – applications of electrolysis -
Faraday's laws of electrolysis- numerical problems.
Reference Books:
1. Engineering chemistry – Jain & Jain – Dhanpat Rai Publishing Company.

2. A Text book of Engineering Chemistry – S.S.Dara – S.Chand Publications.
3. Environmental Studies – A.K.De.
4. Environmental Studies, R. Rajagopalan, 2nd Edition, 2011, Oxford University Press
5. Intermediate Chemistry I and II – Telugu Academy TS
Specific Learning Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the student will have ability to
UNIT- I: FUNDAMENTALS OF CHEMISTRY
1.1 Explain the concept of atomic number and mass number
1.2 State the postulates of Bohr's atomic theory and its limitations
1.3 Explain 1.Aufbau's principle, 2.Hund's rule and 3.Pauli's exclusion principle with examples.
1.4 Define Orbital.
1.5 Draw the shapes of s, p and d Orbitals.
1.6 Distinguish between Orbit and Orbital
1.7 Write the electronic configuration of elements up to atomic number 30
1.8 Define chemical bond.
1.9 Explain the Postulates of Electronic theory of valency.
1.10 Define and explain three types of Chemical bonding viz., Ionic, Covalent, Coordinate
Covalent bond with examples.
1.11 Explain bond formation in NaCl and MgO.
1.12 List the Properties of Ionic compounds.
1.13 Explain covalent bond formation in Hydrogen molecule, Oxygen molecule, and Nitrogen
Molecules using Lewis dot method.
63
1.14 List the Properties of Covalent compounds.
1.15 Distinguish between ionic compounds and covalent compounds.
1.16 Electronic concept of Oxidation and Reduction.
1.17 Define Oxidation Number
1.18 Calculate the Oxidation Number.
UNIT-II: SOLUTIONS AND COLLOIDS
2.1 Define the terms 1.Solution, 2.Solute and 3.Solvent.
2.2 Classify solutions based on physical state.
2.3 Calculate Molecular weight and equivalent weights of acids, bases and salts.
2.4 Define mole.
2.5 Explain Mole concept with examples.
2.6 Define Molarity and Normality.
2.7 Solve Numerical problems on Mole, Molarity and Normality.
2.8 Define Colloids.
2.9 Types of colloids- Lyophilic and Lyophobic.
2.10 Industrial applications of colloids.
UNIT-III: ACIDS AND BASES
3.1 Explain Arrhenius theory of Acids and Bases.
3.2 State the limitations of Arrhenius theory of Acids and Bases
3.3 Explain Bronsted - Lowry theory of acids and bases.
3.4 State the limitations of Bronsted - Lowry theory of acids and bases.
3.5 Explain Lewis theory of acids and bases.
3.6 State the limitations of Lewis theory of acids and bases.
3.7 Explain the Ionic product of water.
3.8 Define pH and explain Sorenson scale.
3.9 Solve the Numerical problems on pH (Strong Acids and Bases).
3.10 Define buffer solutions and give examples of acidic and basic buffers.
64
3.11 State the applications of buffer solutions.
3.12 Explain the buffer action of acidic and basic buffers.
UNIT-IV: ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES-I
4.1 Define the term environment
4.2 Explain the scope and importance of environmental studies
4.3 Define and understand the following terms
1) Lithosphere, 2) Hydrosphere, 3) Atmosphere, 4) Biosphere, 5) Pollutant, 6) Contaminant
7) Pollution, 8) receptor, 9) sink, 10) particulates, 11) Dissolved oxygen (DO),
12) Threshold limit value (TLV),13).BOD and 14).COD
4.4 Explain the growing energy needs.
4.5 Explain renewable (non-conventional) and non renewable (conventional) energy sources
with examples.
4.6 Define an Ecosystem. Understand biotic and abiotic components of ecosystem.
4.7 Define and explain the terms:
1) Producers, 2) Consumers and 3) Decomposers with examples.
4.8 Explain biodiversity and threats to biodiversity.
4.9 Explain the uses of forests and over exploitation of forest resources and deforestation.
UNIT V: WATER TECHNOLOGY
5.1 State the various Sources of water.
5.2 Define the terms soft water and hard water with examples
5.3 Define hardness of water.
5.4 Explain temporary and permanent hardness of water.
5.5 List the usual chemical compounds causing hardness (with Formulae)
5.6 Disadvantages of using hard water in industries.
5.7 Define Degree of hardness, units of hardness in ppm (mg/L) and numerical problems related to
hardness.
65
5.8 Explain the methods of softening of hard water: a) Permutit process b).Ion-Exchange
process.
5.9 Essential qualities of drinking water.
5.10 Explain municipal treatment of water for drinking purpose.
5.11 Define Osmosis and Reverse Osmosis (RO).
5.12 List the applications and advantages of RO.
5.13 Desalination of sea water by Electro dialysis.
5.14 Defluoridation - Nalgonda Technique.
UNIT VI: ELECTROCHEMISTRY
6.1 Define the terms1. Conductor, 2. Insulator, 3.Electrolyte and 4.Non - electrolyte
6.2 Types of electrolytes - strong and weak electrolytes with examples.
6.3 Distinguish between metallic conductors and Electrolytic conductors.
6.4 Arrhenius theory of electrolytic dissociation
6.5 Explain electrolysis of fused NaCl and aqueous NaCl
6.6 Applications of Electrolysis- Electroplating-Electrolytic refining of metal (Copper)
6.7 Explain Faraday's laws of electrolysis
6.8 Define chemical equivalent, electrochemical equivalent.
6.9 Relationship between chemical equivalent and electrochemical equivalent
6.10 Solve the Numerical problems based on Faraday's laws of electrolysis
Suggested Student Activities or Induction Program:
Forenoon Afternoon
Day1 Registration Class work as per Time table
Day2 Rules and Regulations Chemistry Lab practice classes may
Day3 Getting acquainted with Head and be conducted
faculty
Day4 Familiarization with Institutional
facilities
Day5 Interaction with Class teacher and
Seniors
Day6 Introducing the mentor
Day7 Parent –Teacher meeting
1. Student visits Library to refer to Text books, reference books and manuals to find their specifications
2. Student inspects the available equipment in the Chemistry Lab to familiarize with them.
3. Quiz
4. Group discussion
5. Seminar
6. Surprise test
66
E - learning links:
https://iupac.org/
https://www.youtube.com
https://www.khanacademy.org/
www.nptel.ac.in
Blue Print
MID SEM-I EXAM

5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM –II EXAM
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)

Sl No Unit No.
R U A
1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 II
3 III
4 2 10(a) 14(a)
4 IV
9(b) 13(b)
5 V 3 5, 6
11(a) 15(a)
67
11(b) 15(b)
10(b) 14(b)
6 VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)

12(b) 16(b)

Model Question Papers

I SEMESTER, MIDSEM – I
Sub. Code: 18Common-104F
Time: 1 Hour Max. Marks: 20
PART – A
Instructions: Answer all questions. Each question carries one mark. 4 X 1 = 4 marks
1. State Hund’s rule.
2. Write the electronic configuration of Cr.
3. Define mole.
4. What are colloids?
PART – B
2 x 3 =6 Marks
5. a. Draw the shapes of s and d orbitals.
or
b. Explain the covalent bond formation in Nitrogen molecule by Lewis dot method.
6. a. Classify solutions based on their physical state.
or
b. Compare any three properties of lyophilic and lyophobic colloids.
PART – C
Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries five marks
2 x 5 =10 Marks
7. a. Distinguish the ionic compounds from covalent compounds.
or
b. What is oxidation number? Find the oxidation number of ‘S’ in H2SO4 and ‘Mn’ in KMnO4.
68
8. a. Define Molarity. Find the weight of H2SO4 required to prepare 400 ml of 0.5M solution.
or
b. Define Normality. Calculate the normality of 500 ml solution containing 0.53 grams of
Na2CO3.
I SEMESTER, MIDSEM – II
Time: 1 Hour Max.Marks : 20
PART – A
Instructions: i. Answer all questions. Each question carries one mark. 4 X 1 = 4 marks
1. What is conjugate acid base pair?
2. Define ionic product of water.
3. Define an ecosystem.
4. What is threshold limit value?
PART – B
Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries three marks 2 x 3 =6
Marks
5. a. What are the limitations of Arrhenius theory of acids and bases?
or
b. Explain the neutralization according to Lewis theory of acids and bases with an example.
6. a. Explain the terms producers, consumers and decomposers with example.
or
b. What are renewable and non renewable energy sources? Give examples.
PART – C
Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries five marks 2 x 5 =10
Marks
7. a. Define pH. Find the pH of 0.5M NaOH solution.
69
or
b. What are buffer solutions? State the applications of buffer solutions.
8. a. What is Biodiversity? Explain any two threats to biodiversity.
or
b. What is deforestation? What are its consequences?
70
C-18COMMON-104F
I SEMESTER EXAMINATION
Time: 2 Hours Max.Marks: 40
PART – A
Instructions: Answer all questions. Each question carries one mark.
8 X 1 = 8 marks
1. Define atomic mass number.
2. What is biodiversity?
3. Define degree of hardness of water.
4. What are buffer solutions?
5. Define soft water and hard water.
6. Name the salts responsible for temporary hardness of water.
7. Define the terms conductor and insulator.
8. What is an electrolyte?
PART – B
4 x 3 =12 Marks
9. a. State and explain Hund’ rule.
or
b. Write any six essential qualities of drinking water.
10. a. Explain the terms producers, consumers and decomposers with example.
or
b. What are strong and weak electrolytes? Give examples.
11. a. Define reverse osmosis and state its advantages.
or
b. Explain defluoridation of water by Nalgonda technique
12. a. Distinguish between metallic and electrolytic conductors.
Or
b. State Faraday’s Laws of electrolysis.
71
PART – C
Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries five marks
4 x 5 =20 Marks
13. a. Find the molarity and normality of the solution containing 10.6 grams of Na2CO3 in 2 litres of
solution. .
or
b. Calculate the temporary and permanent hardness of water containing the following salts per
litre
i. Ca(HCO3)2 =32.4 mg, ii. Mg(HCO3)2 = 29.2 mg, iii. CaSO4 =13.6 mg, iv. MgCl2 =
19 mg
14. a. Explain Lewis theory of acids and bases.
or
b. Explain the process of electrolysis of fused NaCl.
15. a. Explain the permutit process of softening of hard water with a neat diagram.
or
b. What are the disadvantages of using hard water in industries?
16. a. Explain the process of electrolytic refining of copper.
Or
b. Calculate the weight of Al deposited on the cathode if 0.5 amperes of electric current is
passed through AlCl3 solution for 1 hour.
72
Department of Technical Education
State Board of Technical Education &Training (TS)
Basics of Electrical and

Course Title : Course Code 18EI-105C
Electronics Engineering
Semester I Course Group :Core
Teaching Scheme in
45:15:.0 Credits :3
Periods(L:T:P)
Methodology Lecture + Assignments Total Contact Periods : :60
Pre requisites
This course requires the basic knowledge of high school Basic Physics and Mathematics.
Course Outcomes
CO1 : Distinguish between DC and AC power and its units and relation between the terms.
CO2 : Compare Electrostatic and Electromagnetic fields and solve simple problems.
CO3 : Classification and identification of various Switches and Relays, Preparation of PCBs.
Classify Resistors and Capacitors, Select the correct components for a low power, medium
CO4 :
and High power application and Use them for a given real time application.
Identify the types of Inductors and Transformers. Interpret their specifications and select
CO5 :
the correct value and type for a given application.
Solve simple problems in electrical circuits; suggest correct electronic components

CO6 :
required for simple electronic circuits including their specifications.
73
Course Content and Blue Print of Marks for SEE
Unit Unit Name Period Questions to be set for SEE

No s
R U A
1. Fundamentals of Electricity 8 Q13

Q1 Q9A
2 Electrostatics and Electromagnetism 12 A
3 Switches, Relays and PCBs 8 Q14

Q2 Q10A
4. Resistors and Capacitors 8 A
5. Inductors and Transformers Q13B

,
Q5,Q Q9B,Q11
12 Q15
Q4 6 A,Q11B
A,
Q15B
Q3
6. Engineering Applications Q10B,Q1 Q14B
2A, ,
Q7,Q
12 Q12B Q16
8
A,
Q16B
Total 60 8 8 8
Legend: R: Remembering, U: Understanding, A: Applying
Course
UNIT Contents
1 –Fundamentals of Electricity Duration: 8 Periods (L: 4.8
UNIT 1- Fundamentals of Electricity Duration: 8 Periods (L:6– T:2)
Define Current, Voltage, Ampere and Potential Difference. Ohm’s Law and its Limitations and simple
problems. KVL, KCL and simple problems. AC generation- Cycle, Time period, Frequency,
Amplitude, Instantaneous value, different forms of emf equation - Average value, RMS value, Form
factor and Peak factor for sine wave. Phase and Phase difference.
DC generation, Primary and Secondary cells, Lead acid batteries and Nickel Iron batteries and their
comparison. Maintenance free batteries.
74
UNIT 2- Electrostatics & Electromagnetism Duration: 12 Periods (L:10– T:2)
Electric charge, Electric field, Electric flux, EMF, Electric flux density, Field strength, Coulomb’s laws
of electrostatics, Lenz’s laws, Right hand thumb rule, Laplace law (Biot- savart’s Law), Fleming’s left
hand rule.
Magnetism-Magnetic flux leakage, Magnetic flux leakage coefficient, Relative permeability, absolute
permeability, Lifting power of magnet, MMF, Faraday’s laws of electromagnetic induction, Curie
point. Field patterns due to straight current carrying conductor, Solenoid and Toroid. Magnetic
materials - classifications, properties.
UNIT 3- Switches, Relays and PCBs Duration: 8 Periods (L:6– T:2)
Switches
Define switch-types-classification- ISI symbols-applications. Toggle, push button, slider switches-their

constructional details, ratings, applications.
Relays
Relay-symbols, classification, specifications, constructional details of electromagnetic relay. Fuse-

fuses’ ratings, connectors - MCBs.
PCBs
PCB-classification, types of laminates, methods of layout preparation-etching, cleaning, drilling,

soldering
Unit-4 Resistors and Capacitors Duration: 8Periods (L:6– T:2)
Resistors:
Resistance-Factors effecting resistance- Classification of resistors,-colour coding-Specifications-

preferred values of resistors, applications of resistors. PTC, NTC, Effect of temperature on resistance.
Derive R=Ro(1+αt). Carbon film, metal film, wire wound resistors- characteristics and applications.
Constructional details of carbon and wire wound Potentiometers. Faults in resistors. Equivalent
resistance of given resistors when connected in series and parallel
Capacitors:
Capacitance- Factors effecting capacitance-Classification and specifications of Capacitors, Dielectric

constant, Dielectric strength. Energy stored in a capacitor. Relation between Q, C, V. Basic properties
and applications of Paper, Mica, Ceramic, Glass and Electrolytic capacitors. Variable capacitors and
Gang capacitors- applications. Equivalent capacitance of given capacitors when connected in series and
parallel
75
Unit-5 Inductors and Transformers Duration: 12Periods (L:9– T:3)
Inductors
Inductance- Classification - symbols – Specifications. Self-inductance, Mutual-inductance- Factors

affecting Self-inductance and Mutual-inductance, Coefficient of coupling. Comparison and
applications of AF and RF chokes. Equivalent inductance of given inductors when connected in series
and parallel (aiding and opposing).
Transformers
Define Transformer- Symbols- Classification- Principle of Transformer-constructional details and

applications of Transformers. Turns Ratio. Step up and step down transformers.
UNIT 6: Engineering applications Duration: 12 Periods (L:9– T:3)
Problems on ohms law, Coulomb’s law –KVL, KCL, calculation of instantaneous value, average value
form factor, peak factor of sine wave. Comparison -electric and magnetic circuits, problems on
faradays laws. Series and parallel combination of resisters, capacitors, inductors (series aiding /
opposition and parallel aiding / opposition). Effects of temperature on resistance, Problems on absolute
and relative primitivity and their relation. Calculating the values of R & C using colour coding.
Problems on self-inductance, Mutual inductance, coefficient of coupling. Determination of fuse ratings,
choice of types of fuse per different applications. Selection of Relay for an application, Relay circuit
for controlling AC/DC load, Selection of PCBs
Recommended Books
1. Electrical Technology Volume 1 by Bl Theraja
2. Electronic Devices and Circuits by David A. Bell Prentice hall
3. Hand book of components for Electronics by Charles A. Harper McGrahills
1.http://electrical4u.com/
2. www.electronics-tutorials.ws
3. www.nptel.ac.in

76
1.0 Distinguish between DC and AC power and its units and relation between the terms.
1.1 Define the terms current, voltage, ampere and potential difference
1.2 Define ohms law and mention its applications and limitations.
1.3 Solve simple problems on ohms law.
1.4 Define KVL and KCL.
1.5 Solve simple problems on KVL and KCL.
1.6 Generation of Alternating current.
1.7 Different forms of emf equations
1.8 Define Time period , Frequency and Amplitude of a sine wave
1.9 Give the formula for the instantaneous value in terms of maximum value, frequency and time.
1.10 Solve simple problems to calculate Amplitude, Frequency and Time Period.
1.11 Define the average value, R.M.S. value, form factor and peak factor for sine wave.
1.12 Explain the terms phase and phase difference.
1.13 Explain the concept of “leading”, “lagging” and “in phase” with the help of waveforms.
1.14 Explain the method of generation of DC current.
1.15 Classify cells.
1.16 Define and compare primary and secondary cells.
1.17 Explain the constructional details of lead acid and nickel iron cells.
1.18 Compare lead acid and nickel iron cells
1.19 Write the importance of maintenance free batteries.
2.0 Compare Electrostatic and Electromagnetic fields and solve simple problems.
2.1 Define the Electric charge, Electric field, Electric flux, EMF, Electric flux density, Field
strength,
2.2 State the Coulomb’s laws of electrostatics.
2.3 Define the Magnetic field, Magnetic flux, Magnetic flux density, MMF,
77
2.4 State the Faraday’s laws of electromagnetic induction
2.5 State the Lenz’s laws, Right hand thumb rule, Laplace law (Biot- savart’s Law), Fleming’s left
hand rule,
2.6 Define Magnetic flux leakage coefficient.
2.7 Draw the field patterns due to
a) Straight current carrying conductor; b) Solenoid; c) Toroids.
2.8 Classification of Magnetic materials
2.9 Define the above magnetic materials.
2.10 Distinguish between soft and hard magnetic Materials.
2.11 Give 3 examples for each.
2.12 List the important magnetic materials used in the Electrical &Electronic industry.
2.13 List the important properties of Magnetic materials.
3.0 Classification and identification of various Switches and Relays, Preparation of PCBs.
3.1 Define switch
3.2 Classify switches according to poles and throws.
3.3 Sketch the ISI symbols for SPST, SPDT, DPST, DPDT, Multi-pole multi-throw.
3.4 Explain the construction, working and rating of
a) Toggle Switch
b) Push button Switch
c) Rotary Switch
d) Slider Switch.
3.5 Define a Relay
3.6 Classify different relays based on principle of operation, polarization and

applications.
3.7 Mention specification and applications of Relays.
3.8 State the need of a fuse in electronic equipment.

78
3.9 List different types of Fuses.
3.10 Mention the ratings of Fuses.
3.11 Mention the use of MCB.
3.12 Explain the need of PCB in electronic equipment.
3.13 Classify PCBs.
3.14 List the types of laminates used for PCBs
3.15 Mention the methods of layout preparation of PCB.
3.16 List the methods of transferring lay out on the copper clad sheet.
3.17 Mention the methods of etching, cleaning, drilling of PCB
3.18 List the material used in soldering
3.19 State the standard PCB specification.
4.0 Classify Resistors and Capacitors, Select the correct components for a low power, medium
and High power application and Use them for a given real time application.
4.1 Define Resistance.
4.2 Derive the relation R = (ρl ) / a.
4.3 Classify Resistors.
4.4 Identify the symbols of Resistors.
4.5 List the specifications of Resistors and state their importance.
4.6 Calculate the Resistance value by using colour code.
4.7 Calculate equivalent resistance when given resistors are connected in series and
parallel.
4.8 Simple problems on Series and Parallel connected resistors.
4.9 Compare the features of carbon film, metal film and wire wound resistors.
4.10 Describe the constructional features of carbon and wire wound potentiometers
4.11 Compare the carbon and wire wound potentiometer

79
4.12 Describe the working of rheostat and mention its application.
4.13 Define temperature coefficient of resistance.
4.14 Derive the relation Rt = Ro (1+αto)
4.15 Define Positive and Negative temperature coefficient.
4.16 List the common faults in resistors.
4.17 Define Capacitance
4.18 Classify the different types of Capacitors.
4.19 List the specifications of a capacitor and state their importance.
4.20 State the factors affecting the capacitance of a capacitor.
4.21 Define Di-electric constant and Di-electric strength of a material
4.22 State the properties, range and applications of paper, mica, glass, ceramic and electrolytic
capacitors.
4.23 Sate the different types of variable capacitors and mention their applications.
4.24 State the losses in capacitors.
4.25 Find the equivalent capacitance of capacitors connected in series and parallel and simple
problems.
4.26 List the common faults in capacitors.
5.0 Identify the types of Inductors and Transformers. Interpret their specifications and select the
correct value and type for a given application.Define inductance, mutual inductance and
coefficient of coupling.
5.1. Define Inductance
5.2. Define Self-inductance and Mutual-inductance.
5.3. Classify inductors.
5.4. State the factors effecting Self-inductance and Mutual-inductance.
5.5. Draw the symbol of iron core, air core and ferrite core inductors.
80
5.6. Find equivalence inductance when inductors connected in series (aiding and
opposing), parallel(aiding and opposing)
5.7. List the specifications of inductors.
5.8. Describe the constructional features and applications of A.F and R.F chokes
5.9. List various core materials used in the construction of inductors.
5.10. List the applications of A.F. and R.F chokes.
5.11. List the common faults in inductors.
5.12. Define Transformer.
5.13. Explain the principle of operation of Transformer.
5.14. Different types of transformers
5.15. Constructional details and working principle of basic Transformer.
6.0 Solve simple problems in electrical circuits; suggest correct electronic components required
for simple electronic circuits including their specifications.
6.1 Problems on Ohms law.
6.2 Problems on Coulomb’s law.
6.3 Problems on KVL, KCL.
6.4 Problems on calculation of instantaneous value, average value form factor, peak
factor of sine wave.
6.5 Problems on Faradays laws.
6.6 Problems on series and parallel combination of resisters, capacitors, inductors

(series aiding / opposition and parallel aiding / opposition).
6.7 Problems on Effects of temperature on resistance.
6.8 Problems on absolute and relative permittivity and their relation.
6.9 Calculating the values of R & C using color coding.
6.10 Problems on self-inductance, Mutual inductance, coefficient of coupling.
6.11 Determination of fuse ratings, choice of types of fuse per different applications.
6.12 Selection of Relay for an application.

81
6.13 Relay circuit for controlling AC/DC load.
6.14 Selection and preparation of PCBs for the given application.
Suggested Student Activities for Induction Program

Forenoon Afternoon
Day2 Rules and Regulations Drawing and Basic workshop practice

classes may be conducted
Day3 Getting acquainted with Head and faculty
Day4 Familiarization with Institutional facilities
Day5 Interaction with Class teacher and Seniors

1. Student visits Library to refer to Manual of electronic components to find their specifications
2. Student inspects the available equipment in the Lab to identify the components
3. Visit nearby Industry to familiarize with fabrication techniques
4. Analyze the connections in the UPS available in the Institution facility
5. Quiz
6. Group discussion
7. Surprise test
CO-PO Mapping Matrix
Basic knowledge
work Individual and Team

Engineer and society
Lifelong learning
Engineering Tools
Ethics
Communication
Linked PO
sustainability Environment &
practice Experiments and
Knowledge Discipline
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CO1 2 2 2 1,2,10
82
CO2 2 2 2 2 2 1,2,5,6,7
CO3 2 2 2 2 1,2,4,5
CO4 2 2 2 2 1,2,5,7
CO5 2 2 2 2 1,2,4,5
CO6 2 2 2 2 1,2,3,7
Internal evaluation
Test Units Marks
Mid Sem 1 1 and 2 20
Slip Test 1 1 and 2 5
Assignment 1 5
Seminars 1 5
Total 60
QUESTION PAPER PATTERN FOR MID SEMESTER EXAMS
Sl. Description Level No of Marks for each Choice Total

No Questions question Marks
01 Part-A Remembering(R) 4 1 Nil 4 Marks
02 Part-B Understanding(U) 4 3 2 6 Marks
03 Part-C Application(A) 4 5 2 10 Marks
Total Marks 20 Marks
MID SEM-I EXAM
S.No Unit No R U A Remarks

5(a) 7(a)
83
1 Unit-I 1,2 5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-II 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM-II EXAM

1 Unit-III 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-IV 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)
The length of answer for each question framed in respect of Part-A, B&C shall not exceed ¼ of a
page,1 page and 2 pages respectively
QUESTION PAPER PATTERN FOR SEMESTER END EXAM
Sl.N Description Level No of Marks for Choice Total

84
Unit No Questions to be set for SEE
R U A
I Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
II
III Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
IV
Q4
V Q5,Q6 Q9(b), Q13(b),
Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Q3
Q10(b), Q14(b),
VI Q7,Q8
Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)
Model Question Paper

BOARD DIPLOMA MID-SEMESTER I EXAMINATION (C-18)
DEIE - I SEMETER EXAMINATION
BASICS OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING (18EI-105C)
TIME: 1 Hour MAXIMUM MARKS: 20

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PART –A
Instructions: Answer all the questions. Each question carries one mark.
MARKS: 4X1 =4
85
1. Define current and voltage.
2. State Kirchhoff’s current law.
3. What is EMF (electro motive force)?
4. State Lenz’s law.
PART –B
Instructions: Answer two questions. Each question carries three marks.
MARKS: 2X3 =06
5.(a) State ohm’s law and give the limitations.
(or)
5.(b) Classify cells.
6.(a) State the faraday’s laws of electromagnetic induction.
(or)
6.(b) Distinguish between soft and hard magnetic materials.
PART –C
Instructions: Answer two questions. Each question carries five marks MARKS: 2X5=10
7. (a) Explain the construction of lead acid battery.
(or)
7. (b) Explain the method of generation of DC current.
8. (a) Give the classification and properties of the magnetic materials.
(or)
8. (b) Draw and explain the field patterns due to straight current carrying conductor,
Solenoid and Toroid.

BOARD DIPLOMA MID-SEMESTER II EXAMINATION (C-18)

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PART –A
Instructions: Answer all the questions. Each question carries one mark. MARKS: 4X1 =4
1. Define switch.
86
2. Draw the symbol of a SPDT switch.
3. What is capacitance?
4. Draw the symbol of a resistor.
PART –B
Instructions: Answer two questions. Each question carries three marks. MARKS: 2X3 =06
5.(a) Explain the working of a toggle switch.
(or)
5.(b) Classify PCBs.
6.(a) Explain about tapering in resistors.
(or)
6.(b) Classify the different types of Capacitors.
PART –C
7.(a) Explain the need of PCB in electronic equipment.
(or)
7.(b) Explain the working of a Slider switch
8.(a) Explain about the measurement of resistance using colour code.
(or)
8.(b)Explain the constructional features of carbon and wire wound resistors.

BOARD DIPLOMA SEMESTER END EXAMINATION (C-18)
TIME: 2Hours MAXIMUM MARKS: 40

PART –A
Answer all the questions. Each question carries one mark. Marks: 8X1 =08
1. Define RMS value.
2. What is capacitance?
3. Write the EMF equation of a transformer
4. State the need of a MCB.
87
5. Draw the symbol of a transformer.
6. Define mutual inductance.
7. Calculate the total resistance when 5Ω and 6Ω resistors are connected in series.
8. Give the formula to calculate form factor of a sine wave.
PART –B
Answer FOUR questions. Each question carries three marks. 4 x 3= 12
9.(a) State the faraday’s laws of electromagnetic induction
(or)
9.(b) Explain the principle of operation of Transformer.
10.(a) Explain the constructional details of wire wound potentiometers and give its
applications.
(or)
10.(b) A light bulb has a current of 1 A when 110 volts is applied. What is the resistance of
the bulb filament?
11.(a).State the factors effecting self inductance.

(or)
11.(b)List various core materials used in construction of inductors.
12.(a) Two cells having emf of 10 V and 8V, and internal resistance of 1 Ω(each) are connected as
shown with an external resistance of 8 Ω. Find the current flowing through the circuit.
(or)
12.(b) Two point charges, QA = +8 μC and QB = -5 μC, are separated by a
distance r = 10 cm. What is the magnitude of the electric force. The
constant k = 8.988 x 109 Nm2C−2= 9 x 109 Nm2C−2.
PART –C
Answer FOUR questions. Each question carries five marks. 4 x 5 = 20
13.(a) Give the classification and properties of the magnetic materials.
(or)
13.(b) Explain the constructional features and applications of AF chokes.
88
14.(a) Explain about the measurement of resistance using colour code.
(or)
14.(b) Three capacitors, C1 = 2 μF, C2 = 4 μF, C3 = 4 μF, are connected in series and
parallel. Determine the capacitance of a single capacitor that will have the same
effect as the combination.
15.(a)Explain the constructional features and applications of RF chokes.

(or)
15.(b) Explain the constructional design and working principle of Transformer
16.(a) Find the capacitance of a capacitor if the area of the plates is 10mm2 , distance
between the plates is 2mm and permittivity is 1.
(or)
16.(b) A sinusoidal alternating current is represented by i=30sin30t. Find
a) Maximum value
b) Current when t=0.002sec passing through zero in positive direction.
c) RMS value of current.
BASIC ENGINEERING DRAWING
BASIC ENGINEERING
Course Title : Course Code 18EI-106P
DRAWING
Semester I Course Group Practical
Teaching Scheme 15 : 00:30 Credits 1.5
89
in Periods (L :P)
Total Contact
Methodology Lecture + practice 45
Periods:
***This Course is Common to all Programs of Diploma in Engineering Offered by State Board of
Technical Education –Telangana State.
This Course is aimed at developing basic graphic skills so as to enable them to use these skills in
preparation of engineering drawings, their reading and interpretation.
Prerequisites: Enthusiasm to learn this course and requires basic knowledge of Mathematics.
Course Outcomes (CO)
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to attain the following Course
Outcomes (CO):
Course Outcome
CO1 Acquire the knowledge on Importance of Engineering drawing and instruments.
CO2 Practice free hand Lettering in different styles.
CO3 Acquire the knowledge on different styles of dimensioning systems.
Appreciate the usage of engineering curves for tracing the paths and surface profile of the
CO3
machine components such as gear profile from involute and cycloid.
Realize the concept of projection and attain visualization projection of points, Lines and
CO3 Planes. The student will also be able to draw the views related to projection of Points, Lines
and Planes.
Realize the concept of orthographic projections and student will be able to draw orthographic
CO4
views of an object from its pictorial drawing.
Course Contents
NOTE
1. B.I.S Specification should invariably be followed in all the topics.
2. A - 3 Size Drawing Sheets are to be used for all Drawing Practice Exercises.
1.0 The importance of Engineering Drawing and Engineering Instruments
Explanation of the scope and objectives of the subject of Engineering Drawing Its
importance as a graphic communication -Need for preparing drawing as per standards – (SP-46 –1988)
– Mention B.I.S - Role of drawing in -engineering education – Link between Engineering drawing and
other subjects of study.
90
Engineering drawing Instruments
Classifications: Basic Tools, tools for drawing straight lines, tools for curved lines,
tools for measuring distances and special tools like mini drafter & drafting machine – Mentioning of
names under each classification and their brief description - Scales: Recommended scales reduced &
enlarged - Lines: Types of lines, selection of line thickness - Selection of Pencils -Sheet Sizes: A0, A1,
A2, A3, A4, A5, Layout of drawing sheets in respect of A0, A1, A3 sizes, Sizes of the Title block and
its contents, Care and maintenance of Drawing Sheet,
Drawing plate: La out of sheet – as per SP-46-1988 to a suitable scale.
2.0 Free hand lettering & numbering
Importance of lettering – Types of lettering -Guide Lines for Lettering
Practicing of letters & numbers of given sizes (7mm, 10mm and 14mm)
Advantages of single stroke or simple style of lettering - Use of lettering stencils
3.0 Dimensioning practice
Purpose of engineering drawing, Need of B.I.S code in dimensioning - Shape description of an

Engineering object - Definition of dimensioning size description - Location of features, surface finish,
fully dimensioned Drawing - Notations or tools of dimensioning, dimension line, extension line, leader
line, arrows, symbols, number and notes, rules to be observed in the use of above tools - Placing
dimensions: Aligned system and unidirectional system (SP-46-1988) - Arrangement of dimensions -
Chain, parallel, combined progressive and dimensioning by co-ordinate methods - Rules for
dimensioning standard - features: Circles (holes) arcs, angles, tapers, chamfers, and dimension of
narrow spaces.
4.0 Geometric Construction
Division of a line: to divide a straight line into given number of equal parts internally examples in
engineering application. Construction of tangent lines: to draw tangent lines touching circles internally
and externally.
Construction of tangent arcs
a) To draw tangent arc of given radius to touch two lines inclined at given angle (acute, right and
obtuse angles).
b) Tangent arc of given radius touching a circle or an arc and a given line.
c) Tangent arcs of radius ‘R’, touching two given circles internally and externally.
91
Construction of polygon: construction of any regular polygon of given side length using general
method.
Conical Curves: Explanation of Ellipse, Parabola, Hyperbola, as sections of a double cone and a loci of
a moving point, Eccentricity of above curves – Their Engg. application viz. Projectiles, reflectors, P-V
Diagram of a hyperbolic process.
Construction of any conic section of given eccentricity by general method.
Construction of ellipse by concentric circles method.
Construction of parabola by rectangle method.
Construction of rectangular hyperbola.
General Curves: Involute, Cycloid and Helix, explanations as locus of a moving point, their
engineering application, viz, Gear tooth profile, screw threads, springs etc. - their construction
5.0 Projection of points, lines and planes
Projecting a point on two planes of projection -Projecting a point on three planes of projection
-Projection of straight line.
a) Parallel to both the planes.
b) Perpendicular to one of the planes.
c) Inclined to one plane and parallel to other planes.
Projection of regular planes.
a) Plane perpendicular to HP and parallel to VP and vice versa.
b) Plane perpendicular to HP and inclined to VP and vice versa.
6.0 Orthographic Projections
Meaning of orthographic projection -Using a viewing box and a model – Number of views obtained on
the six faces of the box - Legible sketches of 3 views for describing object -Concept of front view, top
view, and side view for sketching these views of engg objects - Explanation of first angle projection. –
Positioning of three views in First angle projection - Projection of points as a means of locating the
corners of the surfaces of an object – Use of miter line in drawing a third view when other two views
are given -Method of representing hidden lines -Selection of minimum number of views to describe full
object.
Reference Books
92
Engineering Drawing by Kapildev – (Asian Publisher)
Engineering Drawing by BasantAgarwal& C.M Agarwal - (McGraw-hill)
Engineering Drawing by N.D.Bhatt. (Charotar Publishing House Pvt. Ltd.)
A Textbook on Engineering Drawing by P. Kannaiah, K. L. Narayana, K. Venkata Reddy
NPTEL Videos of Engineering Drawing.
Specific Learning Outcomes:
Upon completion of the subject the student shall be able to -
1.0 Understand the basic concepts of engineering drawing (03 Hours)
1.1 State the importance of drawing as an engineering communication medium
1.2 State the necessity of B.I.S. Code of practice for Engineering Drawing.
1.3 Explain the linkages between Engineering drawing and other subjects of study in diploma
course.
Use of Engineering Drawing Instruments
1. 4 Select the correct instruments and draw lines of different orientation.
1.5 Select the correct instruments and draw small and large Circles.
1.6 Select the correct instruments for measuring distances on the drawing.
1.7 Use correct grade of pencil for different types of lines, thickness and given function.
1.8 Select and use appropriate scales for a given application.
1.9 Identify different drawing sheet sizes as per I.S. and Standard Lay- outs.
1.10 Prepare Title block as per B.I.S. Specifications.
2.0 Write Free Hand Lettering and Numbers (03 Hours)
2.1 Write titles using sloping lettering and numerals of 7mm, 10mm and 14mm height
2.2 Write titles using vertical lettering and numerals of 7mm, 10mm and 14mm height
2.3 Select suitable sizes of lettering for different layouts and applications
93
2.4 Practice the use of lettering stencils.
3.0 Understand Dimensioning Practice (06 Hours)
3.1 Define “Dimensioning.
3.2 State the need of dimensioning of drawing according to accepted standard.
3.3 Identify notations of Dimensioning used in dimensioned drawing.
3.4 Identify the system of placement of dimensions in the given dimensioned drawing.
3.5 Dimension a given drawing using standard notations and desired system of
dimensioning.
3.6 Dimensioning standard features applying necessary rules.
3.7 Arrange dimensions in a desired method given in a drawing.
3.8 Identify the departures if any made in the given dimensioned drawing with reference to SP-
46-1988, and dimension the same correctly.
4.0 Apply Principles of Geometric Constructions (12 Hours)
4.1 Divide a given line into desired number of equal parts internally.
4.2 Draw tangent lines and arcs.
4.3 Use General method to construct any polygon.
4.4 Explain the importance of conics.
4.5 Construct conics (ellipse, parabola and hyperbola) by general method.
4.6 Construct ellipse by concentric circles method.
4.7 Construct parabola by rectangle method.
4.8 Construct rectangular hyperbola from the given data.
4.9 Construct involute from the given data.
4.10 Construct cycloid and helix from the given data.
4.11 State the applications of the above constructions in engineering practice.
5.0 Apply Principles of Projection of points, lines and planes (06 Hours)
5.1 Visualize the objects
5.2 Explain the I-angle and III-angle projections
5.3 Practice the I-angle projections

94
5.4 Draw the projection of a point with respect to reference planes (HP&VP)
5.5 Draw the projections of straight lines with respect to two reference
Planes (up to lines parallel to one plane and inclined to other plane)
5.6 Draw the projections of planes (up to planes perpendicular to one plane and
inclined to other plane)
6.0 Apply principles of orthographic projection (15 Hours)
6.1 Explain the principles of orthographic projection with simple sketches.
6.2 Draw the orthographic view of an object from its pictorial drawing.
6.3 Draw the minimum number of views needed to represent complete engineering
component.
Linked Program
Course Outcome Cognizant Level Objectives
(PO)
Acquire the knowledge on Importance of
CO1 R 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10
Engineering drawing and instruments.
CO2 Practice free hand Lettering in different styles. R/U 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10
Acquire the knowledge on different styles of
CO3 R/U 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10
dimensioning systems.
Appreciate the usage of engineering curves for
tracing the paths and surface profile of the machine
CO3 R/U/A 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10
components such as gear profile from involute and
cycloid.
Realize the concept of projection and attain
visualization projection of points, Lines and
CO3 Planes. The student will also be able to draw the R/U/A 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10
views related to projection of Points, Lines and
Planes.
Realize the concept of orthographic projections
CO4 and student will be able to draw orthographic R/U/A 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10
views of an object from its pictorial drawing.
Course-PO Attainment Matrix
Program Outcomes (PO)

Course Name
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Basic
Engineering 3 3 3 2 -- -- -- -- 3 3
Drawing
Level 3- Highly Addressed, Level 2-Moderately Addressed, Level 1-Low Addressed
95
BASIC COMPUTER AIDED DRAFTING
BASIC COMPUTER AIDED

DRAFTING
Semester I Course Group :Practical
Teaching Scheme
15:00:30 Credits : 1.5
in Periods(L:T:P)
Total Contact
Methodology Lecture + Practice 45
Periods
Pre requisites : basics of computer operation
This course requires the Basic Computer Skills and Practice concepts of engineering drawing
Course Outcomes
Importance and advantages of CAD. Set drawing area and draw geometric shapes and
CO1
modify as per requirement
96
CO2 Add text with required font and size and also dimension by various methods
CO3 Generate isometric model and draw circle on three iso planes
CO4 Create 2D drawings with front, side view with all above features
Course Content
UNIT -1 Duration: 15 periods (T:2.5 + P:10hrs)
1.1 The Computer Aided Drafting and its software
Definition of Computer Aided Drafting, the Advantages and importance of CAD

software LIKE Auto CAD, Intel Cad, ProG CAD etc., the features of Graphic Work station, CAD
Environment: Screen, Various tool bars and menus.
1.2 Selection of commands
Commands using toolbars, menus, command bar. Repeating a command, nesting a

command and modifying a command. Use of prompt history window and scripts, mouse shortcuts.
Creating the drawing. Opening existing and, saving of drawing, setting up a drawing. Setting and
changing the grid and snapping alignment, and the Entity snaps.
1.3 Use of viewing tools of CAD & Use of coordinate systems of the drawing
Use of mouse, Scroll bar to move around within drawing, changing of

magnification of drawing. Displaying of multiple views, the use of controlling visual elements like
Line weight.
Two dimensional coordinates such as Absolute, Cartesian, Relative Cartesian and

Polar coordinates and direct method of drawing line.
1.4 Creating simple and complex entities
Drawing of lines, circles, arcs, ellipses, elliptical arcs, rays and infinite lines.
Creating and editing of point entities. Drawing of shapes like rectangles, polygons, polylines, Splines,
donuts, and adding of hatch pattern
1.5 Use the Modifying tools to modify the properties of entities
Entity selection and de selection methods, the Deletion of entities. Copying of entities within a
drawing, between drawings, parallel copies, mirroring entities and arraying entities. The Rearranging of
entities by Moving, Rotating and Reordering. The Resizing of entities by Stretching, Scaling,
Extending, Trimming, and editing the length. The Braking and joining of entities. Editing of polylines:
The Exploding of entities, the Chamfering and Filleting of entities
1.6 Use the drawing information retrieving tools Measure, Divide, Calculate and Display
97
Measuring the intervals on entities, dividing the entities in to segments. Calculation
of areas of defined by points, closed entities, and combined entities, calculate the distance and angle
between the entities. Displaying the information about the entities and drawing status.
2.1 Use the Text tool to create and formatting the various types of text Fonts and its styles
The creating, naming and modifying the text fonts, the Creation of line text, paragraph text, setting of
line text style and its alignment. The Setting of Paragraph text style and its alignment, and modifying
the text.
2.2 Use Dimensioning concepts to create dimensions, Edit dimensions, Control dimension styles
& variables and Adding geometric tolerances
The creating of linear, Angular, Diametric, Radial, Ordinate dimensions. The creating leaders and
annotations, making dimensions’ oblique, Editing the dimension text, controlling of dimension arrows
and format. The Controlling of line settings and dimension text, the Controlling of dimension units, and
dimension tolerance.
UNIT -3 Duration: 06 periods (T : 1 + P: 4hrs)
3 Isometric Views
Setting of isometric grid – change of iso planes, drawing straight line and circle
Create Isometric views of simple objects
.UNIT -4 Duration: 15 periods (T:2.5 + P:10hrs)
2D Drawings
Using appropriate commands creation of 2D drawings of standard components
Recommended Books
1. Auto cad by George Omura
2. 4MCAD User Guide- IntelliCAD Technology Consortium

Key competence to be achieved by students / Suggested Learning Outcomes
S.No Experiment Title Key components

 Open / close AutoCAD program
 Understands AutoCAD Graphic
1 Introduction to CAD
User
 Interface(GUI) and various toolbars
2 Selecting commands &  Use prompt history window and scripts
98
 Practice the setting up a drawing
Working with drawing
 Practice the Entity
 Use Scroll bar, pan command, and rotating
view
to move around within drawing
a) Viewing drawing
 Control visual elements like Fill, Text, Blips
and
3  Line weight
 Use Two dimensional coordinates and Three
 dimensional coordinates
b) Working with coordinates  Use right-hand rule
 Use filters in two and three dimensions
 Define user coordinate system
 Draw the simple shapes like lines, circles, arcs
Creating simple and complex
4 and complex shapes like polygons, planes etc.,
entities
 Practice adding of hatch pattern
 Measure the intervals and distance between
Entities.
5 Getting Drawing information  Divide the entities in to segments
 Calculate the areas defined by points, of closed
entities, and Combined entities
 Calculate the areas defined by points, of closed
entities, and Combined entities
Use the Text tool to create
 Use filters in two and three dimensions
6 various types of text fonts and
 Draw the simple shapes like lines, circles, arcs
its styles
and complex shapes like polygons, planes etc.,
 Practice the adding of hatch pattern
 Practice the Controlling of dimension
properties like arrow types, size, dim line
adjustment, dim offset, text size , primary and
7 Dimensioning drawing
secondary units and format
 Practice the Controlling of dimension units,
and dimension tolerance
8 Isometric Views Use Iso snap command to create Isometric views
9 2D Drawings Use proper 2D commands to create 2D drawings
1 Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to Understand about the Computer
Aided Drafting and its software
1.1 Define Computer Aided Drafting
1.2 List the Advantages of CAD and also various CAD software’s
1.3 Explain the importance of CAD software
99
1.4 Explain the features of Graphic Work station
1.5 Explain CAD Screen, Various tool bars and menus
1.6 Explain the benefits of Templates
2 Use appropriate selection commands
2.1. Practice commands using toolbars, menus, command bar
2.2. Practice repeating a command, Nesting a command and modifying a command
2.3. Use prompt history window and scripts
2.4. Practice mouse shortcuts
2.5. Practice the Creating the drawing, saving the drawing with .drawing extension and Opening
Existing drawing
2.6. Practice the setting up a drawing with drawing limits and drawing units.
2.7. Practice the setting and changing the grid and snapping alignment
2.8. Practice the Entity snaps
3 Use viewing tools of CAD & Use coordinate systems of the drawing
3.1. Practice the use of Scroll bar, pan command and rotating view to move around within drawing
3.2. Practice the changing of magnification of drawing
3.3. Practice how the coordinate system work and it is displayed
3.4 Practice the Find tool to determine the coordinates of a point
3.5. Practice the Two dimensional coordinates such as Absolute Cartesian, Relative Cartesian, Polar
coordinates and direct method to draw a line.
3.6. Explain importance and use of Osnap / Esnap points.
3.7. Practice to draw with other drawing commands like circle, polygon and other.
4 Create the simple and complex entities
4.1. Draw the lines, circles, arcs, ellipses, elliptical arcs, rays and infinite lines and shapes like
Rectangles, Polygons, Polylines, Splines, donuts
4.2. Practice the adding of hatch with required pattern and adjusting line angle and line space.
5 Use the modifying tools to modify the properties of entities
100
5.1. Practice the various methods of entity selection like window, cross window, fence, last and
previous methods and deselection method
5.2. Practice the Deletion, breaking and trimming of entities
5.3. Practice the Copying of entities within a drawing, between drawings
5.4. Practice the Chamfering and Filleting of entities
5.5. Practice the making of parallel copies, Mirroring entities and Arraying entities
5.6. Practice the Rearranging of entities by Moving, Rotating and Reordering
5.7. Practice the Resizing of entities by Stretching, Scaling, and Extending.
5.8. Practice the Editing of polylines: Opening, Closing, Curving, Decurving, Joining, Changing
width and editing vertices
5.9. Practice the Exploding of entities
6. Use the drawing information retrieving tools Measure, Divide, Calculate, Display, and
Track
6.1. Divide the entities in to required number of segments
6.2. Calculate the areas defined by points, of closed entities, and combined entities
6.3. Calculate the distance between the entities
6.4. Calculate the angle between the entities
6.5. Display the information about the entities and drawing status
6.6. Track time spent working on a drawing
7. Use the Text tool to create and formatting the various types of text fonts and its styles
7.1. Practice the creating, naming and modifying the text fonts
7.2. Practice the Creation of line text, paragraph text
7.3. Practice the Setting of line text style and its alignment
7.4. Practice the Setting of Paragraph text style and its alignment
7.5. Practice the Changing of line text and Paragraph text
7.6. Practice the use of alternate text editor
101
8 Use Dimensioning concepts to create dimensions, Edit dimensions, Control dimension styles
& variables and Adding geometric tolerances
8.1. Practice the creating of linear, Angular, Diametral, Radial, Ordinate dimensions
8.2. Practice the creating leaders and annotations
8.3. Practice the making dimensions oblique,
8.4. Edit the dimension text
8.5. Practice the Controlling of dimension properties like arrow types, size, dim line adjustment, dim
offset, text size: primary and secondary units and format
8.6. Practice the Controlling of dimension units, and dimension tolerance
9 Create 2D Drawings
Create 2D drawings of standard mechanical components
Teaching
Course Outcomes CL Linked PO
Hours
Importance and advantages of CAD. Set drawing
CO1 area and draw geometric shapes and modify as U/A 1,2,3,9,10 15
per requirement
Add text with required font and size and also
CO2 U/A 1,2,3,9,10 9
dimension by various methods
Generate isometric model and draw circle on
CO3 U/A 1,2,3,9,10 6
three iso planes
Create 2D drawings with front, side view with all
CO4 A 1,2,3,10 15
above features
102
MID SEM-I EXAM
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM –II EXAM
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)

Sl No Unit No.
R U A
1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 II
3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 IV
9(b) 13(b)
4
5 V 5, 6 11(a) 15(a)

11(b) 15(b)
3
10(b) 14(b)
6 VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)

12(b) 16(b)
103
Basic Electrical &Electronics Engineering lab practice
Course Title : Basic Electrical &Electronics Course Code 18EI-108P

Engineering lab practice
Semester I Course Group :Practical
Teaching Scheme in 15:00:30 Credits : 1.5
Periods(L:T:P)
Methodology Lecture + Practical Total Contact
Periods : :45
Pre requisites
This course requires the basic skills of Handling Domestic tools
Unit Unit name Periods Marks for SEE Marks %We

No weightage ighta
ge
Handling Manipulation Precision
1 Safety precautions , 6 8 0 0 8 20
cleaning and House
keeping
2 wires, cables , House 15 2 2 8 12 30
wiring
&Troubleshooting
3 Electronic 9 2 2 8 12 30
components
4 Switches and Relays 15 2 2 4 8 20

Total 45 14 6 20 40 100
Note: To assess all skill levels, sub experiments may be given
104
Course outcomes
Course Outcome CL Linked PO Teaching

Hours
CO1 Identify the significance of Safety Hazards and R/U/A 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,

preventive methods, and apply them for safe and 8
efficient Laboratory practice.
CO2 Identify of different wires, cables and apply them for R/U/A 1,2,3,4
simple House wiring applications
CO3 Apply the use of basic Electronic measuring R/U/A 1,2,3

Instruments
CO4 Design simple circuit using Electronic components A 1,2,3,10
Course Contents
1. Identify conductors insulating materials semiconductors and magnetic materials
II. Identification of different wires cables and House wiring
2. Identify different wires and cables
3. Practice wire joints
4. Practice Termination of wires
5. Identify the Electrical accessories and their terminals
6. Identify the mains supply Phase ,Neutral ,Ground By observation and testing
7. Verify the difference between AC and DC by Experimenting with 9V / 12 V battery &
Transformer
8. Identify and Draw the electrical symbols of the corresponding component /item
9. Make simple switch connections using low voltage transformer and 12V lamp
10. Make either of two lamps glow by two way switch
Electronic components
11. Identify and work with Resistors
12. Measure DC Voltage and DC current using Voltmeter , ammeter &Multimeter
105
13. Verify Ohms Law and Kirchhoff’s laws
14. Measure unknown Resistance using Voltmeter and DRB
15. A) Verify the laws of Resistance using a nichrome wire and Multimeter
B) Verify the effect of temperature
16. A) Verify voltage and current relationship in series and parallel resistive circuits.
B) Connect Resistors in series and parallel combination to get the required value and Verify with
DMM
106
Basic Science Lab Practice (Physics Lab + Chemistry Lab)
Course Title Basic Science Lab Course Code 18EI-109P

Practice (Physics Lab
+ Chemistry Lab)
Semester I Course Group Practical
Teaching Scheme 15:0:30 Credits 1.5

in Periods (L:T:P)
Methodology Lecture + Practical Total Contact 45

Periods
Physics Lab – 109P(A)
Pre requisites: Knowledge of basic concepts of High School Science, Basic Mathematics
Course objectives: To provide practical knowledge about the basics of Physics instrumentation
and calculations/measurements.
Lecture and Demonstration: 1 Period
1. Introduction to Physics practical and its importance, safety precautions in maintenance of

equipment in the laboratory.
2. Maintenance of apparatus and equipment.
3. Following Do’s and Don’ts.
4. Maintenance of data in manual and record book.
5. Write the procedure of the experiment before the commencement of each experiment.
6. Strictly following of instructions given from time to time by the lecturer-in-charge.

107
7. Demonstration of each experiment by the lecturer in charge.
Conduct of an experiment: 2 Periods

Course outcomes:
On successful completion of the course, the student will have ability to:
1. Use Vernier caliper to determine the volumes of objects like cylinder and sphere.
2: use Screw gauge to determine thickness /diameter of small objects like glass plate
and wire.
3: prove Boyle’s law employing Quill tube.
4: determine the viscosity of liquid using capillary method.
5: verify the parallelogram law and triangle law of forces.
References:
1. Basic Applied Physics – R.K. Gaur
2. Laboratory manual for class XI and XII - NCERT
PHYSICS PRACTICALS
List of experiments
Semester I
1. Vernier calliper - determine the volumes of a cylinder and sphere.
2. Screw gauge - determine thickness of a glass plate and cross section of a wire.
3. Boyle’s law - verification using Quill tube.
4. Coefficient of viscosity of liquid - using capillary method.
5. Parallelogram law and Triangle law of forces – verification.
Course Delivery:
The course will be delivered through lectures, class room interaction, group discussions, graded
exercises, demonstration and practice.
Conduction of experiments: 2 periods/Experiment.
Student must perform experiment individually under the supervision of the lecturer-in charge.
On successful completion of the course, the student will have the ability to attain below Course
outcomes (CO):
108
Course Outcomes CL Linked Teaching
POs Periods
CO 1 Hands on practice on Vernier Caliper U/A 1,2,3,8,9 L:P::1:2
CO 2 Hands on practice on Screw gauge U/A 1,2,3,8,9 L:P::1:2
CO 3 Boyle’s law verification U/A 1,2,3,8,9 L:P::1:2
CO 4 Coefficient of Viscosity by capillary U/A 1,2,3,8,9

method L:P::1:2
CO 5 Verification of Parallelogram law of forces U/A 1,2,3,8,9

and Triangle law of forces L:P::1:2
CO 6 Relate the answers to the oral questions
Cognitive levels (CL): U=Understand, A=Application
Specific learning outcomes:
Name of the Experiment

Competencies Key competencies
1. Hands on practice on Vernier  Find the Least count  Read the scales
Calipers – Cylinder and sphere  Fix the specimen in position  Calculate the volume
 Read the scales of given object
 Calculate the volume of given
object
2. Hands on practice on Screw  Find the Least count  Read the scales
gauge – Wire and glass plate  Fix the specimen in position  Calculate thickness
 Read the scales of given glass plate
 Calculate thickness of glass  Calculate cross
plate and cross section of wire section of wire
3. Boyle’s law verification –  Note the atmospheric pressure  Find the length of air
Quill tube column
 Fix the quill tube to retort stand
 Find the length of air column  Find the pressure of
enclosed air
 Find the pressure of enclosed
air  Find the value P x l
 Find and compare the
calculated value P x l
109
 Find the least count of vernier
 Find the pressure
 Fix the capillary tube to
head
aspiratory bottle
 Calculate rate of
 Find the mass of collected water
4. Coefficient of viscosity by volume of liquid
 Find the pressure head
capillary collected
 Calculate rate of volume of
Method - water  Find the radius of
liquid collected
capillary tube
 Find the radius of capillary tube
 Calculate the
 Calculate the viscosity of water viscosity of water
using capillary method
5. Verification of Parallelogram  Fix suitable weights  Find the angle at
law of forces and Triangle law  Note the positions of threads on equilibrium point
of forces drawing sheet  Constructing
 Find the angle at equilibrium parallelogram
point  Construct triangle
 Construct parallelogram  Compare the ratios of
 Compare the measured force and length
diagonal
 Construct triangle
 Find the length of sides
EXAMINATION & EXPERIMENTS

S.NO EXAMINATION EXPERIMENTS
1 MIDSEM-I EXPERIMENT NO 1 & 2
2 MIDSEM-II EXPERIMENT NO 3 & 4
SEMESTER END EXPERIMENT NO 1,2,3,4 and
3
EXAMINATION 5
Scheme of Valuation of SEE

S.No Particulars Marks
1. Objective/Aim 01
2. Apparatus/Equipment 02
3. Observations 02
4. Principle including formula 02
5. Experiment (Tabular form, readings, etc) 05
6. Calculation and Result 05
7. Viva Voce 03
Total 20
Chemistry Lab - 109P(B)

110
Prerequisite:
Knowledge of basic concepts of chemistry of secondary education.
Course Objectives:
To provide practical knowledge about the basics of preparation of chemical solutions and volumetric
analysis of chemical compounds.
Course Outcomes:
On successful completion of the course, the student will have ability to attain CO:

Periods
CO1 Prepare the standard U/A 1,2,3,8 L:P ::1:2

solution.
CO2 Estimate the amount of U/A 1,2,3,8 L:P ::1:2

the chemical substance in
the given sample of
solutions(HCl, NaOH&
H2SO4).
CO3 Determination of U/A 1,2,3,8 L:P ::1:2

hardness of water in the
given sample.
CO4 Relate the answers to the U/A

oral questions
U = Understand, A = Application
Course Delivery:
The course will be delivered through lectures, classroom interaction, group discussion, demonstration
and practicals.
Conduction of experiments: Lecture 1 period + Experiment 2 periods.
Student must conduct experiment individually under the supervision of the staff-in-charge.
111
1. Introduction of chemistry practical and its importance, safety precautions in maintenance of

cleanliness and orderliness of chemicals in the laboratory.
3. Follow of DO’s and Don’ts.
4. Maintenance of data in record book.
6. Strict following of instructions given from time to time by the staff-in- charge.
7. Demonstration of each experiment by the staff in charge.
Course content
Volumetric Analysis: (22.5 Periods)
Volumetric analysis by Titrimetric Method:-
Volumetric Analysis -Titration – Standard Solutions- Concentration of solutions-
Indicators- acid base indicators- selection of indicators-endpoint of titration-Neutralization.
List of experiments:
1. Preparation of 0.05M sodium carbonate solution.
2. Estimation of hydrochloric acid present in 250 ml of solution by using
Standard sodium carbonate solution.
3. Estimation of sodium hydroxide present in 250ml of solution by using standard hydrochloric

acid solution.
4. Estimation of sulphuric acid present in 250ml of solution by using standard sodium hydroxide
solution.
5. Determination of total hardness of water sample by 0.02N EDTA solution.
1. Prepare standard sodium carbonate solution.
2. Estimate hydrochloric acid present given volume of solution by using
112
standard sodium carbonate solution.
3. Estimate sodium hydroxide present in the given volume of solution by using standard
hydrochloric acid solution.
4. Estimate sulphuric acid present in the given volume of solution by using standard sodium
hydroxide solution.
5. Determine the total hardness of water sample by using 0.02N EDTA solution.
Reference Books:
1. Vogel’s Inorganic Qualitative and Quantitative Analysis.
2. Practical chemistry by O.P.Pande& others.
3. Qualitative and quantitative analysis by Alex.
Scheme of Valuation for MID I & II and SEE
Sl. No. Particulars Marks
1 Identification of apparatus/equipment/chemical 2
compounds/tools/etc.
2 Writing Procedure 5
3 Conducting of experiment 4
4 Observation and Results 6
5 Viva-voice 3
Total 20
C-18 COMMON-109P

MIDSEM – I
113
BASIC SCIENCE LAB PRACTICE
Instructions: (1) Answer both PART-A AND PART-B on separate answer sheets.
(2) Each question carries TEN marks.
PART-A (PHYSICS LAB)

Perform ONE experiment allotted by the examiner. 1 x 10 = 10
1. Find the volume of given sphere using Vernier caliper.
2. Find the volume of given cylinder using Vernier caliper.
3. Determine the thickness of given glass plate using Screw gauge.
4. Find the cross sectional area of given wire using Screw gauge.
PART-B (CHEMISTRY LAB)

5. Prepare 250 ml of 0.05M sodium carbonate solution.
6. Estimate the amount of hydrochloric acid present in 500 ml of the given solution using 0.02M
sodium carbonate solution.
114
C-18 COMMON-109P
MIDSEM – II

1. Verify Boyle’s law using Quill tube.
2. Determine coefficient of viscosity of water using capillary method.

3. Estimate the amount of NaOH present in 500 ml solution using 0.02M HCl solution
4. Find the Molarity and estimate the amount of Sulphuric acid present in 250 ml solution using
0.01M NaOH solution.
115
C18 – COMMON 109P
MODEL PAPER
COMMON – I SEMESTER EXAMINATION

(2) Each question carries TWENTY marks.

1. Find the volume of given sphere using Vernier caliper.
2. Find the volume of given cylinder using Vernier caliper.
3. Determine the thickness of given glass plate using Screw gauge.
4. Find the cross sectional area of given wire using Screw gauge.
5. Verify Boyle’s law using Quill tube.
6. Determine coefficient of viscosity of water using capillary method.
7. Verify parallelogram law of forces.
8. Verify triangle law of forces.

9. Prepare 250 ml of 0.05M sodium carbonate solution.
12. Find the Molarity and estimate the amount of NaOH present in 100 ml of the given solution
using 0.01M HCl solution.
13. Estimate the amount of Sulphuric acid present in a litre of solution using 0.01M NaOH solution.
14. Determine the total hardness of the given water sample using 0.02N EDTA solution
116
COMPUTER FUNDAMENTAL LAB PRACTICE
Course Title :COMPUTER FUNDAMENTAL LAB Course Code : 18EI-110P

PRACTICE Course Group : Practical
Semester :I Credits : 1.5
Teaching Scheme in Periods (L:T:P) :15:00:30 Total Contact Periods: 45
Type of course : Tutorial + Practical’s SEE : 40 Marks
CIE : 60 Marks
Prerequisites
Knowledge of English comprehension, Basic Computer operation and IO devices.
Course Outcome
On successful completion of the course, the students will be able to attain below Course Outcome
(CO):

Hours
CO Identify hardware and software components
R,U, 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 5
1 and work with DOS OS A
CO Operate the computer system with WindowsR,U, 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 15
2 OS A
CO Access the internet R,U, 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 5
3 A
CO Draft the documents using word processing R,U, 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 20
4 software A
Total Sessions 45
Legends: R = Remember U= Understand; A= Apply and above levels (Bloom’s revised taxonomy)
Course Contents
COMPUTER BASICS
1. Identify the various components of a Computer system
2. Differentiate between hardware and software
117
3. State the configuration of a computer system
4. Practice on DOS Internal and External commands.
5. Create and use Batch Files.
6. Know the usage of Editors.
WINDOWS Operating System
7. Exercise on creation of text Files using Notepad, WordPad
8. Exercise on creation of .jpeg, .bmp files using MS Paint
9. Exercise how to use calculator
10. Exercise on creation of folders and organizing files in different folders
11. Exercise on use of Recycle Bin, My Computer and My Documents
12. Exercise on creation of shortcut to files and folders (in other folders) on Desktop
13. Exercise on arranging of icons – name wise, size, type, Modified
14. Exercise on searching, accessing and organizing files / folders
15. Change resolution, colour, appearance, screen server options of Display, date and time
INTERNET
16. Importance of web browser software
17. Structure of URL
18. Create an E-mail account
19. Send & Receive an E-mail
20. Browse the Internet using various search engines
WORD Processing Software
21. Open MS-word and Identify the components on the screen
22. Create a document using MS-word and save it.
23. Create a table using MS-Word and save it.
118
24. Apply formulas in table & sort the table
25. Convert text into table & table into text.
26. Insertion of new rows and columns in the existing table and changing background colour in
Table
27. Merge and split cells in a Table
28. Change the font of a text
29. Exercise with Headers and Footers, paragraph tool bar
30. Insert objects into the document like pictures, shapes, charts, and word-art.
31. Printing a document , page setting, different views of a document
32. Import & export files to & from Word.
33. Create a letter and send to multiple users using mail merge tool of MS-word
34. Create a Simple Newsletter with minimum three columns. Insert a Clip Art in the
Newsletter.
35. Create a Resume for a Job Application.
36. Create the Cover Page of a Project Report (use Word Art, insert Picture Image).
37. Prepare the class time table of your class.
Resources:
1. Computer Fundamentals Concepts, Systems, Application, D.P.Nagapal, S.Chand
Publication, RP-2014, ISBN: 81-219-2388-3
2. http://www.tutorialsforopenoffice.org/
3. http://www.libreoffice.org/get-help/documentation/
Software Tool
Any open source tool or equivalent proprietary tools
Composition of Educational Components:
Questions for CIE and SEE will be designed to evaluate the various educational components
(Bloom’s taxonomy) such as:
119
Sl. Bloom’s Category %
No.
1 Remembrance 20
2 Understanding 20
3 Application 60
Mapping Course Outcomes with Program Outcomes:
(Course Outcome linkage to Cognitive Level)
Course Outcome Experiment Linked PO CL Lab

Linked Sessions
CO1 Identify hardware and 1,2,3,4,5,6 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 R, U, A 5
software components and
work with DOS OS
CO2 Operate the computer system 7,8,9,10,11,12,13, 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 R, U, A 15
with Windows OS 14,15
CO3 Access the internet 16,17,18,19,20 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 R,U, A 5
CO4 Draft the documents using 21,22,23,24,25,26 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 U, A 20
word processing ,
software 27,28,29,30,31,32
,
33,34,35,36,37
U-Understanding; A-application/ Analysis; App-Application
Student Activity
1. Observe newspaper pattern of printing.
2. Submit a report of one page
3. Collection of data
Internal Assessment
Activity Marks
Writing the experiment, record evaluation 30
Execution of the given experiment 20
Viva-voce 10
Total 60
120
121
Model Question Bank
Course Title: COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS LAB PRACTICE Course Code: 18EI-110P
1. Identify Physical components of a Computer System.
2. Demonstrate Internal and External DOS Commands and differentiate between them.
3. Create and Rename the file using DOS Commands.
4. Create a directory and copy a file inside the directory using DOS Commands.
5. Demonstrate the basic formatting features in Text Editors.
6. Create two file in a folder and place the shortcut of these files on the desktop.
7. Demonstrate how search engine may be used in browsing Internet.
8. Create an E-mail account
9. Create and Send an E-mail with a picture attachment.
10. Demonstrate how documents can be downloaded using Internet.
11. Using Word Processor Application create a Simple Newsletter with minimum of threecolumns.
Insert a Clip art in the newsletter.
12. Using Word Processor Application create a Resume for a Job application.
13. Using Word Processor Application create the cover page of a Project Report (use
14. Word Art, insert Picture Image).
15. Prepare the class time table for your class using Word Processor Application.
16. Create a directory and copy a file inside the directory using DOS Commands.
17. Create and use Batch Files
18. What is the usage of Editors
19. Create a of text Files using Notepad
20. Create a of text Files using WordPad
21. Create .jpeg, file using MS Paint
22. Create .jpeg, .bmp file using MS Paint
23. Solve the given expression using calculator
122
24. Demonstrate the basic formatting features in Text Editors
25. Create two file in a folder and place the shortcut of these files on the desktop
26. How to use Recycle Bin and what is the advantage of recycle bin.
27. A file once deleted, can be restored? If so how?
28. Show how to use My Computer and My Documents
29. Show how to make a shortcut files or folders on desktop
30. Arrange icons name wise, size, type, Modified
31. Search for a given folder or file and organize by accessing
32. Change resolution, colour, appearance, screen server options of Display
33. Change Wallpaper of display and date & time
34. Give the importance of web browser software
35. What is Structure of URL
36. Create an E-mail account and change the current password of your account
37. How do you check your received emails , drafts ,outbox and spam mails
38. Create and Send an E-mail with a picture or document attachment
39. How do you reply to received emails and forward them
40. Discard drafts in your email ,and delete outbox and spam mails
41. Browse the Internet using any 2 search engines
42. Demonstrate how documents can be downloaded using Internet
43. Demonstrate how to clear history and cache
44. Open MS-word and Identify the components on the screen
45. Create a document using MS-word and save it.
46. Create a table using MS-Word and save it.
47. Apply formulas in table & sort the table
48. Convert text into table & table into text.
49. Create a table in word document and
a. Insert 3 new rows and 2 new columns in the existing table and
123
b. change background colour in Table
c. Merge 4 cells and split 2 cells in a Table
50. Prepare the Index of your Computer fundamental lab manual
a. Change the font of a text
51. Demonstrate use of Headers and Footers in a word document
52. Find the given word in a document and replace it with other meaningful word
53. Insert objects into the document like pictures, shapes, charts, and word-art.
54. Print a document by page setting
55. Tell about the different print views of a document and Demonstrate about page Layout.
56. Demonstrate the use of a Water mark in a document
57. Import & export files to & from Word.
58. Add 4 recipients in mail merge.
59. Create a letter and send to 3 recipients using mail merge
60. Create a Simple Newsletter with minimum three columns and insert a clipart.
61. Using Word Processor Application create a Resume for a Job application.
62. Create the Cover Page of a Project Report (use Word Art, insert Picture Image).
63. Prepare the class time table of your class using Word Processor Application.
64. Classify few input/output devices of a computer using Smart art
65. Prepare a document using hyperlink.
124
STUDENT ACTIVITY SHEET FOR SKILL UP GRADATION
The activity should be graded as
Excellent: 5 Marks, Good: 4 Marks, Satisfactory: 3 Marks, Needs improvement: 2 Marks,

Unsatisfactory: 1 Mark
Note:
(1) Along with every activity the rubrics table should be given to the student
for his information about the criterion of assessment.
(2) As a record of the activity at least Rubric sheet for each student For every
activity at least Rubric sheet for each student as be preserved as a document.
RUBRICS MODEL – Group activity like Mini Project
RUBRICS FOR ACTIVITY( 5 Marks)

Dimensio Unsatisfactory Developing Satisfactory Good Excellent Student
n 1 2 3 4 5 Score
Collects
Collects very Collect much some basic Collects a
Does not collect
limited information; information great deal of
Collection any information Ex:
information; but very ; information;
of data relating to the 4
some relate to limited relate most refer all refer to
topic
the topic to the topic to the topic
the topic
Fulfill Does not perform Performs all
Performs very Performs
team’s any duties Performs very duties of
little duties but nearly all 5
roles assigned to the little duties assigned
unreliable. duties
& duties team role team roles
Always
Rarely does Usually does does
Normally
Shares Always relies on the assigned the assigned the assigned
does the
work others to do the work; often work; rarely work 3
assigned
equally work needs needs without
work
reminding reminding having to be
reminded
Usually does Talks good;
Listen to Is always talking; Listens, but
most of the but never Listens and
other never allows sometimes
talking; rarely show interest speaks a fair 2
Team anyone else to talk too
allows others in listening amount
mates speak much
to speak others
125
Average / Total marks=(4+5+3+2)/4=14/4=3.5=4
Rubrics assessment for Power point presentations
ELEMENT Exemplary Proficient Partially Unsatisfactory POINTS

Proficient
Research 3 points 2 points 1 point 0 points __/3

and Note
Taking Accurately researched a Recorded Misinterpreted Recorded
variety of information relevant statements, information
sources recorded and information graphics and from four or
interpreted significant from multiple questions and less resources,
facts, meaningful graphics, sources of failed to did not find
and evaluated alternative information identify graphics and
points of view. evaluated and relevant ignored
synthesized arguments. alternative
relevant points of view.
information.
Presentation 3 points 2 points 1 point 0 points ___/3

planning
the slide presentation The The thumbnail There a very
structure with thumbnail thumbnail sketches on the few thumbnail
sketches of each slide sketches on topic are not in sketches on the
including: title of slide, the topic a logical topic and do
text, background color, include titles sequence and not provide an
placement & size of and text for have overview of
graphic, fonts - color, size, each slide and incomplete the
type for text and headings. are in information. presentation.
All slides are numbered, sequential
and there is a logical order.
sequence to the
presentation.
Introduction 3 points 2 points 1 point 0 points ___/3
The introduction presents The The The

the overall topic and draws introduction introduction introduction
the audience into the is clear and shows some does not orient
presentation with coherent and structure but the audience to
compelling questions or by relates to the does not create what will
relating to the audience's topic. a strong sense follow.
interests or goals. of what is to
126
follow. May be The
overly detailed sequencing is
or incomplete unclear and
and is does not
somewhat appear
appealing to interesting or
the audience. relevant to the
audience.
Content 3 points 2 points 1 point 0 points ___/3
The content is written The content is The content is The content

clearly and concisely with written with a vague in lacks a clear
a logical progression of logical conveying a point of view
ideas and supporting progression point of view and logical
information. of ideas and and does not sequence of
supporting create a strong information.
The project includes information. sense of
motivating questions and purpose. Includes little
advanced organizers. The Includes persuasive
project gives the audience persuasive Includes some information
a clear sense of the main information persuasive and only one
idea. from reliable information or two facts
sources. with few facts. about the topic.
Information is accurate,
current and comes mainly Some of the Information is
from * primary sources. information incomplete, out
may not seem of date and/or
to fit. incorrect.
Sources used Sequencing of

appear ideas is
unreliable. unclear.
Text 3 points 2 points 1 point 0 points ___/3
The fonts are easy to read Sometimes Overall The text is

and point size varies the fonts are readability is extremely
appropriately for headings easy to read, difficult with difficult to read
and text. but in a few lengthy with long
places the use paragraphs, too blocks of text
Use of italics, bold, and of fonts, many different and small point
indentations enhances italics, bold, fonts, dark or size of fonts,
readability. long busy inappropriate
127
Text is appropriate in paragraphs, background, contrasting
length for the target color or busy overuse of bold colors, poor
audience and to the point. background or lack of use of
detracts and appropriate headings,
The background and colors does not indentations of subheadings,
enhance the readability of enhance text. indentations, or
text. readability. bold
formatting.
Layout 3 points 2 points 1 point 0 points ___/3
The layout is visually The layout The layout The layout is

pleasing and contributes to uses shows some cluttered,
the overall message with horizontal structure, but confusing, and
appropriate use of and vertical appears does not use
headings, subheadings and white space cluttered and spacing,
white space. appropriately. busy or headings and
distracting with subheadings to
large gaps of enhance the
white space or readability.
uses a
distracting
background.
Graphics, 3 points 2 points 1 point 0 points ___/3

and/or
Animation The graphics, and/or The Some of the The graphics, ,
animation assist in graphics, /and graphics, , and/or
presenting an overall or animation and/or animations are
theme and enhance visually animations unrelated to the
understanding of concept, depict seem unrelated content.
ideas and relationships. material and to the
assist the topic/theme Graphics do
Original images are audience in and do not not enhance
created using proper size understanding enhance the understanding
and resolution, and all the flow of overall of the content,
images enhance the information concepts. or are
content. or content. distracting
Most images decorations
There is a consistent visual Original are clip art or that create a
theme. images are recycled from busy feeling
used. the internet. and detract
from the
Images are too
128
Images are large/small in content.
proper size, size.
resolution.
Images are
poorly cropped
or the
color/resolution
is fuzzy.
Writing 3 points 2 points 1 point 0 points ___/3

Skills
The text is written with no The text is Spelling, Errors in
errors in grammar, clearly punctuation, spelling,
capitalization, punctuation, written with and grammar capitalization,
and spelling. little or no errors distract punctuation,
editing or impair usage and
required for readability. grammar
grammar, repeatedly
punctuation, (three or more distract the
and spelling. errors) reader, and
major editing
and revision is
required.
(more than five

errors)
TOTAL POINTS ___ /24
129
C-18 DEIE I SEMESTER
SKILL UPGRADATION ACTIVITIES
1. Visit the College library and prepare a list of at least 10 text books available in the
library with author name and publishing company for each subject of the semester. The
student should submit a handwritten report. (POs 8,10)
2. Prepare a presentation explaining the concepts of Heat and Thermodynamics in the

subject of Physics. (POs 8,9)
3. Prepare a model to carry out the purification of water supplied in the college. (POs 1,
8,9)
4. Listen to passages/ conversations/dialogues/speeches and answer the questions to

improve the listening skills. (PO 8)
5. Read out a selected text from a newspaper depicting an incident to enhance the reading
skills (POs 8)
6. Read aloud the selected text with proper pronunciation and intonation to improve the
accent of the language. (POs 8)
7. Perform the following vocabulary games:
i) Cross words (POs 8)
ii) Guessing the missing letter (POs 8)
iii) Dumb charades (POs 8,9)
8. Visit the library to refer Standard Books on Mathematics and collect related material
pertaining to a concept in mathematics. (POs 8, 10)
pertaining to a concept in Physics. (POs 8, 10)
pertaining to a concept in Chemistry. (POs 8, 10)
11. Student observes the available equipment in the Physics Laboratory and prepares a hand
written report on functioning of the equipment and accessories along with the details
regarding repairs to be carried out. (POs 4, 8)
12. Student observes the available equipment in the Chemistry Laboratory to familiarize
with the methods of preparing standard solutions for specific experiments and prepares a
hand written report. (POs 4, 8)
130
13. Do a power point presentation on Ohm’s law, Kirchhoff’s law and Faraday’s law.
Documents have to be maintained as a record. (POs 8, 9)
14. Do Market survey on List of Electrical equipment in your home available and collect the
information like name of the equipment specifications, Price etc. The student should
submit a handwritten report. (POs 8, 9)
15. Do Market survey on List of Electronic equipment in your home available and collect
the information like name of the equipment specifications, Price etc. The student should
submit a handwritten report. (POs 8, 9).
131
ENGLISH
Method of evaluation of the student activities ( Rubrics)
Model Rubrics
S.N Sub Performance

o activity excellent Good Satisfactory Need
improvement
1 Step-1 Data was Data was Data was Data was
collected from collected from collected from collected only
more than four three to four two sources. one source.
sources. sources
2 Step-2 All materials Almost all The materials The materials
and data materials and and data and data
required for the data required for required for required for
activity were the activity were the activity the activity
accurately accurately were were
prepared based prepared based accurately inaccurately
on the data on the data prepared based prepared
collected collected on the data
independently. independently. collected with
the help of
teacher.
3 Step-3 Procedures were Procedures were Procedures Procedures
outlined in a outlined in a that outlined that outlined
step-by-step step-by-step were complete were not
fashion that fashion, require with 1 or 2 sequential, &
could be explanation & gaps and performed the
followed by performed the require activity in a
anyone & activity explanation & poor way
performed the effectively. performed the
activity activity
effectively. normally
4 Step-4 Presented/ Presented/ Presented/ Presented/
explained the explained the explained the explained the
information information information information
about the about the about the about the
activity in activity in activity in activity
logical, logical sequence logical without
interesting with visuals or sequence with sequence and
sequence with diagrams. less visuals or visuals or
attractive visuals diagrams. diagrams.
or diagrams.
5 Conclusion Provided a Provided a Student Conclusions
/ summary detailed conclusion / provided a /summary was
conclusion/ summary clearly conclusion/ not relevant.
summary based on the summary less
132
clearly based on data and activity effectively
the data and
activity
Note: Separate rubrics may be prepared according to the activity
I SEMESTER
SKILL UPGRADATION IN - BASIC ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS
ACTIVITY ASSESSMENT Steps
1. Mathematical concepts
2. Procedure
3. Explanation
4. Working with others
5. Mathematical errors
ACTIVITIES
1. Prepare a presentation to explain Logarithms.
2. Prepare a list of articles purchased from a super market and arrange in a matrix form to
Compute the total amount using matrix multiplication.
3. Prepare a presentation to resolve a Partial fraction into simpler fractions.
4. Prepare a presentation stating the applications of Trigonometry.
5. List the methods to solve system of equations using Matrices and Determinants. Describe
their features.
6. Visit the library, refer books on Mathematics and collect the detailsrelated to 2 Mathematicians.
7. Prepare a presentation to solve a triangle ABC in different cases.
CO / PO - MAPPING OF ACTIVITIES
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10
133
CO1 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
CO2 3 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 3
CO3 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
CO4 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
CO5 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
CO6 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
CO7 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
Rubrics for Activity assessment
CATEGORY 4 3 2 1
Mathematical Explanation Explanation Explanation Explanation

Concepts shows complete shows substantial shows some shows very
understanding of understanding of understanding of limited
the mathematical the mathematical the mathematical understanding of
concepts used to concepts used to concepts needed the underlying
solve the solve the to solve the concepts needed
problem(s). problem(s). problem(s). to solve the
problem(s) OR is
not written.
Procedures Typically, uses Typically, uses Sometimes uses Rarely uses an

an efficient and an effective an effective effective
effective procedure to procedure to procedure to
procedure to solve the solve problems, solve problems.
solve the problem(s). but does not do it
problem(s). consistently.
Explanation Explanation is Explanation is Explanation is a Explanation is

detailed and clear. little difficult to difficult to
clear. understand, but understand and is
includes critical missing several
components. components OR
was not included.
Working with Student was an Student was an Student Student did not
Others engaged partner, engaged partner cooperated with work effectively
listening to but had trouble others, but with others.
suggestions of listening to others needed
others and and/or working prompting to stay
134
working cooperatively. on-task.
cooperatively
throughout
lesson.
Mathematical 90-100% of the Almost all (85- Most (75-84%) of More than 75%
Errors steps and 89%) of the steps the steps and of the steps and
solutions have no and solutions solutions have no solutions have
mathematical have no mathematical mathematical
errors. mathematical errors. errors.
errors.
PASS SCORE: 2.5
STUDENT ASSESSMENT by RUBRICS
AV
S.N CO CO CO CO CO CO CO
PIN ERA
O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
GE
SEMESTER – I
SKILL UPGRATION – BASIC PHYSICS
TASK
LEVEL 1: Concept, Ethical Data, Materials, Source (Library/internet/others)
LEVEL 2: Methodology/procedure
LEVEL 3: Analysis/experiment
LEVEL 4: Interpretation/inference/evaluation.
135
Bridge activity: - Visiting your college Library:
(A) Prepare a list of available reference books in Physics with details such as author,
publisher, edition etc.
(B) Prepare a list of Physics/Science journals, magazines, monographs with details.
(C) Prepare a log book of your visits to college library with brief description.
Activities:-
1. Discover some physical equations and apply principle of homogeneity.
2. Visit your College Physics laboratory. Collect equal amounts (mass in gm) of water and
mercury. Calculate the density of each in CGS units. Express them in SI system of units using
dimensional analysis. Infer the result.
3. Identify the bodies which have rolling objects like wheels, ball bearings. Prepare a chart with
drawings and explain the importance of rolling friction.
4. Identify the objects where you apply various methods of reducing friction. Make each method
as a module to one individual. Integrate all modules and generate a chart with brief explanation
by the use of drawings.
5. Take two vectors with varying angles of inclination. Find the resultant using triangle law of
vector addition by drawing the vectors in each case on a graph paper. Draw the conclusions.
Correlate the result using parallelogram law of vector addition.
6. Three forces F1, F2 and F3 are acting on a body with an angles θ1, θ2, and θ3 with the
horizontal respectively. Calculate the resultant force acting on that body. Draw the diagram.
7. Survey the places where curved paths are banked. Take photographs and reconstruct on the
chart. Prepare a report.
136
8. Verify Hooke’s Law by performing experiment using weights, spring and ruler.
9. Explore the internet. Prepare a power point report on surface tension and wetting.
10. Construct a model thermometer having centigrade scale and absolute scale with the help of
available simple objects. Formulate the method of development.
11. Debate on green house effect and global warming. Justify the advantage of green house effect.
Prepare a video clip and power point report with diagrams.
12. Design a mini wind mill as an application of conversion of energy.
NOTE: The above activities are indicative. The teacher may assign any other activity relevant
to the course based on resources available.
Course Outcomes (CO) Linked Pos Activity

Hours
CO1 Application of principle of homogeneity PO1, PO2 3
CO2 Conversion of one system to other system
PO1, PO2, PO3 3
using dimensions
CO3 Preparation of a chart with drawings
PO1, PO2, PO8 3
explaining the importance of friction
CO4 Preparation of a chart on reducing friction PO1, PO2, PO4,
3
PO5, PO8
CO5 Triangle law of vector addition - graphical
analysis – correlation with parallelogram law PO1, PO4, 3
of vector addition
CO6 Calculation of resultant force by component
PO1, PO2, PO4 3
method
CO7 Banking of roads – practical observations PO1, PO2, PO5 3
CO8 Verification of Hooke’s law with simple PO1, PO2, PO3,
3
materials PO4
CO9 Power point report on surface tension and PO1, PO2, PO7,
3
wetting by exploring internet PO9, PO10,
137
CO10 Construct a model thermometer having
centigrade scale and absolute scale. Formulate PO1, PO2, PO4 3
the development.
CO11 Debate on green house effect and global
warming. Advantage of green house effect -
PO6, PO7 3
justification. Prepare a video clip and power
point report with diagrams.
CO12 Design a wind mill as an application of
PO1, PO2,PO10 3
conversion of energy
Rubrics for Task Assessments
General Scale for scoring student performance in Skill Upgradation
Type of
4 3 2 1
Skill/Score
All Data/Material All Data/Material All All
was collected one was collected more Data/Material Data/Material
Data/Material
time than one time was collected was collected
Collection
independently. independently. several times several times
independently. with assistance.
Procedures were Procedures were Procedures Procedures that
outlined in a step- outlined in a step- were outlined were outlined
by-step fashion by-step fashion that in a step-by- were
that could be could be followed step fashion, incomplete or
followed by by anyone without but had 1 or 2 not sequential,
Methodology/
anyone without additional gaps that even after
Procedure
additional explanations. require Expert feedback
explanations. Expert help was explanation had been given.
needed to even after
accomplish this. expert
feedback.
Quality of Skill is Skill is mastered to Skill is present Skill needs
Activity/
high. the level of but with errors improvement.
Development
expectation. and omissions.
Student provided a Student provided a Student No conclusion
detailed somewhat detailed provided a was apparent.
Interpretation/
conclusion clearly. conclusion clearly. conclusion
summary
with some
reference.
138
NOTE: The above types of skills are indicative. The teacher may change the skills
depending on type of activity.
PASS SCORE: 2.5
STUDENT ASSESSMENT (RUBRICS)
AV
ER
S. Course Outcomes (Skill Activities)
AG
N PIN
E
O
CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
GENERAL ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY
Suggested Skill Upgradation Activities
Activity – 1
Oral/Power point presentation on the different types of orbitals and electronic configuration:
Step-1: Data collection on orbitals and rules to be followed to write the electronic
configuration .
Step -2: Prepare for a oral/power point presentation on shapes of orbitals and electronic configuration
Step-3: Explain the electronic configuration with oral presentation or power point presentation
Step-4: Submission of the report.
Activity – 2
Oral/Power point presentation on ionic and covalent bonding:
Step-1: Data collection on electronic configuration and chemical bonding.
Step -2: Prepare for a oral/power point presentation on ionic and covalent bonding
Step-3: Explain the ionic and covalent bonding with oral presentation or power point presentation
Step-4: Submit the report along with ppt.

139
Activity – 3
Preparation and study of physical properties of True Solution, Colloidal Solution, and
Suspension
Step-1: Data/ literature collection.
Step-2: Summarization of data collected.
Step -3: Preparation/ collection of true solution, colloidal solution and suspention
Step-4: Recording of observations and comparison of physical properties like Nature of the solutions,
Diffusion of the solution, Sedimentation, Visibility of particles, Tyndall effect.
Step-5: Overall presentation of the activity
Activity – 4
Study of the acidic, basic or neutral nature of water sample collected from various sources.
Step-2: Summarization of data/ literature collected.
Step -3: Collection of water samples from various sources.
Step-4: Recording the pH values of different water samples by using universal indicator, pH paper, pH
meter etc.
Activity – 5
Comparison of renewable and non renewable energy sources.
Step -3: Comparison of renewable and non renewable energy sources available.
Step-4: Identify the advantages of renewable energy sources over non renewable energy sources in
protecting the environment.
Activity – 6
Study and analysis of ecosystem (lake, pond etc) existing in your surroundings.
140
Step -3: Study of the biotic and abiotic components and effect of the pollutants if any on them.
Step-4: Prepare a report on the selected ecosystem and suggest measures to protect it from pollution.
Activity – 7
Study of bio diversity in your surroundings.
Step -3: Study of the biodiversity in your surroundings, understand its advantages and threats that
affect the bio diversity.
Step-4: Prepare a report on the selected bio diversity and suggest measures to protect it.
Activity – 8
Importance of forests resources.
Step -3: Study of the nearby forest area.
Step-4: Prepare a report on the forest selected and report its importance and resources.
Activity – 9
Importance of osmosis and reverse osmosis.
Step -3: Demonstrate the process of osmosis and reverse osmosis by using any semi permeable
membrane .
Step-4: Prepare a report on the advantages of osmosis and reverse osmosis.
141
Activity – 10
Method of purification of drinking water adopted at your residence .
Step -3: Explanation of the process through oral presentation or power point presentation
Step-4: Prepare a report on the advantages of the process.
Activity – 11
Oral/Power point presentation on the softening of water by different methods and comparison.
Step -3: Explain the process and compare them with the help of power point presentation.
Step-4: Submit the report.
Activity – 12
Study of electrolytes and non electrolytes .
Step -3: Differentiate the electrolyte from non electrolyte through the process of electrolysis.
Step-4: Prepare a report on electrolytes and non electrolytes.
Note: Any other skill upgradation activity related to the course may be taken up.
142
Mapping of POs to Skill Upgradation Activities
S.N Name of the activity Linked POs

o
1 Oral/Power point presentation on the different types of 1,2,4,8,9
orbitals and electronic configuration
2 Oral/Power point presentation on ionic and covalent 1,2,4,8,9
bonding
3 Preparation and study of physical properties of True 1,2,3,4,8,9,10
Solution, Colloidal Solution, and Suspension
4 Study of the acidic, basic or neutral nature of water 1,2,3,4,8,9,10
sample collected from various sources
5 Comparison of renewable and non renewable energy 1,2,4,5,6,7,8,9,10
sources
6 Study and analysis of ecosystem (lake, pond etc) existing 1,2,4,5,6,7,8,9,10
in your surroundings
7 Study of bio diversity in your surroundings 1,2,4,5,6,7,8,9,10
8 Importance of forests resources 1,2,4,5,6,7,8,9,10
9 Importance of osmosis and reverse osmosis 1,2,3,4,5,6,8,9,10
10 Method of purification of drinking water adopted at your 1,2,4,5,8,9
residence
11 Study of electrolytes and non electrolytes 1,2,3,4,8,9
12 Power point presentation on the softening of water by 1,2,3,4,8,9
different methods and comparison
Model Rubrics
S Sub Performance
. activity excellent Good Satisfactory Need
N improvement
o
1 Step-1 Data was Data was Data was Data was
collected from collected from collected from collected only
more than four three to four two sources. one source.
sources. sources
2 Step-2 All materials and Almost all The materials The materials
data required for materials and data and data and data
the activity were required for the required for the required for
accurately activity were activity were the activity
prepared based on accurately accurately were
the data collected prepared based on prepared based inaccurately
independently. the data collected on the data prepared
independently. collected with
the help of
teacher.
3 Step-3 Procedures were Procedures were Procedures that Procedures that
outlined in a step- outlined in a step- outlined were outlined were
143
by-step fashion by-step fashion, complete with 1 not sequential,
that could be require or 2 gaps and & performed
followed by explanation & require the activity in a
anyone & performed the explanation & poor way
performed the activity performed the
activity effectively. activity
effectively. normally
information about information about information information
the activity in the activity in about the about the
logical, logical sequence activity in activity
interesting with visuals or logical sequence without
sequence with diagrams. with less visuals sequence and
attractive visuals or diagrams. visuals or
or diagrams. diagrams.
5 Conclusi Provided a Provided a Student Conclusions
on / detailed conclusion / provided a /summary was
summary conclusion/ summary clearly conclusion/ not relevant.
summary clearly based on the data summary less
based on the data and activity effectively
and activity
Note: Separate rubrics may be prepared according to the activity.
144
Diploma in Electronics and
Instrumentation Engineering
II SEMESTER
145
Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme
Instruction Semester end examination

Total Continuous internal
Periods per
Periods evaluation
week
Course per
Course Name Min
Code semester Credits Max
Mid marks for
Mid Internal marks Total
L T P Sem passing
Sem1 Evaluation Min Marks
2 including
marks
internal
18EI-
1 Advanced English 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
201F
18EI- Engineering
2 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
202F Mathematics
18EI-
3 Applied Physics 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
203F
18EI- Engineering Chemistry
4 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
204F and Environmental studies
18EI-
5 Semi Conductor Devices 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
205C
18EI- Advanced Engineering

6 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
206P Drawing
18EI- Advanced Computer aided 2 45

7 1 0 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
207P Drafting
18EI- Semi Conductor Devices lab 2 45
8 1 0 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
208P Practice
18EI-
2 45 1.5
9 209P- Applied science lab Practice 1 0 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
A+B
18EI- Information Technology Lab 2 45 1.5

10 1 0 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
210P Practice
7 2.5 -
11 Academic activities 0 0 105 0 0 Rubrics --
20 5 17 630 25 200 200 200 400 170 1000 425

TOTAL
Activities: student performance is to be assessed through Rubrics
146
Advanced English
Course Title :Advanced English Course Code : 18 Common-201F
Semester : II Course Group : Foundation
Teaching Scheme in Periods (L:T:P:) : Credits :3

45:15:00
Methodology : Communicative Language Total Contact Hours : 60 periods
Lecture + Tutorial
Prerequisites: Basic knowledge of English Language
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course the students will have the ability to:
201.1 communicate effectively in English
201.2 listen for specific details and use prepositions appropriately.
201.3 learn vocabulary and use them in professional interaction
201.4 analyse errors and make communication flawless
201.5 comprehend central idea and minute details
201.6 make notes, write resumes, prepare cover letters and draft reports
CO-PO Matrix
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 Mapping POs
201.1 2 2 2 -- 1 -- -- 3 3 3 1,2,3,5,8,9,10
201.2 2 2 1 2 -- -- -- 3 3 3 1,2,3,4,8,9,10
201.3 2 2 -- 1 1 1 2 3 3 3 1,2,4,5,6,7,8,9,10
201.4 2 2 2 2 1 -- 2 3 3 3 1,2,3,4,5,7,8,9,10
201.5 2 2 2 -- 1 -- 2 3 3 3 1,2,3,57,8,9,10
201.6 2 2 -- -- -- -- -- 3 3 3 1,2,8,9,10
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT – 1 SPEAKING Duration: 12 Periods
1. Expressing Obligation
2. Fixing and Cancelling Appointments
147
3. Extending and Accepting Invitations
4. Giving Instructions
5. Asking for and Giving Directions
UNIT - 2: LISTENING Duration: 6 Periods
6. The Here and Now!
UNIT –3: VOCABULARY Duration: 8 Periods
7. How to Learn a New Word
8. Synonyms, Antonyms and One word Substitutes
UNIT -4: GRAMMAR Duration: 12 Periods
9. Reported Speech
10. Error Analysis - I
11. Error Analysis - II
12. Error Analysis - III
UNIT - 5: READING Duration: 6 Periods
13. An Environmental challenge
14. The Will to Succeed
15. Waiting for Mr. Clean
UNIT- 6: WRITING Duration: 16 Periods
16. Data Interpretation- I
17. Data Interpretation- II
18. Data Interpretation- III
19. Writing a Resume
20. Writing a Cover Letter

148
21. Note Making
22. Writing a Report
On completion of the course the students will be able to:
 express obligation, fix and cancel appointments
 extend, accept and decline invitations.
 give instructions and directions
 identify and use prepositions
 enhance their vocabulary
 learn synonyms, antonyms and use one word substitutes
 read and understand main ideas and answer the questions
 write in reported speech
 identify and correct common errors
 interpret data and write a paragraph
 learn to prepare cover letter and resume
 make notes and write reports
Internal evaluation
Mid Sem 1 Speaking 20 Part A 4 short answer questions
Listening Part B 2 short essay questions with internal

choice
149
Part C 2 essay questions with internal choice
Mid Sem 2 Vocabulary 20 Part A 4 short answer questions
Grammar Part B 2 short essay questions with internal

choice
Part C 2 essay questions with internal choice
Slip Test 1 Speaking 5 2 questions out of 3 questions
Listening
Slip Test 2 Vocabulary 5 2 questions out of 3 questions
Grammar
Assignment One assignment per one 5 Different group assignments of higher order
semester questions that develop problem solving skills
and critical thinking should be given
Seminars One seminar per one 5 Oral presentations using audio –visual
semester equipment, charts, etc.
Total 60
 Listen to a passage /conversation / dialogue / speech and answer the questions
 Group Discussions
 Seminars
 Review a movie
 Review a book
 Narrating a story
 Chain stories
 JAM
 Speak about incidents /events /memories /dreams /role model
 Interview with famous personalities
 Reading for main ideas and specific details
 Summarizing
150
 Picture description
 Writing a recipe
 Describing a process
 Giving directions using maps
 Surveys
 Filling forms
 e-mail etiquette
 Preparing reports on field visits, experiments, projects
Textbook: English for Polytechnics
(English Textbook for the First-Year Diploma Students)
REFERENCES:
1. Practical English Grammar by A.J Thomson and A.V. Martinet
2. A Course in Phonetics and Spoken English by J. Sethi and P.V Dhamija
3. Word Power Made Easy by Norman Lewis
4. Keep Talking by Friederike Klippel
5. More Grammar Games by Mario Rinvolucri and Paul Davis
6. Essential English Grammar by Raymond Murphy
7. Spoken English-A Self Learning Guide to Conversation Practice by V Sasi Kumar
e-learning:
1.www.duolingo.com
2. www.bbc.co.uk
3. www.babbel.com
4. www.merriam-webster.com
5. www.ello.org
151
6. www.lang-8.com
7. youtube.com
8. Hello English(app)
9. mooc.org
10. https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in
152
MID SEM-I EXAM
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM –II EXAM
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)

Sl No Unit No.
R U A
1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 II
3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 IV
9(b) 13(b)
4
5 V 5, 6 11(a) 15(a)

11(b) 15(b)
3
10(b) 14(b)
6 VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)

12(b) 16(b)

153
SECOND SEMESTER COMMON-201F
ADVANCED ENGLISH
MID SEM - I
PART-A 4X1=4
1. I strongly recommend you to read this novel. (Rewrite the sentence using suitable words of obligation).
2. Invite your friend to attend a seminar on Yoga.
3. Fill in the blanks using suitable prepositions.
a. I usually go to polytechnic _______ foot.
b. Suman has been suffering ___________ malaria.
4. Fill in the blanks using suitable preposition.
a. She is jealous ______________ her best friend.
b. Madhu jumped __________ the well.
PART-B 2X3=6
Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries three marks.
5. a) Extend an invitation to your friend to attend your brother’s marriage and write
expressions showing his / her acceptance or inability.
Or
b) Give directions to your sister on how to reach the nearest branch office of State Bank of India from your
house.
6. a) Give directions to your house from polytechnic using at least three prepositions.
Or
b) Complete the paragraph using suitable prepositions.
154
We went _____the zoo ____ Sunday. We saw a python ____ a branch of a tree. There were several parrots
_______ the cages. In the zoo, we boarded a train that passed __________ a tunnel. There we saw a lion going
______ its cave.
PART-C 2 X 5 = 10
7. a) Write on how to send an image from your mobile to another mobile number using WhatsApp.
Or
b) Write a dialogue to fix an appointment with an orthopedic surgeon on 5 th January at
10.00 a.m.
8. a) Use the following words or phrases in your own sentences.
i) across ii) against iii) in front of iv) since v) along
Or
b) Correct the words in italics.
i. I’ve got the key on my pocket.
ii. She was sitting among her two friends.
iii. There is a tree besides the house.
iv. I was born in Monday.
v. He came in the room.
155
SECOND SEMESTER COMMON-201F
ADVANCED ENGLISH
MID SEM - II
PART - A 4X1=4
5. Write the synonym and antonym of lazy.
6. Write any two different forms of the word, ‘beauty’.
7. Rewrite the following making necessary corrections.
a) She travelled to her village every week.
b) Raghu returned the money back.
8. Change as directed.
a) Sita said, “She is a teacher.” (Change it into indirect speech)
b) He told me that she was going to market. (Change it into direct speech.)
PART - B 2X3=6
9. a. Write down the one word substitutes of the following.
a) A person who does not believe in God.
b) The study of planets.
c) A person who loves reading books.
(Or)
b. Write antonyms for the words in italics.
My friend Rani is young and attractive. She is very sharp and loves to eat fresh food.
10. a. Rewrite the following making necessary corrections.

156
I go to college everyday by walk. I am getting up late every morning. I work very hardly.
(Or)
b. Change the following as directed.
i. He said to her, “I will teach you Chemistry today.” (Change it into Reported speech)
ii. She said to him, “Take me to Central Library now.” (Change it into reported speech)
iii. Gopal said to Mamatha, “ Please lend me your calculator.”
PART-C 2 X 5 = 10
11. a) What are the five aspects you learn when you learn a new word?
(Or)
b) Suggest any five ways to improve your vocabulary.
12. a) Rewrite the following making necessary changes.
a. My luggage were in the store room.
b. The teacher stressed on the importance of team work.
c. My friend and I gone for a movie.
d. The team is loving the food.
e. I have three son –in –laws.
(Or)
b) Rewrite the following sentences as directed.
i. He said that he was not feeling well. (Change to direct speech).
ii. Amala said that she would visit us the next day. (Change to direct speech).
iii. She said that their team had won the match. (Change to direct speech).
iv. The teacher said, “Australia is an island.” (Change to reported speech).
v. She says, “They will help us.” (Change to reported speech).
157
SECOND SEMESTER 18 COMMON-201F
ADVANCED ENGLISH
SEMESTER END EXAM
Time : 2 Hours Total Marks: 40 Marks
PART-A 8X1=8
Instructions: Answer all questions.
Each question carries one mark.
1. Fill in the blanks with appropriate prepositions.
a) They went___ a walk.
b) He went to college____bus.
2. Write one word substitutes for the given meanings.
a) Study of planets.
b) Something that cannot be heard.
3. What will you write under achievements secton in your resume?
2. Fill in the blanks with words of obligation.
a) I ____wear a helmet when I drive a two wheeler.
b) We ____- respect our elders.
5. Answer the questions given in 5 and 6 after reading the passage,
Mammals are among the most successful animals to have lived. Because they are warm blooded, they can
survive in almost any environment. To take advantage of different environments mammals have evolved
different body shapes.
a) Why do mammals have different body shapes?
6. How can mammals survive in any environment?
3. Make notes for the given passage.
About 40 million years ago new kinds of primates — monkeys and apes—- began to take over lemurs. Today,
there are two groups of monkeys: the old world monkeys which live in Africa and Asia and the New world
monkeys which live only in Central America.
158
1. Write a short paragraph based on the
flowchart given.
Finding a lost Item
Part -B 3 X4 = 12
Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries three marks.
9.(a) Invite a celebrity to your college sports day. The celebrity accepts your invitation. Write a conversation.
(Or)
(b) Answer the questions after reading the passage
There are almost 2,400 species of snake. From the 20 cm long thread snake to the gaint anaconda, which can
reach 36 feet. Snakes have many colours, patterns and ways of killing their prey. They eat everything from ants,
eggs , snails to animals as big as goats.
1. What is the largest snake?
2. What do snakes eat?
3. Are all snakes similar?
10 (a). Write three things you learn when you learn a new word?
OR
159
10 (b) Write a paragraph based on the tree diagram
11. (a). Read the following passage and answer the questions given in 11 a or 11 b
Humans communicate with each other everyday using sounds and body movements .Most commonly , we share
information about the world around us through spoken languages. These are in special sounds we make to
represent objects, actions, numbers, colours and other features. We use our brains to remember words, put them
in the correct order and make the larynx, or voice ,box,produce the correct sounds. If a person is unable to speak
they can communicate by using sign language. We also have written and pictorial languages.
1. How do human beings communicate?
2. What is the larynx?
3. When do we use sign language?
(Or)
(b) 1. What do we use to remember words?
2. How do we share information?
3. What are some forms of communication mentioned in the passage ?
12 (a). Make notes for the given passage
Sleep is as important to healthy life style as eating and exercising. On an average healthy adult requires just
over eight hours of sleep at night. Yet polls show that the increasing numbers of people are suffering from sleep
disorder or significant sleep loss. A study shows that 29% of Indians sleep only after midnight and 61% slept for
seven hours or less. Sleep is crucial to maintain one’s health. Without it, you increase your susceptibility to a
wide range of health problems .including heart disease, stroke, diabetes, obesity and depression. Not sleeping
enough can affect the immune system. The immune system works when you are asleep. That is when natural
killer cells are generated in the bone marrow. These killer cells help in protecting the body against the viruses,
bacteria and even cancer.
160
(Or)
12 (b) Write a paragraph based on the table given
Apes Country Habitat
Orangutan Sumatra live in trees
Gorilla Africa live on ground
Chimpanzee Africa live on ground
Part-C 5X4=20M
Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries 5 marks.
13(a) Take an appointment with a doctor for your grandmother.
(Or)
(b) Read the passage and answer the questions.
Reading skills are considered the most important tools for academic success. Printed materials serve as a
source of information and entertainment. Reading is an important activity in life with which one can update
one’s knowledge . Speech precedes reading and reading is the input for writing. Reading is an active process
which involves recognition and comprehension. A reader can understand a text only when he or she uses his or
her mental faculties. A reader should have the knowledge of the writing system, the knowledge of the language ,
the ability to interpret , the knowledge of the world, a reason for reading and a reading style.
1. What are the advantages of reading?
2. What comes before reading?
3. What does the process of reading involve?
4. What are the inputs required by a reader to read something?
5. What is the purpose of printed information?
14 (a). Correct the following sentences.
1. My friend like me very much.
2. This is the best if the two.
3. He sat among the two girls.
4. He is running daily.
161
5. This is the boy which won the race.
OR
(b) Write a cover letter applying for the post of a software engineer at an MNC.
15 ( a). Read the given passage and answer questions given in 15 a or 15 b
The first elephants were pig-sized creatures without tusks or trunks that lived in Northern Africa about 150
million years ago. Today there are only two species of elephant: the Indian Elephant and the African elephant -
the largest mammal living on land. Both species live in family groups, which sometimes join to from herds of
hundreds of animals. Elephants spend upto twenty on hours a day eating as much as 320kgs of leaves ,bark , fruit
and grass. An adult elephant needs to drink 90 litres of water a day. Elephants travel through forests on
traditional paths called elephants’ roads .These intelligent animals have good memories and can live for more
than 60 years. Both Indian and African elephants are endangered because humans take over their habitats for
farming and poachers kill them for their tusks.
1. What is the largest mammal on land?
2. What is an elephant road?
3. Which word in the passage means home?
4. Do elephants live alone?
5. Why are elephants killed?
(Or)
(b)
1. What do elephants eat?
2. How long does an elephant live?
3. Who is putting elephants in danger?
4. What was the size of the first elephants?
5. Elephants have tusks and_______.
16 (a). Write your resume for the post of an Assistant Engineer at TESCO Company.
(Or)
(b) Write a report about an industry you visited.
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS
162
Course Title : ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS Course Code : 18COMMON202F
SEMESTER : II Course Group : Foundation
Teaching Scheme ( L : T : P ) : 45 :15 : 0 ( in
Credits : 3 Credits
Periods )
Programme : Common to all Engineering Diploma Programmes
Pre requisites:
This course requires the basic knowledge of Algebra, Trigonometry in Mathematics at Secondary school level
and Basic Engineering Mathematics at Diploma 1st Semester level
CO 1 Formulate the equations of Straight Line, Circle and Conic Sections

CO 2 Evaluate the Limits of different Functions
CO 3 Determine the Derivatives of Various Functions
CO 4 Find the Successive Derivatives and Partial Derivatives of Functions
CO 5 Use Differentiation in Geometrical and Physical Applications
CO 6 Use Differentiation for finding Maxima and Minima.
Course Contents:
Co-ordinate geometry
Unit – I Duration: 10 Periods (L: 7.5 – T:2.5)
1. Straight lines: Write the different forms of a straight line – point slope form, two point
form, intercept form, normal form and general form - Find distance of a point from a line, acute angle between
two lines, intersection of two non-parallel lines and distance between two parallel lines - perpendicular distance
from a point to a line - Solve simple problems on the above forms
163
2. Circle: Define locus of a point, circle and its equation. Find equation of the Circle given (i) Centre and radius,
(ii) two ends of a diameter (iii) Centre and a point on the circumference (iv) three non collinear points and (v)
Centre and tangent equation - general equation of a circle - finding Centre, radius - tangent, normal to circle at a
point on it - simple problems.
Unit – II Duration: 8 Periods (L: 6.0 – T:2.0)
3. Conic Sections: Define a conic section, focus, directrix, eccentricity, axes and latus rectum – Find equation of
a conic when focus directrix and eccentricity are given. Properties of parabola, ellipse and hyperbola - standard
forms with Vertex (Centre) at the Origin and Axis (Axes) along Co – Ordinate Axes only – Simple Problems.
Differential Calculus
Unit-III Duration: 12 Periods (L: 9.0 – T:3.0)
4. Functions & Limits : Concept of Limit- Definition- Properties of Limits and Standard Limits ( without
1 x
xn  an sin x tan x a x 1 ex 1  1
lim , lim , lim , lim , lim , lim (1  x ) x , lim 1  
proof ) - x  a x  a x  0 x x 0 x x 0 x x0 x x 0 x   x  - Simple
a x2  b x  c f ( x)
lim 2 lim
x l  x   x   x  g ( x )
Problems . Evaluate the limits of the type and
f ( x  h)  f ( x )
lim
5. Differentiation – I : Concept of derivative - definition from first principle as h0 h -
n x x
different notations - derivatives of elementary functions like x , a , e , log x, sin x, cos x, tanx, Secx, Cosecx
and Cotx. Derivatives of sum, product, quotient, scalar multiplication of functions - problems. Derivative of
function of a function (Chain rule) with illustrative examples such as
2 x
t2  2 2 log  sin(cos x) 
(i) t (ii) x sin 2 x (iii) x 1 (iv) .
Unit – IV
Duration: 12 Periods (L: 9.0 – T:3.0)
6. Differentiation – II: Derivatives of inverse trigonometric functions, derivative of a function with respect to
another function, derivative of parametric functions, derivative of hyperbolic, implicit functions, logarithmic
differentiation – problems in each case. Higher order derivatives - examples – functions of several variables –
partial differentiation, Euler’s theorem-simple problems.
164
Applications of Derivatives:
Unit – V Duration: 8 Periods (L: 6.0 – T:2.0)
7. Geometrical Applications: Geometrical meaning of the derivative, equations of Tangent and normal to a
curve at any point on the curve. Lengths of tangent, normal, sub tangent and subnormal to the curve at any point
on it. Angle between two intersecting curves - problems.
Unit – VI Duration: 10 Periods (L: 7.5 – T:2.5)
8. Physical Applications: Physical applications of the derivative – Explain the derivative as a rate of change
in distance-time relations to find the velocity and acceleration of a moving particle with examples. Explain the
derivative as a rate measure in the problems where the quantities like volumes, areas vary with respect to time-
illustrative examples– Simple Problems.
9. Maxima & Minima: Applications of the derivative to find the extreme values – Increasing and decreasing
functions, finding the maxima and minima of simple functions - problems leading to applications of maxima and
minima.
References
1. Co - Ordinate Geometry – by S.L. Loney
2. Thomas Calculus, Pearson Addison – Wesley Publications
3. Calculus – I by Shanti Narayan and Manicavachagam Pillai, S.V Publications.
4. NCERT Mathematics Text Books Of ClassXI,XII.
5. Intermediate Mathematics Text Books (Telugu Academy)
2.E-books:www.mathebook.net
Coordinate Geometry
Unit – I
1.0 Solve the problems on Straight lines
1.1 Write the different forms of a straight line – point slope form, two point form, intercept form, normal
form and general form
1.2 Solve simple problems on the above forms

165
1.3 Find distance of a point from a line, acute angle between two lines, intersection of two non-parallel lines
and distance between two parallel lines.
2.0 Solve the problems on Circles
2.1 Define locus of a point, circle and its equation.
2.2 Find the equation of a circle given
(i) Centre and radius
(ii) Two ends of a diameter
(iii) Centre and a point on the circumference
(iv) Three non collinear points
(v) Centre and tangent
2.3 Write the general equation of a circle and find the centre and radius.
2.4 Write the equation of tangent and normal at a point on the circle.
2.5 Solve the problems to find the equations of tangent and normal.
Unit – II
3.0 Appreciate the properties of Conics in engineering applications
3.1 Define a conic section.
3.2 Understand the terms focus, directrix, eccentricity, axes and latus rectum of a conic with illustrations.
3.3 Find the equation of a conic when focus, directrix and eccentricity are given
3.4 Describe the properties of Parabola, Ellipse and Hyperbola
3.5 Solve problems in simple cases of Parabola, Ellipse and Hyperbola.
Differential Calculus
UNIT - III
4.0 Use the concept of Limit for solving the problems
lim f ( x)  l
xa
4.1 Understand the concept of limit and meaning of and state the properties of limits.
xn  an sin x tan x a x 1 ex 1
lim , lim , lim , lim , lim ,
xa x  a x0 x x 0 x x 0 x x0 x
4.2 Mention the Standard limits
1 x
 1
lim (1  x) x , lim 1  
x 0 x   x  (All without proof).
166
4.3 Solve the problems using the above standard limits
a x2  b x  c f ( x)
lim lim
x  l  x2   x   x   g ( x)
4.4 Evaluate the limits of the type and
5.0 Appreciate Differentiation and its meaning in engineering situations
5.1 State the concept of derivative of a function y = f(x) – definition, first principle as
f ( x  h)  f ( x )
lim
h0 h and also provide standard notations to denote the derivative of a function.
5.2 State the significance of derivative in scientific and engineering applications.
5.3 Find the derivatives of elementary functions like x n , ax, ex, log x, sin x, cos x, tanx, Secx, Cosecx and
Cot x using the first principles.
5.4 Find the derivatives of simple functions from the first principle.
5.5 State the rules of differentiation of sum, difference, scalar multiplication, product and quotient of
functions with illustrative and simple examples.
5.6 Understand the method of differentiation of a function of a function (Chain rule) with illustrative
examples such as
2 x
t2  2 log  sin(cos x) 
(i) t (ii) x sin 2 x (iii) x2  1 (iv) .
Unit – IV
6.0 Appreciate Differentiation and its meaning in engineering situations
6.1 Find the derivatives of Inverse Trigonometric functions and examples.
6.2 Understand the method of differentiation of a function with respect to another function and also
differentiation of parametric functions with examples.
6.3 Find the derivatives of hyperbolic functions.
6.4 Explain the procedures for finding the derivatives of implicit function with examples.
6.5 Explain the need of taking logarithms for differentiating some functions with examples like [f(x)] g(x).
6.6 Explain the concept of finding the higher order derivatives of second and third order with examples.
6.7 Explain the concept of functions of several variables, partial derivatives and difference between the
ordinary and partial derivatives with simple examples.
6.8 Explain the definition of Homogenous function of degree n
6.9 Explain Euler’s theorem for homogeneous functions with applications to simple problems.
167
Applications of Differentiation
UNIT - V
7.0 Understand the Geometrical Applications of Derivatives
7.1 State the geometrical meaning of the derivative as the slope of the tangent to the curve y=f(x) at any
point on the curve.
7.2 Explain the concept of derivative to find the slope of tangent and to find the equation of tangent and
normal to the curve y=f(x) at any point on it.
7.3 Find the lengths of tangent, normal, sub-tangent and sub normal at any point on the curve y=f(x) .
7.4 Explain the concept of angle between two curves and procedure for finding the angle between two given
curves with illustrative examples.
Unit – VI
8.0 Understand the Physical Applications of Derivatives
8.1 Explain the derivative as a rate of change in distance-time relations to find the velocity and acceleration
of a moving particle with examples.
8.2 Explain the derivative as a rate measurer in the problems where the quantities like volumes, areas vary
with respect to time- illustrative examples.
9.0 Use Derivatives to find extreme values of functions
9.1 Define the concept of increasing and decreasing functions.
9.2 Explain the conditions to find points where the given function is increasing or decreasing with
illustrative examples.
9.3 Explain the procedure to find the extreme values (maxima or minima) of a function of single variable -
simple problems yielding maxima and minima.
9.4 Solve problems on maxima and minima in applications like finding areas, volumes, etc.
2. Quiz
3. Group discussion
168
4. Surprise tests
5. Seminars
6. Home assignments.
CO / PO - MAPPING
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 Mapped
POs
CO1 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO2 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO3 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO4 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO5 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO6 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
169
MID SEM-I EXAM
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM –II EXAM
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)

Sl No Unit No.
R U A
1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 II
3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 IV
9(b) 13(b)
4
5 V 5, 6 11(a) 15(a)

11(b) 15(b)
3
10(b) 14(b)
6 VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)

12(b) 16(b)
170
MID SEM –I, MODEL PAPER, II SEMESTER
PART-A
1. Find the slope of the straight line 3x + 4y + 9 = 0
2. Write the equation of circle whose centre (h,k) and radius r given.
3. Define conic section.
x2 y2
4. Find the Length of major and minor axes of the Ellipse + =1
16 9
PART-B
. 5 a) Find the distance between parallel lines 2x + 3y + 5 =0 and 2x + 3y + 9 = 0
Or
5 b) Find the centre and radius of the circle x2 + y2 – 6x + 4y – 12 = 0.
6 a) Find the vertex , focus ,equation of directrix and length of latus-rectum of the parabola
y2 = 20x
Or
171
x2 y2
6 b) Find the centre, vertices and foci of Ellipse + =1
25 16
PART C
7 a) Find the angle between the lines 2x – y + 3 = 0 and x + y – 2 = 0
Or
7b) Find the equation of the Circle passing through the points (0, 0), (1,0) and (0,2)
8 a) Find the equation of the Parabola with focus at (2 , -3 ) and whose directrix is
3x – 4y + 16 = 0
Or
8 b) Find the Centre,Vertices, Eccentricity, Foci, Lengths of axes, Length of Latus Rectum,
x2 y2
and equations of directrices of the Hyperbola − =1
16 9
@@@
172
MID SEM –II, MODEL PAPER, II SEMESTER
PART-A
2 x 3 −3 x 2 +1
Lt 9 x 2 + 8 x +7
1. Evaluate x →0
2. Differentiate x3 + Tanx w.r.t. x
3. Differentiate log(sinx) w.r.t x
∂u
4. Find if U=x 3 + y 3
∂x
PART-B
5 a). Evaluate ; lim

n→∞ ( 1+2+3+…
n
.+ n
2 )
Or
173
dy
5 b). If y = ex.cotx , find dx
dy
6 a). Find if x=at 2 , y=2 at .
dx
Or
dy
6 b) If x2 + y2 + 3xy = 7, then find dx
PART C
Instructions: 1. Answer any TWO questions 02 X 05 =10
dy 1+ x 2
log
7 a). Find dx , If y = 1−x 2
Or
7 b) Differentiate log[log(logx)] w. r. t. x
8 a). If y=sin ( logx ) , prove t h at x 2 y 2 + x y 1+ y =0.
Or
x 2 + y2 ∂u ∂u
8 b) If U =sin−1 ( x+ y ) t h en prove t h at x
∂x
+y
∂y
=tanu
@@@
174
C18-common SUB.CODE:202F
BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION,(C-18)
MODEL PAPER
II SEMESTER EXAMINATION
PART-A
9. Write the intercept form of a straight line ax +by +c=0
x 3−8
10. Evaluate lim
x →2 x−2
11. Write the conditions for an increasing function and a decreasing function of f (x) in the interval [ a , b ]
12. Write the equation of a circle whose centre is ( h , k ) and radius is r .
13. Write the slope of a curve y=f ( x ) at the point ( x 1 , y 1 ) .
14. Define Orthogonal curves.
15. Write the conditions for a point to be a maximum point on the curve y=f ( x ) .
175
16. Write the quantities to denote the rate of change of volume and area with respect to t.
PART-B
9(a). Find the perpendicular distance of the point (2, 4) from the line 4 x−3 y−6=0.
OR
9(b). Find the length of the tangent to the curve y=x 2 +2 x+1 at (1,4).
10(a). Differentiate log ⁡(tanx) with respect to x.
OR
1 3 2
10 (b). A particle is moving along a line such that s= t −3t +8 t +5. Find its velocity and acceleration at
3
t=2 sec .
11 (a). Find the equation of the normal to the curve y 2=16 x at (2,4).
OR
11 (b). Find the equation of the tangent to the curve y=x 3−2 x +5 at (1,4).
12 (a). Find the rate of change of Area of the circle with respect to the radius when r =6 cm.
OR
12 (b). Find the maximum value of 2 x3 −9 x 2+12 x+ 5.
PART C
13(a). Find the equation of the parabola whose focus is the point (3, -4) and directrix is the
line x− y +5=0.
OR
13 (b). Find the angle between the curves y 2=2 x , x + y = 8 at their point of intersection
(2, 2)
dy
14 (a). Find , if x=a ( θ−sinθ ) , y=a ( 1−cosθ ) .
dx
176
OR
14 (b). The sum of two numbers is 24. Find them if their product is maximum
15(a). Find the lengths of the normal, subtangent and subnormal to the curve
y=x 3−3 x +2 at ( 0,2 ) .
OR
2 k
15 (b). show that the curves y =x∧ y = cut at right angles if 8 k 2−1=0.
x
16 (a). A circular metal plate expands by heat so that its radius is increasing at the rate of 0.02 cm/sec. At what
rate its area is increasing when the radius is 10 cms.
OR
16 (b). A wire of length 40 cm is bent so that to has to form a rectangle. Find the maximum area that can be
enclosed by the wire.
Applied Physics
Course Title Applied Physics Course Code 18Common-203F

Semester II Course Group Foundation
Periods (L:T:P)
Periods
Pre requisites: Basic High School Science, Basic Mathematics
Course Objectives: After studying this course, the student will be able to understand and appreciate the role of
Physics in different areas of engineering and technology.
Course outcomes: On successful completion of the course, the student will have the ability to attain below
Course outcomes (CO):
177
Course Outcomes Linked POs Teaching
Periods
Apply knowledge of waves and sound in engineering

CO 1 problems. PO1,PO2 10
Apply knowledge of Simple Harmonic Motion to solve

CO 2 PO1, PO2 10
PO1,
CO 3 Use modern instruments in engineering PO2,PO3, 10
PO4
PO1,
CO 4 Use various magnetic materials in engineering equipments 10
PO2,PO3
PO1,
Use various electrical measuring instruments as tools in
CO 5 PO2,PO3,P 10
engineering
O4
PO1,
CO 6 Apply Electronics principles in engineering problems PO2,PO3,P 10
O4
Course Contents
1. UNIT – 1 WAVES AND SOUND Duration: 10 periods (L:7.5 – T: 2.5)
Wave motion – definition and characteristics – audible range – infrasonic and ultrasonic – longitudinal
and transverse waves – examples – Relation between wavelength, frequency and velocity of a wave – derivation
–stationary waves- beats - applications of beats - Doppler effect – list the applications – ultrasound and radar in
medicine and engineering as special emphasis- echo –definition - applications - relation between time of echo
and distance of obstacle –derivation- Reverberation and time of reverberation - Sabine’s formula - Free and
forced vibrations - Resonance - Conditions of good auditorium - noise pollution – definition – causes, effects
and methods to minimize noise pollution - problems
2. UNIT – 2 SIMPLE HARMONIC MOTION Duration: 10 periods (L:7.5 – T: 2.5)
Periodic motion - Simple Harmonic Motion (SHM)– definition - examples - Conditions for SHM –Projection of
circular motion on any diameter of a circle is SHM - Expressions for Displacement, Velocity and Acceleration
of a particle executing SHM – derivations - Time period, frequency, amplitude and phase of a particle in SHM -
Ideal simple pendulum – time period of simple pendulum –derivation - laws of simple pendulum-Seconds
pendulum- problems.
3. UNIT – 3 MODERN PHYSICS Duration: 10 periods (L:7.5 – T: 2.5)

178
Photo electric effect - Einstein’s photo electric equation – Work function and threshold frequency - laws of
photo electric effect - applications of photo electric effect – photo cell - concept of Refraction of light - critical
angle and total internal reflection - principle of Optical fiber - Applications of optical fiber – LASER –
definition and characteristics – principle of LASER - spontaneous emission and stimulated emission -
population inversion - examples of LASER – Uses.
4. UNIT-4 MAGNETISM Duration: 10 periods (L:7.5 – T: 2.5)
Magnetic field - magnetic lines of force -properties - Uniform and Non-uniform magnetic field –
Magnetic length, pole strength – magnetic induction field strength- definition - Coulomb’s inverse square law of
magnetism - expression for moment of couple on a bar magnet placed in a uniform magnetic field – derivation -
expression for magnetic induction field strength at a point on the axial line of a bar magnet –derivation - Dia,
Para and Ferro magnetic materials – examples - related problems.
5. UNIT-5 ELECTRICITY AND MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
Duration: 10 periods (L:7.5 – T: 2.5)
Ohm’s law – Ohmic and non ohmic conductors – examples - Temperature dependence of resistance –
coefficients of resistance with examples - Specific resistance – units – conductance- series and parallel
combination of resistors - moving coil galvanometer - conversion of galvanometer into ammeter and voltmeter
with diagram (qualitatively) – Kirchhoff’s current and voltage laws in electricity – Expression for balancing
condition of Wheatstone’s bridge – derivation – Meter bridge –working with neat diagram –Superconductivity-
definition-superconductors - definition and examples – applications - related problems.
6. UNIT – 6 ELECTRONICS Duration: 10 periods (L:7.5 – T: 2.5)
Solids – definition – energy bands in solids- valence band, conduction band and forbidden band – Energy band
diagram of conductors, insulators and semiconductors – concept of Fermi level - Intrinsic semiconductors -
examples - Concept of holes in semiconductors - Doping - Extrinsic semiconductor - P-type and N-type
semiconductors - PN Junction diode – Forward Bias and Reverse Bias - Applications of PN diode - Diode as
rectifier – principle – principle of Light Emitting Diode and solar cell.
References:
5. Engineering Physics by R.K. Gaur, S.L. Gupta, Dhanpatrai Publications, New Delhi.
179
6. ISC Physics, Book I&II, P. Vivekanandan, DK Banerjee, S Chand, New Delhi.
7. Intermediate Physics, Vol. I&II, Telugu Academy, TS, Hyderabad.
8. Fundamentals of Physics by Halliday and Resnick.
Suggested learning outcomes:
1. know the concept of Waves and Sound
1.1 Define wave. Explain the characteristics of a wave (frequency, wavelength, amplitude, time
period).
1.2 Explain audibility range of sound.
1.3 Define infrasonic and ultrasonic sounds.
1.4 Define longitudinal and transverse wave motion. Write examples for each. Distinguish between
them.
1.5 Derive the relation between wavelength, frequency and velocity of a wave (v ꞊ nλ)
1.6 Define stationary waves.
1.7 Explain the phenomenon of beats. List the applications of beats.
1.8 Explain Doppler Effect. List the applications of Doppler Effect.
1.9 Application of Doppler Effect in medicine and engineering - ultrasound and radar.
1.10 Define echo. List the applications of echo.
1.11 Derive the relation between time of echo and distance of obstacle.
1.12 Explain Reverberation and time of reverberation.
1.13 Write Sabine’s formula and explain the terms.
1.14 Define free and forced vibrations.
1.15 Define resonance with examples.
1.16 State the conditions of a good auditorium.
1.17 Define noise pollution.
180
1.18 List the causes, effects and methods to minimize noise pollution.
2. know the concept of Simple Harmonic Motion
2.1 Define periodic motion.
2.2 Define Simple Harmonic Motion (SHM).
2.3 List the examples of SHM.
2.4 State the conditions of simple harmonic motion.
2.5 Projection of circular motion on any diameter of a circle is SHM.
2.6 Define the terms time period, frequency, amplitude and phase of particle in SHM.
2.7 Derive the expressions for Displacement, Velocity and Acceleration of a particle executing in SHM.
2.8 Define Ideal simple pendulum and derive the expression for time period of simple pendulum.
2.9 State the laws of simple pendulum.
2.10 Define seconds pendulum.
3. know the concept of Modern Physics
3.1 Explain Photo electric effect.
3.2 Define the terms work function and threshold frequency.
3.3 State Einstein’s photo electric equation and explain the terms.
3.4 State laws of photo electric effect.
3.5 List the applications of photo electric effect.
3.6 Explain working of photocell.
3.7 Explain the concept of refraction of light.

181
3.8 Define critical angle.
3.9 Define Total internal reflection.
3.10 State conditions for Total internal reflection.
3.11 Explain principle and working of optical fiber.
3.12 List the applications of optical fiber.
3.13 Define LASER. State the characteristics of LASER.
3.14 Explain the principle of LASER.
3.15 Define spontaneous emission and stimulated emission.
3.16 Define population inversion.
3.17 List the examples of LASER.
3.18 List the uses of LASER.
4 know the concept of Magnetism
4.1 Define magnetic field.
4.2 Define magnetic lines of force.
4.3 State the properties of magnetic lines of force.
4.4 Define Uniform and Non-uniform magnetic field.
4.5 Define the terms magnetic length and pole strength of a bar magnet.
4.6 Define magnetic induction field strength.
4.7 State and explain Coulomb’s inverse square law of magnetism.
4.8 Derive the expression for moment of couple on a bar magnet placed in a uniform
magnetic field.
4.9 Derive the formula for magnetic induction field strength at a point on the axial line of a bar magnet.
4.10 Define Dia, Para and Ferro magnetic materials with examples.
5 know the concept of Electricity and measuring instruments
5.1 State Ohm’s law – Define ohmic and non ohmic conductors with examples
182
5.2 Explain temperature dependence of resistance – types of temperature coefficients with examples
5.3 Define specific resistance. Write its units.
5.4 Define conductance.
5.5 Write the formulae for effective resistance in series and parallel combination of resistors with diagram.
5.6 Explain moving coil galvanometer.
5.7 Conversion of a galvanometer into ammeter and voltmeter. Explain with diagram.
5.8 State and explain Kirchhoff’s current and voltage laws in electricity.
5.9 Derive an expression for balancing condition of Wheatstone’s bridge with legible sketch.
5.10 Explain briefly Meter Bridge with neat diagram.
5.11 Define superconductivity.
5.12 Define superconductor. Give examples.
5.13 List the applications of superconductors.
6 know the concepts of Electronics and applications
6.1 Define solid.
6.2 Define valence band, conduction band and forbidden band in solids.
6.3 Explain conductors, insulators and semiconductors on the basis of energy band diagram.
6.4 Explain the concept of Fermi level.
6.5 Define intrinsic semiconductors.
6.6 List the examples for intrinsic semiconductors.
6.7 Explain the concept of hole in semiconductors.
6.8 Define doping.
6.9 Define extrinsic semiconductors.
6.10 Explain P-type and N-type semiconductors.
6.11 Explain PN Junction Diode (formation only).
6.12 Explain forward and reverse bias of PN diode (biasing and flow of majority and minority
carriers with diagram only)
183
6.13 List the applications of PN Diode.
6.14 Explain the principle of diode as a rectifier.
6.15 Explain working principle of Light Emitting Diode (LED)
6.16 Explain the working principle of solar cell.
MID SEM-I EXAM
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM –II EXAM
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
184

Sl No Unit No.
R U A
1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 II
3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 IV
9(b) 13(b)
4
5 V 5, 6 11(a) 15(a)
11(b) 15(b)
3
10(b) 14(b)
6 VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)
12(b) 16(b)
Legend: Application (A) 5 Marks
C-18 COMMON-203F
185
MIDSEM – I
SECOND SEMESTER EXAMINATION
APPLIED PHYSICS
Important Note: Wherever any question has choice, marks will be allotted only to first attempted question. No
marks will be allotted for extra questions answered
PART - A (4x1 = 4M)
5. Write the Sabine’s formula.
6. Define longitudinal wave.
7. Define Second’s pendulum.
8. Define SHM.
PART- B (2 x 3 = 6M)
5 (a). Write any three applications of Beats.
(OR)
(b). Write any three effects of noise pollution.
6 (a). Write the conditions for SHM.
(OR)
186
(b). The displacement of a particle executing SHM is given by Y=8Sin ( πt + π /4 ) m. Find i) Amplitude ii)
Angular velocity and iii) Time period
PART-C (2×5=10M)
7 (a). Derive relation between time of echo and distance of obstacle.
(OR)
(b). State five conditions of a good auditorium.
8 (a). Derive the expression for time period of a simple pendulum.
(OR)
(b). Derive the expressions for velocity and acceleration of a particle in SHM.
*** ** ***
C-18 COMMON-203F
187
MIDSEM – II
APPLIED PHYSICS
Important Note: Wherever any question has choice, marks will be allotted only to first attempted question. No
marks will be allotted for extra questions answered
PART - A (4x1 = 4M)
5. Define photoelectric effect.
6. Define total internal reflection.
7. Define magnetic field.
8. Write the formula for magnetic moment of a bar magnet.
PART- B (2 x 3 = 6M)
5 (a). State three laws of photo electric effect.
(OR)
(b). Distinguish between spontaneous and stimulated emission.
6 (a). Write three properties of magnetic lines of force.
188
(OR)
(b). Explain Coulomb’s inverse square law of magnetism.
PART-C (2×5=10M)
7 (a). Explain the principle of LASER.
(OR)
(b). Explain working principle of optical fiber.
8 (a). Derive the formula for moment of couple acting on a bar magnet placed in uniform
magnetic field.
(OR)
(b). Derive the expression for magnetic induction field strength at a point on the axial line
of a bar magnet.
** *** **
C18 – COMMON 203F

189
MODEL PAPER
COMMON – II SEMESTER EXAMINATION
APPLIED PHYSICS
PART – A
Instructions: 1. Answer ALL questions. 8X1=08

2. Each question carries ONE mark.
1. Define an echo.
2. Write any two uses of optical fiber.
3. State Ohm’s law.
4. Write any two laws of Reflection.
5. Write SI unit of specific resistance
6. Define non ohmic conductors and give one example.
7. Define Fermi level.
8. Write any two advantages of LED’s.
PART – B
Instructions: 1. Answer any FOUR questions. 4X3=12

2. Each question carries THREE marks.
9(a). Derive V= nλ.

(or)
9(b). Explain the temperature dependence of resistance on conductor.
10(a). Explain photo cell with neat diagram.

(or)
10(b). Define magnetic induction field strength, write its formula and SI unit.
11(a). State and explain Kirchhoff’s voltage law.

(or)
11(b). Write any three applications of Superconductors.
12(a). Explain principle of diode as a rectifier.

(or)
12(b). Write any three applications of p-n diode.
PART – C 4X5 = 20
Instructions: 1. Answer any FOUR questions.

190
2. Each question carries FIVE marks.
13(a). Derive the relation between time of an echo and distance obstacle
(or)
13(b). Derive the expression for balancing condition of Wheatstone’s bridge.
14(a). Explain working principle of optical fiber with neat diagram.
(or)
14(b). Explain forward and reverse bias of PN diode.
15(a). Explain briefly with neat diagram .
(or)
15(b). Explain moving coil galvanometer.
16(a). Explain the working principle of LED with neat diagram.
(or)
16(b). Explain the working principle of solar cell.
*** ** ***
Engineering Chemistry and Environmental Studies
Course Title Engineering Chemistry Course Code 18Common-204F

191
and Environmental
Studies
Semester II Course Group Foundation

Periods (L:T:P)
Periods
Prerequisite:
Basic knowledge of chemistry in secondary education.
Course Objectives: After studying this course the student will be able to understand and appreciate the role of
Chemistry and environmental studies in different spheres of industries.
Course Outcome:
On successful completion of the course, the students will have ability to attain below Course Outcomes (CO):
CO Course outcome CL Linked Teaching

PO periods
CO1 Understand and explain the different metallurgical R/U/A 1,2,9,10 10

processes, alloys and applications of alloys
CO2 Understand and explain corrosion and preventive methods R/U/A 1,2,9,10 10
of corrosion
CO3 List out the different methods of preparation and industrial R/U/A 1,2,5,6,7, 12
uses of plastics, rubber and fibers. vulcanization of rubber 10
and its applications
CO4 Classify the fuels and explain basic terms of fuel, outline the R/U/A 1,2,10 8
composition and industrial use of gaseous fuels
CO5 Understand and Explain Galvanic cell, emf of cell -electro R/U/A 1,2,5 12
chemical series-Applications of Galvanic cells, batteries and
cells and distinguish the Galvanic and electrolytic cell
CO6 Explain the causes, effects and controlling methods of air R/U/A 1,2,5,7 8
and water pollutions.
Total Periods 60
Legends: R = Remember, U= Understand, A = Apply
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT - I: Metallurgy: 10Periods (L:7.5 – T: 2.5)
192
Characteristics of Metals - distinguish between Metals and Non Metals- Ore, Gangue, Flux, Slag - Concentration
of Ore -Froth floatation - Methods of Extraction of crude Metal - Roasting, Calcination, Smelting – Alloys-
purpose of making alloys - Composition of Brass, German silver, Nichrome, Stainless steel and Duralumin
UNIT – II: Corrosion: 10Periods (L:7.5 – T: 2.5)
Introduction - factors influencing the rate of corrosion - electrochemical theory of corrosion - composition, stress
and concentration cells- rusting of iron and its mechanism - prevention of corrosion - coating methods, Paints-
constituents and characteristics of paints-cathodic protection.
UNIT – III: Polymers: 12Periods (L : 9.0 - T : 3.0)
Introduction - polymerization - types of polymerization - addition, condensation with examples - plastics - types
of plastics - advantages of plastics over traditional materials - Disadvantages of using plastics - preparation and
uses of the following plastics: 1. Polythene 2. PVC 3.Teflon 4.
Polystyrene 5.Urea formaldehyde 6. Bakelite - Rubber - Elastomers –Preparartionof Butyl rubber, Buna-s,
Neoprene rubber and their uses-Fibres-Preparation and uses of fibres-Nylon 6,6-Polyester.
UNIT – IV: Fuels: 8Periods (L : 6.0 - T : 2.0) Definition and

classification of fuels- characteristics of good fuel - Calorific value-HCV and LCV-Calculation of oxygen
required for combustion of methane and ethane - composition and uses of gaseous fuels- a) water gas b)
producer gas, c) natural gas, d) coal gas, e) Bio gas
and f) acetylene.
UNIT – V: Electro Motive Force: 12Periods (L : 9.0 - T : 3.0)
Galvanic cell – standard electrode potential –electro chemical series -emf of cell-Batteries-Types of batteries-
Fuel cells.
UNIT – VI: ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES-II : 8Periods (L : 6.0 - T : 2.0)
Introduction- classification of air pollutants based on origin and states of matter-Air pollution - causes-Effects -
control methods - Water pollution - causes - effects - control measures.
Reference Books:
193
1. Engineering chemistry – Jain & Jain – DhanpatRai Publishing Company.
2. A Text book of Engineering Chemistry – S.S.Dara – S.Chand Publications.
3. Environmental Studies – A.K.De.
4. Environmental Studies, R. Rajagopalan, 2nd Edition, 2011, Oxford University Press
5. Intermediate Chemistry I and II – Telugu Academy TS
UNIT – I: METALLURGY
1.1. List the Characteristics of Metals.
1.2. Distinguish between Metals and Non Metals
1.3. Define the terms 1.Mineral, 2.Ore, 3. Gangue, 4. Flux and 5.Slag
1.4. Describe Froth Floatation method of concentration of ore.
1.5. Describe the methods involved in extraction of crude metal- Roasting, Calcination and
Smelting.
1.6. Define an Alloy
1.7. Explain the purpose of making of alloys
1.8. Write the Composition of the following alloys:1.Brass, 2.German silver, 3.Nichrome
4. Stainless steel, 5. Duralumin
1.9. List the uses of following Alloys: Brass, German silver, Nichrome, Stainless steel,
Duralumin
UNIT – II: CORROSION
2.1. Define the term corrosion
2.2. Explain the Factors influencing the rate of corrosion
2.3. Explain the concept of electrochemical theory of corrosion
2.4. Describe the formation of a) composition cell, b) stress cell c) concentration cell
2.5. Define rust and explain the mechanism of rusting of iron with chemical reactions.
2.6. Explain the methods of prevention of corrosion:

194
a) Protective Coatings i) Metallic coatings (Anodic and cathodic coatings) ii) Inorganic
coatings iii) Organic coatings, paint,constituent of paint and characteristics of good paint.
b) Cathodic protection (Sacrificial anode process and Impressed - voltage process).
UNIT – III: POLYMERS
3.1. Explain the concept of polymerization
3.2. Describe the methods of polymerization a) addition polymerization
b) condensation polymerization with examples.
3.3. Define the term plastic
3.4. List the Characteristics of plastics.
3.5. State the advantages of plastics over traditional materials
3.6. State the disadvantages of using plastics.
3.7. Types of plastics with examples.
3.8. Distinguish between thermoplastics and thermosetting plastics
3.9. Explain the methods of preparation and uses of the following plastics:
1. Polythene, 2. PVC, 3.Teflon, 4.Polystyrene 5.Urea formaldehyde 6. Bakelite
(only flow chart for Bakelite i.e. without chemical equations).
3.10. Define the term natural rubber
3.11. Explain preparation of natural rubber
3.12. State the structural formula of Natural rubber
3.13. List the Characteristics of natural rubber
3.14. Explain the process of Vulcanization
3.15. List the Characteristics of Vulcanized rubber
3.16. Define the term Elastomer
3.17. Describe the preparation and uses of the following synthetic rubbers a) Butyl rubber,
b) Buna-s and c) Neoprene rubber.
3.18. Define fibre.
3.19. Explain the preparation and uses of fibres –Nylon 6,6 and Polyester
UNIT – IV: FUELS

195
4.1. Define the term fuel
4.2. Classify the fuels based on physical state - solid, liquid and gaseous fuels with examples.
4.3. Classify the fuels based on occurrence- primary and secondary fuels with examples.
4.4. List the characteristics of a good fuel
4.5. Advantages of gaseous fuels
4.6. Define Calorific value- HCV and LCV.
4.7. Calculate the oxygen required for the combustion of Methane and Ethane fuel gases.
4.8. State the composition and uses of the following gaseous fuels:
a) water gas, b) producer gas, c) natural gas, d) coal gas, e) Bio gas and f) acetylene
UNIT – V: Electro Motive Force
5.1. Define Galvanic cell
5.2. Explain the construction and working of Galvanic cell
5.3. Distinguish between electrolytic cell and galvanic cell
5.4. Explain standard electrode potential
5.5. Explain standard hydrogen electrode
5.6. Define electrochemical series and explain its significance.
5.7. Define and explain emf of a cell.
5.8. Solve the numerical problems on emf of cell
5.9. Explain Batteries (Cells) and types of batteries with examples –working and applications of
Dry cell (Leclanche cell), Lead storage battery, Ni-Cd cell
5.10. Explain working and advantages of Fuel cell (Hydrogen - Oxygen Fuel Cell)
UNIT – VI: ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES-II
6.1. Define air pollution
6.2. Classify the air pollutants- based on origin and states of matter
6.3. Explain the causes of air pollution
6.4. Explain the effects of air pollution on human beings, plants and animals
6.5. Explain the green house effect - ozone layer depletion and acid rain
196
6.6. Explain the methods of control of air pollution
6.7. Define water pollution
6.8. Explain the causes of water pollution
6.9. Explain the effects of water pollution on living and non living things
6.10. Explain the methods of control of water pollution.
Suggested Student Activities for Induction Program:
Forenoon Afternoon
Day2 Rules and Regulations Chemistry Lab practice classes may be
Day3 Getting acquainted with Head and faculty conducted
Day4 Familiarization with Institutional facilities
Day5 Interaction with Class teacher and Seniors
1. Student visits Library to refer to Text books, reference books and manuals to find their specifications
2. Student inspects the available equipment in the Chemistry Lab to familiarize with them.
3. Quiz
4. Group discussion
5. Seminar
6. Surprise test
E learning links:
https://iupac.org/
https://www.youtube.com
https://www.khanacademy.org/
www.nptel.ac.in
Blue Print
MID SEM-I EXAM
197
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM –II EXAM
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)

Sl No Unit No.
R U A
1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 II
3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 IV
9(b) 13(b)
4
5 V 5, 6 11(a) 15(a)
11(b) 15(b)
3
10(b) 14(b)
6 VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)
12(b) 16(b)
198
Legend: Application (A) 5 Marks
Model Question Papers
II SEMESTER, MIDSEM – I
Time: 1 Hour Max. Marks: 20
PART – A
9. Define the terms mineral and ore.
10. Define an alloy.
11. Define corrosion.
12. What is paint?
PART – B
Instructions: Answer all questions. Each question carries three marks 2 x 3 =6 Marks
13. a. List any six characteristics of metals.
or
b. Explain the process of roasting of ore with an example.
14. a. List any six factors influencing the rate of corrosion.
or
b. Explain the formation of stress cell with an example.

199
PART – C
Instructions: Answer all questions. Each question carries five marks 2 x 5 =10 Marks
15. a. Explain the froth floatation process of concentration of ore .
or
b. Write the composition and uses of Brass, German silver .
16. a. Explain the mechanism of rusting of iron with chemical equations.
or
b. Explain sacrificial anode method of prevention of corrosion with a neat diagram.
II SEMESTER, MIDSEM – II
Sub. Code: 18common-204F
Time: 1 Hour Max.Marks : 20
PART – A
9. What is the chemical name of natural rubber?
10. Define polymerization.
11. What are fuels?
12. Mention any two characteristics of good fuel.
PART – B
Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries three marks 2 x 3 =6 Marks
13. a. Write any three advantages of plastics over traditional materials.
or
b. Write a method of preparation and uses of Nylon-6,6 .
14. a. Define colorific value and differentiate lower and higher calorific values.
or
b. Classify the fuels based on their physical state.
PART – C
Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries five marks 2 x 5 =10 Marks
200
15. a. What is vulcanization of rubber and explain with chemical equations.
or
b. Distinguish thermoplastics and thermosetting plastics.
16. a. Write the composition and uses of water gas and producer gas.
or
b. Calculate the mass and volume of the oxygen required for the complete combustion of 8
grams of CH4.
C-18COMMON-204F

II SEMESTER EXAMINATION
Time: 2 Hours Max.Marks : 40
PART – A
17. Define gangue.
18. What are the different types of plastics?
19. Define Galvanic cell.
20. What is the chemical formula of rust?
21. What is electrochemical series?
22. What are the different types of batteries?
23. Define air pollution.
24. Define water pollution.
PART – B
Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries three marks 4 x 3 =12 Marks
25. a. Write any three differences between metals and non-metals.
or
b. Write any three significances of electrochemical series.
26. a. Write a method of preparation and two uses of polystyrene.
or
201
b. Classify the pollutants based on origin and give examples.
27. a. Write any three differences between electrolytic cell and galvanic cell.
or
b. Write the electrode reaction of lead storage battery during discharging.
28. a. Write a short note on Green house effect.
or
b. Write a note on Ozone layer depletion.
PART – C
Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries five marks 4 x 5 =20 Marks
29. a. Explain the formation of composition cell and stress cell.
or
b. Describe the construction and working principle of Leclanche cell.
30. a. Calculate the mass and volume of oxygen required for the complete combustion of 15 gm of
ethane( C2H6).
or
b. Explain the causes of water pollution.
31. a. Explain the construction and functioning of Galvanic cell.
or
b. Explain working principle of H2-O2 fuel cell.
32. a. Explain the control methods of water pollution.
Or
b. Explain the causes of air pollution.
202
Course Title : Semiconductor devices Course Code 18EI-205C
Semester II Course Group Core

periods (L:T:P)
Methodology Lecture + Assignments Total Contact

periods : : 60
Pre requisites:
This course requires the basic knowledge of Basic Physics at Secondary school level, Electronic Components,
AC and DC voltages and Currents.
Course Outcomes
Upon completion of the course the student should have the ability to
Course Outcome
CO1 Analyze the PN-Junction diode operation under different biasing.
CO2 Discuss various Rectifiers and Filters.
CO3 Discuss various Clippers and Clampers.
CO4 Learn about Transistor configurations and need for heat sinks.
203
CO5 Discuss various special semiconductor devices.
CO6 Explain DC power supplies.
Course content and Blue print of marks for SEE
Unit Questions to be set for SEE

Unit name Periods
No R U A
1. PN Junction Diode 10 9(a) 13(a)

1
2. Rectifiers and Filters 8
3. Clippers and clampers 10 10(a) 14(a)

2
4. Transistors 12
9(b) 13(b)
Special semi conductor 4
5. 12 5,6 11(a) 15(a)
devices
11(b) 15(b)
3
10(b) 14(b)
6. DC Power supplies 8 7,8 12(a) 16(a)
12(b) 16(b)
Total 60 8 8 8
Course Contents
UNIT1: PN-Junction Diode Duration: 10Periods (L: 7 – T: 3)
Electrical properties of materials- Energy band diagrams of Conductor, Semi conductor and Insulator. Semi
conductors - Intrinsic, Extrinsic, Doping - Formation of P-Type and N-Type materials and their properties,
minority and majority charge carriers, Drift and diffusion current.
204
Formation of PN junction diode.-Biasing - Forward and Reverse bias- Formation of potential barrier,
Recombination, V-I Characteristics, forward current and Reverse saturation currents, Knee voltage (Cut-in
Voltage), Reverse Breakdown Voltage, Diode current equation, Forward and Reverse Resistance calculations,
Applications of diode.
UNIT-2: Rectifiers and Filters Duration: 8Periods (L: 6 – T: 2)
Rectifier – Definition, Types - Half wave, Full wave rectifiers - Centre tapped, Bridge rectifiers - RMS value,
Average value, PIV, Ripple factor, Voltage regulation, Efficiency of half wave rectifier and full wave rectifiers.
Filters - R, L, C, LC and CLC.
UNIT-3: Clippers and Clampers Duration: 10Periods (L: 7 – T: 3)
Integrator and differentiator circuits using passive elements (R&C), Clipper: Definition, Negative, Positive
clippers, Series, Shunt Clippers, Clamper: Definition, Negative, Positive Clampers. Applications of Clipping and
clamping circuits
UNIT-4: Transistors Duration: 12Periods (L: 9 – T: 3)
Formation and properties of PNP and NPN Transistor-Transistor configurations CB, CE and CC - Input and
Output characteristics. α, β and γ factors-Comparison of CB,CE,CC configurations- Applications of transistor
-Transistor as an amplifier, Thermal runaway, Heat sink - Types of heat sinks.
UNIT-5: Special Semiconductor Diodes Duration: 12Periods (L: 9 – T: 3)
Zener diode Characteristics - Zener breakdown and avalanche breakdown, Voltage Regulator, Tunnel diode-
Characteristics, Applications. Varactor diode - Characteristics, Applications, Schottkey diode -Characteristics,
Applications, Light Emitting Diode (LED), Applications. Photo diode- Principle, Operation and Applications.
UNIT-6: DC Power Supplies Duration: 8Periods (L: 6 – T: 2)
Zener regulator – Series and Shunt IC regulators and specifications of Regulated Power Supplies(RPS)-Inverter,
Uninterruptable Power Supply(UPS), Switched Mode Power Supplies(SMPS), Calculation of voltage regulation,
Ripple factor of DC Power Supply. Design of a Zener regulator circuit for given Line and Load voltages, Power
ratings. 78XX series IC Regulator.
RECOMMENDED BOOKS
205
1. Electronic Devices and Circuits by Salivahanan.
2. Electronic Devices and Circuits by Millman and Halkias.
3. Electronic Devices and Circuits by David A.Bell Prentice hall.
4. Hand book of components for Electronics by Charles A. Harper McGrahills.
5. Printed circuit Boards Design &Technology by Walter C. Boshart TMH.
1. http://elEItrical4u.com/
2. www.elEItronics-tutorials.ws
3. www.nptel.ac.in
1.0 Explain the Formation of PN-Junction Diode
1.1 State the electrical properties of solid state materials.
1.2 Explain the concept of Energy band diagram.
1.3 Sketch energy band diagrams for conductors, Semiconductors, and Insulators.
1.4 List the types of Semiconductors.
1.5 Explain the concept of Doping.
1.6 Distinguish between Intrinsic and extrinsic Semiconductors.
1.7 Describe the formation of P type and N type materials and sketch the energy band diagrams.
1.8 Explain Majority and Minority carriers in P and N Type materials.
1.9 Define Recombination.
1.10 Distinguish between Drift current and Diffusion current.
1.11 Explain the concept of PN-Junction Diode.
1.12 Draw the symbol of PN-Junction Diode.
1.13 Define Biasing.
206
1.14 Explain about forward and reverse biasing.
1.15 Draw the VI-Characteristics of diode in forward and reverse bias configurations.
1.16 Define forward current and reverse saturation currents.
1.17 Define Knee Voltage and Breakdown Voltages.
1.18 Derive Diode current Equation.
1.19 Define forward and reverse bias resistances.
1.20 Explain how Diode acts as a Switch.
2.0. Explain the Constructional features and operation of different types Rectifiers and Filters.
2.1 Define Rectifier.
2.2 List the Types of Rectifiers
2.3 Draw and Explain Half wave Rectifier.
2.4 Draw and Explain Centre tapped type Full wave Rectifier.
2.5 Draw and Explain Bridge type Full wave Rectifier.
2.6 Define a) RMS value b) Average value.
2.7 State the importance of Ripple Factor.
2.8 Explain about various parameters with respect to Rectifiers.
2.9 Compare Rectifiers.
2.10 Define Filter.
2.11 List various Filters.
2.11 Draw the circuit diagram of Rectifier with
a) C Filter; b) L Filter; c) LC Filter; d) CLC Filter
2.12 Explain the working of the above filters.
2.13 Compare all the above Filters.
3.0 Clippers and Clampers
3.1 Define a Clipper.
3.2 Define a Clamper.
3.3 Explain the working of Integrator with diagram.

207
3.4 Describe the working of differentiator with diagram.
3.5 Explain Positive clipper with diagram.
3.6 Explain Negative clipper with diagram.
3.7 Explain series clipper with diagram.
3.8 Explain shunt clipper with diagram.
3.7 Describe combinational Clipping circuits with diagram.
3.8 Explain the working of Positive clamping circuit with diagram.
3.9 Sketch and explain Negative Clamping circuits.
3.10 List the applications of clipping circuits.
3.11 List the applications of clamping circuits.
4.0 Analyze the transistor operation under different configurations and application of
Transistor as an Amplifier
4.1 Explain the formation of Transistor.
4.2 Classify Transistors.
4.3 Draw the symbols of PNP and NPN Transistors.
4.4 Explain the working of PNP and NPN Transistors.
4.5 Draw the different Transistor configurations.
4.6 Identify cut off, saturation and active regions.
4.7 Sketch the input/output characteristics of CB, CC and CE configurations.
4.8 Define alpha, beta and gamma Factors.
4.9 Relate alpha, beta and gamma Factors.
4.10 Write collector current expression in CB, CE and CC modes of Transistors in terms of α, β, I B,
IC, ICBO , ICEO .
4.11 Compare the performance Characteristics of CB,CE and CC Configurations.
4.12 Explain the reason for wide use of CE configuration.
4.13 Describe the working of Transistor as an amplifier (CE configuration).
4.14 Explain the concept of thermal runaway.
4.15 State the need for Heat sink.

208
4.16 List the types of heat sinks.
5.0 Special semi conductor diodes.
5.1 Difference between PN-Junction and Zener Diode.
5.2 Draw the VI-Characteristics of Zener Diode.
5.3 Draw the circuit symbol of Zener Diode.
5.4 Explain the concept of Zener Breakdown.
5.5 Explain the concept of Avalanche Breakdown.
5.6 Explain the working of Zener diode as Voltage regulator.
5.7 Define tunnelling.
5.8 Explain about the Tunnel diode.
5.9 Explain about Varactor Diode.
5.10 Explain about Schottkey Diode.
5.11 Explain about Light Emitting Diode.
5.12 Explain about Photo Diode.
5.13 Draw the symbols of above all Diodes.
5.14 Give one application of each diode.
6.0 Understand the working of DC Power Supplies.
5.1 Explain the necessity of D.C. power supply for Electronic circuits.
5.2 Define Voltage Regulation.
5.3 Explain the need for a filter circuit in power supplies.
5.4 State the need for a regulated power supply.
5.5 List important specifications of Regulated power supply.
5.6 Draw the circuit of a simple Zener regulated DC Power supply.
5.7 Explain the working of Zener regulated power supply.
5.8 Determine the Resistance value and wattage of Series Resistor, Zener diode for a given Input
voltage, load voltage and load current. (Problems)
5.9 Explain about Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS).
209
5.10 Explain about Switched Mode Power Supply (SMPS).
5.11 Calculate of Voltage regulation, Ripple factor of DC Power Supply for given Input Voltage.
(Problems)
5.12 Design a Zener regulator circuit for given Line and Load voltages, Power ratings. (Problems)
3. Visit nearby Industry to familiarize with fabrication techniques
4. Analyze the connections in the UPS available in the Institution facility
5. Quiz
6. Group discussion
7. Surprise test

Basic knowledge
Communication
Lifelong learning
Discipline Knowledge
Engineering Tools
Ethics
Linked PO
Experiments and
Environment &
Individual and Team

sustainability
practice
work
CO PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO
10
CO1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1,2,3,4,5,10
CO2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1,2,3,4,5,10
CO3 2 2 2 2 2 2 1,2,3,4,5,10
CO4 2 2 2 2 2 2 1,2,3,4,5,10
CO5 2 2 2 2 2 2 1,2,3,4,5,10
CO6 2 2 2 2 2 2 1,2,3,4,5,10
210
Internal Evaluation
Test Units Marks
Assignment 1 5
Seminars 1 5
Total 60
Sl.No Description Level No of Marks for Choice Total Marks

Questions each question
MID SEM-I EXAM
1 Unit-I 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-II 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM-II EXAM
211
1 Unit-III 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-IV 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)
The length of answer for each question framed in respect of Part-A, B&C shall not exceed ¼ of a page, 1
page and 2 pages respectively

Questions to be set for SEE

Unit No
R U A
I
Q1 Q9(a) Q9(a)
II
III
Q2 Q10(a) Q10(a)
IV
Q4
Q5,Q Q9(b), Q9(b),
V
6 Q11(a), Q11(b) Q11(a), Q11(b)
Q3
Q7,Q Q10(b), Q10(b),
VI
8 Q12(a), Q12(b) Q12(a), Q12(b)
MODEL QUESTION PAPER

BOARD DIPLOMA MID-SEMESTER-I EXAMINATION (C-18)
DEIE- II SEMESTER EXAMINATION
18EI-205C- SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES
Time: 1 Hour ____________ Max Marks: 20
PART –A
212
Answer all the questions 4X1 =4
1. Define Doping.
2. Define biasing.
3. Define Rectifier.
4. List various Filters.
PART –B
Answer any two questions. Each question carries three marks. 2X3 =6
5. (a) Explain Majority and Minority carriers in P and N Type materials.

(or)
(b) Explain the concept of Energy band diagram.
6. (a) Draw and explain Half wave Rectifier.

(or)
(b) Draw the circuit diagram of Rectifier with CLC filter.
PART –C
Answer any two questions. Each question carries five marks. 2X5 =10
7. (a) Explain the working of PN junction diode with various biasing voltages.
(or)
(b) Distinguish between Drift and Diffusion current.
8. (a) Explain how diode acts as a switch.

(or)
(b) Draw and explain the circuit diagram of Full wave with bridge rectifier and
Calculate the Ripple factor.
213
BOARD DIPLOMA MID-SEMESTER-II EXAMINATION (C-18)
Time: 1 Hour ____________ Max Marks: 20

PART –A
1. Define clipper.
2. Define clamper.
3. Classify Transistors.
4. State the need for heat sink.
PART –B
Answer any two questions. Each question carries three marks. 2X3 =6
5. (a) Explain the working of Integrator with diagram.

(or)
(b) List the applications of clipping circuits.
6. (a) State the concept of Thermal runaway.

(or)
(b) Draw the CB Transistor configuration.
PART –C
Answer any two questions. Each question carries five marks. 2X5 =10
7. (a) Explain Negative clipper with diagram.

(or)
(b) Explain the working of Positive clamping circuit with diagram.
8. (a) Explain the working of PNP and NPN Transistors.

(or)
(b) Describe the working of Transistor as an amplifier (CE configuration).

214
Time: 2 Hrs ___________________ Max Marks: 40
PART –A
1. Define Doping.
2. Classify Transistors.
3. Define tunnelling.
4. List various Filters.
5. Draw the circuit symbol of Zener Diode.
6. Give one application of photo diode diode.
7. Define Voltage Regulation.
8. State the need for a regulated power supply.
PART –B
Answer any four questions. Each question carries three marks. 4X3 =12
9. (a) Explain Majority and Minority carriers in P and N Type materials.
(or)
(b) Explain about the Tunnel diode.
10. (a) Explain the working of Integrator with diagram.
(or)
(b) Explain the need for a filter circuit in power supplies.
11. (a) Explain the concept of Zener Breakdown.
(or)
(b) Differentiate between PN-Junction and Zener Diode.

215
12. (a) List important specifications of Regulated power supply.
(or)
(b) Explain the necessity of D.C. power supply for Electronic circuits.
PART –C
Answer any four questions. Each question carries five marks. 4X5 =20
13. (a) Explain the working of PN junction diode with various biasing voltages.
(or)
(b) Explain about Varactor Diode and Schottkey Diode.
14. (a) Explain Negative clipper with diagram.
(or)
(b) Explain about Light Emitting Diode and Photo Diode.
15. (a) Explain the working of Zener diode as Voltage regulator.
(or)
(b) Explain the concept of Zener Breakdown and Avalanche Breakdown.
16.(a) Explain about Switched Mode Power Supply (SMPS).
(or)
(b) Explain about Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS).
Advanced Engineering Drawing
Course Title : Advanced Engineering Drawing Course Code 18EI-206P

Semester II Course Group practical
216
Teaching Scheme in
15:00:30 Credits 1.5
Periods (L :P)
Total Contact
Methodology Lecture + practice 45
Periods :
***This Course is Common to all Programs of Diploma in Level Offered by State Board of Technical
Education – Telangana State
Prerequisites: Knowledge of Basic Engineering Drawing and Clear visualization and sound pictorial
intelligence to learn this course.
This Course is aimed at developing basic graphic skills so as to enable them to use these skills in
preparation of engineering drawings, their reading and interpretation.
Course Outcomes (CO)
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to attain the following Course
Outcomes (CO):
Course Outcome
CO1 Apply the principles of Projection of solids also draw the projections of solids.
Appreciate the need of Sectional views also draw the sectional views and true sections
CO2
of the engineering components.
Escalate the need of auxiliary views and draw the auxiliary views of the given
CO3
engineering components.
Gainthe knowledge of Isometric views of engineering components also draw the

CO4
isometric views of given components.
Grasp the knowledge and draw the development of surfaces of different engineering
CO5
components
Course Contents
1.0 Projection of solids (09 Hours)
Projection of regular solids
(a) Axis perpendicular to one of the planes
(b) Axis parallel to VP and inclined to HP and vice versa.
2.0 Sectional views (06 Hours)
217
Need for drawing sectional views – what is a sectional view - Location of cutting plane – Purpose of
cutting plane line – Selection of cutting plane to give maximum information (vertical and offset planes) -
Hatching – Section of regular solids inclined to one plane and parallel to other plane
3.0 Auxiliary views (06 Hours)
Need for drawing auxiliary views -Explanation of the basic principles of drawing an auxiliary views -
explanation of reference plane and auxiliary plane -Partial auxiliary view.
4.0 Pictorial Drawings (15 Hours)
Brief description of different types of pictorial drawing viz., Isometric, oblique, and perspective and their
use - Isometric drawings: Iso axis, angle between them, meaning of visual distortion in dimensions - Need
for an isometric scale, difference between Isometric scale and ordinary scale difference between Isometric
view and Isometric projection - Isometric and non-Isometric lines -Isometric drawing of common
features like rectangles, circular shapes, non-isometric lines - Use of box and offset methods.
5.0 Development of Surfaces (09 Hours)
Need for preparing development of surface with reference to sheet metal work -Concept of true length of
a line with reference to its orthographic projection when the line is (i) parallel to the plane of projection
(ii) inclined to one principal and parallel to the other -Development of simple solids like cubes, prisms,
cylinders, cones, pyramid (sketches only) -Types of development: Parallel line and radial line development
-Procedure of drawing development, drawings of trays, funnels, elbow pipes and rectangular ducts.
Reference Books
Engineering Drawing by Kapildev – (Asian Publisher)
Engineering Drawing by BasantAgarwal& C.M Agarwal - ( McGraw-hill)
Engineering Drawing by N.D.Bhatt. (Charotar Publishing House Pvt. Ltd.)
A Textbook on Engineering Drawing by P. Kannaiah, K. L. Narayana, K. Venkata Reddy
1.0 Apply Principles of Projection of solids
1.1. Draw the projections of solids to axis of solids parallel to one plane.
1.2. Draw the projections of solids to axis of solid inclined to other plane.
2.0 Appreciate the need of Sectional Views
218
2.1 Explain the need to draw sectional views.
2.2 Select the section plane for a given component to reveal maximum information.
2.3 Explain the positions of section plane with reference planes
2.4 Differentiate between true shape and apparent shape of section
2.5 Draw sectional views and true sections of regular solids discussed in 6.0
2.6 Apply principles of hatching.
3.0 Understand the need of auxiliary views
3.1 State the need of Auxiliary views for a given engineering drawing.
3.2 Draw the auxiliary views of a given engineering component
3.3 Differentiate between auxiliary view and apparent view
4.0 Prepare pictorial drawings
4.1 State the need of pictorial drawings.
4.2 Differentiate between isometric scale and true scale.
4.3 Prepare Isometric views for the given orthographic drawings.
5.0 Interpret Development of surfaces of different solids
5.1 State the need for preparing development drawing.
5.2 Prepare development of simple engineering objects (cubes, prisms, cylinders, cones,
pyramid) using parallel line and radial line method.
5.3 Prepare development of surface of engineering components like trays,funnel, 90 0 elbow &
rectangular duct.
Note: Students have to get Minimum 50% of the total (i.e. 20 Marks).
Linked Program
Course Outcome CL Objectives
(PO)
Apply the principles of Projection of solids also

CO1 R/U/A 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10
draw the projections of solids.
Appreciate the need of Sectional views also draw

CO2 the sectional views and true sections of the R/U/A 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10
engineering components.
219
Escalate the need of auxiliary views and draw the
CO3 auxiliary views of the given engineering R/U/A 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10
components.
Gainthe knowledge of Isometric views of

CO4 engineering components also draw the isometric R/U/A 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10
views of given components.
Grasp the knowledge and draw the development of

CO5 R/U/A 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10
surfaces of different engineering components
Program Outcomes (PO)

Course Name
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Advanced
Engineering 3 3 3 2 -- -- -- -- 3 3
Drawing
Level 3- Highly Addressed, Level 2-Moderately Addressed, Level 1-Low Addressed
MID SEM-I EXAM

5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM –II EXAM
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
220

Sl No Unit No.
R U A
1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 II
3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 IV
9(b) 13(b)
4
5 V 5, 6 11(a) 15(a)

11(b) 15(b)
3
10(b) 14(b)
6 VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)

12(b) 16(b)
Advanced Computer Aided Drafting
Advanced Computer Aided

Drafting
Semester II Course Group Practical
Teaching Scheme in
15:00:30 Credits 1.5
Periods(L:T:P)
Total Contact
Methodology Tutorials + Practice 45
Periods :
221
This course requires the Basic CAD Skills and concepts of engineering drawing
Course Outcomes
CO1 Significance of Layers. Create and assign properties to layers and modify layers
CO2 Importance and advantages of blocks. Use of standard blocks and user defined blocks
CO3 Need of solid modeling and various methods of solid modeling with different surfaces
CO4 Create and modify 3D drawings
Course Contents
UNIT -1 Duration: 06 periods (T:1 + P:4hrs)
Organize the information on layers
Setting a current layer, layers color, line type, line weight, print style locking and unlocking of layers, the
layer visibility and layer printing. Setting of current line type. The loading of additional line types,
creating and naming of line type, editing of line type.
Use the Blocks, Attributes and External references to manage the drawing blocks
The purpose of a block, creating a block, inserting a block, redefining a block, exploding a block
Attribute
Editing attribute definitions, attaching attribute to blocks. Editing attributes attached to blocks,
Extracting attributes information.
3.0 Viewing entities in three dimensions
Setting a new viewing direction
Dynamically setting a view direction
3.1 Creation of three-dimensional entities using different methods
Drawing of two dimensional entities in three dimensional space.
Converting two dimensional planar entities into three dimensional entities by applying elevation and
thickness.
222
Converting two dimensional planar entities into three dimensional entities by revolving or extruding.
Creation of three-dimensional faces, rectangular meshes, ruled surface meshes, extruded surface meshes,
revolved surface meshes, three dimensional entities such as boxes, Cylinders, Cones, Spheres, wedges,
torus, Regions, extruded solids, revolved solids, composite solids, intersect solids.
3.2 Editing in three dimensions
Rotating in three dimensions, Array in three dimensions (Rectangular and polar).
Mirroring in three dimensions, aligning in three dimensions.
3.3 Editing of three dimensional solids
Sectioning and Slicing of solids, hiding, shading and rendering.
3.4 Selection of material from library
Enable the material library, editing materials and material library.
UNIT- 4
Application of above three units
Recommended Books
1. Auto cad by George Omura
2. 4MCAD User Guide- IntelliCAD Technology Consortium
Specific learning outcomes
1.0 Organize the information on layers
1.1 Explain the need and importance of Layers.
1.2 Practice creating new layer, naming the layer and assigning properties like Layer colour, Line
type and line weight and setting the current layer
1.3 Practice the locking and unlocking of layers
1.4 Practice the Freezing and thawing of layers
1.5 Practice the layer visibility and layer printing
1.6 Practice the loading of additional line types
223
2.0 Use the Blocks, Attributes and External references to manage the Drawing
2.1 Define a block
2.2 Explain the purpose of a block
2.3 Practice the creating a block
2.4 Practice the inserting a block
2.5 Practice the redefining a block
2.6 Practice the exploding a block
2.7 Define an Attribute
2.8 Practice the editing attribute definitions
2.9 Practice the attaching attribute to blocks
2.10 Edit attributes attached to blocks
2.11 Extract attributes information
2.12 Define external reference
2.13 Practice the Attaching, Removing, and Reloading of external references
2.14 Practice the Binding, Clipping and changing the path of external references
3.0 Understand the concepts of 3D
View entities in three dimensions
3.1.1 To set a new viewing direction
3.1.2 To dynamically set a view direction
3.2 Create three-dimensional entities using different methods
3.2.1 Draw two dimensional entities in three dimensional space.
3.2.2 Convert two dimensional planar entities into three dimensional entities by applying
elevation and thickness.
3.2.3 Convert two dimensional planar entities into three dimensional entities by revolving or
extruding.
3.2.4 Create three-dimensional faces.
3.2.5 Create rectangular meshes.
3.2.6 Create ruled surface meshes.
3.2.7 Create extruded surface meshes.
224
3.2.8 Create revolved surface meshes.
3.2.9 Create three dimensional entities such as boxes, Cylinders, Cones, Spheres, wedges, torus,
Regions.
3.2.10 Create extruded solids.
3.2.11 Create revolved solids.
3.2.12 Create composite solids.
3.2.13 Create intersect solids.
3.3 Editing in three dimensions
3.3.1 Rotate in three dimensions
3.3.2 Array in three dimensions (Rectangular and polar)
3.3.3 Mirror in three dimensions
3.3.4 Align in three dimensions
3.4 Edit three dimensional solids
3.4.1 Practice Sectioning and Slicing solids
3.4.2 Practice hiding, shading and rendering
4 Practice applications on above units
Exercise Key components

 Importance of layers
Layers  Creation of new layers and controlling properties of
layers
 Create, insert and explode a block
Working with blocks  Attach attribute to blocks
 Edit and extract attributes attached to blocks
 Set a new viewing direction
View entities in three dimensions
 Set dynamically view direction
 Create three-dimensional faces
 Create rectangular meshes, ruled surface
meshes, extruded surface meshes, revolved
Create three-dimensional entities
surface meshes
 Create three dimensional entities such as boxes,
Cylinders.
Edit in three dimensions  Rotate in three dimensions
 Array in three dimensions (Rectangular and
polar)
225
 Mirror in three dimensions
 Align in three dimensions
 Practice Sectioning and Slicing solids

Edit three dimensional solids
 Practice hiding, shading and rendering
Practice the selection of material from  Enable material library

library  Edit materials and material library
Cognizant Teaching
Course Outcome Linked PO
Level Hours
Significance of Layers. Create and assign
CO1 U/A 1,2,3,9,10 15
properties to layers and modify layers
Importance and advantages of blocks. Use of
CO2 U/A 1,2,3,9,10 9
standard blocks and user defined blocks
Need of solid modeling and various methods of
CO3 U/A 1,2,3,9,10 6
solid modeling with different surfaces
CO4 Create and modify 3D drawings A 1,2,3,10 15
MID SEM-I EXAM

5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM –II EXAM
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
226
Sl No Unit No.
R U A
1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 II
3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 IV
9(b) 13(b)
4
5 V 5, 6 11(a) 15(a)

11(b) 15(b)
3
10(b) 14(b)
6 VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)

12(b) 16(b)

Semiconductor Devices lab

Practice
Semester II Course Group :practical
Teaching Scheme in
15:00:30 Credits 1.5
periods (L:T:P)
Total Contact
Methodology Lecture + Practical
periods : : 45 Periods
227
Pre requisites
This course requires the basic knowledge on Basic Electronics lab.
Course Outcomes
Understand and analyze the working of Junction diode and Zener diode and plot the
CO1 :
Characteristics.
CO2 : Analyze the working of Rectifiers and Filters.
CO3 : Determine Clippers and Clampers circuits.
Understand and analyze the working of Transistor in CB, CE and CC modes and plot the
CO4 :
Characteristics.
CO5 : Identify different DC power supplies. Understand the working of Rectifiers.
Unit Questions for SEE

Unit name Periods
No Handling Manipulation Precision
1. PN-Diode and Zener diode characteristics 6 3 3 3
2 Rectifiers and Filters 12 3 2 1
3 Clippers and Clampers

9 3 1 2
4 Transistor Amplification Factors 12 6 3 3
5. DC Power supplies and Rectifiers 6 6 4 2
228
Total 45 21 13 11
Course Contents
I. Diode Characteristics
1. Conduct an experiment using PN-Junction diode and plot forward bias characteristics.
2. Conduct an experiment using PN- Junction diode and plot reverse bias characteristics.
3. Conduct an experiment using Zener diode and plot forward bias characteristics.
4. Conduct an experiment using Zener diode and plot reverse bias characteristics.
II. Rectifiers and Filters
1. Conduct an experiment of half wave Rectifier and draw the input and output wave forms.
Calculate the ripple factor and efficiency of the rectifier from the output wave forms.
2. Conduct an experiment of Full wave Centre-tapped Rectifier and draw the input and output
wave forms. Calculate the ripple factor and efficiency of the rectifier from the output wave
forms.
3. Conduct an experiment of Full wave bridge Rectifier and draw the input and output wave
forms. Calculate the ripple factor and efficiency of the rectifier from the output wave forms.
4. Conduct an experiment of half wave Rectifier with following Filter and draw the input and
output wave forms. Calculate the ripple factor and efficiency of the rectifier with filters.
a) C-filter; b) L-Filter; c) LC-Filter; d) CLC-Filter
5. Conduct an experiment of Fullwave Rectifier with following filter and draw the input and
III. Clippers and Clampers
1. Construct a Positive Clipper circuit using diode, resistor with and without D.C. biasing voltage
and draw its input and output wave forms.
229
2. Construct a Negative Clipper circuit using diode, resistor with and without D.C. biasing voltage
3. Construct a Positive Clamper circuit using diode, D.C. reference voltage and draw its input and
output wave forms.
4. Construct a Negative Clamper circuit using diode, D.C. reference voltage and draw its input and
output wave forms.
IV. Transistor Characteristics
1. Conduct an experiment using NPN/PNP transistor in CB mode and plot input characteristics.
2. Conduct an experiment using NPN/PNP transistor in CB mode and plot output

characteristics.
3. Conduct an experiment using NPN/PNP transistor in CE mode and plot input characteristics.
4. Conduct an experiment using NPN/PNP transistor in CE mode and plot output

characteristics.
5. Conduct an experiment using NPN/PNP transistor in CC mode and plot input characteristics.
7. Construct a Switch circuit using transistor.
V. DC power supplies and Rectifiers
8. Identify different DC power supplies and know its ratings and specifications.
9. Design a Voltage regulator using Zener Diode.
230
1. Electrical Technology Volume 1 By BL.Theraja
2. Electronic Devices and Circuits By David A.Bell Prentice hall
3. Principles of Electronics ,V.K. Mehta &Rohit Mehta, S. Chand TechnicalPublication
1. Do Market survey on List of Electronic components available in the market and collect the
following information like name of the electronic component, specifications, Price etc. The student
should submit a handwritten report. Documents have to be maintained as a record.
2. Take Quiz tests / assignments in Semiconductor device experiments. Documents have to be

maintained as a record.
3. Do power point presentations on Electronic components. Documents have to be maintained as a

record.
1. http://electrical4u.com/
3. www.nptel.ac.in
231
Communication
Engineering Tools
Lifelong learning
Basic knowledge
Knowledge
Ethics
Linked
Environment &
Experiments and
Individual and Team

Discipline
sustainability
PO
practice
work
CO PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10
CO1 2 2 2 2 2 - - - - - 1,2,3,4,5
CO2 2 2 2 2 2 - - - - - 1,2,3,4,5
CO3 2 2 2 2 2 - - - - - 1,2,3,4,5
CO4 2 2 2 2 2 - - - - - 1,2,3,4,5
CO5 2 2 2 2 2 - - - - - 1,2,3,4,5
Internal Evaluation
Test Units Marks
Mid Sem 1 1, 2 and 3 20
Mid Sem 2 4,5 20
Internal Evaluation Attendance (5) 20
Attitude of students towards practicing

experiments (10)
Prompt submission of records in time (5)
Total 60
232
DEIE III Semester Practical Examination
Model Question Paper MID SEM-1
Course Code: 18EI-208P Duration: 1 hr
Course Name: Semiconductor Devices lab Practice Max.Marks:20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-Instructions to the Candidate:
(i) Answer any One of the following Questions.
(ii) Record the results on a graph sheet if required, and conclude your observation of the experiment
(iii) Draw the circuit diagram for illustration; choose appropriate values when not mentioned in the question
forms.
233
Model Question Paper MID SEM-II
Course Code: 18EI-208P Duration: 1Hr
234
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(i)Answer any One of the following Questions.
(ii)Record the results on a graph sheet if required, and conclude your observation of the experiment
output wave forms.
output wave forms.

characteristics.

characteristics.
Model Question Paper Semester End Exam
235
Course Code: 18EI-208P Duration: 2 hrs
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
forms.

236
output wave forms.
output wave forms.
characteristics.
characteristics.
Applied Science Lab Practice (Physics Lab + Chemistry Lab)
237
Course Title Applied Science Lab Course Code 18EI-209P
Practice (Physics Lab +
Chemistry Lab)
Semester II Course Group Practical
Teaching Scheme in 15:00:30 Credits 1.5

Periods (L:T:P)
Methodology Lecture + Practical Total Contact Periods 45
Physics Lab – 209P(A)
Pre requisites: Knowledge of basic concepts of High School Science, Basic Mathematics
Course objectives: To provide practical knowledge about the basics of Physics instrumentation and
calculations/measurements.
1. Introduction to Physics practical and its importance, safety precautions in maintenance of

equipment in the laboratory.
3. Follow of Do’s and Don’ts.
4. Maintenance of data in manual and record book.
6. Strictly following of instructions given from time to time by the lecturer-in-charge.
7. Demonstration of each experiment by the lecturer in charge.
Conduct of an experiment: 2 Periods
Course outcomes:
On successful completion of the course, the student will have ability to:
1: Determine the Focal length and focal power of convex lenses using U-V and
graphical method.
2: Determine the value of acceleration due to gravity using Simple Pendulum and verify
with L-T2graph.
238
3: Determine the velocity of sound in air at room temperature.
4: Determine the refractive index of a solid using travelling microscope.
5: Practice the mapping of magnetic lines of force-locating neutral points.
References:
3. Basic Applied Physics – R.K. Gaur
4. Laboratory manual for class XI and XII - NCERT
PHYSICS PRACTICALS
List of experiments
Semester II
1. Convex lens-Determination of Focal length and focal power using U-V and graphical method.
2: Simple Pendulum-Determination of the value of acceleration due to gravity and verify
with L-T2graph.
3: Resonance apparatus-Determination of velocity of sound in air at room temperature .
4: Travelling microscope-Determination of refractive index of a solid.
5: Practice the mapping of magnetic lines of force-location of neutral points
Course Delivery:
The course will be delivered through lectures, class room interaction, group discussions, graded exercises,
demonstration and practice.
Conduction of experiments: 2 periods/Experiment.
Student must perform experiment individually under the supervision of the lecturer-in charge.
On successful completion of the course, the student will have the ability to attain below Course outcomes
(CO):
239
CL Linked Teaching
Course Outcomes
POs Periods
CO Focal length and Focal power of convex lens U/A 1,2,3,8,9
1 (Separate & Combination) L:P::1:2
CO Acceleration due to gravity using simple U/A 1,2,3,8,9
2 pendulum L:P::1:2
CO Velocity of sound in air – (Resonance U/A 1,2,3,8,9
3 method) L:P::1:2
CO Refractive index of solid using traveling U/A 1,2,3,8,9
4 microscope L:P::1:2
CO Mapping of magnet lines of force-locating U/A 1,2,3,8,9
5 neutral points L:P::1:2
CO Related the answers to the oral questions
6
Cognitive levels (CL): U=Understand, A=Application
Specific learning outcomes:
Name of the Experiment

Competencies Key competencies
1. Focal length and Focal power of  Calculate the focal

 Fix the object distance
convex lens (Separate & length and power of
Combination)  Find the Image distance
convex lens
 Calculate the focal length
 Draw u-v and 1/u – 1/v
and power of convex lens
graph
and combination of convex
lenses
 Draw u-v and 1/u – 1/v
curves
2. Simple pendulum – acceleration due to  Fix the simple pendulum to  Find the time for
gravity – length of seconds pendulum the stand number of oscillations
 Adjust the length of  Find the time period
pendulum  Calculate the
 Find the time for number of acceleration due to
oscillations gravity
 Find the time period  Draw l-T and l-T2 graph
 Calculate the acceleration
due to gravity
 Draw l-T and l-T2 graph
240
3. Velocity of sound in air  Adjust the reservoir
–Resonance method level
 Arrange the resonance  Find the first and second
apparatus resonanting lengths
 Adjust the reservoir level  Calculate velocity of
for booming sound sound
 Find the first and second  Calculate velocity of
resonanting lengths sound at 00 C
 Calculate velocity of sound
4. Refractive index of solid using  Find the least count of  Read the scale
traveling microscope vernier on microscope  Calculate the refractive
 Place the graph paper index of glass slab
below microscope
 Read the scale
 Calculate the refractive
index of glass slab
5. Mapping of magnet lines of  Draw magnetic meridian

Force – neutral points  Place the bar magnet in  Draw magnetic lines of
NN(North pole of bar force
magnet pointing North) and  Locate the neutral
NS (South pole of bar points
magnet pointing North) along equatorial and
directions axial lines
 Draw magnetic lines of force
 Locate the neutral points
along equatorial and axial
lines
241
EXAMINATION & EXPERIMENTS
S.NO EXAMINATION EXPERIMENTS
1 MIDSEM-I EXPERIMENT NO 1 & 2
2 MIDSEM-II EXPERIMENT NO 3 & 4
3 SEMESTER END EXAMINATION EXPERIMENT NO 1,2,3,4 and 5
242
Scheme of Valuation of SEE
S.No Particulars Marks
1. Objective/Aim 01
2. Apparatus/Equipment 02
3. Observations 02
4. Principle including formula 02
5. Experiment (Tabular form, readings, etc) 05
6. Calculation and Result 05
7. Viva Voce 03
Total 20
Chemistry Lab – 209P(B)
Prerequisite:
Knowledge of basic concepts of chemistry of secondary education.
Course Objectives:
To provide practical knowledge about the basics of volumetric analysis of chemical compounds.
Course Outcomes:
On successful completion of the course, the student will have ability to attain CO:

Periods

the mohr’s salt in the
given solution
CO2 Determination of acidity , U/A 1,2,3,8 L:P ::1:2

alkalinity and pH of given
water samples/
solutions.

the chlorides in the given
solution.
CO4 Relate the answers to the U/A

oral questions
U = Understand, A = Application
Course Delivery:
The course will be delivered through lectures, classroom interaction, group discussion, demonstration and
practicals.
Conduction of experiments: Lecture 1 period + Experiment 2 periods..
Student must conduct experiment individually under the supervision of the staff-in-charge.
243
8. Introduction of chemistry practical and its importance, safety precautions in maintenance of

cleanliness and orderliness of chemicals in the laboratory.
10. Follow of DO’s and Don’ts.
11. Maintenance of data in record book.
13. Strict following of instructions given from time to time by the staff-in- charge.
14. Demonstration of each experiment by the staff in charge.
Course content
Volumetric Analysis: (22.5 Periods)
Volumetric analysis by Titrimetric Method:-
Volumetric Analysis -Titration – Standard Solutions- Concentration of solutions-
Indicators- acid base indicators- selection of indicators-endpoint of titration-Neutralization.
List of experiments:
1. Estimation of Mohr’s salt by using 0.02M potassium permanganate
solution.
2. Determination of acidity of water sample by using 0.02N NaOH solution.
3. Determination of alkalinity of water sample by using 0.02N H2SO4 solution.
4. Estimate the chloride content present in water sample by using 0.0141N
AgNO3 solution.
5. Find out the pH of the given solution by using pH meter.
1. Estimate Mohr’s salt by using standard potassium permanganate solution.
2. Determine the partial and total acidity of water sample by using 0.02N
NaOH solution.
3. Determine the partial and total alkalinity of water sample by using 0.02N
244
H2SO4 solution.
AgNO3 solution.
Reference Books:
4. Vogel’s Inorganic Qualitative and Quantitative Analysis.
5. Practical chemistry by O.P.Pande & others.
6. Qualitative and quantitative analysis by Alex.
Scheme of Valuation for MID I & II and SEE
Sl. No. Particulars Marks
1 Identification of apparatus/equipment/chemical 2
compounds/tools/etc.
2 Writing Procedure 5
3 Conducting of experiment 4
4 Observation and Results 6
5 Viva-voice 3
Total 20
245
C-18 COMMON-209P

MIDSEM – I
APPLIED SCIENCE LAB PRACTICE
1. Determine the Focal length and focal power of given convex lense using U-V method.
2. Determine the Focal length and focal power of given convex lense by U-V graph method.
3. Determine the value of acceleration due to gravity at your place sing Simple Pendulum.
4. Determine the value of acceleration due to gravity at your place sing Simple Pendulum by L-T 2
graph.
5. Estimate the amount of Mohr’s salt present in the given 500 ml of solution
by using 0.02M potassium permanganate solution.
6. Determine the partial acidity of water sample by using 0.02N NaOH solution.
7. Determine the total acidity of water sample by using 0.02N NaOH solution
246
C-18 COMMON-209P

MIDSEM – II
1. Determine the velocity of sound in air at room temperature by resonance method.
2. Determine the refractive index of a solid using travelling microscope.
3. Determine the partial alkalinity of water sample by using 0.02N H 2SO4 solution.
4. Determine the total alkalinity of water sample by using 0.02N H 2SO4 solution
AgNO3 solution
247
C18 – COMMON 209P

MODEL PAPER
COMMON – II SEMESTER EXAMINATION
(2) Each question carries TWENTY marks.
1. Determine the Focal length and focal power of given convex lens using U-V method.
2. Determine the Focal length and focal power of given convex lens by U-V graph method.
3. Determine the value of acceleration due to gravity at your place sing Simple Pendulum.
4. Determine the value of acceleration due to gravity at your place sing Simple Pendulum by L-T 2
graph.
5. Determine the velocity of sound in air at room temperature by resonance method.
6. Determine the refractive index of a solid using travelling microscope.
7. Draw magnetic lines of force around a bar magnet placed in NN position of earth’s magnetic field
and locate neutral points.
8. Draw magnetic lines of force around a bar magnet placed in NS position of earth’s magnetic field
and locate neutral points.
248
1. Estimate the amount of Mohr’s salt present in the given one litre of solution
by using 0.02M KMnO4 solution.
2. Determine the partial acidity of water sample by using 0.02N NaOH solution.
3. Determine the total acidity of water sample by using 0.02N NaOH solution
4. Determine the partial alkalinity of water sample by using 0.02N H 2SO4 solution.
5. Determine the total alkalinity of water sample by using 0.02N H 2SO4 solution
AgNO3 solution
249
INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY LAB PRACTICE
Course Title : INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY Course Code :18EI-210P

LAB PRACTICE Course Group :Practical
Semester : II Credits :1.5
Teaching Scheme in Periods (L:T:P) : 15:00:30 Total Contact Periods : 45
Type of course : Tutorial + Practical SEE : 40 Marks
CIE : 60 Marks
Prerequisites
Knowledge of Computer basics and DOS
Course Outcome
On successful completion of the course, the students will be able to attain below Course Outcome (CO):
Course Outcome CL Linked PO Practical hrs

CO1 Demonstrate skills using spreadsheet software A 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 15
CO2 Demonstrate skills using presentation software A 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 15
CO3 Demonstrate skills using database software A 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 15
Total Sessions 45
Legends: R = Remember U= Understand; A= Apply and above levels (Bloom’s revised taxonomy)
Course Content
Spread Sheet
1. Open MS-Excel and identify the components on the screen
2. Create a Worksheet in MS-Excel and save it in .xls or .xlsx format
3. Inserting column and row in Excel
4. Creation of new worksheet in the existing Excel Book file
5. Generate a Chart using the data in Excel-worksheet
6. Automate calculations in a worksheet using formula
7. Sort and filter data in a worksheet
8. Protecting a worksheet, working with multiple sheets

250
9.
Presentation Software
10. Create a simple Power point presentation for a small topic and saving in .ppt or pptx format
11. Inserting a new slide in the existing PowerPoint file
12. Inserting chart or image in a PowerPoint slide
13. Exercise with animation and sound features in PowerPoint
14. Exercise with Rehearse Timings feature in PowerPoint
15. Exercise in printing the PowerPoint file in (a) Slides (b) Handouts
Database Management System
16. Create a table for given data and save in .mdb or .accdb format
17. Add, Delete and rename fields
18. Use the Primary key field
19. Enter and edit data
20. Use Relationships option
21. Create forms
22. Modify and save forms
23. Create and use queries
24. Sort data
25. Display data
26. Create and print reports
Resources:
1. Computer Fundamentals Concepts, Systems, Application, D.P.Nagapal, S.Chand
Publication, RP-2014, ISBN: 81-219-2388-3
2. http://www.tutorialsforopenoffice.org/
3. http://www.libreoffice.org/get-help/documentation/
Composition of Educational Components:

251
Questions for CIE and SEE will be designed to evaluate the various educational components (Bloom’s
taxonomy) such as:
Sl. Bloom’s Category %

No.
1 Remembrance 20
2 Understanding 20
3 Application 60
Mapping Course Outcomes with Program Outcomes:
(Course Outcome linkage to Cognitive Level)
Course Outcome Experiment Linked Linked PO CL Practical

Sessions
CO Demonstrate skills using 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 A 15
1 spreadsheet software
CO Demonstrate skills using 9,10,11,12,13,14 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 A 15
2 presentation software
CO Demonstrate skills using 15,16,17,18,19,20,21, 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 A 15
3 database software 22,23,24,25
U-Understanding; A-application/ Analysis; App-Application
Level 3- Highly Addressed, Level 2-Moderately Addressed, Level 1-Low Addressed.
Course Delivery
The course will be delivered through tutorial of one hour and one & half hours of hands on practice per
week.
Suggested Student Activities:
1. Create a spreadsheet for the class
2. Create power point presentation for a course
3. Create a database for the class
Format for Student Activity Assessment
Internal Assesment
252
Activity Marks
Writing the experiment, record evaluation 30
Execution of the given experiment 20
Viva-voce 10
Total 60
Model Question Bank
Course Title: INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY LAB PRACTICE Course Code: 18EI-210P
1. Using Spreadsheet Application, create a worksheet with five columns. Enter tenrecords and find
the sum of all columns using auto sum feature.
2. You have a monthly income of Rs.10000. Your monthly expenditures are Rent- Rs3000, Food- Rs.
1500, Electricity- Rs.100, Phone- Rs. 150, and Cable TV-Rs. 200.
3. Prepare a worksheet with the Monthly Income, the Monthly Expenditures listed and summed,
monthly savings amount (what’s left over each month) calculated, and the amount saved per day
(assuming 30 days in a month). Use Spreadsheet Application.
4. Using Spreadsheet Application, create a worksheet containing the pay details(containing Basic
pay, DA, HRA ,Other Allowance , Deductions- PF, PT, Insurance, Gross and Net salary) of the
employees using formulas.
5. Using Spreadsheet Application, create a Simple Bar Chart to highlight the results of your institute
for three years.
6. Using Spreadsheet Application, create a Pie Chart for a sample data and give legends.
7. Using presentation tool, Create a simple Presentation consisting of 4-5 slides aboutI/O Devices.
8. Create a presentation about a book containing Title, Author, Publisher and Contents.
253
9. Create an automated (timings & animation) Presentation with five slides aboutdifferent Models of
Computers. Use Presentation tool
10. Create a table for given data and save in .mdb or .accdb format
11. Create a database for the class
12. Add, Delete and rename fields in a database management system
13. Demonstrate the Use of Primary key field in database management system
14. Enter and edit data in database management system
15. Demonstrate the use of Relationships option in database management system
16. Create forms in database management system
17. Modify and save forms of database in database management system
18. Create and use queries in database management system
19. Sort data in database management system
20. Display data in database management system
21. Create and print reports of database in database management system
Excellent: 5 Marks, Good: 4 Marks, Satisfactory: 3 Marks, Needs improvement: 2 Marks, Unsatisfactory:
1 Mark
Note:
(1) Along with every activity the rubrics table should be given to the student for his information
about the criterion of assessment.
(2) As a record of the activity at least Rubric sheet for each student for every activity at least
Rubric sheet for each student as be preserved as a document.

Unsatisfactory Developing Satisfactory Good Excellent Student
Dimension
1 2 3 4 5 Score
254
Collects very Collect much Collects Collects a
Does not collect
limited information; some basic great deal of
information; but very information; information;
of data relating to the 4
some relate to limited relate most refer to all refer to
topic
the topic to the topic the topic the topic
Does not
Fulfill Performs all
perform Performs very Performs
team’s Performs very duties of
any duties little duties but nearly all 5
roles little duties assigned
assigned to the unreliable. duties
& duties team roles
team role
Rarely does Usually does Always does
Normally
Shares Always relies on the assigned the assigned the assigned
does the
work others to do the work; often work; rarely work without 3
assigned
equally work needs needs having to be
work
reminding reminding reminded
Is always Usually does Talks good;

Listen to Listens, but
talking; most of the but never Listens and
other sometimes
never allows talking; rarely show interest speaks a fair 2
Team talk too
anyone else to allows others in listening amount
mates much
speak to speak others

Proficient

and Note
Taking Accurately researched a Recorded Misinterpreted Recorded
variety of information sources relevant statements, information
recorded and interpreted information graphics and from four or
significant facts, meaningful from multiple questions and less resources,
graphics, and evaluated sources of failed to did not find
alternative points of view. information identify graphics and
evaluated and relevant ignored
synthesized arguments. alternative
information.
255
planning the slide presentation structure The The thumbnail There a very
with thumbnail sketches of thumbnail sketches on the few thumbnail
each slide including: title of sketches on topic are not in sketches on
slide, text, background color, the topic a logical the topic and
placement & size of graphic, include titles sequence and do not provide
fonts - color, size, type for text and text for have an overview of
and headings. All slides are each slide and incomplete the
numbered, and there is a are in information. presentation.
logical sequence to the sequential
presentation. order.
The introduction presents the The The The

overall topic and draws the introduction is introduction introduction
audience into the presentation clear and shows some does not
with compelling questions or coherent and structure but orient the
by relating to the audience's relates to the does not create audience to
interests or goals. topic. a strong sense what will
of what is to follow.
follow. May be
overly detailed The
or incomplete sequencing is
and is unclear and
somewhat does not
appealing to appear
the audience. interesting or
relevant to the
audience.
The content is written clearly The content is The content is The content
and concisely with a logical written with a vague in lacks a clear
progression of ideas and logical conveying a point of view
supporting information. progression of point of view and logical
ideas and and does not sequence of
The project includes supporting create a strong information.
motivating questions and information. sense of
advanced organizers. The purpose. Includes little
project gives the audience a Includes persuasive
clear sense of the main idea. persuasive Includes some information
information persuasive and only one
Information is accurate, from reliable information or two facts
current and comes mainly sources. with few facts. about the
from * primary sources. topic.
Some of the
information Information is
256
may not seem incomplete,
to fit. out of date
and/or
Sources used incorrect.
appear
unreliable. Sequencing of
ideas is
unclear.
The fonts are easy to read and Sometimes the Overall The text is
point size varies appropriately fonts are easy readability is extremely
for headings and text. to read, but in difficult with difficult to
a few places lengthy read with long
Use of italics, bold, and the use of paragraphs, blocks of text
indentations enhances fonts, italics, too many and small
readability. bold, long different fonts, point size of
paragraphs, dark or busy fonts,
Text is appropriate in length
for the target audience and to color or busy background, inappropriate
background overuse of bold contrasting
the point.
detracts and or lack of colors, poor
The background and colors does not appropriate use of
enhance the readability of text. enhance indentations of headings,
readability. text. subheadings,
indentations,
or bold
formatting.
The layout is visually pleasing The layout The layout The layout is
and contributes to the overall uses shows some cluttered,
message with appropriate use horizontal and structure, but confusing, and
of headings, subheadings and vertical white appears does not use
white space. space cluttered and spacing,
appropriately. busy or headings and
distracting subheadings
with large gaps to enhance the
of white space readability.
or uses a
distracting
background.

and/or
The graphics, and/or The Some of the The
257
animation assist in presenting graphics, /and graphics, , graphics, ,
an overall theme and enhance or animation and/or and/or
understanding of concept, visually depict animations animations
ideas and relationships. material and seem unrelated are unrelated
assist the to the to the content.
Original images are created audience in topic/theme
using proper size and understanding and do not Graphics do
resolution, and all images the flow of enhance the not enhance
enhance the content. information overall understanding
or content. concepts. of the content,
There is a consistent visual or are
theme. Original Most images distracting
images are are clip art or decorations
Animation used. recycled from that create a
the internet. busy feeling
Images are and detract
proper size, Images are too from the
resolution. large/small in content.
size.
Images are
poorly cropped
or the
color/resolution
is fuzzy.

Skills
The text is written with no The text is Spelling, Errors in
errors in grammar, clearly written punctuation, spelling,
capitalization, punctuation, with little or and grammar capitalization,
and spelling. no editing errors distract punctuation,
required for or impair usage and
grammar, readability. grammar
punctuation, repeatedly
and spelling. (three or more distract the
errors) reader, and
major editing
and revision is
required.
(more than
five errors)
258
Note: This is only an example. Appropriate rubrics/criteria may be devised by
the concerned faculty (Course Coordinator) for assessing the given activity.
C-18 DEIE II SEMESTER
1. Visit the College library and prepare a list of at least 10 text books available in the library with
author name and publishing company for each subject of the semester. The student should
submit a handwritten report. (POs 8, 10)
2. Prepare 3D models of different exercises given in isometric drawings using AUTOCAD. (POs 8, 10)
3. Prepare a 3D view of the college campus using AUTO CAD with animation.
(POs 8, 10)
4. Calculate the volume of the nearby pond/reservoir using contours interpreted from respective
survey maps and topo sheets using Trapezoidal/Simpson’s rule.
(POs 5, 8)
5. Prepare 3D models of different exercises given in isometric drawings using Fibre board. (POs 5, 8)
6. Prepare a perspective view of entire college campus using AUTOCAD and demonstrate with
animation. (POs 5, 8)
7. Prepare a presentation formulating an action plan to control air pollution in the city.
(POs 5, 8)
8. Give a presentation describing the detailed action plan to minimize water pollution in the city.
(POs 5, 8)
9. Listen to given passages/conversations/dialogues/speeches and answer the questions to improve the
listening skills. (PO 8)
10. Speak about incidents/events/memories/dreams/role model to enhance public speaking skills. (PO
8, 9)
11. Compare and contrast two people/pictures/news items/ideas and give presentation.
(PO 8, 9)
12. Student observes the available equipment in the Chemistry Lab to familiarize with them. (PO 8)
259
13. Create a spreadsheet for the data pertaining to students’ bio-data. (PO 8)
14. Create a power point presentation on the performance of the students in Games and Sports meet.
(PO 8)
15. Do Market survey on List of Semi conductor devices available in the market and collect the
information like specifications, Price etc. The student should submit a handwritten report.
Documents have to be maintained as a record. (PO 8, 9)
16. Take Quiz tests / assignments in Semiconductor devices. Documents have to be maintained as a
record. (PO 8, 9)
17. Do a power point presentation on Electronic components used in the concerned subject
experiments. Documents have to be maintained as a record. (PO 8, 9)
18. Visit YouTube or any other sites for the study of fabrication of Electronics components and
devices. Listen to the lectures and submit a handwritten report and a soft copy (CD/DVD). (PO 8,
9, 10)
ENGLISH
Model Rubrics
S.N Sub Performance

o activity excellent Good Satisfactory Need
improvement
1 Step-1 Data was collected Data was collected Data was collected Data was
from more than four from three to four from two sources. collected only
sources. sources one source.
2 Step-2 All materials and data Almost all materials The materials and The materials
required for the and data required data required for and data
activity were for the activity were the activity were required for
accurately prepared accurately prepared accurately the activity
based on the data based on the data prepared based on were
collected collected the data collected inaccurately
independently. independently. with the help of prepared
teacher.
3 Step-3 Procedures were Procedures were Procedures that Procedures
outlined in a step-by- outlined in a step- outlined were that outlined
step fashion that could by-step fashion, complete with 1 or were not
be followed by anyone require explanation 2 gaps and require sequential, &
& performed the & performed the explanation & performed the
activity effectively. activity effectively. performed the activity in a
activity normally poor way
4 Step-4 Presented/ explained Presented/ Presented/ Presented/
260
the information about explained the explained the explained the
the activity in logical, information about information about information
interesting sequence the activity in the activity in about the
with attractive visuals logical sequence logical sequence activity
or diagrams. with visuals or with less visuals or without
diagrams. diagrams. sequence and
visuals or
diagrams.
5 Conclusio Provided a detailed Provided a Student provided Conclusions
n/ conclusion/ summary conclusion / a conclusion/ /summary was
summary clearly based on the summary clearly summary less not relevant.
data and activity based on the data effectively
and activity
261
II SEMESTER
SKILL UPGRADATION IN - ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS
2. Procedure
3. Explanation
ACTIVITIES
1 Prepare a presentation to describe various types of Straight lines.
2 Identify the geometrical shapes in and around your locality and give the details about them.
3. Prepare a comparative study of conic sections and their uses in engineering applications.
3. Prepare a detailed study report on differentiation using different methods.
4. List out and explain the applications of Differentiation.
5. Apply the differentiation in geometrical problems.
6. Apply the differentiation in rate measure problems.
7. Apply the differentiation to problem solving in finding maxima minima.
CO1 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
CO2 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
CO3 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
CO4 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
CO5 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
CO6 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
CO7 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
262
CATEGORY 4 3 2 1

Concepts shows complete shows substantial shows some shows very
understanding of understanding of understanding of limited
the mathematical the mathematical the mathematical understanding of
concepts used to concepts used to concepts needed the underlying
solve the solve the to solve the concepts needed
problem(s). problem(s). problem(s). to solve the
problem(s) OR is
not written.
Procedures Typically, uses an Typically, uses an Sometimes uses Rarely uses an

efficient and effective an effective effective
effective procedure to solve procedure to solve procedure to solve
procedure to solve the problem(s). problems, but problems.
the problem(s). does not do it
consistently.

detailed and clear. clear. little difficult to difficult to
understand, but understand and is
includes critical missing several
components. components OR
was not included.
Others engaged partner, engaged partner cooperated with work effectively
listening to but had trouble others, but needed with others.
suggestions of listening to others prompting to stay
others and and/or working on-task.
working cooperatively.
cooperatively
throughout lesson.
Mathematical 90-100% of the Almost all (85- Most (75-84%) of More than 75% of
Errors steps and 89%) of the steps the steps and the steps and
solutions have no and solutions have solutions have no solutions have
mathematical no mathematical mathematical mathematical
errors. errors. errors. errors.
PASS SCORE: 2.5
263
STUDENT ASSESSMENT by RUBRICS
S.N CO CO CO CO CO CO C AVERA
PIN
O 1 2 3 4 5 6 O7 GE
SEMESTER – II
SKILL UPGRATION – APPLIED PHYSICS
TASK
LEVEL 1: Concept, Ethical Data, Materials, Source (Library/internet/others)
LEVEL 2: Methodology/procedure
LEVEL 3: Analysis/experiment
LEVEL 4: Interpretation/ inference/ evaluation.
Bridge activity: - Visiting your college Library:
(A) Prepare a list of available reference books in Physics with details such as author, publisher,
edition etc.
(B) Prepare a list of Physics/Science journals, magazines, monographs with details.
(C) Prepare a log book of your visits to college library with brief description.
Activities:-
1. Construct a blowing pipe to detect dangerous gases in mines.
2. Construct model stethoscope with known materials.
3. Conduct awareness program on noise pollution in your college, colony. Prepare a video report.
4. Hypothesize seconds’ pendulum timer.
5. Prepare a power point presentation on photosensitive materials with detailed specifications.
6. Prepare a report on Lasers where they are practically used.
7. Prepare a power point presentation on application of optical fibers in medical and engineering
field.
8. How can you produce electricity with a magnet? – (a) Develop a working model/ prepare a power
point presentation with animation/ prepare drawings on a chart.
9. Construct an electric calling bell.

10. Setup a circuit on breadboard to verify Kirchhoff’s voltage law.
11. Prepare a power point presentation on Superconductors and their practical applications with
motion pictures embedded.
12. Collect various resistors, diodes and LEDs with specifications and compile on a card board.
NOTE: The above activities are indicative. The teacher may assign any other activity relevant
to the course based on resources available.
Course Outcomes (CO) Linked Pos Activity

Hours
CO1 Construction of a blowing pipe to detect PO1, PO2, PO3,
3
dangerous gases in mines PO4, PO5, PO6
CO2 Construction of model stethoscope with known PO1, PO2, PO5,
3
materials PO7
CO3 Conduct of awareness program on noise PO1, PO2, PO5,
pollution in the college, colony and preparation PO6, PO7, PO8, 3
of a video report. PO9
264
CO4 Construction of a seconds’ pendulum timer PO1, PO2, PO3,
3
PO4
CO5 Preparation of PPT on photosensitive materials
PO1, PO2 3
with detailed specifications
CO6 Preparation of report on lasers practically PO1, PO2, PO4,
3
used PO5, PO10
CO7 Preparation of PPT on application of optical PO1, PO2,PO4,
fibers in medical and engineering field PO5, PO6, PO9, 3
PO10
CO8 Production of electricity with a magnet –
PO1, PO2,
working model, PPT with animation and 3
PO3,PO4
drawings on a chart.
CO9 Construction of an electric calling bell PO1, PO2, PO3,
3
PO4
CO10 Construction of a circuit on breadboard to PO1, PO2, PO3,
3
verify Kirchhoff’s voltage law PO4
CO11 Preparation of PPT on Superconductors and
PO1, PO2, PO3,
their practical applications with motion 3
PO4, PO9, PO10
pictures.
CO12 Collection of various resistors, diodes and
LEDs with specifications and installation on a PO1, PO2 3
card board
Rubrics for Task Assessments
General Scale for scoring student performance in Skill Upgradation
Type of
4 3 2 1
Skill/Score
All Data/Material All Data/Material All All
was collected one was collected more Data/Material Data/Material
Data/Material
time than one time was collected was collected
Collection
independently. independently. several times several times
independently. with assistance.
Procedures were Procedures were Procedures Procedures that
outlined in a step- outlined in a step- were outlined were outlined
by-step fashion by-step fashion that in a step-by- were incomplete
that could be could be followed by step fashion, or not
followed by anyone anyone without but had 1 or 2 sequential, even
Methodology/
without additional additional gaps that after Expert
Procedure
explanations. explanations. Expert require feedback had
help was needed to explanation been given.
accomplish this. even after
expert
feedback.
Quality of Skill is Skill is mastered to Skill is present Skill needs
Activity/
high. the level of but with errors improvement.
Development
expectation. and omissions.
Student provided a Student provided a Student No conclusion
Interpretation/ detailed conclusion somewhat detailed provided a was apparent.
summary clearly. conclusion clearly. conclusion with
some reference.
265
NOTE: The above types of skills are indicative. The teacher may change the skills
depending on type of activity.
PASS SCORE: 2.5
STUDENT ASSESSMENT (RUBRICS)
AVE
S. Course Outcomes (Skill Activities) RA
N PIN GE
O CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Suggested Skill Upgradation Activities
Activity – 1
Oral/Power point presentation on the different methods of concentration of ore :
Step-1: Data collection on the ores and different methods of concentration of ore.
Step -2: Prepare for oral/a power point presentation on different methods of concentration of ore.
Step-3: Explain the methods of concentration of ore with oral presentation/ power point
presentation
Step-4: Submit the report along with ppt.
Activity – 2
Corrosion of a metal under different conditions:
Step-1: Collection of data related to the factors effecting the corrosion.
Step -3: Setting and Execution of experiment under different conditions such as
i. Metal exposed to air only
ii. Metal exposed to dry air
iii. Metal partially dipped in salt water
iv. Metal completely dipped in water
v. Metal partially dipped in pure water

266
Note: This experiment may be conducted in other conditions also.
Step-4: Recording of observations and comparison of extent of corrosion under different conditions
after one week with explanation
Step-5: overall presentation of the activity
Activity – 3
Comparison of Corrosion of different metals /alloys exposed to the same environmental conditions:
Step-1: Data collection.
Step -3: Setting and Execution of experiment with different metals/alloys such as Iron, stainless steel,
aluminum, copper etc. under the same conditions
Step-4: Recording of observations and comparison of extent of corrosion on different metals after one
week with explanation
Activity – 4
Comparison of Corrosion of metal with different shapes and surfaces under same environmental
conditions:
Step -3: Setting and Execution of experiment with a metal having different shapes and surfaces under
the same conditions.
Step-4: Recording of observations and comparison of extent of corrosion on different metals after one
week with explanation
Activity – 5
Study of Prevention of Corrosion of a metal by using different coating materials
Step -3: Setting and Execution of experiment with a metal coated with different materials like oil, paint,
plastic, rubber etc
267
Step-4: Recording of observations and comparison of extent of corrosion on the metals after one week
with explanation
Activity – 6
Study of plastics, recycling of plastics and their advantages and disadvantages
Step -3: Preparation of power point presentation on recycling, advantages and disadvantages of platsics
Step-4: Explain about the recycling, advantages and disadvantages of plastics and suggest the measures
to protect the environment
Step-5: Submission of the report along with the ppt.
Activity – 7
Study on natural rubber and its uses
Step -3: Preparation of power point presentation on processing of natural rubber from natural source
and vulcanization..
Step-4: Explain about the properties and uses of natural and vulcanized rubber.
Activity – 8
Power point presentation on fossil fuels
Step -3: Preparation of power point presentation on fossil fuels.
Step-4: Explain about the advantages and disadvantages of solid , liquid and gaseous fuels.
Activity – 9
Study and analysis of environment related air pollution

268
Step -3: Identify the factors that affecting the quality of air.
Step-4: Explain about the quality of air and suggest the remedial measures through ppt.
Activity – 10
Study and analysis of environment related water pollution
Step -3: Identify the factors that affecting the quality of water body.
Step-4: Explain about the quality of water body and suggest the remedial measures through ppt.
Activity – 11
Study and analysis of college environment
Step -3: Identify the factors that affecting the environment of the institution.
Step-4: Explain about the existing environment and suggest the measures to improve it through ppt.
Activity – 12
Construction of Galvanic cell
Step -3: Construction of any galvanic cell.
Step-4: Explain about the construction and functioning of Galvanic cell through ppt.
Note: Any other skill upgradation activity related to the course may be taken up.
Mapping of POs to Student activities
S.N Name of the activity Linked POs

269
o
1 Power point presentation on the different methods of 1,2,4,8,9
concentration of ore
2 Corrosion of a metal under different conditions 1,2,3,4, 5,6,8,9,10
3 Comparison of Corrosion of different metals /alloys 1,2,3,4, 5,6,8,9,10
exposed to the same environmental conditions
4 Comparison of Corrosion of metal with different shapes 1,2,3,4,5,6,8,9,10
and surfaces under same environmental conditions
5 Study of Prevention of Corrosion of a metal by using 1,2,3,4,5,6,8,9,10
different coating materials
6 Study of plastics, recycling of plastics and their advantages 1,2,4,5,6,7,8,9,10

and disadvantages
7 Study on natural rubber and its uses 1,2,4,5,6,7,8,9,10
8 Power point presentation on fossil fuels 1,2,4,5,7,8,9,10
9 Study and analysis of environment related air pollution 1,2,4,5,6,7,8,9,10
10 Study and analysis of environment related water pollution 1,2,4,5,6,7,8,9,10

11 Study and analysis of college environment 1,2,4,5,6,7,8,9,10
12 Construction of Galvanic cell 1,2,3,4,5,8,9

Model Rubrics
S Sub Performance
. activity excellent Good Satisfactory Need
N improvement
o
1 Step-1 Data was collected Data was collected Data was Data was
from more than from three to four collected from collected only
four sources. sources two sources. one source.
2 Step-2 All materials and Almost all The materials The materials
data required for materials and data and data and data
the activity were required for the required for the required for
accurately activity were activity were the activity
270
prepared based on accurately accurately were
the data collected prepared based on prepared based inaccurately
independently. the data collected on the data prepared
independently. collected with
the help of
teacher.
3 Step-3 Procedures were Procedures were Procedures that Procedures
outlined in a step- outlined in a step- outlined were that outlined
by-step fashion by-step fashion, complete with 1 were not
that could be require or 2 gaps and sequential, &
followed by explanation & require performed the
anyone & performed the explanation & activity in a
performed the activity effectively. performed the poor way
activity activity normally
effectively.
information about information about information information
the activity in the activity in about the about the
logical, interesting logical sequence activity in activity
sequence with with visuals or logical sequence without
attractive visuals diagrams. with less visuals sequence and
or diagrams. or diagrams. visuals or
diagrams.
5 Conclusi Provided a Provided a Student Conclusions
on / detailed conclusion / provided a /summary was
summary conclusion/ summary clearly conclusion/ not relevant.
summary clearly based on the data summary less
based on the data and activity effectively
and activity
271
III SEMESTER
272
TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME
Cours Course Name Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme
e
Instruction Total Credit Continuous internal Semester end
Code examination
Period Period s evaluation
sper s per
week semes
ter
L T P Mid Mid Internal Max Total Min
Sem1 Sem2 Evaluati marks Mark marks
on Min s for
marks passing
includin
g
internal
18EI-
1 Applied Engineering 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
301F Mathematics 3 1
18EI-
2 Digital Electronics 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
302C 3 1
18EI-
3 Electronic devices 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
3 1
303C and Circuits
18EI-
4 Sensors and 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
3 1
304C Transducers
18EI-
5 Network theory & 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
305E Electrical Machines 3 1
18EI-
6 Electronic Circuits 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
306 P Lab Practice
18EI-
7 Sensors and 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
307P Transducers lab
Practice
18EI-
8 Digital Electronics 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
308 P lab Practice
18EI-
9 Circuit Design & 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
309 P Simulation Lab
Practice
1018EI- Communication and 1 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
310P Life skills lab 0
practice
11 Skill Upgradation 0 0 7 105 2.5 0 0 Rubrics -- -
TOTAL 20 5 17 630 25 200 200 200 400 170 1000 425
273
APPLIED ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS
Course Title : APPLIED ENGINEERING

Course Code : 18EI-301F
MATHEMATICS
SEMESTER : III Course Group : Foundation
Teaching Scheme ( L : T : P ) : 45 :15 : 0 ( in Periods ) Credits : 3 Credits
Programmes : Common to all Engineering Diploma Programmes
Pre requisites
This course requires the knowledge of Basic Engineering Mathematics and Engineering Mathematics at
Diploma 1st and 2nd Semester level.
CO 1 Integrate different kinds of functions

CO 2 Integrate functions using different methods
CO 3 Find the values of definite integrals.
CO 4 Solve simple problems of Areas, Volumes.
CO 5 Find the Mean and RMS values of various functions and Approximate values of Definite
integrals using Trapezoidal and Simpson’s 1/3rd rule
CO 6 Form the Differential Equation and Solve Simple DEs of 1st order and 1stdegree.
Course Content:
Unit-I Duration: 10 Periods (L: 7.5 – T:2.5)
Indefinite Integration-I
Integration regarded as anti-derivative – Indefinite integral of standard functions. Properties
of indefinite integral. Integration by substitution or change of variable. Integrals of the form
sinmq. cosnq. where m and n are positive integers. Integrals of tan x, cot x, sec x, cosec x
274
and powers of tan x, sec x by substitution.
Evaluation of integrals which are reducible to the following forms:
1 1 1
i) 2 2
, 2 2, 2 2
a + x a −x x −a
1 1 1
ii) , ,
√ a2+ x2 √a 2−x 2 √ x 2−a2
iii ) √ x 2 + a2 , √ a2 −x 2 , √ x 2 −a2
Unit – II Duration: 08 Periods (L: 6.0 – T:2.0)
Indefinite Integration-II
Integration by decomposition of the integrand into simple rational algebraic functions. Integration by
parts, Bernoulli’s rule.
Unit-III Duration: 06 Periods (L: 4.5 – T:1.5)
Definite Integral and its Properties:
Definite integral-fundamental theorem of integral calculus, properties of definite integrals,

evaluation of simple definite integrals. Definite integral as the limit of a sum.
Unit – IV Duration: 10 Periods (L: 7.5 – T:2.5)
Applications of Definite Integrals:
Areas under plane curves – Sign of the Area – Area enclosed between two curves. Solid of
revolution – Volumes of solids of revolution.
Unit – V Duration: 08 Periods (L: 6.0 – T:2.0)
Mean, RMS values and Numerical Integration:
Mean values and Root Mean Square values of a function on a given interval.
Trapezoidal rule, Simpson’s 1/3 rule to evaluate an approximate value of a definite integral.
Unit – VI Duration: 18 Periods (L: 13.5 – T:4.5)
275
Differential Equations of First Order:
Definition of a differential equation – order and degree of a differential equation – formation of

differential equations – solution of differential equation of first order, first degree : variables -separable,
homogeneous, exact, linear differential equation, Bernoulli’s equation.
Reference Books:
1. Integral Calculus Vol.I, by M.Pillai and Shanti Narayan
2. Thomas’ Calculus, Pearson Addison –Wesley Publishers
2.E-books:www.mathebook.net
Unit-I
1.0 Use Indefinite Integration to solve engineering problems
1.1 Explain the concept of Indefinite integral as an anti-derivative.
1.2 State the indefinite integral of standard functions and properties of Integrals ò (u + v) dx
And ò ku dx where k is constant and u, v are functions of x.
1.3 Solve integration problems involving standard functions using the above rules.
1.4 Evaluate integrals involving simple functions of the following type by the method of
substitution.
i) ò f(ax + b) dx where f(x) dx is in standard form.
ii) ò [f(x)]n f ¢(x) dx
iii) ò f¢(x)/[f(x)] dx
iv) ò f {g(x)} g ¢(x) dx
1.5 Find the Integrals of tan x, cot x, sec x and cosec x usingthe above.
1.6 Evaluate the integrals of the form ò SinmqCosnq. dq where m and n are positive integers.
276
1.7 Evaluate integrals of powers of tan x and sec x.
1.8 Evaluate the Standard Integrals of the functions of the type
1 1 1
i) 2 2
, 2 2, 2 2
a + x a −x x −a
1 1 1
ii) , ,
√ a2+ x2 √a 2−x 2 √ x 2−a2
iii ) √ x 2 + a2 , √ a2 −x 2 , √ x 2 −a2
1.9 Evaluate the integrals of the type
1 1 1
 a  bSin d ,  a  b cos  d and  a cos  b sin   c d .
Unit-II
2.0 Use Indefinite Integration to solve engineering problems
2.1 Evaluate integrals using decomposition method.
2.2 Evaluate integrals using integration by parts with examples.
2.3 State the Bernoulli’s rule for evaluating the integrals of the form ∫ u.vdx .
2.4 Evaluate the integrals of the form òex [f(x) + f ¢(x)] dx.
Unit-III
3.0 Understand definite integral and use it in engineering applications
3.1 State the fundamental theorem of integral calculus
3.2 Explain the concept of definite integral.
3.3 Calculate the definite integral over an interval.
3.4 State various properties of definite integrals.
3.5 Evaluate simple problems on definite integrals using the above properties.
3.6 Explain definite integral as a limit of sum by considering an area.
Unit –IV
4.0 Understand definite integral and use it in engineering applications

277
4.1 Find the Areas under plane curves and area enclosed between two curves using
integration.
4.2 Obtain the Volumes of solids of revolution.
Unit –V
5.0 Understand Mean, RMS values and Numerical Methods
5.1 Obtain the Mean value and Root Mean Square (RMS) value of the functions in any given
Interval.
5.2 Explain the Trapezoidal rule, Simpson’s 1/3 rules for approximation of definite integrals
andprovide some examples.
Unit –VI
6.0 Solve Differential Equations in engineering problems.
6.1 Define a Differential equation, its order and degree
6.2 Form a differential equation by eliminating arbitrary constants.
6.3 Solve the first order first degree differential equations by the following methods:
i. Variables Separable.
ii. Homogeneous Equations.
iii. Exact Differential Equations
iv. Linear differential equation of the form dy/dx + Py = Q,
where P and Q are functions of x or constants.
v. Bernoulli’s Equation (Reducible to linear form.)
6.4 Solve simple problems leading to engineering applications by using above methods.
1. Student visits Library to refer Standard Books on Mathematics and collect related material
278
2.Quiz
3.Group discussion
4.Surprise tests
5. Seminars
6. Home Assignments
CO / PO - MAPPING
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 Mapped POs
CO1 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO2 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO3 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO4 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO5 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO6 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
MID SEM-I EXAM

5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM –II EXAM
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
279

Sl No Unit No.
R U A
1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 II
3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 IV
9(b) 13(b)
5 V 4 5, 6
11(a) 15(a)
3 11(b) 15(b)
10(b) 14(b)
6 VI 7,8
12(a) 16(a)
12(b) 16(b)

Legend:
MID SEM –I, MODEL PAPER, III SEMESTER
PART-A
280
5. Integrate ( ex– sinx + x4 ) with respect to x
dx
6. Find ∫ 5 x+7 dx
7. Write Bernoulli’s rule of integration
8. Find ∫ xlogx dx
PART-B
x5
5 a). Evaluate∫ dx .
1+ x 12
Or
dx
5 b) Evaluate ∫ ¿¿ ¿
6 a) Evaluate∫ x sinxdx
Or
3 x +2
6 b) Evaluate∫ dx .
( x−1 ) (2 x +3)
PART C
7 a) Evaluate∫ √ x 2+ 2 x +5dx
281
Or
7 b) Evaluate: ∫ cosxcos 2 xdx .
8 a) Find ∫ x tan−1 xdx .

Or
8 b) Find ∫ x 4 cos 2 xdx .

@@@
282
MID SEM –II, MODEL PAPER, III SEMESTER
PART-A
1. Find ∫ (x ¿¿ 4+1)dx ¿
0
2. Evaluate : ∫ sin 3 xdx

0
3. Evaluate : ∫ 1+1x 2 dx
0
4. Write the formula to find area bounded by the curve y= f(x) , x-axis, between the limits x=a
and x =b
PART-B

π
2
5 a) Evaluate:∫ √ 1−sin2 x dx
0
Or
π
2
5 b) Evaluate: ∫ sin 2 xdx
0
283
6 a) Find the area bounded by the line 2x + y =8, x-axis and the lines x = 2 and x = 4.
Or
6 b) Find the Volume of the Solid generated by revolving the part of the Circle x 2+ y 2=36
From x = 0 to x = 4 about x – axis.
PART C

π
2
7 a) Evaluate:∫ √ Sinx dx
0 √ Sinx+ √Cosx
Or
π
2
7 b) Evaluate: ∫ logsin xdx
0
8 a) Find the area enclosed between the Parabolas y=3 x−x 2∧ y =x 2−x .
Or
8 b) Find the Volume of the Solid generated by the revolution of the area bounded by the
x2 y2
Ellipse + =1 , about x- axis.
25 16
@@@
284
C18-common SUB.CODE:301F
BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION,(C-18)
MODEL PAPER
III SEMESTER EXAMINATION
PART-A
1. Find ∫ x 7 – 3/ x dx
1
2
2. Evaluate ∫ ( x +1 )dx
0
3. Write the formula to find mean value of y = f(x), in the interval (a, b)
2
dy dy
4. Find the Order and Degree of the Differential Equation x
dx √
= 1+( )
dx
.
5 Write Trapezoidal Rule to find the approximate value of∫ f ( x ) dx.

a
6. Write the formula to find RMS value of y = f(x) over the range x=a and x = b.
dy
7. Solve =e 2 x+ y
dx
8. Write the condition for exactness of the differential equation M(x,y)dx + N(x,y)dy =0
PART-B
285
π
2
9 a) Evaluate:∫ √ 1−sin2 x dx
0
Or
6
dx
9 b) Find the approximate value of ∫ by taking n = 6 using Trapezoidal rule.
0 1+ x
10 a) Find the area bounded by the Parabola y = x2 – 2x + 1 and x-axis.
Or
10 b) Form the Differential Equation from y= A e x + B e 3 x where A, B are arbitrary constants
11 a) Find the RMS value of √ log x over the range x= 1 and x= e
Or
4
dx
11 b) Calculate approximate value of ∫ by taking n= 4 using Simpson’s 1/3 rule
0 1+ x
dy
12 a) Solve: x +2 y =logx .
dx
Or
12 b) Solve: x ( 1− y 2 ) dx+ y ( 1−x2 ) dy =0
PART C
1
13 a) Evaluate: ∫ 2 dx
x + 2 x +2
Or
13 b) Find the RMS value of y = √ 8−4 x 2 between x = 0 and x = 2
x2 y 2
14 a) Find the volume of solid generated by revolving the Ellipse + =1 about Major
a2 b 2
286
axis
Or
dy
14 b) Solve: =sin( x + y )
dx
15 a) A curve is drawn to passing through the points given by the following table:
x 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4

y 3 3.4 3.7 3.8 2.7 2.6 2.1
Calculate the approximate area bounded by the curve, x-axis and the lines x= 1 and x= 4
using Simpson’s 1/3 rule
Or
1
15 b) Evaluate: ∫ √( 1−x2 ) dx approximately by taking n = 4 using

0
Simpson’s 1/3 rd Rule.
16 a) Solve: ( y 2−xy ) dx =x2 dy .
Or
dy
16 b) Solve: + yCosx= y 3Sin2x.
dx
@@@
287
DIGITAL ELECTRONICS
Course Title : DIGITAL ELECTRONICS Course Code 18EI-302 C

Semester III Course Group Core
Periods(L:T:P)
Methodology Lecture + Assignments Total Contact periods
: 60Pds
Pre requisites
This course requires the basic knowledge of electronics in Basic Physics at Secondary school level.
Course Outcomes
CO1 Convert number systems and Solve Boolean expressions using K-map.
CO2 Compare various digital IC logic families and identify them by their characteristics.
CO3
Design adders using Combinational logic.
CO4 Develop Combinational logic circuits like MUX, De-mux, encoder, decoder and
comparator circuits.
CO5
Identify the need of sequential circuits and design registers using flip-flops.
CO6
Design counter circuits and Compare different types of memories.
After completion of the course, the student should be able to
COURSE CONTENT
UNIT 1 –Basics of Digital Electronics Duration: 14 Periods (L: 8– T: 6)
288
Convert number systems and Solve Boolean expressions using K-map.
Number systems –comparison with Decimal system-Conversion from number system into another –
performing arithmetic operations in binary-Use of weighted and Un-weighted codes- importance of
parity Bit- Different postulates in Boolean algebra- Basic logic gates with truth table- universal logic
gates - exclusive – OR gate with truth table- De-Morgan’s theorems- AND, OR, NOT operations using
NAND, NOR gates- De-Morgan’s theorems related postulates to simplify Boolean expressions (up to
three variables)- standard representations for logical functions (SOP and POS form)- Boolean
expressions from the given truth table- Karnaugh map to simplify Boolean Expression (up to 4
variables only)
UNIT2 – Digital IC logic families Duration: 6 Periods (L: 6– T: 0)
Compare various digital IC logic families and identify them by their characteristics.
Classification of digital logic families- Important characteristics of Digital ICs- requirements of TTL
and CMOS ICs - Propagation delay and Noise margin- Fan-in and Fan-out capacity- Power dissipation-
Figure of merit of a logic family- explain TTL NAND gate with open collector- TTL NAND gate with
Totem pole output- CMOS NAND gate circuit – Compare logic families- IC numbers of two input
Digital IC Logic gates.
UNIT 3–Design adders using Combinational logic. Duration: 10 Periods (L: 8– T: 2)
Concept of combinational logic circuits- Half adder circuit -truth table- Half-adder using NAND gates
only &NOR gates only- Full adder circuit - Truth table- Full-adder using two Half-adders and an OR –
gate - a 4 Bit parallel adder using full – adders- 2’s compliment parallel adder/ subtractor circuit- Serial
adder -Performance of serial and parallel adder-
UNIT4–Develop Combinational logic circuits like MUX, De-mux, encoder, decoder and
comparator circuits. Duration: 10 Periods (L: 8– T: 2)
Operation of 4 X 1 Multiplexers- Operation of 1 to 4 demultiplexer- IC numbers -applications- 3 X 8

decoder- BCD to decimal decoder- Decoders- Decimal to BCD encoder- IC numbers -Applications -
Tri-state buffer - Types of tri-state Buffers-Applications - Digital comparator.
UNIT 5–Identify the need of sequential circuits and design registers using flip-flops.
289
Duration: 12 Periods (L: 8– T: 2)
Concept of Sequential logic circuits- NAND and NOR latches with truth tables-Necessity of clock -
Clocked SR flip flop circuit using NAND gates- Need for present and clear inputs - Circuit of Clocked
JK flip flop (using S-R flip-flops) with truth table -Race around condition- Master slave JK flip flop
circuit - clocked D and T flip flops - Truth table, Circuit diagram and timing diagram- Symbols of
above Flip Flops- Truth tables - Applications for each type of flip flop- Need for a Register - Types of
registers- 4 bit shift left and shift right registers - 4-bit bi-directional shift Register - Parallel in parallel
out shift register - Universal shift register (74194 ) - Applications of shift registers.
UNIT 6–Design counters circuits and Compare different types of memories.
Duration: 8 Periods (L: 8– T: 0)
4-bit asynchronous counter - Asynchronous decade counter with a circuit - 4-bit synchronous counter–
Differences between synchronous and asynchronous counters- asynchronous 3 bit up-down counter
-Ring counter- applications - Types of memories - Memory read operation, write operation, access
time, memory capacity, address lines and word length- ROM and RAM- Diode ROM- EEPROM and
UVPROM- Dynamic MOS RAM cell- static RAM and dynamic RAM- Applications of Flash ROM.
Specific Learning Outcomes: upon completing this course the student will be able to
1.0 Understand the basics of Digital Electronics
1.1 Explain Binary, Octal, Hexadecimal number systems.
1.2 Compare the above with Decimal system.
1.3 Convert a given decimal number into Binary, Octal, and Hexadecimal numbers and vice versa.
1.4 Convert a given binary number into octal and hexadecimal number system and vice versa.
1.5 Perform binary addition, subtraction, Multiplication and Division.
1.6 Perform binary addition, subtraction, Multiplication and Division and check in decimal system.
1.7 Write 1’s complement and 2’s complement numbers for a given binary number.
1.8 Perform subtraction of binary numbers in 1’s complement method.
1.9 Perform subtraction of binary numbers in 2’s complement method.
1.10 State the use of weighted and Un-weighted codes and list the types.
1.11 Write Binary equivalent number for a number in 8421, Excess-3 code.
1.12 Convert a given binary number into Gray code and vice-versa.
1.13 Explain the use of alphanumeric codes (ASCII & EBCDIC)
290
1.14 State the importance of parity Bit.
1.15 State different postulates in Boolean algebra.
1.16 Explain the basic logic gates AND, OR, NOT gates with truth table.
1.17 Explain the working of universal logic gates (NAND, NOR gates) using truth tables.
1.18 Explain the working of an exclusive – OR gate with truth table.
1.19 Realize AND, OR, NOT operations using NAND, NOR gates.
1.20 Realize exclusive – OR gate using basic gates.
1.21 Realize exclusive – OR gate using NAND, NOR gates.
1.22 State De-Morgan’s theorems.
1.23 Prove De-Morgan’s theorems.
1.24 Apply De-Morgan’s theorems related postulates to simplify Boolean expressions (up to four
variables).
1.25 Explain standard representations for logical functions (SOP and POS form)
1.26 Write Boolean expressions from the given truth table and draw the circuit.
1.27 Use Karnaugh map to simplify Boolean Expression (up to 4 variables only) in SOP form.
1.28 Use Karnaugh map to simplify Boolean Expression (up to 4 variables only) in POS form.
2.0 Understand different logic families.
2.1 Give the classification of digital logic families (like TTL, CMOS and ECL).
2.2 List the important characteristics of Digital ICs
2.3 Explain logic levels and Voltage requirements of TTL and CMOS ICs.
2.4 Define propagation delay and Noise margin.
2.5 Define Fan-in and Fan-out capacity of a digital IC.
2.6 Define Power dissipation and figure of merit of a logic family.
2.7 Explain the working of open collector TTL NAND gate with a circuit diagram.
2.8 Explain the working of Totem pole output TTL NAND gate with a circuit diagram.
2.9 Explain the working of CMOS NAND gate with a circuit diagram.
2.10 Compare the TTL, CMOS and ECL logic families.
291
2.11 Give IC numbers of different two input Digital IC Logic gates (One for each type)
3.0 Understand the working of combinational logic circuits and adder circuits.
3.1 Define combinational logic circuit.
3.2 Define half adder circuit and write its truth table.
3.3 Write the output expression and draw half adder circuit using basic gates.
3.4 Realize a Half-adder using i) NAND gates only and ii) NOR gates only.
3.5 Explain the operation of full adder circuit with truth table.
3.6 Realize full-adder using two Half-adders and an OR – gate.
3.7 Write truth table for the above circuit.
3.8 Explain the working of 4 Bit parallel adder circuit using full adders.
3.9 Explain 2’s compliment parallel adder/ subtractor circuit.
3.10 Explain the working of a serial adder circuit.
3.11 Compare the performance of serial and parallel adder.
4.0 Understand the working of MUX, DE-MUX, Encoder and Decoder circuits.
4.1 Define multiplexer and de-multiplexer.
4.2 Write the truth table of 4 X 1 Multiplexer and draw its circuit.
4.3 Write the IC numbers of TTL & CMOS Multiplexer ICs.
4.4 Mention any 3 applications of multiplexer circuit.
4.5 Write the truth table of 1 to 4 de- Multiplexer and draw its circuit.
4.6 Write the IC numbers of TTL & CMOS De-multiplexer ICs.
4.7 Mention any 3 applications of De-multiplexer.
4.8 Write the truth table of 3 X 8 decoder and draw its circuit.
4.9 Mention any 3 applications of decoder IC.
4.10 Explain the working of BCD to decimal decoder circuit.
4.11 Explain the working of Decimal to BCD encoder circuit.
4.12 State the need for a tri-state buffer.
4.13 List the two types of tri-state buffers with IC numbers.
292
4.14 Write the truth table of 2-bit digital comparator and draw its circuit.
5.0 Understand the working of Sequential logic circuits.
5.1 Define a Sequential logic circuit.
5.2 State the necessity of clock.
5.3 What is level and edge triggering?
5.4 Explain clocked SR flip flop circuit using NAND gates.
5.5 State the need for preset and clear inputs.
5.6 Explain the circuit of JK flip flop (using S-R flip-flops) with truth table.
5.7 What is race around condition in JK flip-flop?
5.8 Explain the working of master slave JK flip flop circuit with necessary diagrams.
5.9 Explain the level clocked D and T flip flops with the help of truth table, circuit diagram and
timing diagram.
5.10 Draw the symbols of above Flip Flops.
5.11 Give the truth tables of edge triggered D and T flip flops.
5.12 List any 2 commonly used IC numbers of flip flops of each type.
5.13 List two applications for each type of flip flop.
5.14 State the need for a Register
5.15 List the four types of registers.
5.16 Explain the working of 4-bit shift left and shift right registers with a circuit and timing diagram.
5.17 Explain the working of 4-bit bi-directional shift register with a circuit and timing diagram.
5.18 Explain parallel in parallel out shift register with a circuit and timing diagram.
5.19 List any four common applications of shift registers.
5.20 List any 2 commonly used IC numbers of registers.
5.21 Distinguish between combinational and sequential circuits.
6.0 Understand working of Counters and Semiconductor memories
6.1 Define a counter and modulus of a counter.
6.2 Explain the working of 4-bit asynchronous up counter with a circuit and Timing diagram.
293
6.3 Explain the working of asynchronous 3 bit up-down counter with a circuit and Timing diagram
6.4 Explain the working of 4-bit synchronous counter with a circuit and Timing diagram.
6.5 Explain the working of decade counter with a circuit and Timing diagram.
6.6 Distinguish between synchronous and asynchronous counters.
6.7 List any 2 commonly used IC numbers of counters.
6.8 Explain the working of ring counter.
6.9 List any three applications for counters and ring counter.
6.10 State the need for memory in digital circuits.
6.11 Define the terms memory read operation, write operation, access time, memory capacity, and
word length.
6.12 Classify various types of memories based on principle of operation, physical characteristics,
accessing modes and fabrication technology.
6.13 Differentiate between ROM and RAM.
6.14 Explain the working of diode ROM.
6.15 Distinguish between EEPROM and UVPROM.
6.16 Explain the working of basic dynamic MOS RAM cell.
6.17 Compare static RAM and dynamic RAM.
6.18 State the need for Flash ROM.
6.19 List the applications of Flash ROM.
RECOMMENDED BOOKS
1. Digital Computer Electronics by Malvino and leach. 3rdedition Tata McGraw-Hill Education
2. Modern Digital Electronics By RP JAIN TMH
3Digital Electronics: Principles & Applications by Roger L. Tokheim -McGraw-Hill Education, 2008
4. Digital Electronics by GK Kharate, Oxford University Press.
e-links
www.nptel.com
www.electronics4u.com
Suggested student activities.

294
1. Learn how to Test the digital IC’s and submit a report.
2. Propose how to manage the e-waste.
3. Perform trouble shooting of the not working equipment in the lab.
4. Learn the latest CMOS IC equivalents of the TTL IC’s.
5. Prepare a simple PCB to perform verification of truth table for basic gates.
6. Prepare a PPT on the day to day application of the gates you have studied.
CO PO Mapping Matrix
On Successful completion of the course, the student will be able to attain the following Course
Outcomes (COs):
Course Outcome CL Linked Teaching

PO Periods
Convert number systems and Solve Boolean expressions R/U 1,2,10

CO1 : 14
using K-map.
R/U 1,2,5,6,7
Compare various digital IC logic families and identify

CO2 : 6
them by their characteristics.
CO3 : Design adders using Combinational logic. R/U/A 1,2,9 10

R/U/A 1,2,5,7
CO4 : Develop Combinational logic circuits like MUX , De-mux, 10
encoder, decoder and comparator circuits.
R/U/A 1,2,5
CO5 : Identify the need of sequential circuits and design registers 12

using flip-flops.
R/U/A 1,2,3,7
CO6 : Design counter circuits and Compare different types of 8
memories.
MID SEM-I EXAM

295
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM –II EXAM
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)

Sl No Unit No.
R U A
1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 II
3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 IV
9(b) 13(b)
4
5 V 5, 6 11(a) 15(a)

11(b) 15(b)
3
10(b) 14(b)
6 VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)

12(b) 16(b)

296
C-18 III SEMESTER
18 EI-302C DIGITAL ELECTRONICS
MODEL PAPER MID- SEM I
TIME : 1 HOUR MAX. MARKS : 20
PART-A
Answer ALL questions. 4 x 1= 4M
1. Convert the binary number 1101101 into its decimal equivalent.
2. Draw the logic symbol of AND and OR gates.
3. Define propagation delay with reference to digital IC.
4. Write CMOS IC nos. of AND and NAND gates.
PART – B
Answer ALL questions. 2x3=6M

5 (a) Perform 2’s complement of subtraction for the binary numbers 10110 – 110110
OR
5(b) Draw the symbol of NAND gate, write its truth table and output expression.
6(a) Define Fan-in and Fan-out capacity of a digital IC.
OR
6(b) Write the specifications of digital IC’s.
PART – C
Answer ALL questions. 2 x 5= 10 M
7(a) Explain the working of universal logic gates NAND and NOR with truth tables.
OR
7(b) Simplify the Boolean expression using De-Morgan’s theorems and draw its simplified logic
circuit.
Á B́CD + B Á CD + Ć BA´ D + ABCD + B Ć AD
8(a) Draw the TTL totem pole circuit and explain.

OR
8(b)Compare the various logic families.
297
C-18 III SEMESTER
MODEL PAPER MID- SEM II
TIME: 1 HOUR MAX. MARKS: 20
PART-A
1. Define combinational logic circuit.
2. Draw the circuit of full adder using half adders.
3. Define a multiplexer.
4. Write any 2 IC nos. of multiplexers.
PART – B
5 (a) Explain the operation of full adder with a truth table.
OR
5(b) Compare the performance of serial adder and parallel adder.
6(a) Write the truth table of 1 x 4 de-multiplexer.
OR
6(b) Write any 3 applications for each of MUX and decoders.
PART – C
Answer ALL questions. 2 x 5 = 10 M
7(a) Explain the working of 4-bit parallel adder using half adders.
OR
7(b) Explain 2’s compliment parallel adder/subtractor circuit.
8(a) Write the truth table of 1 x 8 demultiplexer and draw its circuit.
OR
8(b) Explain the working of BCD to decimal decoder circuit..
298
C-18 III SEMESTER
MODEL PAPER - SEMESTER END EXAMINATION
TIME: 2 HOURS MAX. MARKS: 40
PART-A
1. State any 2 postulates of Boolean algebra.
2. Define a de-multiplexer.
3. What is edge-triggering with reference to clock?
4. Draw the symbol of D and T flip-flop
5. List any 2 IC numbers of JK flip-flop.
6. List the synchronous inputs of a flip-flop.
7. Define modulus of a counter.
8. Define access time with reference to memory.
PART – B
9 (a) List out the specifications of digital IC’s.
OR
9(b) Explain clocked SR flip flop using NAND gates.
10(a) Realize a half adder using NAND gates only.
299
OR
10(b) Distinguish between synchronous and asynchronous counters.
11(a) Write the logic symbol and negative edge triggered truth table of D flip-flop.
OR
11(b) State the need of a register and list its types.
12(a) Draw the circuit of a decade counter.
OR
12(b) Differentiate between ROM and RAM.
PART – C
13(a) Simplify the Boolean expression ∑ πM (1,3,6,8,14,15 ) using K- map and draw its simplified
logic circuit.
OR
13(b) Explain the working of 4-bit left shift register with a circuit and timing diagram.
14(a) Explain the working of 4-bit bit parallel adder using full adders.
OR
14(b) Explain the working of diode ROM.
300
15(a) Explain the working of parallel-in and parallel-out register with circuit and timing diagram.
OR
15(b) Explain the working of master slave JK flip-flop circuit with necessary diagrams.
16(a) Classify various types of memories based on principle of operation, physical
characteristics, accessing modes and fabrication technology.
OR
16(b) Explain the working of ring counter with a circuit and necessary timing diagrams.
301
ELECTRONIC DEVICES AND CIRCUITS
Course Title : Electronic devices and Circuits Course Code 18EI-303C

Periods(L:T:P)
Periods : 60
Pre requisites
This course requires the basic knowledge of Physics and Mathematics at Secondary school level, and
about operation of diode and Transistor
Course Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to
Course Outcome
CO1 Measure different parameters of a transistor amplifier using small signal model
CO2 Construct multi stage and feedback amplifiers using Transistors
CO3 Construct tuned amplifiers and power amplifiers using Transistors
CO4 Construct various oscillators using Transistors
CO5 Develop various applications using special semiconductor devices
CO6 Design wave shaping circuits using Diodes
Course Contents
UNIT1-Small Signal Amplifiers: Duration: 10 Periods (L: 6– T:4)
Basic CE amplifier: -Different parameters of a Transistor amplifier- h-parameter model of CE, CB and
CC configuration-Conversion of h-parameters from CE into CB and CC configuration- simple
problems- CS FET amplifier
UNIT -2: Multistage and Feedback amplifiers Duration: 10 Periods (L: 6– T:4)
Classify amplifier based on coupling- feedback and frequency-Multistage amplifiers–Different

parameters- 2-stage RC coupled amplifier- 2-stage Transformer coupled amplifier- 2-stage Direct
coupled amplifier- Darlington pair-Cascode amplifier-Feedback Amplifiers: -Concept of feedback-four
302
types of negative feedback amplifiers-Effect of negative feedback- Merits and De-merits of Negative
Feedback.
UNIT 3 –Tuned and Power amplifiers Duration: 10 Periods (L: 6– T:4)
Voltage and Power Amplifier: - Difference between Voltage and Power amplifiers-Classification of
power amplifiers-Class A single ended-Push-pull amplifier circuit- Effect of distortion in amplifiers-
Choice of Class A, Class B Class AB Amplifier and Class C Amplifiers- Applications of Class C
Amplifiers- Efficiencies of different types of power amplifiers (A, B, AB & C)
UNIT -4: Oscillators Duration: 10 Periods (L: 6– T:4)
Oscillators: Barkhausen criteria in oscillators- Oscillator circuits- Hartley oscillator-Colpitts oscillator-

Crystal Oscillator- Expressions for frequency of oscillation and condition for sustained oscillations of
the above circuits- Reasons for instability in oscillator circuits- Remedies for instability in oscillators-
Advantages of crystal oscillators- Merits and demerits of RC and LC oscillators.
Unit 5- Special semiconductor devices Duration: 10 Periods (L: 6– T:4)
Working principle:Varactor diode- UJT- Photo Diode- Photo transistor- Photo Voltaic Cell- LCD,
Characteristics and Applications: Varactor diode- UJT- Photo Diode- Photo transistor- Photo Voltaic
Cell- LCD, Merits and Demerits
UNIT- 6: Wave shaping circuits Duration: 10 Periods (L: 6– T:4)
Clippers: Design of simple clippers- Clamper circuits - Applications of clippers and clampers- Sweep
Voltage generators, Applications of Voltage and current Time base circuits
References
RECOMMENDED BOOKS
1. Basic Electrical Engineering Volume 1 by PSDhogal , TMH
2. Electronic devices and applications by B.Somanathan Nair, PHI.
3. Understanding Electronics Components by Filipovic D. Miomir. Mikroe online Edition
303
4. Electronic Devices and Circuits by David A.Bell Prentice hall
Specific Learning Outcomes: After completing this course the student will be able to
1.0 Explain the working of Small Signal Amplifiers
1.10 Explain the working of basic amplifier circuit using BJT in CE mode.
1.11 Define the terms Av, Ai, Zi and Zo of an amplifier
1.12 Define frequency response and bandwidth of an amplifier
1.13 Explain the concept of Gain-Bandwidth product
1.14 Define h-parameters of a transistor
1.15 Draw the h-parameter model for CE, CB and CC Configuration
1.16 Derive expressions for Av, Ai, Zi and Zo using h-parameter model for CE configuration
1.17 Obtain h-parameters of CB and CC from CE parameters
1.18 Solve simple problems related to Av, Ai, Zi , Zo and Gain – bandwidth product
1.19 Draw the circuit of CS( common source) FET amplifier
1.20 Explain CS( common source) FET amplifier operation
1.21 Draw the JFET as current source circuit
1.22 Explain the use of JFET as current source
2.0 Explain the working of Multi-stage and Feedback amplifiers
2.1 Classify amplifiers based on coupling, feedback and frequency
2.2 State the need for multi-stage amplifiers
2.3 Define gain, frequency response and bandwidth of multi-stage amplifier
2.4 Give the expressions for gain, frequency response and bandwidth of multi-stage amplifier
2.5 Solve simple problems on overall gain, overall frequency response and overall bandwidth of
multi-stage amplifiers
2.6 Draw 2-stage RC coupled amplifier circuit.
304
2.7 Explain the operation of 2-stage RC coupled amplifier.
2.8 Explain the frequency response of the above circuit.
2.9 Draw 2-stage Transformer coupled amplifier circuit.
2.10 Explain the operation of 2-stage Transformer coupled amplifier
2.11 Explain the frequency response of the above circuit.
2.12 Draw 2-stage Direct coupled amplifier circuit.
2.13 Explain the operation of 2-stage Direct coupled amplifier
2.14 Draw Darlington pair circuit.
2.15 Explain the operation of Darlington pair circuit.
2.16 Give the expression for current gain of Darlington pair circuit
2.17 Explain high current gain amplifier using Darlington pair
2.18 Draw Cascode amplifier.
2.19 Explain Cascode amplifier.
2.20 Draw the basic block diagram of a feedback amplifier.
2.21 Derive the expression for gain in a feedback amplifier.
2.22 Compare negative and positive feedback.
2.23 Draw the block diagram of voltage series feedback amplifier.
2.24 Draw the block diagram of voltage shunt feedback amplifier
2.25 Draw the block diagram of current series feedback amplifier
2.26 Draw the block diagram of current shunt feedback amplifier
2.27 State the effect of negative feedback on gain
2.28 State the effect of negative feedback on bandwidth
2.29 State the effect of negative feedback on input impedance
2.30 State the effect of negative feedback on output impedance
2.31 List the advantages of negative feedback amplifiers.
2.32 Solve simple problems on effect of negative feedback on gain, bandwidth, Zi and Zo
3.0 Explain the working of Power amplifiers and Tuned amplifiers
305
3.1 State the need for a power amplifier.
3.2 Distinguish between voltage and power amplifiers.
3.3 Classify power amplifier based on conduction.
3.4 Define Conversion efficiency
3.5 Define distortion in power amplifier
3.6 Draw the circuit of class A amplifier with resistor load.
3.7 Explain operation of class A amplifier with resistive load
3.8 Derive the expression for efficiency of the above circuit.
3.9 Draw the circuit of class A amplifier with transformer load.
3.10 Explain the operation of class A amplifier with transformer load.
3.11 Derive the expression for efficiency of the above circuit.
3.12 Draw the circuit of Class-B push-pull amplifier.
3.13 Explain the operation of Class-B push-pull amplifier
3.14 Derive the expression for efficiency of Class-B push-pull amplifier.
3.15 List the advantages & disadvantages of push-pull amplifier.
3.16 Draw the circuit of complementary symmetry push-pull amplifier.
3.17 Explain the operation of complementary symmetry push-pull amplifier
3.18 List the conditions to avoid thermal runaway in a power transistor
3.19 State the necessity of heat sink for a power transistor.
3.20 List different types of heat sinks and mounting methods.
3.21 Classify tuned amplifiers.
3.22 Draw single tuned amplifier circuit.
3.23 Explain the operation of single tuned amplifier circuit
3.24 Draw double tuned amplifier circuit
3.25 Explain the operation of double tuned amplifier circuit
3.26 Draw class C tuned amplifier circuit.
3.27 Explain class C tuned amplifier circuit with waveforms
306
3.28 List applications of tuned circuits
4..0 Explain the working of Oscillators
4.1 State the condition for an amplifier to work as oscillator.
4.2 Mention the requisites of an oscillator.
4.3 State Barkhausen criteria in oscillators.
4.4 Classify oscillator circuits.
4.5 Draw the Hartley oscillator circuit.
4.6 Explain the working of Hartley oscillator circuit
4.7 Mention the condition for sustained oscillations in Hartley Oscillator
4.8 Give the expression for frequency of oscillations in Hartley Oscillator
4.9 Draw the Colpitts oscillator circuit.
4.10 Explain the working of Colpitts oscillator circuit
4.11 Mention the condition for sustained oscillations in Colpitts Oscillator
4.12 Give the expression for frequency of oscillations in Colpitts Oscillator
4.13 Draw the equivalent circuit of crystal and explain.
4.14 Draw the transistor crystal oscillator circuit.
4.15 Explain the working of transistor crystal oscillator circuit
4.16 List the advantages of crystal oscillator
4.17 State the reasons for instability in oscillator.
4.18 Mention the remedies to avoid instability in oscillators.
4.19 Compare the LC and RC oscillators
5.0 Explain the working of special Semiconductor devices
5.1 Explain the working principle of varactor diode.
5.2 Draw the characteristics of Varactor Diode.
5.3 Explain the working principle of UJT with its equivalent circuit
307
5.4 Draw UJT characteristics.
5.5 Explain UJT characteristics.
5.6 List the application of varactor diode
5.7 List applications of UJT.
5.8 Explain constructional details of photo diode.
5.9 Draw the characteristics of photo diode.
5.10 Explain operation of photo diode.
5.11 Explain constructional details of photo transistor.
5.12 Draw the characteristics of photo transistor.
5.13 Explain operation of photo transistor.
5.14 Explain the principle of photovoltaic cell.
5.15 Explain the working principle of LCD
5.16 Mention the types of LCD displays
5.17 Give constructional details of LCD
5.18 List the merits and demerits of LCD Displays
5.19 List the applications of LCD
6.0 Wave shaping Circuits
6.1. List the different types of clippers.
6.2. Explain the unbiased and biased clippers with waveforms
6.3. Explain the double ended clipper with waveforms
6.4. Draw the output waveforms of a given clipper circuit for sinusoidal/square input
6.5. Draw the clipper circuits for a given input and output waveforms
6.6. Explain the principle of clamper circuit with waveforms
6.7. Mention the applications of clippers and clampers
6.8. Design simple clippers and clampers for a given input and output waveform
6.9. Define Sweep Voltage.
6.10. State the fundamental consideration of sweep waveform.
308
6.11. Distinguish between voltage and current time-base generation
6.12. List errors in sweep signal
6.13. Draw simple voltage time base generator
6.14. Explain the operation of voltage time base generator
6.15. Draw simple current time base generator
6.16. Explain the operation of current time base generator
6.17. Draw the Bootstrap sweep circuit
6.18. Explain the operation of Bootstrap sweep circuit
6.19. Draw the Miller sweep circuit
6.20. Explain the operation of Miller sweep circuit
6.21. List the applications of Voltage and current Time base circuits.
1. Student visits Library to refer to Manual of Electronic Semiconductor Devices to find their
specifications
2. Student inspects the available equipment in the Lab to identify the Diodes, Transistors and FETs
3. Visit nearby Industry to familiarize with fabrication techniques of Semiconductor Devices
4. Analyze the Power Supply Unit in the Institution facility
5. Participate in the Quiz
6. Participate in Group discussion
7. Search internet for circuits using the semiconductor devices
Model of rubrics for assessing student activity:
General Scale for scoring student performance in Skill Upgradation (Rubrics)
Type of Developing(1
Excellent(4) Good(3) Satisfactory(2)
Skill/Score )
309
All Data/Material All Data/Material All Data/Material All
was collected one was collected was collected Data/Material
time independently. more than one several times was collected
Collects a great time independently. several times
Data/Mate deals of independently. Collects basic with
rial information, all Collects more information, most assistance.
Collection refer to the topic information, refer to the topic Collects very
most refer to the limited
topic information,
some relate to
topic
Procedures were Procedures were Procedures were Procedures
outlined in a step- outlined in a outlined in a step- that were
by-step fashion that step-by-step by-step fashion, outlined were
could be followed fashion that but had 1 or 2 gaps incomplete or
by anyone without could be that require not sequential,
Methodolo
additional followed by explanation even even after
gy/
explanations. anyone without after expert expert
Procedure
additional feedback. feedback had
explanations. been given.
Expert help was
needed to
accomplish this.
Activity/ Quality of Skill is Skill is mastered Skill is present but Skill needs
Developme high. to the level of with errors and improvement.
nt expectation. omissions.
Student provided a Student provided Student provided a No conclusion
Interpreta detailed conclusion a somewhat conclusion with was apparent.
tion/ clearly. detailed some reference.
summary conclusion
clearly.
Full-fills Performs all duties Performs almost Performs nearly all Performs very
team roles of assigned team all duties duties little duties
and duties roles
Always does the Always does the Usually does the Rarely does
Shares assigned work, assigned work, assigned work, the assigned
work without needing rarely needs rarely needs work, often
equality reminding reminding reminding needs
reminding.
Listens and talks a Listens and talks Listens, but Usually does
Listen to
fare amount a little more than sometimes talk too most of the
other team
needed much talking, rarely
mates
allows others
to speak
e-Links:
310
3. www.nptel.ac.in
CO-PO MAPPING MATRIX

Hours
CO1 Construct small signal model of a transistor R/U 1,2,8,9,10 10

amplifier and analyse different parameters
CO2 Apply the basic knowledge of transistor R/U/A 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 10
amplifiers and Understand and analyse the
working of multi stage and feedback amplifiers
and be able to select for proper application
CO3 Apply the basic knowledge of transistor R/U/A 1,2,5,6,8,9,10 10
amplifiers and Understand and analyse the
working of tuned and power amplifiers and be
able to select for proper application
CO4 Explain the working of oscillators and be able to R/U/A 1,2,8,9,10 10
select the proper oscillator for the application
CO5 Understand the different special semiconductor R/U/A 1,2,5,6,8,9,10 10
devices and be able to select for required
application
CO6 Apply the knowledge of diodes and transistors in R/U/A 1,2,3,4,6,8,9,10 12
designing, constructing regulators and wave
shaping circuits
311
MID SEM-I EXAM
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM –II EXAM
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)

Sl No Unit No.
R U A
1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 II
3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 IV
9(b) 13(b)
4
5 V 5, 6 11(a) 15(a)

11(b) 15(b)
3
10(b) 14(b)
6 VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)

12(b) 16(b)
312
Legend:
C18EI-303C
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION & TRAINING: TS: HYDERABD
C18EI-303C Electronic Devices and Circuits
III SEMESTER MID SEMESTER – I MODEL PAPER
Time: 1 hour Max. Marks:20
PART-A
Answer All questions. Each carries 1 mark. 4X1=4 Marks
1. Define frequency response of an amplifier?
2. Define h-parameters of a transistor?
3. Classify amplifiers based on coupling?
4. List any two advantages of negative feedback amplifiers over positive feedback
amplifiers?
PART-B
Answer ALL questions. Each carries 3 marks. 2X3=6 Marks
5.a Draw the block diagrams of Voltage shunt feedback and Current series feedback
amplifiers?
313
(OR)
5.b Explain the concept of Gain-Bandwidth product?
6.a Derive the expression for gain in a feedback amplifier?
(OR)
6.b Explain the frequency response of 2-stage RC coupled amplifier
PART-C
Answer ALL questions. Each carries 5 marks. 2X5=10Marks
7.a Explain how a BJT in CE mode acts as an amplifier?
(OR)
7.b A transistor used in CE arrangement has the following set of h parameters when the d.c.
operating point is VCE = 10 volts and IC = 1 mA , hie = 2000 Ω; hoe =10−4 mho; hre = 10−3 ;
hfe = 50 Determine (i) input impedance (ii) current gain and (iii) voltage gain. The a.c.
load seen by the transistor is RL = 600 Ω. What will be approximate values using
reasonable approximations?
8.a If an amplifier has a bandwidth of 200 KHz and voltage gain of 80. What will be the new
bandwidth and gain if 5% negative feedback is introduced?
(OR)
8.b Two identical amplifier stages having gains of 50 each and phase shift between input and
output signals of 180degrees each are cascaded. How much is the overall gain and phase
shift of 2-stage amplifier?
314
C18EI-303C
III SEMESTER MID SEMESTER – II MODEL PAPER
PART-A
1. Define conversion efficiency of a power amplifier?
2. List the applications of Tuned circuits?
3. State Barkhausen criteria in oscillators.
4. What are the advantages of crystal oscillator?
PART-B
5.a.What is push-pull power amplifier? Why the name is given so?
(OR)
5.b. What is tuned amplifier? Where it is used?
315
6.a What are the requisites of an amplifier to work as an oscillator?
(OR)
6.b Compare LC and RC oscillators?
PART-C
7.a Calculate the efficiency of a transformer-coupled class A amplifier for a supply of 12 V and
outputs of:
(a) V (p) =12V.
(b) V (p) =6V.
(c) V (p) =2V.
(OR)
7.b Calculate the efficiency of a class B amplifier for a supply voltage of VCC = 24 V with peak
output voltages of:
(a) (a)VL (p) =22V
(b) (b)VL (p) =6V.
8.a Which oscillator provides stable oscillations? Why?
(OR)
8.b Explain the reasons for instability in oscillators and also mention the remedies?
316
C18EI-303C
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION & TRAINING:TS: HYDERABD
SEMESTER END EXAMINATION MODEL QUESTION PAPER
Time: 2 hours Max. Marks: 40
PART-A
1. Define gain-bandwidth product in an amplifier?
2. What is the need for a heat sink in a power transistor?
3. Draw the symbols of Varactor diode and UJT?
4. Mention Barkhausen criterion in oscillators?
5. List the merits of LCD?
6. List the applications of UJT?
7. Define sweep voltage?
8. Define a non-linear wave shaping circuit?
PART-B
Answer ALL questions. Each carries 3 Marks. 4X3=12Marks
9.a Obtain h-parameters of CB configuration in terms of CE configuration?
(OR)
9.b Explain the working principle of LCD?
10.a Distinguish between voltage and power amplifiers?
(OR)
317
10.b Explain the principle of clamper with waveforms?
11.a Explain the working principle of UJT with its equivalent circuit?
(OR)
11.b Explain the working principle of photo voltaic cell?
12.a Explain the double ended clipper with waveforms?
(OR)
12.b Differentiate voltage time base and current time base circuits?
PART-C
Answer ALL questions. Each carries 5 Marks. 4X5=20 Marks
13.a Explain how JFET is used as current source?
(OR)
13.b Explain the use of Varactor diode as a tuning element?
14.a Draw and explain the operation of class-B push-pull amplifier and derive the expression
for efficiency?
(OR)
14.b Explain the use of Bootstrap Time base generator?
15.a Explain the use of UJT as relaxation oscillator?
(OR)
15.b Explain the principle of operation of Photo transistor and list the application areas of
photo transistor?
16.a Explain how a diode clipper is used as noise limiter?
(OR)
16.b Explain the operation of Miller sweep circuit?
318
Course Title : Sensors and Transducers Course Code 18EI-304C
Teaching Scheme in
45:15:0 Credits 3
Periods(L:T:P)
Methodology Lecture + Assignments Total Contact periods : 60
This course requires the basic knowledge of physics, Chemistry and mathematics.
Course Outcomes:
After the completion of course the student is able to
Course Content and Blue print of Marks for SEE

Pre requisites:
CO1 : Use the basic principles of transduction.
CO2 : Classify and compare Temperature measuring instruments.
CO3 : Apply transducers to measure Pressure.
CO4 : Classify and compare flow measuring instruments.
Apply the knowledge of various Transducers in the measurement of displacement and

CO5 :
level.
319
CO6 : Apply transducers to measure force &torque.
Unit Questions to be set for SEE

Unit name Periods
No R U A
1. Measurement System 8
9(a) 13(a)
1
Temperature
2. 10
Measurement
3. Pressure Measurement 12
10(a) 14(a)
2
4
4. Flow Measurement 10
9(b) 13(b)
Measurementof
5. 10 5,6 11(a) 15(a)
Displacement and Level
11(b) 15(b)
3
10(b) 14(b)
Measurement of Force 10
6. 7,8 12(a) 16(a)
and Torque
12(b) 16(b)
Total 60 8 8 8
Course Contents
UNIT I: Measurement Systems.Duration: 8 Periods (L: 6 T: 2)
Generalized Measurement System – Block Diagram-Functional descriptionof measuring systems-Basic

characteristics of ameasuring system- Accuracy, Precision, Error, Linearity, Hysteresis, Resolution,
Threshold, Repeatability, Reliability, Span-Transducer-Definition-Classification-Basic requirements of
a transducer-ElectricalTransducer – Definition, Advantages-Variable Resistance Transducer –Variable
Capacitance Transducer –Variable Inductance Transducer –Opto Electric Transducers.
UNIT II: Temperature Measurement.Duration: 10 Periods (L: 8 T: 2)
Temperature:-Definition-Units-Classification-Electrical temperature sensors – RTD (Platinum

resistance thermometer)-Thermo Electric thermometer (Thermocouple)-Bulk semiconductor sensors
(Thermister)-High Temperature Measurement – Optical Pyrometer, Total Radiation Pyrometer-Infrared
Pyrometer.
320
UNIT III: Pressure Measurement. Duration: 12 Periods (L: 10 T: 2)
Pressure-Definition, Units-Measuring elements – Diaphragm, Capsule, Bellows, Bourdon tube-

Pressure Transducers-Strain Gauge type Pressure Transducer-Capacitive Pressure transducer-
Piezoelectric Pressure Transducer-Low Pressure Measurement – McLeod gage-Pressure Calibration –
Dead weight tester.
UNIT IV: Flow Measurement. Duration: 10Periods (L: 8 T: 2)
Flow-Classification-Bernoulli’s Theorem-Head type – Orifice meter, Venturimeter Rotameter,

Electromagnetic Flow meter, Ultrasonic Flow meter, Anemometers – Hot Wire, Laserand Thermal
Type.
UNIT V: Displacement & Level. Duration: 10 Periods (L: 8 T: 2)
Displacement Measurement-Displacement Transducers-Resistive Potentiometer-LVDT-RVDT-

Variable inductance pickup-Variable capacitive pickup-Strain Gauge and gauge factor- Level
Measurement-Level Transducers-Resistive method-Capacitive method-Gamma Rays method-
Ultrasonic method.
UNIT VI: Force &Torque. Duration: 10 Periods (L: 8 T: 2)
Force –Definition-Units-Types-Working-Load Cell –Column type, Proving ring , Hydraulic ,

Pneumatic,Piezoelectric-Digital Force Transducer-Torque –Definition-Units-Types-Working-Strain
Gauge method-Magneto elastic Transducer.
Recommended Books:
1. Instrumentation Devices & Systems: Rangan, Mani & Sharma.
2. Electrical & Electronic Measurements – A K Sahwney.
3. Electrical &Electronic Measurements and Instrumentation: R K Rajput
4. Instrumentation Devices & Systems: Rangan, Mani & Sharma.
5. Transducers & Instrumentation: S K Venkataram
6. Transducers & Instrumentation: D V S Murthy.
7. Electronic Instrumentation and Measurements: David Bell.
8. Introduction to Measurements and Instrumentation: Arun K Ghosh
9. Principles of Industrial Instrumentation & Control Systems Chennakesava R Alavala
321
1. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Accuracy_and_precision
Accuracy and precision
2. www.instrumentationtoday.com/transducers/2011/0
3. https://www.americanpiezo.com/piezo-theory/whats-a-transducer.html
Transducer
4. www.slideshare.net/manash234/classification-of-transducers
Classificationof transducer
5. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Capacitive_displacement_sensor
Capacitive displacement sensor
6. http://www.instrumentationtoday.com/piezoelectric-transducer/2011/07/
Piezoelectric transducer
7. http://www.technologystudent.com/elec1/ldr1.htm LDR
8. http://www.aptechnologies.co.uk/support/photodiodes/photodiode-theory-
of operation
1.0 Understand the concepts of Measurement System.
1.1 Draw and explain the block diagram of Measurement system.
1.2 List out the basic characteristics of measuring system.
1.3 List the Static and Dynamic characteristics of an instrument.
1.4 Define and understand the terms: Accuracy, Precision, Error, Linearity, Hysteresis,
322
Resolution, Threshold, Repeatability, Reliability, Span.
1.5 Define transducer.
1.6 List the basic requirements of a Transducer.
1.7 List the advantages of Electrical Transducers.
1.8 Give the classification of Electrical Transducers.
1.9 Explain Active and Passive Transducer.
1.10 Explain Primary and Secondary Transducer.
1.11 List the Characteristics required for selecting a transducer for a particular
application.
1.12 List out the Transducers based on their transduction principle.
1.13 State the need for Signal conditioning.
2.0 Understand the concepts of Temperature Measurement.
2.1 Define Temperature and mention its units.
2.2 Classify Temperature measuring devices.
2.3 List the metals commonly used for the construction of electrical temperature devices.
2.4 Explain the working, applications and ranges of the following Electrical Temperature
Transducers
a. RTD (Platinum Resistance Thermometer).
b. Thermocouple (Thermo electric Thermometer)
c. Thermistor (Bulk Semiconductor Sensors)
2.5 State the need of Pyrometry.
2.6 Explain the working, applications and ranges of following High Temperature
Transducers
a. Optical Pyrometer
b. Total Radiation Pyrometer
c. Infrared Pyrometer
323
3.0 Understand the concepts of Pressure Measurement.
3.1 Define Pressure and mention its units.
3.2 List the basic pressure measuring elements.
3.3 Explain the principle of operation of pressure measurement elements like
a. Diaphragm- Types
b. Capsules- Types
c. Bellows
d. Bourdon tubes- Types
3.4 Explain the principle of operation of following Electrical pressure transducers
a. Strain gauge transducer
b. Variable capacitance device
c. Piezo-Electric pressure transducer
3.5 Explain the principle of operation of Low pressure measurement using McLeod gauge.
3.6 Explain the Pressure calibration method using Dead weight tester.
4.0 Understand the concepts of Flow Measurement.
4.1 State the importance of Flow measurement in industry.
4.2 Classify Flow meters.
4.3 State Bernoulli’s theorem.
4.4 Explain the working principle, advantages and disadvantages of following Constant Head type flow
meters
a. Orifice Plate
b. Venturi Tube
c. Pitot Tube
4.5 Explain the working principle, advantages and disadvantages of Variable Head type flow meter
Rotameter.
4.6 Explain the working principle, advantages and disadvantages of Electromagnetic flow meter.
4.7 Explain the working principle, advantages and disadvantages of Ultrasonic flow meter.
324
4.8 Explain the working principle and advantages of following Anemometers
a. Hot-wire anemometer
b. Laser anemometer
4.9 Explain the working principle and advantages of Thermal Flow meter.
5.0 Understand the concepts of Measurement of Displacement and Level:
5.1 Define Displacement and Level.
5.2 State the units of Displacement and Level.
5.3 List different types of Displacement measurement.
5.4 List the devices used for linear displacement measurement.
5.5 List the devices used Angular displacement measurement.
5.6 List different types of Level measurement.
5.7 Explain the working principle of Displacement measurement and applications of the following
a. Linear potentiometers
b. Variable Inductance Pickup
c. Variable Capacitance Pickup
d. Linear variable differential transformers (LVDT)
e. Rotary variable differential transformers (RVDT)
5.8 Explain the working principle of Displacement measurement and applications of the following
a. Resistive method
b. Capacitive method
c. Gamma Rays method
d. Ultrasonic method
5.9 Explain the principle of Resistance strain Gauge.Write the expression for Gauge factor.
6.0 Understand the concepts of Force and Torque Measurement
6.1 Define Force and mention its units.
6.2 Define Torque and mention its units.
6.3 List the types of Force measuring devices.
325
6.4 List the types of Torque measuring devices.
6.5 Explain the working of Torque measurement using the following
a. Strain gauge Torque transducer
b. Magneto elastic Torque transducer
6.6 Explain the working of Digital Force Transducer.
6.7 Explain the working of Force measurement using
a. Column type.
b. Proving ring.
c. Hydraulic load cell.
d. Pneumatic load cell.
e. Piezo electric transducer.
1. Do Market survey on Transducers available in the market and collect the following information
like name of the transducer, comparisons, specifications, Price etc. The student should submit a
handwritten report. Documents have to be maintained as a record.
2. Take Quiz tests / assignments in topics of Industrial Instrumentation. Documents have to be

3. Do a power point presentation on current topics in Industrial Instrumentation. Documents have

to be maintained as a record.
4. Visit YouTube or any other sites on current topics in Industrial Instrumentation. Listen to the
lectures and submit a handwritten report and a soft copy (CD/DVD)
5. Visit Mechanical department and study the working of venturi meter and submit the report.
6. In Process lab see the temperature measuring instruments and write their specification and
submit the report.
326
Ethics
Basic knowledge
Lifelong learning
Engineering Tools
Communication
Linked

society Engineer and
Team work Individual and

PO
10
CO1 2 2 2 1,2,10
CO2 2 2 2 2 2 1,2,5,6,7
CO3 2 2 2 2 1,2,4,5
CO4 2 2 2 2 1,2,5,7
CO5 2 2 2 2 1,2,4,5
CO6 2 2 2 2 1,2,3,7
Internal Evaluation
Test Units Marks
Assignment 1 5
Seminars 1 5
Total 60
327

o Questions each Marks
question
MID SEM-I EXAM
1 Unit-I 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-II 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM-II EXAM
1 Unit-III 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-IV 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)
328
page, 1 page and 2 pages respectively

question
02 Part-B Understanding(U 8 3 4 12 Marks

)

Unit No
R U A
I
Q1 Q9(a) Q9(a)
II
III
Q2 Q10(a) Q10(a)
IV Q4
Q9(b), Q9(b),
V Q5,Q6
Q11(a), Q11(b) Q11(a), Q11(b)
Q3
Q10(b), Q10(b),
VI Q7,Q8
Q12(a), Q12(b) Q12(a), Q12(b)
329
BOARD DIPLOMA SEMESTER MID-I EXAMINATIONS (C-18)
DEIE - III SEMESTER EXAMINATION
SENSORS AND TRANSDUCERS (18EI-304C)
TIME: 1 Hour Maximum Marks: 20
PART –A
Instructions: Answer all the questions. Each question carries ONE mark. MARKS:
4X1 =4
1. Define accuracy.
2. Define transducer.
3. Define Temperature.
4. List temperature measuring devices.
PART –B
Instructions: Answer TWO questions. Each question carries THREE marks. MARKS:
2X3=6
5(a) List the static and dynamic characteristics of an instrument.
(OR)
5(b) State the need for signal conditioning.
6(a) State the need of pyrometry.
(OR)
6(b) List any two applications of (i)RTD (ii) Thermocouple (iii) Thermistor
330
PART –C
Instructions: Answer TWO questions. Each question carries FIVE marks. 2X5=10
7(a) Draw and explain the block diagram of measurement system..
(OR)
7(b) Explain about primary and secondary transducers.
8(a) Explain the working principle of thermocouple.
(OR)
8(b) Explain the working principle of optical pyrometer.
331
BOARD DIPLOMA SEMESTER MID-II EXAMINATIONS (C-18)
PART –A
Instructions: Answer all the questions. Each question carries ONE mark. MARKS: 4X1 =4
1. Define pressure.
2. List the pressure measuring elements.
3. Define flow rate.
4. Classify Flow meters.
PART –B
Instructions: Answer TWO questions. Each question carries THREE marks.

MARKS:2X3=6
5(a) Draw the bellows and capsule.
(OR)
5(b) State the principle of Bourdon Tube.
6(a) State Bernoulli’s theorem.
(OR)
6(b) List the advantages of Electromagnetic flow meter.
PART –C
332
Instructions: Answer TWO questions. Each question carries FIVE marks.
MARKS: 2X5=10
7(a) Explain the principle of operation of Strain gauge type pressure transducers
(OR)
7(b) Explain the pressure calibration method using dead weight tester.
8(a)Explain the working principle of Electromagnetic flow meter with a diagram.
(OR)
8(b) Explain the working principle of Laser anemometer with a diagram.
333
BOARD DIPLOMA SEMESTER END EXAMINATIONS (C-18)
PART –A
1. Define transducer.
2. Define pressure.
3. Define torque.
4. Define precision.
5. Define Displacement.
6. State the units of level.
7. Define force.
8. Mention the units of torque.
PART –B
Instructions: Answer FOUR questions. Each question carries THREE marks.

MARKS: 4X3=12
9(a) State the need for signal conditioning.
(OR)
9(b) List different types of Level measurement.
10(a) State the importance of flow measurement in industry.
(OR)
334
10(b) Write the advantages of force measuring devices.
11(a) Draw the diagram of linear potentiometer.
(OR)
11(b) Explain the principle of Resistance strain Gauge.
12(a) List the types of force measuring devices.
(OR)
12(b) Write the advantages of torque measuring devices.
.PART –C
Instructions: Answer FOUR questions. Each question carries FIVE marks.

MARKS: 4X5=20
13(a) Draw and explain the block diagram of Measurement system.
(OR)
13(b) Draw and explain the working principle of LVDT.
14(a) Explain the working principle of electromagnetic flow meter
(OR)
14(b) Explain the working of force measurement using column type.
15(a) Draw and explain the working principle of RVDT.
(OR)
15(b) Draw and explain the working of liquid level measurement using resistive transducer.
16(a) Explain the working of digital force transducer.
(OR)
16(b) Explain the working principle Magneto elastic Torque transducer.
335
336
Course Title : Network theory and Course Code 18EI-305C

Electrical Machines

Periods(L:T:P)
Methodology Lecture + Assignments Total Contact periods 60
Pre requisites:
The course requires the basic knowledge of Physics and Mathematics and fundamentals of Basic
electrical engineering subject.
Course Outcomes
Upon completion of the course the student should have the ability to
CO1 : Analyze the Fundamentals of D.C circuits.
CO2 : Apply the concept of Node and Mesh analysis.
CO3 : Analyze the Network theorems. Questions to be set for SEE

Unit
Unit name Periods
No :
CO4 Analyze and determine FundamentalsRof A.C circuits. U A
CO5 : Apply and analyze
Fundamentals of D.Cthe working of DC machines.
1. 6
circuits 9(a) 13(a)
CO6 : Apply and analyze the working of AC machines.
1
Node and Mesh
2. 10
analysis 4
3. Network theorems 12 2 10(a) 14(a)
4. Fundamentals of A.C 8
circuits
337
DC machines 9(b) 13(b)
5. 12 5,6 11(a) 15(a)
11(b) 15(b)
3
AC machines 10(b) 14(b)
6. 12 7,8 12(a) 16(a)
12(b) 16(b)
Total 60 8 8 8
Course Contents
UNIT 1- Fundamentals of D.C circuits Duration: 6 Periods (L: 4 T: 2)
Active and Passive circuits – ideal voltage source ideal current source Junction- branch and loop in
circuits-source transformation –limitations of Ohm’s law to solve complex circuits- Kirchhoff’s laws -
Star – Delta configurations- star-delta transformations.
UNIT 2- Node and Mesh analysis Duration: 10 Periods (L: 7 T: 3)
Tree- co-tree- twigs- links- mesh- loop- node- principal node -Tie-set matrix and cut-set matrix for a
given network Graph-Mesh currents identification, framing into matrix form. Obtain mesh currents
using Crammer’s Rule-Super mesh technique to find the mesh current for the circuits- Node Voltage
identification- framing into matrix Form-Obtain node voltage using Crammer’s Rule-Super node
technique to find the node voltage for the circuits and Dual networks.
UNIT 3- Network theorems Duration: 12 Periods (L: 9 T: 3)
Super position theorem- The Venin’s Theorem -Norton’s Theorem-Reciprocity Theorem- Maximum
power transfer theorem with reference to D.C.-Problems on the above.
UNIT-4 Fundamentals of A.C circuits Duration: 8 Periods (L: 6 T: 2)
338
Derivation of Voltage and current relationship in pure resistive- inductive and capacitive circuits-
calculation of impendence- current-phase angle- power and power factor in R-L, R-C, R-L-C Series
Circuits-Derivation of relation between voltage- current- impendence- power including Waveforms-
Problems on series circuits-resonance circuits-definition of resonance-resonant circuit –problem-band
Width-Q-factor and problems on series resonance
UNIT-5 DC machines Duration: 12 Periods (L: 9 T: 3)
Introduction- energy Conversion-D.C Generator- principle of working -simple loop generator-

construction details of D.C Machine and materials used for the above said parts- simple lap and wave
windings- uses of lap and wave windings- Expression for the EMF generated- simple problems for
different types of D.C. Generators with diagrams- calculation of generated E.M.F- different types of
losses- calculation of efficiency- condition for maximum efficiency. Principle of operation of D.C.
Motor- back EMF and speed equation. Expression for torque developed- characteristics of D.C. series
shunt and compound motors. Need of a starter- 3-point starter. Speed control by variation of armature
voltage and excitation.
UNIT 6: AC machines Duration: 12 Periods (L: 9 T: 3)
Basic working principle- parts- types (salient pole and non-salient pole Machines) E.M.F. equation
problems- voltage regulation-features of single and three phase induction motor –principle of induction
Motors-Applications-Synchronous impedance- Operation of synchronous motor- methods of starting of
synchronous motors- applications.
Recommended books
1. Electrical Circuits by A.Chakrabarthy- Dhanapat Raj and Sons.
2. Electrical Circuits by Joseph Edminister- Schaum series Electrical Technology vol.-II,
B.L Theraja.
3. Electrical and electronic measuring instruments A.K. Sahney.
4. Engineering Circuit analysis By William Hayt and JackE,kemmerly-TMH.
339
Suggested e-learning references
2. www.electronic circuits-tutorials.ws
3. www.nptel.ac.in
1.0 Understand the Fundamentals of D.C circuits.
1.20 Differentiate between active and passive circuits.
1.21 Define ideal voltage source.
1.22 Define ideal current source.
1.23 Explain Source transformation technique.
1.24 Explain the concept of junction, branch and loop in circuits.
1.25 State the limitations of Ohm’s law to solve complex circuits.
1.26 State Kirchhoff’s current law.
1.27 State Kirchhoff’s voltage law.
1.28 Solve problems by applying KVL (Only on resistive circuits).
1.29 Solve problems by applying KCL (Only on resistive circuits).
1.30 Explain star and delta circuits.
1.31 Give formulae for star to delta and for delta to star transformations.
1.32 Explain finding the equivalent circuits using above transformations.
1.33 Solve problems on the above.
2.0 Understand the concepts of Node and Mesh analysis
2.14 Define the terms.
(i). tree (ii). Co-tree (iii). Twigs (iv). Links (v). Mesh (vi). Node (vii).Principal node.
2.15 Find the tie-set matrix and cut-set matrix for a given network graph.
340
2.16 Find the number of Mesh current loops for a given network.
2.17 Determine the number of meshes required to solve the given network.
2.18 Give the mesh current equations for a given network and find matrix for equations.
2.19 Solve the mesh currents using Crammer’s rule.
2.20 Find the mesh current for the circuits having current sources using super mesh
technique.
2.21 State the nodes in a network.
2.22 Determine the number of nodes required to solve the given network.
2.23 Find the node voltage equations for a given network and arrange them in matrix form.
2.24 Solve the simple problems on node voltage using Crammer’s rule.
2.25 Find the node voltage for the circuits having voltage sources using super node
technique.
2.26 Explain the concept of dual network.
2.27 Draw the dual for a given network.
3.0 Understand Network theorems
3.20 Explain the steps involved in finding Thevenin’s equivalent circuit.
3.21 Define Thevenin’s voltage.
3.22 Define Thevenin’s resistance.
3.23 Solve simple problems to determine current through any branch in a given network.
3.24 State Norton’s theorem.
3.25 Explain the steps involved in finding Nortan’s equivalent circuit.
3.26 Solve simple problems to determine current through any branch in a given network.
3.27 State Super position theorem.
3.28 Explain the steps involved in using superposition theorem.
3.29 Solve simple problems on the above theorem.
3.30 State Reciprocity theorem.
341
3.31 Give examples for reciprocal circuits.
3.32 Solve simple problems to verify the reciprocity of a circuit.
3.33 State Maximum power transfer theorem.
3.34 Solve simple problems on the above theorem.
3.35 Explain the need for impedance matching in networks.
4.0 Understand the Fundamentals of A.C circuits
4.27 Define the terms resistance, inductance and capacitance.
4.28 Derive relationship between voltage and current in pure resistive circuits.
4.29 Derive relationship between voltage and current in pure inductive circuits.
4.30 Derive relationship between voltage and current in pure capacitive circuits
4.31 Calculate the impedance, current, phase angle, power and power factor in R-L, R-C,
L-C series circuits.
4.32 Solve Problems on Series Circuits.
4.33 Calculate the impedance, current, phase angle, power and power factor in RLC circuits.
4.34 Define Resonance in RLC series circuits.
4.35 Derive an expression for resonant frequency in series resonant circuit.
4.36 Draw the characteristics of circuit under series resonance.
4.37 State the circuit conditions under resonance.
4.38 Define Q- factor.
4.39 Give the importance of Q-factor.
4.40 Define Band width.
4.41 Solve simple problems on series resonance.
4.42 State the applications of series resonance circuits.
7.0 Understand the Working of DC machines
5.16. Draw a legible Sketch of a D.C. Machine and label its parts.
342
5.17. List the materials used for each part.
5.18. Explain the simple lap and wave windings.
5.19. Explain the principle of working of a D.C. generator.
5.20. Derive the equation for EMF of a generator.
5.21. Solve simple problems on EMF equation.
5.22. Classify D.C. Generators.
5.23. Explain the principles of separate and self excited D.C Generators.
5.24. Distinguish between series, shunt and compound types of D.C. generator.
5.25. List the Various applications of D.C Shunt, series and compound Generator.
5.26. Explain the principle of operation of a D.C. motor.
5.27. State the significance of back e.m.f of a D.C. motor
5.28. State the relationship between supply voltage, back e.m.f and current.
5.29. Explain the torque equation of a D.C. motor.
5.30. Solve simple problems on torque equation.
5.31. List the applications of Shunt, Series and Compound motors.
5.32. State the need for a starter.
5.33. Explain the working of a 3-point starter with a legible sketch.
5.34. List the methods of variation of speed of D.C. motors.
5.35. Explain the speed control of a D.C. Motor by
(i) Armature voltage method (ii) Field current method.
5.36. List different types of losses in a D.C. Machine.
8.0 Understand the Working of AC machines
6.15 Explain principle of working of alternator.
6.16 Explain constructional features of alternator
i) Salient pole ii) Non salient pole.
6.17 Define i) pitch factor ii) distribution factor of the armature winding.
343
6.18 State and derive the e.m.f. equation of alternator.
6.19 Solve problems on EMF equation.
6.20 Explain the construction features of Single Phase and Three phase induction motors.
6.21 Explain the principle of operation of above induction motors.
6.22 State the applications of induction motors.
6.23 Explain the terms i) synchronous impedance ii) voltage regulation of an alternator.
6.24 Explain the principle of working of Synchronous motor.
6.25 List the methods of starting a synchronous motor.
6.26 List the applications synchronous motor.
. Suggested Student Activities
1. Student visits Library and refers various text books to solve the problems.
2. Student inspects the electrical machines to understand the working.
3. Visit nearby Industry to familiarize with electrical machines.
4. Analyze the working of D.C & A.C circuits
5. Quiz.
6. Group discussion.
7. Surprise test.
344
Engineering Tools
Basic knowledge
Ethics
Individual and Team work

Experiments and practice
Lifelong learning
Communication
Linked

PO
CO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
CO1 2 2 2 2 1,2,3,10
CO2 2 2 2 2 2 1,2,5,6,10
CO3 2 2 2 2 2 1,2,4,5,10
CO4 2 2 2 2 1,2,5,10
CO5 2 2 2 2 1,2,4,5
CO6 2 2 2 2 1,2,3,10
Internal Evaluation
Test Units Marks
Assignment 1 5
Seminars 1 5
Total 60
345
question
MID SEM-I EXAM
1 Unit-I 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-II 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM-II EXAM
1 Unit-III 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-IV 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)
346
question
02 Part-B Understanding(U 8 3 4 12 Marks

)

Unit No
R U A
I
Q1 Q9(a) Q9(a)
II
III
Q4 Q2 Q10(a) Q10(a)
IV
Q9(b), Q9(b),
V Q5,Q6
Q11(a), Q11(b) Q11(a), Q11(b)
Q3
Q10(b), Q10(b),
VI Q7,Q8
Q12(a), Q12(b) Q12(a), Q12(b)
BOARD DIPLOMA MID-SEMESTER-I EXAMINATIONS (C-18)
DEIE – III SEMESTER EXAMINATION

347
NETWORK THEORY AND ELECTRICAL MACHINES (18EI-305C)
PART –A
5. Define ideal voltage source.
6. State Kirchhoff’s current law.
7. Define the terms a) tree b) Co-tree.
8. Define Mesh and node.
PART –B
Instructions: Answer TWO questions. Each question carries THREE marks. MARKS: 2X3=6
5(a) Differentiate between active and passive circuits.
(OR)
5(b) State the limitations of Ohm’s law to solve complex circuits.
6(a) Write the mesh equation for the given circuit.
(OR)
6(b) Draw the dual for a given network.
348
PART –C
Instructions: Answer TWO questions. Each question carries FIVE marks. MARKS: 2X5=10
7(a) Using KVL find the current in each branch of the circuit given below.
V2
V1 4V
6V R2
10Ω R3
R1 8Ω
2Ω
(OR)
7(b) Explain the STAR to DELTA and DELTA to STAR conversion.
8(a) Find the current3Ω resistor in the given circuit using nodal analysis.
(OR)
8(b) Find the i1, i2, i3, i4, i5, currents in the given circuit using Mesh analysis.
BOARD DIPLOMA MID-SEMESTER-II EXAMINATIONS (C-18)

349
PART –A
5. Define Thevenin’s voltage.
6. State the Norton’s theorem.
7. Define resistance.
8. Define Q- factor.
PART –B
Instructions: Answer TWO questions. Each question carries THREE marks. MARKS: 2X3=6
5(a) Explain the steps involved in finding Thevenin’s equivalent circuit
(OR)
5(b) Explain the need for impedance matching in networks.
6(a) Derive relationship between voltage and current in pure inductive circuits.
(OR)
6(b) Calculate the impedance in R-L circuit.
PART –C

MARKS: 2X5=10
7(a) State Maximum power transfer theorem and find the maximum power across 1KΩ resistor for the
given circuit.
350
(OR)
7(b) Find the current through 2 ohms resister of the circuit shown below using super
position theorem.
V1
10 V R2 V2
2Ω 6V
R1
1Ω
8(a) Calculate the impedance, current, phase angle, power and power factor in RLC
circuits.
(OR)
8(b) Derive an expression for resonant frequency in series resonant circuit.
351
PART –A
1. Define ideal voltage source.
2. State the Norton’s theorem.
3. State the need for a starter.
4. Define pitch factor.
5. Classify D.C. Generators.
6. List the applications of Shunt motor.
7. Define distribution factor of armature winding.
8. State any two applications of induction motors.
PART –B

MARKS: 4X3=12
9(a) Differentiate between active and passive circuits.
(OR)
9(b) List the different types of losses in a D.C machine.
10(a) Explain the need for impedance matching in networks.
(OR)
10(b) Explain the principle of Alternator.
11(a) Distinguish between series and shunt D.C Generator.
(OR)
11(b) List the methods of variation of speed of D.C motor.
352
12(a) State the e.m.f. equation of alternator.
(OR)
12(b) List the applications of synchronous motor.
PART –C

MARKS: 4X5=20
13(a) Find the i1, i2, i3, i4, i5, currents in the given circuit using Mesh analysis.
(OR)
13(b) Explain the principle of working of D.C generator.
14(a) Derive an expression for resonant frequency in series resonant circuit.
(OR)
14(b) Explain the constructional feature of Salient Pole Alternator.
15(a) Explain the principle of operation of D.C Motor.
(OR)
15(b) Explain the working of a 3 point starter with a neat diagram.
353
16(a) Explain the constructional features of single phase induction motor.
(OR)
16(b) Explain the principal of working of Synchronous motor.
354
ELECTRONIC DEVICES LAB PRACTICE
Course Title : Electronic Devices Lab Practice Course Code 18EI-306P

Semester III Course Group Practical
Periods(L:T:P)
Periods : 45
Pre requisites
This course requires the basic skills of Handling Basic Electronics tools and Components, knowledge
of connecting cables and meters
Unit Unit name Marks for SEE Marks

No Periods weightage
Han Ma Pre
dlin nip cisi
g ulat on
ion
1 Amplifiers, Oscillators 15 4 2 6 12
and Multi-vibrators
2 Special semiconductor 15 4 2 8 14
devices
3 Wave shaping circuits 15 4 4 6 14
Total 45 10 8 22 40
Course Content
I. Amplifiers and Oscillators
1. Implement voltage divider bias single stage RC coupled CE amplifier and plot frequency response.
a) Observe the effect of connecting and disconnecting the emitter bypass capacitor on gain and
distortion.
b) Observe the effect of emitter bypass capacitor Ce on voltage across Emitter Resistance using CRO.
c) Measure the output power using ac power meter
355
2. Implement Colpitt’s oscillator and verify the effect of varying the tank circuit component values
and observe output waveforms on CRO.
3. Implement Hartley oscillator and verify the effect of varying the tank circuit component values
4. Implement transistor Astable multivibrator circuit and observe the waveforms on CRO.
II. Special Semiconductor Devices
5. Plot the characteristics of a) Photodiode b) photo transistor
6. a) Implement a Twilight switch using a Phototransistor and a Relay
b) Replace Phototransistor with LDR and Test
7. a) Plot the VI characteristics of different colour LEDs & determine the Vf (forward voltage drop)
b) Test the above devices with DMM & Analogue multimeter and identify the Terminals
8.a) Plot the characteristics of i) LDR ii) Thermistor iii) VDR
b) Test the above devices with DMM & Analogue multimeter
9. a) Implement a simple Temperature controller using Thermistor and a Relay
b) Use a VDR /Trigistor for protection against high voltage surges and verify
10. a) Plot the characteristics of optocoupler MCT2E
b) Test the given optocoupler and identify its terminals
11. a) Use MCT 2E to switch on a 6V lamp connected to RPS by applying a Low voltage 1.5 V signal
from a cell at input
b) Implement a simple timer using 1 M Ω Resistor, 1000 mfd capacitor, Transistor BC148 and a
Relay
III. Wave shaping Circuits
Realize Clipper and Clamper circuits and observe the waveforms on CRO
12. a) Realize Series and Parallel diode clippers
b) Assemble and test Positive and negative clipper circuits with and without bias
13. a) Implement Amplitude limiter (two diodes connected back to back) and observe the waveform on
CRO.
356
b) Implement a Zener diode Clipper and measure the output voltage with DMM and also observe
waveform on CRO
14. Implement Boot-strap sweep circuit and observe the sweep wave form.
15. Implement Miller sweep circuit and observe the waveform.
(i) Collection of catalogues and specification sheets, preparation of a chart displaying symbols of
passive components and connectors/cables.
(ii) Collection of the contributors (scientists) and contribution details to the field of Electrical and
Electronics engineering
(iii) Any other such activities that can contribute to the student’s knowledge in respect of this course.
(iv)Record the best practices used in the disposal of E-waste and precautions in
the operation of electrical appliances.
CO1 Apply the basics of transistor to construct amplifiers, 1,2,3,8,9,10

oscillators and multi-vibrators and analyze the effect of
circuit components
CO2 Identify different special semiconductor devices and apply 1,2,3,4,5,6,8,9,10

the knowledge of special semiconductor devices in special
applications
CO3 Apply the knowledge of semiconductor components in 1,2,3,4,8,9,10

realizing and analyzing wave shaping circuits
E Learning Resources
3. www.nptel.ac.in
357
4.studentboxoffice.in
State Board of Technical Education and Training, Telangana
III Semester Mid Examination-I Model Question paper
DEIE III semester practical Examination
Corse Code:18EI-306P Duration:1 hour
Course Name: Electronic Devices Lab Practice Max.Marks:20
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Instructions to the Candidate:
(ii)Record the results on a graph sheet if required , and conclude your observation of the experiment
(iii) Draw the circuit diagram for illustration ,choose appropriate values when not mentioned in the
question
Record the effect of emitter bypass capacitor on gain of the amplifier.
2. Implement Colpitt’s oscillator and verify the effect of varying the tank circuit component values
3. Implement Hartley oscillator and observe the effect of varying the tank circuit component values
and observe output waveforms on CRO. Record your observations.
4. Implement transistor Astable multivibrator circuit and observe the waveforms on CRO and record
your observations.
5. Implement the Photo diode circuit to show that the resistance of the photo diode varies with light and
also measure the current through the Photodiode. Record your observations.
III Semester Mid Examination-II Model Question paper
358
Corse Code: 18EI-306P Duration: 1 hour
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(iii) Draw the circuit diagram for illustration; choose appropriate values when not mentioned in the
question
1. .Implement the Photo transistor circuit to show that the resistance of the photo transistor varies with
light and also measure the current through the Photo transistor. Record your observations.
2. a) Implement a Twilight switch using a Phototransistor and a Relay
b) Replace Phototransistor with LDR and record the observations.
3. a) Plot the VI characteristics of white, red and green colour LEDs & determine the Vf (forward
voltage drop)
b) Test the above devices with DMM & Analogue multi meter and identify the Terminals
4. a) Plot the V-I characteristics and response characteristics of i) LDR
b) Test the above devices with DMM & Analogue multi meter
5. a) Implement a simple Temperature controller using Thermistor and a Relay
b) Use a VDR for protection against high voltage surges and verify
Semester End Examination Model Question paper
Corse Code: 18EI-306P Duration: 2 hours
359
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
question
Record the effect of emitter bypass capacitor on gain of the amplifier.
2. Implement Colpitt’s oscillator and verify the effect of varying the tank circuit component values and
observe output waveforms on CRO.
3. Implement Hartley oscillator and observe the effect of varying the tank circuit component values and
observe output waveforms on CRO. Record your observations.
4. Implement transistor Astable multi vibrator circuit and observe the waveforms on CRO and record
your observations.
5. Implement the Photo diode circuit to show that the resistance of the photo diode varies with light and
also measure the current through the Photodiode. Record your observations.
6. Implement the Photo transistor circuit to show that the resistance of the photo transistor varies with
light and also measure the current through the Photo transistor. Record your observations.
7. a) Implement a Twilight switch using a Phototransistor and a Relay.
b) Replace Phototransistor with LDR and record the observations.
8. a) Plot the VI characteristics of white, red and green color LEDs & determine the Vf (forward
voltage drop)
b) Test the above devices with DMM & Analogue multimeter and identify the Terminals.
9. a) Plot the V-I characteristics and response characteristics of i) LDR .
360
b) Test the above devices with DMM & Analogue multimeter.
10. a) Implement a simple Temperature controller using Thermistor and a Relay.
b) Use a VDR for protection against high voltage surges and verify.
11. a) Plot the characteristics of optocoupler MCT2E.
b) Test the given optocoupler and identify its terminals.
12. a) Use MCT 2E to switch on a 6V lamp connected to RPS by applying a Low voltage 1.5 V signal
from a cell at input.
b) Implement a simple timer using 1 M Ω Resistor, 1000 mfd capacitor, Transistor BC148 and a
Relay.
13. Construct and test Positive and negative clipper circuits with and without bias.
14. Implement Amplitude limiter (two diodes connected back to back) and observe the
waveform on CRO.
b) Implement a Zener diode Clipper and measure the output voltage with DMM and also observe
waveform on CRO.
15. Implement Boot-strap sweep circuit and observe the sweep wave form.
Sensors and Transducers Lab

Course Title Course Code 18EI-308P
Practice
361
Teaching Scheme in 1.5
15:0:30 Credits
Hrs(L:T:P)
Total Contact 45
Methodology Lecture + Practicals
Periods
Pre requisites
This course requires the basic knowledge of high school science and Mathematics.
Course Outcomes
Unit No Unit name Periods

Analyze the response and plot the characteristics of displacement measurements
CO1 : Course Content and Blue Print
transducer such as LVDT, RVDT, Capacitive transducer
CO2 : 1. observe Temperature

Analyze, and record the measurement
Level measurement 9
2. Pressure measurement 9
Analyze the response and plot the characteristics of temperature measurement
CO3 :
transducer such as RTD, Thermistor and Thermocouple
Analyze
3. the response
Flowand plot the characteristics of pressure
Measurement 9 measurement
CO4 :
transducer
CO5 : Analyze, observe and record the Flow measurement

4. Displacement measurement 9
362
5. Level measurement 9
Total 45
Course Contents
I. Temperature Measurement. Duration: 9 Periods
5. Conduct an experiment to measure temperature using Thermistor and plot its

characteristics.
6. Conduct an experiment to measure temperature using Thermocouple and plot its

characteristics.
7. Conduct an experiment to measure temperature using RTD and plot its characteristics.
II. Pressure Measurement. Duration: 9 Periods
8. Conduct an experiment to measure pressure using Strain gauge load cell.
9. Conduct an experiment to measure pressure using Dead weight tester.
10. Conduct an experiment to measure pressure using Resistive transducer.
11. Conduct an experiment to measure pressure using Capacitive transducer.
III. Flow Measurement. Duration: 9 Periods
12. Conduct an experiment to measure Flow using Orifice plate.
13. Conduct an experiment to measure Flow using Venturi tube.
14. Conduct an experiment to measure Flow using Rotameter.
363
IV. Displacement Measurement. Duration: 9 Periods
15. Conduct an experiment to measure linear displacement using LVDT and plot its
characteristics.
16. Conduct an experiment to measure angular displacement using RVDT and plot its
characteristics.
17. Conduct an experiment to measure linear displacement using Resistive transducer and
plot its characteristics.
18. Conduct an experiment to measure linear displacement using Capacitive transducer and
V. Level Measurement. Duration: 9 Periods
19. Conduct an experiment to measure level using Float type level indicator.
20. Conduct an experiment to measure level using Resistive type level indicator.
1. Instrumentation Devices & Systems- Ragan, Mani & Sharma
2. Transducers &Instrumentation-D V S Murthy
3. Introduction to Measurements & Instrumentation- Arun K Ghosh
4. Electrical & Electronics Measurements- AK Sawhney
5. Instrumentation handbook- Liptak

The student should be able to
1. Do market survey on LVDT, resistive, capacitive transducers available in the market and
collect the following information like make, specifications, price etc. the student should submit
a handwritten report. Documents have to be maintained as a record.
364
2. Take quiz, tests/assignments on lab experiments. Documents have to be maintained as a
record.
3. Do a power point presentation the various parameters monitored in industrial instrumentation

environment. Documents have to be maintained as a record.
4. Visit YouTube sites relevant to topics on measurements in transducer

engineering/instrumentation. Listen to lectures and submit a handwritten report or softcopy
(CD/DVD).
5. Draw a control panel and indicate the meters. Highlight the importance of control room in
industrial environment monitoring a process. Submit a report.
6. Visit any mechanical department lab and study the working of Venturi meter/orifice
meter/rotameter/viscometer and submit a handwritten report.
7. Visit electrical/civil department lab and study the working of various measuring instrument
and submit a handwritten report.
8. Visit nearby process instrumentation industry and submit a handwritten report on the process
and safety procedures followed.
365
Linked PO
Lifelong learning
Engineering Tools
Ethics
Basic knowledge
Communication

CO Knowledge Discipline
PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO
10
CO 2 - 2 - - - - - - 2
1 1,3,10
CO 2 2 - - - - - - - 2
1,2,10
2
CO 2 2 2 - - - 2 - - 2
1,2,3,7,10
3
CO 2 - 2 2 - - - 2 - 2
1,3,4,8,10
4
CO 2 2 2 2 - - 2 2 - 2 1,2,3,4,7,
5 8,10
CO 2 2 2 2 2 - - 2 - 2 1,2,3,4,5,
6
8,10
CO 2 2 2 2 2 - - 2 - 2 1,2,3,4,5,
7
8,10
366
Internal evaluation:
Test Units Marks
Mid Sem 1 1, 2 20
Mid Sem 2 3,4 and 5 20
Attitude of students
towards practicing
experiments(10)
Prompt submission of
records in time (5)
Total 60
367
DEIE III SemesterPractical Examination
Course Code: 18EI-308P Duration: 1 Hr
Course Name: Sensors and Transducers Lab Practice Max.Marks:20
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
question
1. Calculate temperature using Thermistor and plot its characteristics.
2. Calculate temperature using Thermocouple and plot its characteristics.
3. Calculate temperature using RTD and plot its characteristics.
368
DEIE III SemesterPractical Examination
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---
question
1. Conduct an experiment to measure Flow rate using Orifice plate.
2. Conduct an experiment to measure Flow rate using Rotameter.
characteristics.
characteristics.
5. Conduct an experiment to measure linear displacement using Resistive transducer and plot
its characteristics.
6. Conduct an experiment to measure linear displacement using Capacitive transducer and plot
8. Conduct an experiment to measure level using Resistive type level indicator
369
Course Code:18EI-308P Duration: 2 Hrs
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
question
1. Calculate temperature using Thermistor and plot its characteristics.
2. Calculate temperature using Thermocouple and plot its characteristics.
3. Calculate temperature using RTD and plot its characteristics.
8. Conduct an experiment to measure Flow rate using Orifice plate.
9. Conduct an experiment to measure Flow rate using Rotameter.
characteristics.
characteristics.
12. Conduct an experiment to measure linear displacement using Resistive transducer and plot
370
13. Conduct an experiment to measure linear displacement using Capacitive transducer and
15. Conduct an experiment to measure level using Resistive type level indicator
371
Digital Electronics Lab Practice
Course Title : Digital electronics lab practice Course Code 18EI-308P

Semester III Course Group :practical
Periods(L:T:P)
Periods : :45Pds
Pre requisites
This course requires the basic skills of Handling bread boards and PCB.
U Unit name Period Marks for SEE Marks %Weightage

ni s weightage
t Hand Ma Pre
N ling nip cisi
o ulat on
ion
1 Basic Gates and Logic
9 8 2 0 10 25
Families
2 Boolean Functions using
15 0 12 0 12 30
Gates
3 Multiplexers and
DeMultiplexers/Encoder,B 9 2 2 4 8 20
CD decoder
4 Flip Flops &Sequential
12 2 4 4 10 25
Circuits
Total 45 12 20 8 40 100
Course outcomes

Hours
CO1 Identify Basic Gates and Logic Families R/U/ 1,2,3,4,5,6,7, 9
A 8
372
CO2 Realization of Boolean Functions using Gates R/U/ 1,2,3,4
15
A
CO3 Verification of truth tables of Multiplexers and R/U/ 1,2,3
9
DeMultiplexers/encoder, BCD decoder. A
CO4 Flip Flops & Timing Circuits Counters & Shift A 1,2,3,10
Registers 12
45
Course Contents
I. Basic Gates and Logic Families
1. Identify Digital ICs and noting down pin details from data sheets
a. Identify the given digital ICs and draw the pin diagrams. (Use TTL and CMOS ICs of
AND, OR, NOT, NAND, NOR and XOR gates with two and three inputs).
b. Realize basic gate functions using toggle switches and a bulb.
2. Verify the truth tables of basic gates using universal gates.
a. Verify the truth table of 7403 IC (open collector quad 2input NAND gate).
b. Verify the Truth table of 4073 IC.
c. Verify the truth table of OR gate using NAND gates only.
d. Verify the truth table of NOT gate using NOR gates only.
e. Verify the truth table of AND gate using NOR gates only.
f. From the data sheets find out CMOS equivalent of above ICs.
373
II. Realizing Boolean Functions.
3. Implement Boolean functions using basic and universal logic gates.
a. Verify the truth table of XOR using TTL NAND gates only.
b. Verify the truth table of XOR using CMOS NOR gates only.
c. From the data sheets find out CMOS Equivalent of XOR ICs.
d. Implement a given Boolean function using basic gates and verify the truth table.
e. Implement a given Boolean function using NAND gates only and verify the truth table.
f. Implement a given Boolean function using any gates and verify the truth table.
4. Implement Half adder and full adder circuits using TTL/CMOS gates and verify the truth
tables.
a. Verify the truth table of half adder using basic gates only.
b. Verify the truth table of half adder using NAND gates only.
c. Verify the truth table of full adder using 2 half adders.
d. Implement a full adder using NOR gates only.
III. Realization of Boolean Functions using Multiplexers and Demultiplexers
374
a. Verify the truth table of IC 74153MUX.
b. Verify the truth table of IC 74154 DE-MUX.
c. Verify the function of 74148 Encoder and write the truth table
d. Verify the function of 74138 Decoder and write the truth table
e. Verify the function of BCD to decimal decoder and write its truth table.
f. Verify the function of decimal BCD to encoder and write its truth table.
IV. Flip Flops &Sequential Circuits
5. Construct clocked RS FF using NAND gates and Verify its truth table.
a. Verify the truth table of CD 4013 Dual D flip Flop
b. Verify the functionality and truth table of 74L71 RS flip flop with Preset and Clear
c. Verify the Truth table of JK FF using 7476 IC.
d. Construct D and T flip flops using 7476 and verify the truth tables.
6. Construct and verify the function of decade counter using 7490 ICs.
Verify the function of up/down counter using 74190, 74193
Verify the function of CD 4029 up/down counter.
Verify the function of shift register (ICs like 7495or 74194 etc.)
Verify the function of Johnson counter using CD 4017 IC
375
7. Identify Various Memory ICs and Note their pin Configuration from the datasheets
8. Study the various standards like IEEE and the current being used with respect to digital ICs.
376
Circuit design and Simulation lab Practice
Circuit design and Simulation

lab Practice
Teaching Scheme
15:0:30 Credits 1.5
in Hrs(L:T:P)
Total Contact
Methodology Lecture + Practicals 45
Periods :
Pre requisites
This course requires the basic computer knowledge and electronics devices.
Course Outcomes
CO1 Design and observe the outputs waveforms of different rectifier circuits.
CO2 Design and observe the output waveforms various wave shaping circuits.
CO3 Design and observe the frequency responses of multi stage amplifier circuits.
Calculate, design and observe the frequency responses of different types of

CO4
oscillators.
377
CO5 Calculate, design and observe the output waveforms of multi-vibrators.
Unit Unit name Periods Questions for SEE

No
Handling Manipulation Precision
1 Rectifiers 06 3 3 2
2 Wave shaping 12 4 4 3
circuits
3 Multi stage 06 3 3 3
amplifiers
4 Oscillators 12 3 3 2
5 Multivibrators 09 3 3 3
Total 45 16 16 13
CourseI.Contents
Rectifiers.
I. Rectifiers
1. Design and simulate Half-wave rectifier circuit using Multisim.
2. Design and simulate Full-wave rectifier circuit using Multisim.
3. Design and simulate Bridge rectifier circuit using Multisim.
II. Wave Shaping Circuits.
1. Design and simulate series/ shunt Clippers using Multisim.
2. Design and simulate series positive/negative Clippers using Multisim.
3. Design and simulate shunt positive/negative Clippers using Multisim.
4. Design and Simulate positive-Negative Clamper using Multisim.

378
5. Design and simulate positive/negative Clamper using Multisim.
III. Multi Stage Amplifiers.
1. Design and simulate RC coupled amplifier circuit using Multisim.
2. Design and simulate Transformer coupled amplifier circuit using Multisim.
3. Design and simulate Direct coupled amplifier circuit using Multisim.
IV. Oscillators.
1. Design and simulate RC Phase shift Oscillator circuit using Multisim.
2. Design and simulate Wein bridge Oscillator circuit using Multisim.
3. Design and simulate Colpitts Oscillator circuit using Multisim.
4. Design and simulate Hartley Oscillator circuit using Multisim.
5. Design and simulate Crystal Oscillator circuit using Multisim.
V. Multivibrators.
1. Design and simulate transistor monostable multivibrator circuit using Multisim.
2. Design and simulate transistor bistable multivibrator circuit using Multisim.
3. Design and simulate transistor astable multivibrator circuit using Multisim.
Recommended Books
1. Electronic devices and circuits by David A. Bell 4th Edition PHI
2. Circuit analysis with Multisim by David Baez-Lopez and Felix.
4. Do Market survey on List of Electronic circuits available in the market and collect the
following information like name of the electronic circuit, specifications, Price etc. The student
should submit a handwritten report. Documents have to be maintained as a record.
379
5. Take Quiz tests / assignments in electronic circuits experiments. Documents have to be
6. Survey various simulation tools for circuit design available in the market.
7. Do power point presentations on Electronic devices and circuits simulation.
3. www.ni.com
4. www.ece.mtu.edu
5. www.androiderode.com
380
Ethics
Basic knowledge
Lifelong learning
Engineering Tools
Communication
Linked


PO
10
CO 2 2 2 2 - - - - - 2
1,2,3,4,10
1
CO 2 2 2 2 - - - - - 2
1,2,3,4,10
2
CO 2 2 2 - - - - - 2 2
1,2,3,9,10
3
CO 2 - 2 2 - - - - 2 2
1,3,4,9,10
4
CO 2 2 2 2 - - - - - 2
1,2,3,4,10
5
381
Internal Evaluation
Test Units Marks
Mid Sem 1 1, 2 and 3 20
Mid Sem 2 4,5 20
Attitude of students
towards practicing
experiments(10)
Prompt submission of
records in time (5)
Total 60
Course Name: Circuit Design and Simulation Lab Practice Max.Marks:20
______________________________________________________________________________
question
1. Design half wave rectifier and verify the output and find out ripple factor and efficiency by
382
using Multisim.
2. Design full wave rectifier and verify the output and find out ripple factor and efficiency by
using Multisim.
3. Design the clippers and verify the output by using Multisim.
4. Design the clampers and verify the output by using Multisim.
5. Design RC coupled amplifier and observe frequency response by using Multisim.
6. Design Transformer coupled amplifier and observe frequency response by using Multisim.
______________________________________________________________________________
question
383
1. Design RC phase shift oscillator and observe the wave form by using Multisim.
2. Design wein bridge oscillator and observe the wave form by using Multisim.
3. Design colpitts oscillator and observe the wave forms by using Multisim.
4. Design crystal oscillator and observe the wave forms by using Multisim.

Course Code: 18EI-309P Duration: 2 Hrs
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
question
1. Design half wave rectifier and verify the output and find out ripple factor and efficiency by
using Multisim.
2. Design full wave rectifier and verify the output and find out ripple factor and efficiency by
using Multisim.
384
3. Design the clippers and verify the output by using Multisim.
4. Design the clampers and verify the output by using Multisim.
5. Design RC coupled amplifier and observe frequency response by using Multisim.
6. Design Transformer coupled amplifier and observe frequency response by using Multisim.
8. Design RC phase shift oscillator and observe the wave form by using Multisim.
9. Design wein bridge oscillator and observe the wave form by using Multisim.
10. Design colpitts oscillator and observe the wave forms by using Multisim.
11. Design crystal oscillator and observe the wave forms by using Multisim.
Communication Skills and Life Skills lab practice
Course Title Communication Skills and Life Course Code 18EI- 310 P
Skills lab practice
Semester III Course Practical
Group
Teaching 15:0:30 Credits 1.5
Scheme in
Periods- L:
T:P
Methodology Lecture + Practical Total 45 Periods
Contact (3 Periods per
Hours Week)
Rationale:
This course is designed to impart communication skills and life skills to the students of diploma which
will help them a great deal in personal and professional fronts.
Prerequisites:
385
This course requires the basic knowledge of vocabulary, grammar, and four language learning skills,
viz. Listening, Speaking, Reading and Writing.
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course the students will have the

ability to:
Identify the main or the central idea.
Listening Skills Listen for specific details.
Learn the pronunciation.
Learn relevant vocabulary to make introductions.
Communication Skills – I Learn to introduce oneself in formal and informal
situations.
Learn vocabulary and expressions useful for
describing objects
Describe objects
Learn vocabulary to talk about the past

Describe the incidents that happened in the past
Learn the techniques of organising the matter / content
Communication Skills – II for one-minute speech.
Speak fluently and accurately using appropriate body
language.
Think positively.
Develop positive attitude.
Life Skills – I Overcome negative attitude.
Know the importance of setting goals.
Set goals using SMART features.
Know the reasons for a problem.

Learn to overcome problems.
Learn the various techniques to solve the problems.
Life Skills – II Learn to make proper decisions on time.
Think ‘out of the box’.
Learn to be creative.
Think innovatively.
Think critically.
Know how to be a leader.
Learn the qualities of a good leader.
Life Skills – III Learn the qualities of a good team.
Learn the advantages and disadvantages of a team.
Manage time effectively.
Learn various time management techniques.
Learn the importance of prioritisation.
386
CO-PO Matrix

CO 1 Listening for main idea and specific R/U/A 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,7,8,
details 9,10
CO 2 Introduce oneself and Describe Objects R/U/A 1,2,3,8,9,10
CO 3 Talk about the past and speak fluently for R/U/A 1,2,3,7,8.9,10
one minute
CO 4 Develop positive attitude and set short R/U/A 1,2,3,7,8,9,10
term and long term goals
CO 5 Learn to solve a problem, make decisions R/U/A 1,2,3,7,8,9,10
and think innovatively
CO6 Learn to become a good team member R/U/A 1,2,3,7,8,9,10
and leader
Course Contents:
I. Listening Skills Duration: 9
1. Listening – I
 Digital Camera
 A Dialogue
 Wild Animal / Human conflict
2. Listening – II
 A Recipe
 A Telephone conversation
 An Interview
II. Communication Skills – I Duration:6
3. Introducing Oneself
4. Describing Objects
III. Communication Skills – II Duration:6
387
5. Talking About the Past
6. Just A Minute
IV. Life Skills – I Duration:6
7. Attitude
8. Goal Setting
V. Life Skills – II Duration:9
9. Problem Solving and Decision-Making Skills
10. Critical Thinking & Creativity
VI. Life Skills – III Duration:9
11. Leadership and Teamwork
12. Time Management
 Listening Comprehension
 Seminars
 Paper Presentations
 Line ups for introducing oneself
 Describing persons / places / things
 Picture description
 Role Plays
 Dumb charades
 What is in the bag? (Identify the objects)
 Games using Online Dictionaries
 Sharing the information using emails, chats and groups
 Just A Minute
 Writing diary events
 Find a solution to the problem
388
 Making innovative things through recycling
 Creating advertisements
 Five-minute activities on Life Skills
 Watching videos on life skills and making presentations
 Case studies
Evaluation Pattern:
I. Continuous Internal Examination: 60 Marks
a. Mid Sem- I 20 marks
Syllabus:
i. Listening Skills
ii. Communication Skills - I
b. Mid Sem – II 20 Marks
Syllabus:
i. Communication Skills - II
ii. Life Skills - I
c. Internal assessment: 20 marks
i. Seminars: 10 marks
ii. Assignments: 5 marks
iii. Lab record submission: 5 marks

389
II. Semester End Examination : 40 Marks
a. Listening: 10 Marks
b. JAM or Role plays: 15 Marks
c. Viva Voce on any life skills topic : 15 Marks
References:
Flint, Chrisand Jamie FlockhartListening: A2 (Collins English for Life: Skills)Collins. 2013
Brown, Stephen E. English in Everyday Life. McGraw-Hill Education.2008
Mohanraj, Jayashree. Let Us Hear Them Speak: Developing Speaking-Listening Skills in

English.Sage. 2015
Susan Earle – Carlin. Q Skills for Success: Listening and Speaking 5: Student Book with Online
Practice. Oxford University Press. 2013
Kumar, Sanjay and Pushpa Latha. Communication Skills: A Work Book.Oxford University Press.
2018
Carnegie, Dale.The Leader in You. Simon & Schuster: 1995
Carnegie, Dale.The Art of Public Speaking. Prabhat Prakashan. NewDelhi.2013
Kaye, Martin. Goal Setting (Workbook Included): Goals & Motivation: Introduction To A
Complete & Proven Step-By-Step Blueprint For Reaching Your Goals (Goal Setting Master Plan 1).
Kindle Edition. MK Coaching.2016.
West, Steven. Critical Thinking Skills: Practical Strategies for Better Decision making, Problem-
Solving and Goal Setting. Kindle Edition.2018
Tracy, Brain. Goals. Berret-Koehler PublishersInc. San Francisco. 2017
Tracy, Brain. Master your Time Master your Life. Penguin Random House Inc. New York. 2017
Sean Covey . The 7 Habits of Highly Effective Teens. Simon and Schuster,2011
E-Learning Resources:
http://www.bbc.co.uk/worldservice/learningenglish/youmeus/learnit/learnitv39.shtml
https://www.examenglish.com/leveltest/listening_level_test.htm
https://www.oxfordonlineenglish.com/listening?utm_referrer=https%3A%2F
%2Fwww.google.co.in%2F
390
https://takeielts.britishcouncil.org/prepare-test/free-ielts-practice-tests/listening-practice-test-1
https://learnenglish.britishcouncil.org/en/listening
https://www.cambridgeenglish.org/learning-english/activities-for-learners/?skill=listening
https://www.businessenglishsite.com/business-english-listening.html
391
THIRD SEMESTER 18 COMMON-310P
COMMUNICATION SKILLS AND LIFE SKILLS
MID SEM - I
Part – A 10 marks
1. Listening Comprehension: 5 X 2 = 10
(Teacher should give the questions before reading the passage given below)
Florence Nightingale was an English social reformer and a statistician, and the founder of
modern nursing. She was born in Florence, Italy, on May 12, 1820. Part of a wealthy family,
Nightingale defied the expectations of the time and pursued what she saw as her God-given calling of
nursing during the Crimean War. She and a team of nurses improved the unsanitary conditions at a
British base hospital, greatly reducing the death count. Her writings sparked worldwide health care
reform, and in 1860 she established St. Thomas' Hospital and the Nightingale Training School for
Nurses. A revered hero of her time, she died on August 13, 1910, in London. Nightingale came to
prominence while serving as a manager and trainer of nurses during the Crimean War, in which she
organized care for wounded soldiers. She gave nursing a favourable reputation and became an icon of
Victorian culture, especially in the persona of "The Lady with the Lamp" making rounds of wounded
soldiers at night.
Questions:
1. Who was Florence Nightingale?
2. When and where was she born?
3. What does the passage convey?
4. When did she pass away?
5. Where did she establish nursing school?
PART- B 10 Marks
Instruction: Answer any one of the questions in 150 words.
2. How do you introduce yourself formally in an interview?
3. Describe your polytechnic.
392
MID SEM - II
Part – A 10 marks
Instruction: Answer any one of the following questions in 150 words.
1. Describe how you have spent your summer vacation.
2. What are the features of good JAM presentation? What precautions do you take before speaking for
one minute on the given topic?
Part – B 10 marks
Instruction: Answer any one of the following questions in 150 words.
3. What is positive attitude? Give examples of positive attitude from your life.
4. Mention your long term goal with SMART features. How do you achieve it?
393
SEMESTER END EXAM
Part – A 10 marks
1. Listen to the following passage and answer the questions give below it. 5 X 2 = 10
(Teacher should give the questions before reading the passage)
Answer the following questions after teacher reads the following paragraph.
Prof. Jayashankar was born to Mahalaxmi and Laxmi Kantha Rao on 6th August 1934 in
Akkampet village, Warangal District. He was a Doctorate in Economics. He worked as a Vice-
Chancellor of Kakatiya University. He worked in many capacities. He was popularly known as “Pedda
Sir.” He inspired many a people to fight for the cause of Telangana Statehood.
At the age of twelve, Jayashankar refused to sing songs in praise of the Nizam and insisted on
singing Vande Mataram instead. As an intermediate student, in 1952, he protested against State
Reorganization Committee plan to merge with the Andhra Rashtra. He took an active part in the
agitations of “Non – Mulki go back“ and “ Idli Sambar go back.” He took an active part in Telangana
separate statehood agitation in 1969 too. In 1999, Prof. Jayashankar started the Telangana Development
Forum in the USA which helped to propagate the injustice, discrimination and exploitation meted out
to Telangana region and people in the aspects of employment, funds and water resources. He
relentlessly put his efforts to end the struggle of Telangana people. He passed away on June 21, 2011.
He was 76 years old at the time of his death.
Questions:
1. Where was Prof. Jayashankar born?
2. Why didn’t he sing songs in praise of the Nizam?
3. Why did Jayashankar start the Telangana Development Forum in USA?
4. What are the two agitations in which he took an active part?
5. What is the meaning of ‘relentlessly’?
Part – B 15 marks
2. JAM / Role Plays
Part – C 15 marks
3. Viva Voce on Life Skills topics
394

Note:
(1) Along with every activity the rubrics table should be given to the student for his
information about the criterion of assessment.
(2) As a record of the activity at least Rubric sheet for each student For every activity at
least Rubric sheet for each student as be preserved as a document.
Unsatisfacto Satisfactor Studen

Dimensio Developing Good Excellent
ry y t
n
1 2 3 4 5 Score
Collects Collect
Does not Collects Collects a
very much
collect some basic great deal
limited informatio
Collectio any of
n; informatio Ex:
n information informatio
n; informatio
n; but very 4
of data relating to n;
most refer
the some relate limited
to all refer to
to relate
topic the topic the topic
the topic to the topic
Fulfill Does not Performs Performs Performs Performs 5

perform very very all
team’s nearly all
roles any duties little duties little duties duties of
but duties
& duties assigned to assigned
395
the
Unreliable. team roles
team role
Always
Rarely Usually
does
does does
Always relies Normally the
the the
Shares on assigned
assigned assigned does the
work others to do work 3
work; work; assigned
the without
equally often rarely
work work having to
needs needs
be
reminding reminding
reminded
Usually
Talks
Is always does
good; Listens,
Listen to talking; most of the Listens and
but never but
other never allows talking; speaks a
show sometimes 2
Team anyone else rarely fair
interest talk too
mates to allows amount
in listening much
speak others
others
to speak
396

Proficient

and Note
Taking Accurately researched Recorded Misinterpreted Recorded
a variety of relevant statements, information
information sources information graphics and from four or
recorded and from multiple questions and less resources,
interpreted significant sources of failed to did not find
facts, meaningful information identify graphics and
graphics, and evaluated and relevant ignored
evaluated alternative synthesized arguments. alternative
points of view. relevant points of view.
information.

planning
the slide presentation The The thumbnail There a very
structure with thumbnail sketches on the few thumbnail
thumbnail sketches of sketches on topic are not in sketches on
each slide including: the topic a logical the topic and
title of slide, text, include titles sequence and do not provide
background color, and text for have an overview of
placement & size of each slide and incomplete the
graphic, fonts - color, are in information. presentation.
size, type for text and sequential
headings. All slides are order.
numbered, and there is
a logical sequence to
the presentation.
The introduction The The The

presents the overall introduction introduction introduction
topic and draws the is clear and shows some does not
audience into the coherent and structure but orient the
presentation with relates to the does not create audience to
compelling questions topic. a strong sense what will
or by relating to the of what is to follow.
audience's interests or follow. May be
397
goals. overly detailed The
or incomplete sequencing is
and is unclear and
somewhat does not
appealing to appear
the audience. interesting or
relevant to the
audience.

clearly and concisely written with a vague in lacks a clear
with a logical logical conveying a point of view
progression of ideas progression of point of view and logical
and supporting ideas and and does not sequence of
information. supporting create a strong information.
information. sense of
The project includes purpose. Includes little
motivating questions Includes persuasive
and advanced persuasive Includes some information
organizers. The project information persuasive and only one
gives the audience a from reliable information or two facts
clear sense of the main sources. with few facts. about the
idea. topic.
Some of the
Information is information Information is
accurate, current and may not seem incomplete,
comes mainly from * to fit. out of date
primary sources. and/or
Sources used incorrect.
appear
unreliable. Sequencing of
ideas is
unclear.
The fonts are easy to Sometimes the Overall The text is

read and point size fonts are easy readability is extremely
varies appropriately to read, but in difficult with difficult to
for headings and text. a few places lengthy read with long
the use of paragraphs, blocks of text
Use of italics, bold, and fonts, italics, too many and small
indentations enhances
398
readability. bold, long different fonts, point size of
paragraphs, dark or busy fonts,
Text is appropriate in color or busy background, inappropriate
length for the target background overuse of bold contrasting
audience and to the detracts and or lack of colors, poor
point. does not appropriate use of
The background and enhance indentations of headings,
colors enhance the readability. text. subheadings,
readability of text. indentations,
or bold
formatting.

pleasing and uses shows some cluttered,
contributes to the horizontal structure, but confusing, and
overall message with and vertical appears does not use
appropriate use of white space cluttered and spacing,
headings, subheadings appropriately. busy or headings and
and white space. distracting subheadings
with large gaps to enhance the
of white space readability.
or uses a
distracting
background.

and/or
Animation The graphics, and/or The Some of the The graphics,
animation assist in graphics, /and graphics, and/or
presenting an overall or animation and/or animations
theme and enhance visually depict animations are unrelated
understanding of material and seem unrelated to the content.
concept, ideas and assist the to the
relationships. audience in topic/theme Graphics do
understanding and do not not enhance
Original images are the flow of enhance the understanding
created using proper information overall of the content,
size and resolution, or content. concepts. or are
and all images enhance distracting
the content. Original Most images decorations
images are are clip art or that create a
used. recycled from busy feeling
399
There is a consistent Images are the internet. and detract
visual theme. proper size, from the
resolution. Images are too content.
large/small in
size.
Images are
poorly cropped
or the
color/resolution
is fuzzy.

Skills
The text is written with The text is Spelling, Errors in
no errors in grammar, clearly written punctuation, spelling,
capitalization, with little or and grammar capitalization,
punctuation, and no editing errors distract punctuation,
spelling. required for or impair usage and
errors) reader, and
major editing
and revision is
required.
(more than
five errors)
C-18 DEIE III SEMESTER
400
1. Visit the College library and prepare a list of at least 10 text books available in the library
with author name and publishing company for each subject of the semester. The student
should submit a handwritten report. (POs 8, 9, 10)
2. To Study about work benches and their connections, Different types of Power supplies,
available in the Lab and prepare a detailed report of their working and uses. Documents have
to be maintained as a record. (POs 8, 9)
3. Do Market survey on List of digital ICs available in the market and collect the information
like pin diagrams, specifications, Price etc. The student should submit a handwritten report.
4. Analyze the connections in the UPS available in the Institution. Documents have to be
maintained as a record. (POs 4, 8, 9)
5. Give Seminars on the topics of the concerned Course as allotted by the staff. Documents have
to be maintained as a record. (POs 8, 9)
6. Participate in Quiz in Concerned subjects. Documents have to be maintained as a record.
(POs 8)
7. Write assignments in Concerned subjects.. Documents have to be maintained as a record.
(POs 8, 9)
8. Prepare a power point presentation with full details about the Electronic components used in
the concerned subject experiments. Documents have to be maintained as a record.
(POs 8, 9)
401
9. Prepare a power point presentation with full details about the Digital ICs used in the
concerned subject experiments. Documents have to be maintained as a record.
(POs 8, 9)
10. Visit YouTube or any other sites on current topics in Digital electronics experiments.
Listen to the lectures and submit a handwritten report and a soft copy (CD/DVD).
(POs 8, 9, 10)
11. Design a mini project useful to the society based on the topics relevant to electronic circuits
and they have to be demonstrated. Student can search 5 min. /10 min. projects in you tube for
this purpose. (POs 5, 8, 9, 10)
12. Design a mini project useful to the society based on the topics relevant to Digital electronics
and they have to be demonstrated. Student can search 5 min. /10 min. projects in you tube for
this purpose. (POs 5, 8, 9, 10)
13. Visit YouTube or any other sites to study the manufacturing of various sensors and
transducers like LVDT, RVDT and Potentiometers etc. Submit a handwritten report.
(POs 8, 9, 10)
transducers like Sight glass, IR sensors, etc. Submit a handwritten report.
(POs 8, 9, 10)
transducers like Thermo couple, Thermistor, RTD etc. Submit a handwritten report.
(POs 8, 9, 10)
transducers like Bourdon tubes, Bellows Dead weight tester etc. Submit a handwritten report.
(POs 8, 9, 10)
402
transducers like Orifice, Venturi tube, Rota meter, Electromagnetic flow meter etc. Submit a
handwritten report. (POs 8, 9, 10)
18. Design a mini project useful to the society based on the topics relevant to sensors and
transducers Thermistor, RTD, Float etc. and they have to be demonstrated. Student can
search 5 min. / 10 min. projects in you tube for this purpose. (POs 5, 8, 9, 10)
III SEMESTER
SKILL UPGRADATION IN - APPLIED ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS
2. Procedure
3. Explanation
ACTIVITIES
1 .Write a short notes on different types of integrals.
2. Prepare a notes on different methods to evaluate integrals.
3. List out Properties of definite integrals.
4. List out and explain various applications of definite integrals.
5. Explain the procedure to solve problems on Areas using integration
6. Explain the procedure to find volumes of irregular shapes of solids of revolution using
integration.
7. Prepare a presentation to find Mean values and R.M.S values of any given function.
8. Explain the procedure to calculate approximate area by using Trapezoidal rule.
9. Explain the procedure to calculate approximate area by Simpson’s 1/3 rule
10. Prepare a presentation on solving 1st order differential equations using any suitable method.
403
CO1 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
CO2 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
CO3 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
CO4 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
CO5 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
CO6 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
CO7 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
CO8 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
CO9 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
CO1 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
0
CATEGORY 4 3 2 1

Concepts shows complete shows shows some shows very
understanding substantial understanding limited
of the understanding of the understanding
mathematical of the mathematical of the
concepts used to mathematical concepts needed underlying
solve the concepts used to to solve the concepts needed
problem(s). solve the problem(s). to solve the
problem(s). problem(s) OR
is not written.
Procedures Typically, uses Typically, uses Sometimes uses Rarely uses an

an efficient and an effective an effective effective
effective procedure to procedure to procedure to
procedure to solve the solve problems, solve problems.
solve the problem(s). but does not do
problem(s). it consistently.

detailed and clear. little difficult to difficult to
understand, but understand and
404
clear. includes critical is missing
components. several
components OR
was not
included.
Others engaged engaged partner cooperated with work effectively
partner, but had trouble others, but with others.
listening to listening to needed
suggestions of others and/or prompting to
others and working stay on-task.
working cooperatively.
cooperatively
throughout
lesson.
Mathematical 90-100% of the Almost all (85- Most (75-84%) More than 75%
Errors steps and 89%) of the of the steps and of the steps and
solutions have steps and solutions have solutions have
no mathematical solutions have no mathematical mathematical
errors. no mathematical errors. errors.
errors.
405
IV SEMESTER
406
Course Course Name Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme
Code Instruction Total Credits Continuous internal Semester end examination
periods Periods evaluation
per per
week semest
er
L T P Mid Mid Internal Max marks Total Min marks for
Sem1 Sem2 Evaluati Min marks Marks passing
on including
internal
1 Advance Engineering 14
401F Mathematics 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 100 35
2 Microcontroller 14 35
402C programming. 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 100
3 Linear Integrated circuits
403C 14 35
3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 100
4 Industrial Instrumentation 14 35
404C 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 100
5 Process Control 14 35
405C 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 100
6 Linear Integrated circuits 20 50
406P Lab Practice 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 100
7 Industrial Instrumentation 2 45 20 50
407P Lab Practice 1 0 1.5 20 20 20 40 100
8 Microcontrollers
2 45 20 50
408P Programming Lab Practice 1 0 1.5 20 20 20 40 100
9 Process Control Lab

2 45 1.5 20 50
409P practice 1 0 20 20 20 40 100
10 Advanced communications
2 45 1.5 20 50
410P & Life skills Lab 1 0 20 20 20 40 100
11 7 2.5
Skill Upgradation 0 0 105 0 0 Rubrics -- Grade A/B/C/D
TOTAL 20 17 630 25 200 200 200 400 170 1000 425

5
407
ADVANCED ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS
Course Title : Advanced Engineering Mathematics

Course Code : 18EI-401F
SEMESTER : IV Course Group : Foundation

Teaching Scheme ( L : T : P ) : 45 :15: 00 ( in Credits : 3 Credits
periods) )
Programme : Common to all Engineering Diploma Programs
Pre requisites:
This course requires the knowledge of Engineering Mathematics at Diploma first year level and
Applied Engineering Mathematics at Diploma 3rd Semester level.
Course Outcomes:
CO 1 Solve simple Homogeneous Linear Differential Equations

CO 2 Solve simple Non-Homogeneous Linear Differential Equations
CO 3 Express f(x) as a Fourier series in the given interval
CO 4 Express f(x) as a Fourier Half-Range Cosine series and Sine series
CO 5 Find Laplace transforms of simple functions
CO 6 Find Inverse Laplace transforms of simple functions and solve Linear Differential
Equations using Laplace Transformations.
Course Contents:
Unit – I Duration: 05 Periods (L:3.75 – T:1.25)
Homogeneous Linear Differential equations with constant coefficients
Homogenous linear differential equations with constant coefficients of order two and higher with
emphasis on second order.
Unit – II Duration: 15 Periods (L:11.25 – T:3.75)
Non-Homogeneous Linear Differential equations with constant coefficients

Non-homogenous linear differential equations with constant coefficients of the form f(D)y = X,
where X is in the form k(a constant ) ,eax, sin ax, cos ax, xn, (n= 1,2,3) Complimentary Function (CF),
Particular Integral (PI) and General Solution (GS).
408
Unit-III Duration: 10 Periods (L: 7.5 – T: 2.5)
Fourier series
Orthogonality of trigonometric functions, Representation of a function in Fourier series over the

interval
c , c  2 
, Euler’s formulae, sufficient conditions for existence of Fourier series for a
function. Even, Odd functions and Fourier series over the Interval (0,2π) and (-π , π)
Unit – IV Duration: 05 Periods (L:3.75 – T:1.25)
Fourier Half-range series
Representation of a function as Fourier Half-range Sine series and Cosine series over the interval (0,
π)
Unit – V Duration: 10Periods (L: 7.5 – T:2.5)
Laplace Transformations:
Definition, sufficient conditions for existence of Laplace Transform, Laplace Transform of

elementary functions, linearity property, Change of scale property, First shifting theorem ,
multiplication by tn, division by t, Laplace Transform of derivatives and integrals, unit step
function, Laplace Transform of second shifting theorem
Unit – VI Duration: 15 Periods (L:11.25 – T:3.75)
Inverse Laplace transforms:
Inverse Laplace transforms- shifting theorems and change of scale property, multiplication by s n
and division by s –Inverse Laplace Transform using partial fractions – convolution theorem (no
proof) – application of Laplace Transformations to solve ordinary differential equations of second
order with initial conditions.
Recommended Books:
1. Higher Engineering Mathematics, B.S.Grewal .
2. Laplace Transforms - Murray R. Spigel .
3. Ordinary Differential Equations – R. S. Aggarwal.
4. Fourier Series – A.R. Vasishtha and Gupta.
Suggested E-Learning references:
2. E-books:www.mathebook.net

409
Unit-I
1.0 Solve Homogeneous linear differential equations with constant coefficients in engineering
situations
1.1 Solve Differential equations of the type (aD 2 +bD + c)y = 0 when the roots of the auxiliary equation are
real and different, real and repeated, complex.
1.2 Solve the higher order homogeneous Linear differential equations with constant coefficients.
Unit-II
2.0 Solve Non Homogeneous linear differential equations with constant coefficients in engineering
situations
2.1 Explain the concept of complementary function, particular Integral and general solution of a
differential equation.
2.2 Solve nth order differential equation of the type f(D) y = X where f(D) is a polynomial of second order
and X is a function of the form k, eax ,Sinax, Cosax, xn.
2.3 Solve simple problems on the above types of 2.2
Unit-III
3.0 Understand the Fourier series expansion of functions
3.1 Define the orthogonality of functions in an interval.
3.2 Define Fourier series of a function in the interval (C, C+2 π ¿ and write the Euler’s
formulae for determining the Fourier coefficients.
3.3 Write sufficient conditions for the existence of Fourier series for a function.
3.4 Write Fourier series of simple functions in the range (0, 2 π ¿ and (- π , π ¿.
3.5 Write Fourier series for even and odd functions in the interval (- π , π ¿
3.6 Solve simple problems on even and odd functions in the interval. (0,2 π ¿∧¿ (- π , π ¿
Unit- IV
4.0 Understand the Half – Range Fourier series expansion of functions
4.1 Write Half – Range Cosine series of a function in the range (0 , π) .
4.2 Write Half – Range Sine series of a function in the range (0 , π) .
4.3 Solve simple problems on Half – Range Cosine and Sine series over the interval (0 , π)
Unit-V
410
5.0 Understand Laplace transforms
5.1 Write the definition of Laplace Transform and Laplace transform of standard functions.
5.2 Explain the sufficient conditions of existence of Laplace Transform.
5.3 Write the properties of Laplace Transform – Linearity property, First shifting theorem,
Change of Scale property.
5.4 Solve simple problems using the above properties.

t
n f (t ) n
5.5 Write formulae for Laplace transform of t f (t) , , f ( t ) ,∫ f ( u ) du
t 0
in terms of Laplace transform of. f (t)
5.6 Solve simple problems using the above formulae.
5.7 Define unit step function and write the Laplace Transform of unit step function.
5.8 Write Second shifting theorem.
Unit-VI
6.0 Use Laplace transforms and Inverse Laplace transforms to solve differential
equation in engineering problems
6.1 Define inverse Laplace Transform and write inverse Laplace Transforms of standard
functions.
6.2 Solve simple problems on Inverse Laplace Transforms.
6.2 Write Shifting theorems and Change of scale property of inverse Laplace Transform.
6.3 Solve simple problems on 6.2
6.4 Write inverse Laplace Transforms corresponding to Laplace Transform of the functions
t
f (t ) n
t n f (t), , f ( t ) ,∫ f ( u ) du
t 0
6.5 Solve simple problems on 6.4
6.6 Define convolution of two functions and state convolution theorem.
6.7 Solve simple problems on Convolution theorem.
6.8 Use Laplace and inverse Laplace Transforms to solve simple differential equations of
Second order.
411
2. Quiz
3. Group discussion
4. Surprise tests
5. Seminars
6. Home Assignments.

Basic knowledge
Communication
Lifelong learning
Engineering Tools
Ethics
Linked PO

10
CO1 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO2 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO3 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO4 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO5 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO6 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
412
Internal Evaluation


Test Units Total Marks Marks 20 Marks
Assignments - 5
Seminars - 5
Total 60
413
MID SEM-I EXAM

1 Unit-I 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-II 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)
414
MID SEM-II EXAM
1 Unit-III 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-IV 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)
The length of answer for each question framed in respect of Part-A, B&C shall not exceed ¼ of a page,1page
and 2 pages respectively


Unit No
R U A
I
Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
II
III
Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
IV Q4
Q5,Q Q9(b), Q13(b),
V
6 Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Q3
Q7,Q Q10(b), Q14(b),
VI
8 Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)
Code: 18Common-401F
415
MID SEM –I, MODEL PAPER, IV SEMESTER
PART-A

1. Write the General solution of (aD2+bD+c)y = 0, whose roots of auxiliary equation are real and distinct.
2. Find the roots of auxiliary equation of the differential equation ( D 2 +2 D+ 1¿ y=0
3. Find the Particular Integral of( D 2−4 D+1 ) y=e3 x

4. Find the P.I of ( D 2−16 ) y=sin 4 x
PART-B
5 a) Solve (D2 + 3D – 54)y = 0
Or
5 b) Solve (D2 +16)y = 0
6 a) Solve ( D 2 +4 D+ 4) y =e 2 x
Or
6 b) Find P.I of ( D 3 + D) y = sin2x
PART C
7 a) Solve (D3 – 2D2 – 4D + 8) y = 0
Or
7 b) Solve (D3 – D2 – D +1)y = 0
8 a) Solve ( D 2 +36) y =sin2 x
Or
8 b) Solve :( D 2+3 D+2) y = x 2
416
Code: 18 Common-401F
MID SEM –II, MODEL PAPER, IV SEMESTER
PART-A

1. Define periodic function and give one example
2. Define Fourier series of the function f(x) in the interval (0, 2 π )
3. Write Half-range sine series of f(x) in the interval (0, π ¿
4. Find a 0for f(x) =e x in 0¿ x <π
PART-B

5 a) If f(x) = x 2 in (0, 2 π ¿, then find the value of an in Fourier series of f(x)
Or
5 b) If f(x) =|x| in (- π , π ¿, then find the value of a1 in Fourier series of f(x)
6 a).Find the value of an in half-range Cosine series for the function f(x) = e x in (0, π ¿
Or
6 b) Obtain the Fourier Half – Range Sine series for f(x) =( π−x ¿∫ h einterval(0 , π)
PART C

7 a) Obtain the Fourier series for f(x) = x in the interval 0 ¿ x <2 π
Or
7 b) Find the Fourier series for f(x) =( x−x 2 ¿ in the interval (- π , π ¿. Hence show that
1 1 1 1 π2
- + - + ……….+ =
1 2 22 3 2 4 2 12
8 a) Express f(x) = πx – x2 as a half-range Sine series in (0, π ¿
Or
417
8 b) Find the half –range cosine series for the function f(x) = x 2 in the interval (0, π ¿
18 Common-401F

SEMESTER END EXAM MODEL PAPER
IV SEMESTER EXAMINATION
PART-A
1. Find the roots of auxiliary equation of the differential equation ( D 2 + 4 D ) y=0 .

2. Define Fourier Series for the function f(x) in the interval ( c, c+2 π ¿
3. Find the Particular Integral of( D 2−4 D+1 ) y=e x
4. Find L ( e 2t + cos 3 t )
5. Find L ( t+5 cos h t )
6. State the First Shifting theorem of Laplace Transforms.
7. Find L
−1
( s−31 + s +s 4 )
2
8. Find L
−1
( 2 s+1 5 )
PART-B
9a) Solve (D2+D + 1) y = 4e3x
Or
9 b) Find L ( tCos 3 t )
10 a) Find Half Range Sine Series of f(x) = x in ( 0 , π )

Or
10 b) Find L
−1
( s +6s +1s−7 )
2
418
20−4 s
11 a) If L{f(t)} = 2 , find L{f(3t)}
s −4 s +20
Or
∞
11 b) Find ∫ t . e−2 t sin 3 tdt using Laplace Transform Technique
0
1−cos at
12 a) Show that L−1 ¿ =
a2
or
12 b) Find L
−1
( (s+ 2)s +4 )
2
PART C
13 a) Solve:(D2 + D -2) y = x + sinx
Or
13 b) Find L[ t et sin 3 t ]
2
as a Fourier series in the interval (−π , π )
14 a) Expand f(x) = x
Or
s
14 b) Find L
−1
( ( s +1 ) (s 2 +1)
2
)
15 a) Find L ( sin 3 tt.Cost )
Or
15 b) Evaluate
L
{∫
0
sin t
t
dt
}
16 a) Find L
−1
( ( s +1)1( s+2) ) using Convolution theorem .
Or
419
16 b) Solve the differential equation y’’– 2y’– 8y = Sint , when y (0) = 3, y’ (0) = 6 by
Laplace Transform method.
Course MICROCONTROLLER Course Code 18EI-

Title : PROGRAMMING 402 C
Semester IV Course Group Core
Teaching 45:15:0 Credits 3

Scheme in
Periods(L:
T:P)
Methodolo Lecture + Assignments Total Contact

gy Periods : 60
CIE 60 Marks SEE 40

Mark
s
MICROCONTROLLER PROGRAMMING
This course requires the basic knowledge of digital electronics.
Course
CO1 : Outcomes
Analyze the architecture of 8051.
CO2 : Compare the various low level and high levellanguages and interpret the addressing modes.
CO3: Write simple programs using instructions of 8051.
CO4 : Classify and know the working of hardware interfacing devices.
CO5 : Analyze the need forprogrammable interfacing devices.
CO6 : Make use of instructions to solve programs.
Pre requisites
420
COURSE CONTENT
Upon completion of the course the student should be able to
UNIT 1 –Architecture of Microcontroller 8051 Duration: 14 Periods (L: 14– T: 0)
Analyze the architecture of 8051.

block diagram of a microcomputer - function of each block-Compare Microprocessors and Microcontrollers-
applications of microcontrollers-INTEL microcontroller family chips.--features of various INTEL
microcontroller family chips-Compare the various INTEL microcontroller families-features of Intel 8051
Micro Controller-multiplexing and de-multiplexing in 8051.
functional block diagram of 8051 microcontroller-function of each block-register structure of 8051- function
of various special function registers-pin diagram of 8051 micro controller -purpose of each pin-internal
memory Organization in 8051-interrupts in 8051.
UNIT 2 –Assembly language and addressing modes. Duration: 6 Periods (L: 6– T: 0)
Compare the various low level and high levellanguages and interpret the addressing modes.
Define bit, nibble, byte and word related to microcontrollers- machine language, assembly language, and
mnemonics-Differences between machine level and assembly level programming-Differences between low level
and high level languages-need for assembly level programming-need for an instruction set-instruction format of
8051 -Classify the instruction set of 8051-one byte, two byte and three byte instructions of 8051-What is
addressing mode with reference to microcontroller-various addressing modes of 8051-need for bit level
addressing..
UNIT 3 –Instruction set of 8051. Duration: 14 Periods (L: 10– T: 4)
Explain the instruction set of 8051.
Function of data transfer instructions and the effect of flags- data transfer instructions with examples.Programs
in mnemonics to illustrate the application of data copy instructions-function of arithmetic group of instructions
and the effect of flags-arithmetic group of instructions with examples.Programs in mnemonics to illustrate the
application of arithmetic instructions-function of logical instructions and the effect of flags-logical instructions
with examples- programs in mnemonics to illustrate the application of logical instructions-function of branching
instructions and the effect of flags-unconditional jump instructions-conditional jump instructions-bit
manipulation or Boolean instructions.
UNIT 4 –Hardware Interfacing Duration: 6 Periods (L: 6– T: 0)
Classify and know the working of hardware interfacing devices.
interfacing and its need- Distinguish between input and output interfacing-interfacing of pushbutton switch to
8051-interfacing of LED to 8051-interfacing of seven segment display -assembly level program for the above-
functions of pins of LCD-instruction command code for programming a LCD- interfacing of LCD to 8051-
assembly language Program for interfacing LCD - key press and detect mechanism- interfacing of 4x4 matrix
key board.
UNIT 5 –Programmable peripheral devices. Duration: 10Periods (L: 10– T: 0)
Analyze the need for programmable interfacing devices.
421
need for programmable peripheral devices- Classify various programmable interfacing devices- block diagram
of PPI 8255- control word format of 8255- PIN diagram of 8255 and function of each PIN- need for DMA
controller-block diagram of DMA controller 8257- PIN diagram of 8257 and function of each PIN- need for
programmable communication interface-block diagram of serial communication interface 8251- PIN diagram of
8251 and function of each PIN- RS 232 standards-RS232 pin, DB25 and DB9 connectors.
UNIT 6 –8051 Programming Concepts Duration: 10Periods (L: 7– T: 3)
Make use of instructions to solve programs.
various symbols used in drawing flow charts-flow charts for simple problems-flow chart illustrating counter
technique--program using counter techniques-programs of instructions to perform single byte, double byte and
multi byte addition and subtraction-subroutine and its advantages-operation of stack with PUSH & POP
instructions-branching instructions related to subroutines-sequence of program when subroutine is called and
executed-information exchange between the program counter and the stack and identification of stack pointer
register when a subroutine is called-concept of nesting, multiple ending and common ending in subroutines-
input/output, machine related statements in writing assembly language programs- debugging a program-
important steps in writing and trouble shooting a simple program-principles of single step and break point
debugging techniques-simple programs to setup time delay using counter & a single register-time delay in the
program given the clock frequency.
1.0 Comprehend the architecture of Microcontroller 8051

1.1 Draw the block diagram of a microcomputer and explain the function of each block.
1.2 Compare Microprocessors and Microcontrollers.
1.3 List the applications of microcontrollers.
1.4 State the INTEL microcontroller family chips.
1.5 List the features of various INTEL microcontroller family chips.
1.6 Compare the various INTEL microcontroller families.
1.7 State the features of Intel 8051 Micro Controller.
1.8 Explain multiplexing and de-multiplexing in 8051.
1.9 Draw the functional block diagram of 8051 microcontroller.
1.10 Explain the function of each block.
1.11 Draw the register structure of 8051and explain.
1.12 Explain the function of various special function registers.
1.13 Draw the pin diagram of 8051 micro controller and specify the purpose of each pin.
1.14 Explain internal memory Organization in 8051.
1.15 Explain interrupts in 8051.
2.0 Understand the languages and addressing modesof 8051 micro controller.
2.1 Define bit, nibble, byte and word related to microcontrollers.
2.2 Define the terms machine language, assembly language, and mnemonics.
422
2.3 Write the differences between machine level and assembly level programming.
2.4 Write the differences between low level and high level languages.
2.5 State the need for assembly level programming.
2.6 State the need for an instruction set.
2.7 Write the instruction format of 8051 & illustrate these terms by writing an instruction.
2.8 Classify the instruction set of 8051.
2.9 Explain one byte, two byte and three byte instructions of 8051.
2.10 What is addressing mode with reference to microcontroller.
2.11 List the various addressing modes of 8051and Explain with examples.
2.12 State the need for bit level addressing.
3.0 Understand the instruction set of 8051.

3.1. Explain the function of data transfer instructions and the effect of flags.
3.2. Explain the data transfer instructions with examples.
3.3. Write programs in mnemonics to illustrate the application of data copy instructions.
3.4. Explain the function of arithmetic group of instructions and the effect of flags.
3.5. Explain the arithmetic group of instructions with examples.
3.6. Write programs in mnemonics to illustrate the application of arithmetic instructions.
3.7. Explain the function of logical instructions and the effect of flags.
3.8. Explain the logical instructions with examples.
3.9. Write programs in mnemonics to illustrate the application of logical instructions.
3.10. Explain the function of branching instructions and the effect of flags.
3.11. Explain unconditional jump instructions.
3.12. Explain conditional jump instructions.
3.13. Explain bit manipulation or Boolean instructions.
4.0 Hardware Interfacing

4.1 What is interfacing and its need?
4.2 Distinguish between input and output interfacing.
4.3 Explain the interfacing of pushbutton switch to 8051.
4.4 Explain the interfacing of LED to 8051.
4.5 Explain the interfacing of seven segment display.
4.6 Write the assembly level program for the above.
4.7 Explain the functions of pins of LCD.
4.8 List instruction command code for programming a LCD.
423
4.9 Explain interfacing of LCD to 8051.
4.10 Explain assembly language Program for interfacing LCD
4.11 Explain key press and detect mechanism.
4.12 Explain interfacing of 4x4 matrix key boards.
5.0 Programmable peripheral devices.

5.1 Explain the need for programmable peripheral devices.
5.2 Classify the various programmable interfacing devices.
5.3 Draw and explain the block diagram of PPI 8255.
5.4 Write the control word format of 8255.
5.5 Draw the PIN diagram of 8255 and explain the function of each PIN.
5.6 State the need for DMA controller.

5.7 Draw and explain the block diagram of DMA controller 8257.
5.9 State the need for programmable communication interface.
5.10 Draw and explain the block diagram of serial communication interface 8251.
5.12 Explain RS 232 standards.
5.13 List RS232 pin, DB25 and DB9 connectors.
5.14 Explain the need for MAX 232 and 233 IC’s and their circuits used for interfacing.
6.0 Comprehend 8051 Programming Concepts

6.1 List the various symbols used in drawing flow charts.
6.2 Draw flow charts for simple problems.
6.3 Draw a simple flow chart illustrating counter technique.
6.4 Write a program using counter techniques.
6.5 Write programs to perform single byte, double byte and multi byte addition and subtraction.
6.6 Define a subroutine and write its advantages.
6.7 Explain the operation of stack with PUSH & POP instructions.
6.8 Explain the branching instructions related to subroutines.
6.9 Explain the sequence of program execution when subroutine is called and executed.
424
6.10 Explain information exchange between the program counter and stack when a subroutine is called.
6.11 Illustrate the concept of nesting, multiple ending and common ending in subroutines.
6.12 Use input/output, machine related statements in writing assembly language programs.
6.13 Explain the term debugging a program.
6.14 List the important steps in writing and trouble shooting a simple program.
6.15 Explain the principles of single step and break point debugging techniques.
6.16 Write simple programs to setup time delay using counter & a single register.
6.17 Calculate the time delay in the program given the clock frequency.
RECOMMENDED BOOKS
1. The 8051 Micro controller and Embedded systems , by Muhammad Ali Mazidi, Janice Mazidi, Janice
GillispieMazidi Pearson-Prenticehall publication
2. The 8051 Microcontroller By Kenneth J. Ayala -Thomson Delmar publications
3. Programming customizing the 8051 Microcontroller by MykePredko, TMH
4. Introduction to microprocessors for engineers and scientists by Ghosh& Sridhar, Prentice-Hall.
5. Microprocessors and Microcontrollers by N.Senthil Kumar, M. Saravanan, S. Jeevanathan, and Oxford
press.
e-links
www.nptel.com
www.electronics4u.com
Suggested student activities.
1. Learn how to download keil software.
2. Propose how to manage the e-waste.
3. Down load ed-sim simulator and know its working.
4. Learn the latest microcontrollers used in day to day applications.
5. Prepare a simple PCB to interface a switch and LED.
On Successful completion of the course, the student will be able to attain the following Course Outcomes (COs):
Course Outcome CL Linke Teaching

d PO Periods
CO Analyze the architecture of U/A 1,2,10
1 8051. 14
CO Compare the various R/U 1,2,

2 languages and interpret the 6
addressing modes.
CO Explain the instruction set of R/U/A 1,2,
3 8051 and write simple 14
programs.
CO Classify and analyze the R/U/A 1,2,
6
4 hardware interfacing
425
devices.
CO Analyze the need for R/U 1,2,
5 programmable interfacing 10
devices.
CO Make use of instructions to R/U/A 1,2,
6 solve programs. 10
MID SEM-I EXAM

5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM –II EXAM
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)

Sl No Unit No.
R U A
1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 II
3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 IV
4
9(b) 13(b)
5 V 5, 6 11(a) 15(a)
3
11(b) 15(b)
6 VI 7,8 10(b) 14(b)
426
12(a) 16(a)

12(b) 16(b)

C-18 IV SEMESTER
18EI-402C MICROCONTROLLER PROGRAMMING
MODEL PAPER MID- SEM I
TIME: 1 HOUR MAX. MARKS : 20

PART-A

1. List any 2 applications of microcontrollers.
2. List the interrupts of 8051 microcontroller.
3. Define bit and nibble related to microcontrollers.
4. Write the instruction format of 8051.
PART – B
5(a) State the features of 8051 microcontroller.

OR
5(b) List any 6 SFR’s and their functions.
6(a) Write the difference between machine level and assembly level programming.
OR
6(b) Classify the instruction set of 8051.
PART – C
7(a) Draw the register structure of 8051 and explain.

OR
7(b) Draw the PIN diagram of 8051 and explain the function of each PIN.
8(a) Explain one byte, two byte and three byte instructions with example for each.
427
OR
8(b) Explain the addressing modes of 8051 microcontroller with an example for each.
C-18 IV SEMESTER
MODEL PAPER MID- SEM II
TIME: 1 HOUR MAX. MARKS : 20

PART-A

1. Write the function of the instruction MOV @R0,A.
2. Write the number of bytes and the type of addressing mode for the instruction MOV DPTR, #6500H.
3. What is interfacing?
4. List any 2 input devices and 2 output devices.
PART – B
5(a) Write an assembly language program to add the numbers 3Ah and 19H.
OR
5(b) Write an assembly language program to multiply two binary numbers.
6(a) Explain the interfacing of pushbutton switch to 8051.

OR
6(b) Write functions of pins of LCD.
PART – C
428
7(a) Write an assembly language program to load numbers into registers R1 and R2 using indirect addressing
mode, then exchange the data between them.
OR
7(b) Write any 5 arithmetic group of instructions and explain them with an example for each.
8(a) Explain the interfacing of seven segment LED display to 8051.

OR
8(b) Explain the interfacing of LCD display to 8051.
C-18 IV SEMESTER
MODEL PAPER - SEMESTER END EXAMINATION
TIME: 2 HOURS MAX. MARKS : 40

PART-A

1. Define machine language and mnemonics.
2. Define interfacing.
3. List any 2 pins of DB 9 connector.
4. What is the need for programmable peripheral devices?
5. Write the function of IC’s 8255 and 8257.
6. What is control word with reference to 8255.
7. List any 4 flow chart symbols.
8. Define a subroutine.
PART – B
9(a) List the interrupts of 8051 and write their vector addresses and order of priority.
OR
9(b) Write the control word format of 8051.
10(a) Write an assembly language program to rotate a number in register R4 twice towards left with carry.
OR
429
10(b) Explain the operation of stack with PUSH and POP instructions.
11(a) Draw the PIN diagram of 8257.

OR
11(b) Explain the standards of RS – 232.
12(a) Explain the term debugging.

OR
12(b) Write an assembly language program to generate a time delay of 10 microseconds using a register and
operating with a clock frequency of 10MHz.
PART – C
13(a) Draw and explain the functional block diagram of 8051.

OR
13(b) Draw and explain the block diagram of 8251.
14(a) Explain the key press and key detect mechanism.

OR
14(b) Explain the sequence of program execution when a subroutine is called and executed.
15(a) Draw and explain the block diagram of 8255.

OR
15(b) Explain MAX 232 and MAX 233 IC with necessary diagrams.
16(a) Write an assembly language program to transfer a block of 5 numbers stored in i-RAM locations from
10H onwards to off-chip RAM locations from 6400H onwards.

OR
16(b) Write an assembly language program to add a block of 5 numbers stored in i-RAM locations from
10H onwards. Store the sum onto off-chip RAM locations from 6400H and carry 6401H.
430
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUITS
Course Title : Linear Integrated Circuits Course Code 18EI-403C
Semester IV Course Group Core

Periods(L:T:P)

Periods : 60
Pre requisites
This course requires the basic knowledge of Basic Physics and Mathematics at Secondary school level and
basics of electrical and electronics
Course Outcomes
Course Outcome
CO1
Compare different IC fabrication techniques
CO2 Familiarize operational amplifier and its characteristics
431
CO3 Construct basic application circuits using Op-amp
CO4 Construct oscillators and multi-vibrators using Op-amp
CO5 Develop Timers and PLL using Op-amp
CO6 Construct Instrumentation amplifier and ADC and DAC converters using Operational Amplifiers
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT1- IC Manufacturing: Duration: 8 Periods (L: 6– T: 4)
Merits and demerits of Integrated Circuits-Classification of ICs based on manufacturing process (monolithic,
thin film, thick film and hybrid) - Manufacturing process of monolithic ICs- fabrication of resistor, and capacitor
on monolithic IC- Fabrication of diode and transistor on monolithic IC- different IC packages- - Power rating of
above packages- Various levels of integration (SSI, MSI, LSI, VLSI etc.) - Surface Mount Technology (SMT) -
Merits of SMT Technology
UNIT -2: Operational Amplifier Duration: 10 Periods (L: 6– T: 4)
Need for differential amplifier- Circuit diagram of differential amplifier- Operation of differential amplifier-
Reasons for not implementing differential amplifier with discrete components- differential gain and common
mode gain- Function of an operational amplifier- Symbol - Inverting and Non inverting inputs of Op Amp-
Important characteristics of ideal operational amplifier- Input impedance, Open loop gain, Slew rate, CMRR,
Input offset voltage, Input offset Current- block diagram and pin out diagram of IC 741 - Pin configuration of
IC 741- Typical values of Open loop gain, Slew rate, CMRR, Input offset voltage, Input offset Current- Power
supply requirements of Operational Amplifier- Concept of virtual ground and Virtual short- Single supply
operation of Operational Amplifier- Pin configuration of single supply Op Amps such as CA 3011 ,LM324 -
Features of above ICs.
432
UNIT 3 –Op-amp applications Duration: 12 Periods (L: 6– T: 4)
Inverting amplifier configuration of Op Amp- input and output waveforms- Equation for voltage gain- Effect of
feedback on input impedance and Bandwidth for inverting amplifier configuration- Non Inverting amplifier
configuration of Op Amp- formula for Voltage gain- Effect of feedback on input impedance and Bandwidth- for
Non inverting amplifier configuration. Use of operational amplifier as i) inverter , ii) Voltage Buffer iii)
Summing Amplifier iv)Scale changer v) Integrator vi) Differentiator- Reasons for not implementing
differentiator circuit in high frequency applications-Voltage to current converter circuit- applications of Voltage
to current converter- Current to Voltage converter circuit - Current to Voltage converter circuit - Applications of
Current to Voltage converter-Active and Passive filters- Op amp Active low pass filter with circuit diagram of
first order- Frequency response - Op amp Active high pass filter of first order- Frequency response of the above
circuit- Merits of active filters
UNIT -4: Oscillators and Multi- vibrators using Op-amp Duration: 12 Periods (L: 6– T:4)
OP-Amp Wein-bridge Oscillator circuit- - Output waveform - Conditions required for stable operation - RC
Phase shift oscillator using OP Amp - conditions for stable operation -Classification of Multi vibrators- OP-
Amp Bistable multi vibrator - OP-Amp Bistable multi vibrator- output waveforms- OP-Amp Monostable
multivibrator with waveforms- Astable multi vibrator using OP-Amp- OP-Amp based Astable multi vibrator-
waveforms- applications of multivibrators- OP-Amp Schmitt trigger circuit- fundamental consideration of sweep
waveform- Hysteresis of Schmitt trigger circuit
Unit 5- Timers and PLL Duration: 8 Periods (L: 6– T:4)
Block diagram of 555 IC - Astable multi using 555 IC- Monostable Multivibrator using 555 IC.- Phase locked
loops - Block diagram of PLL – LM565- operation of VCO (LM566)- Lock range of PLL- Capture range of
PLL-Give design rules(Formulas) for implementing PLL circuit - Applications of PLL
UNIT- 6: Instrumentation amplifiers and A/D and D/A converters Duration: 10 Periods (L: 6– T:4)
Use of op amp circuits in instrumentation- Op amp and instrumentation amplifier- Need for instrumentation
amplifier- OP amp instrumentation amplifier circuit- Need for A/D and D/A conversion- Terms: resolution,
Accuracy, Monotonicity and settling time of D/A converter- D/A converter using binary weighted resistors- -
Circuit of D/A converter using R-2R ladder network-.A/D converter using counter method with a block diagram
- A/D converter using successive approximation method - Block diagram - Performance of above A/D
converters
Specific Learning Outcomes: After completing this course the student will be able to
1.0 Explain the IC manufacturing methods
433
1.1 List the advantages and disadvantages of Integrated Circuits over discrete assembly.
1.2 Classify ICs based on fabrication techniques (monolithic, thin film, thick film and hybrid).
1.3 Compare the different types of above fabrication techniques
1.4 Explain the manufacturing process of monolithic ICs.
1.5 Explain the fabrication of resistor, and capacitor on monolithic IC.
1.6 Explain the fabrication of diode and transistor on monolithic IC.
1.7 List different IC packages.
1.8 Draw the sketch of above package types
1.9 Mention the power rating of above packages.
1.10 Explain various levels of integration (SSI, MSI, LSI, VLSI etc.,).
1.11 Explain the Surface Mount Technology (SMT)
1.12 List 6 merits of SMT Technology.
2.0 Explain the working of Operational amplifier
a. State the need for differential amplifier

b. Draw and explain the circuit diagram of differential amplifier
c. Give reasons for not implementing differential amplifier with discrete components.
d. Define the terms differential gain and common mode gain
e. State the function of an operational amplifier.
f. Draw the symbol of an operational amplifier.
g. Explain inverting and Non inverting inputs of Op Amp
h. State the important characteristics of ideal operational amplifier with practical values.
i. Define Input impedance, Open loop gain, Slew rate, CMRR, Input offset voltage, Input offset Current,
j. Draw the Pin configuration of IC 741
k. State the function of each pin.
l. Give typical values of Open loop gain, Slew rate, CMRR, Input offset voltage, Input offset Current,
m. Explain the power supply requirements of Operational Amplifier.
n. Explain the concept of virtual ground and Virtual short.
o. Explain single supply operation of Op-amp
p. Give the pin configuration of single supply op-amps such as CA 3011, LM324
q. List 6 important features of above ICs
r. Explain the operation of adjustable voltage regulator (LM317)
s. Give the formula for output voltage of adjustable regulators
434
3.0 Operational amplifier applications using negative feedback
3.1. Explain the Inverting amplifier configuration of Op Amp with input and output waveforms.
3.2. Derive the equation for voltage gain of an inverting amplifier
3.3. Explain the concept of virtual ground and Virtual short.
3.4. Derive the equation for voltage gain of an inverting amplifier.
3.5. Explain the Non Inverting amplifier configuration of Op Amp.
3.6. Derive the formula for Voltage gain of above.
3.7. Explain the use of operational amplifier as i) inverter , ii) Buffer iii) Summing Amplifier iv)Scale
changer v) Integrator vi) Differentiator
3.8. Mention the reasons for not implementing differentiator circuit in high frequency applications.
3.9. Draw the Voltage to current converter circuit.
3.10. Explain the operation of above circuit
3.11. List 3 applications of Voltage to current converter.
3.12. Draw the Current to Voltage converter circuit.
3.13. Explain the operation of Current to Voltage converter circuit.
3.14. List 3 applications of Current to Voltage converter
3.15. .Distinguish between Active and Passive filters.
3.16. Explain the working of Op amp Active low pass filter with circuit diagram of first order.
3.17. Draw the frequency response of the above circuit.
3.18. Explain the working of Op amp Active high pass filter with circuit diagram of first order
3.19. Draw the frequency response of the above circuit.
3.20. Mention the merits of active filters.
4.0Explain the working of Oscillators and Multi- vibrators using Op-amp
4.1 Explain Wein-bridge Sine wave Oscillator circuit using an OP-Amp

4.2 Mention the reason for using non linear element in the feedback circuit.
4.3 State the conditions required for stable operation and frequency of oscillation of above circuit
4.4 Explain RC Phase shift oscillator circuit using OP Amp
4.5 Mention the conditions and frequency of oscillation for stable operation of the above circuit
4.6 Explain Gain Bandwidth product of Op Amp
4.7 Classify Multi vibrators.
4.8 Draw and explain the operation of transistor astable multivibrator.
4.9 Draw OP-Amp Bistable multi vibrator
4.10 Explain the working of OP-Amp Bistable multi vibrator with output waveforms.
4.11 Draw and explain the working of OP-Amp Monostable multivibrator with waveforms.
435
4.12 Draw the circuit of Astable multi vibrator using OP-Amp.
4.13 Explain the working of OP-Amp based Astable multi vibrator with output waveforms.
4.14 List 6 applications of multivibrators
4.15 Draw OP-Amp Schmitt trigger circuit.
4.16 Explain the working of OP-Amp Schmitt trigger circuit.
5.0Explain the working of Timers and PLL
5.1. Draw the block diagram of 555 IC and explain.

5.2. Explain the working of astable multi using 555 IC.
5.3. Explain the working of Monostable Multivibrator using 555 IC.
5.4. Explain the concept of Phase locked loops
5.5. Draw and explain the block diagram of PLL – LM565.
5.6. Explain the operation VCO (LM566)
5.7. Define lock range of PLL
5.8. Define capture range of PLL.
5.9. Give design rules(Formulas) for implementing PLL circuit
5.10. List the applications of PLL.
5.11. Explain use of PLL as frequency multiplier
6.0 Explain the working of Instrumentation Amplifiers and A/D and D/A converters
6.1. Explain the use of op amp circuits in instrumentation.

6.2. Distinguish between Op amp and instrumentation amplifier.
6.3. Explain the need for instrumentation amplifier
6.4. Draw three OP amp instrumentation amplifier circuit
6.5. Explain the working of above circuits.
6.6. State the need for A/D and D/A conversion.
6.7. Define the terms resolution, Accuracy, Monotonicity and settling time of D/A converter.
6.8. Draw and explain the circuit of D/A converter using binary weighted resistors
6.9. Explain the operation D/A converter using binary weighted resistors.
6.10. Draw and explain the circuit of D/A converter using R-2R ladder network.
6.11. Explain operation of D/A converter using R-2R ladder network.
6.12. Explain the operation of A/D converter using counter method with a block diagram
6.13. Explain A/D converter using successive approximation method with a block diagram
6.14. Compare the performance of above A/D converters
RECOMMENDED BOOKS
436
1. Electronic Devices and Circuits – T.F. Bogart Jr., J.S.Beasley and G.Rico, Pearson Education,6th edition,
2004.
2. Linear Integrated circuits – D.Roychoudhury&Shail.B. Jain – New age International Publishers – II
Edition – 2004.
3. Op-amps and linear integrated circuits, Ramakanth A. Gayakwad, ISBN- 9780132808682
4. Principles of Electronics, Rohit Mehta and V K Mehta, S. Chand and Company Publishing, ISBN-
9788121924504
5. Electronic Devices and Circuits, David A. Bell, Oxford University Press, ISBN9780195693409
1. Student visits Library to refer to Manual of Operational amplifiers
2. Student inspects the available equipment in the Lab to test the applications of op-amp
3. Visitnearby Industry to familiarize with fabrication techniques of ICs
4. Participate in the Quiz
5. Participate in Group discussion
6. Search internet for circuits using the operational amplifier
3. www.nptel.ac.in
Teaching
Course Outcome CL Linked PO Hours
R/U 1,2,10 8
Know the different IC fabrication techniques
CO1
437
CO2 Know the salient features of Op-amp and Understand the R/U/A 1,2,5,6,7
working of op-amp 12
CO3 Apply the knowledge of op-amp in constructing and R/U/A 1,2,9

analyzing the basic applications 10
CO4 Apply the basic knowledge of Op-amp in the design of R/U/A 1,2,5,7
oscillators and multi-vibrators 10
CO5 Apply the knowledge of Op-amp and know the working of R/U/A 1,2,5
Timers and PLL 10
CO6 Apply the knowledge of op-amp in understanding the R/U/A 1,2,3,7

Instrumentation amplifier and A/D and D/A converters 10
MID SEM-I EXAM

5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM –II EXAM
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)

Sl No Unit No. Questions to be set for SEE Remarks
438
R U A
1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 II
3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 IV
9(b) 13(b)
4
5 V 5, 6 11(a) 15(a)

11(b) 15(b)
3
10(b) 14(b)
6 VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)

12(b) 16(b)

C18EI-403C

C18EI-403C Linear Integrated Circuits
IV SEMESTER MID SEMESTER – I MODEL PAPER
PART-A
1. List different IC packages?

2. List merits of SMT technology?
3. List the important characteristics of ideal operational amplifier?
4. Define the common mode gain?
PART-B
439
5.c Explain manufacturing process of monolithic IC?
(OR)
5.d Explain the fabrication process of diode on monolithic IC?

6.c Draw the pin diagram of IC741 and mention the function of each pin?
(OR)
6.d List important features of ICs CA 3011 and LM 324?
PART-C
7.c Explain the Surface Mount Technology (SMT)?

(OR)
7.d Explain fabrication of a transistor on monolithic IC?

8.c Define Slew rate and CMRR of operational amplifier? Explain their importance in the operation of
operational amplifier?
(OR)
8.d Explain power supply requirements of Operational Amplifier?
C18EI-403C
IV SEMESTER MID SEMESTER – II MODEL PAPER
Time: 1 hour Max. Marks: 20
PART-A
Answer All questions. Each carries 1 marks. 4X1=4 Marks
5. List the applications of Voltage to Current converter?

6. List the merits of active filters?
7. Classify Multi-vibrators?
440
8. List the applications of Multi-vibrators?
PART-B
5.c. Give the reason for using non-linear element in the feedback circuit of Wein-bridge oscillator?
(OR)
5.d. Give the conditions for stable operation of RC – Phase shift oscillator?
6.c Explain Gain-Bandwidth product of Op-amp?
(OR)
6.d Explain RC phase shift oscillator circuit using Op-amp?
PART-C
7.c Draw and explain the working of first order active low pass filter using op-amp?
(OR)
7.d Draw and explain the Non-inverting amplifier configuration of op-amp and derive the expression for
voltage gain?
8.c Draw and explain the working of Bi-stable multi-vibrator using Op-amp?
(OR)
8.d Draw and explain the Schmitt-Trigger circuit using Op-amp?
18EI-403C
PART-A

441
1. What is the need for a heat sink in a power transistor?
2. Draw the Summing amplifier circuit using Op-amp?
3. Define Mono tonicity and settling time?
4. Define Input offset voltage and Input offset current of Op-amp?
5. Define lock range and capture range of PLL?
6. What is the purpose of the voltage-controlled oscillator (VCO) in PLL?
7. What is instrumentation amplifier?
8. The basic step of a 9 bit DAC is 10.3 mV. If 000000000 represents 0Volts, what is the output for an
input of 101101111?
PART-B
9.c Draw the block diagram of operational amplifier?.

(OR)
9.d Explain controlled voltage and threshold of IC-555.?
10.c Mention the reasons for not implementing differentiator circuit in High Frequency applications?
(OR)
10.dWhat is the difference between Op-amp and instrumentation amplifier?
11.c Explain controlled voltage and threshold of IC-555.?
(OR)
11.dMention design rules for implementing PLL circuit?

12.c What is the need for ADC and DAC converters?
(OR)
12.dCompare the performance of Counter method and SAR ADC?
PART-C
13.c Define Slew rate and CMRR of operational amplifier? Explain their importance in the operation of
operational amplifier?
(OR)
442
13.dDetermine the frequency of oscillation for the astable multivibrator using IC-555. Given that
RA=RB=1KΩ and C=1000PF.
14.c For the subtractor circuit using an op-amp input voltages are V 1=5V and V2=2V and R1=10K and R2=20k
respectively. Calculate the output voltage.
(OR)
14.dA certain 8-bit DAC has a full-scale output of 2mA and a full-scale error of ± 0.5% F.S. What is the range
of possible outputs for an input of 10000000?
15.c Explain controlled voltage and threshold of IC-555.?
(OR)
15.dExplain the operation of PLL-based FM demodulator?

16.c Explain the operation of instrumentation amplifier using three operational amplifiers?
(OR)
16.dExplain the operation of Successive Approximation method of ADC?
Industrial Instrumentation
Course Title Industrial Instrumentation Course Code 18EI-404C
Semester IV Semester Course Group Core

Periods(L:T:P)
443
Methodology Lecture+Assignments Total Contact Periods 60 Periods

Pre requisites
This course requires the basic knowledge of Instrumentation.

Course Outcomes
CO1 Apply the knowledge of Transducers in the measurement of speed ,velocity & vibration
CO2 Demonstrate Density and Viscosity measurement transducers used in Industries.
CO3 Illustrate the use of Humidity, Moisture and Special sensors and their applications
CO4 Understand the working principle ofnuclear radiation measurementtechniques
CO5
Analyze smart sensor and understand the types & working of Proximity Sensors & Relays
CO6 Applications of Industrial Instrumentation in different fields.
Unit Unit Name Periods Questions to be set for SEE

No
R U A
444
1 Measurement of Speed,
8
Velocity & Vibration
Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
2 Measurement of Density
10
& Viscosity
3 Humidity, Moisture and

10
Special Sensors
Q4 Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
4 Fundamentals of Nuclear
8
Instrumentation
5 Smart sensors Q9(b), Q14(b),

12 Q5,Q6
Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Q3
6 Advance Applications of Q10(b), Q13(b),
12 Q7,Q8
Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)
Industrial Instrumentation
Total 60 8 8 8
Course Contents
UNIT 1-Measurement of Speed, Velocity & Vibration Duration: 8Periods (L: 6 T :2)
Vibration monitoring-linear velocity measurement-moving coil type velocity transducers-moving iron type
velocity transducers-Angular velocity speed measurements-AC & DC Tachogenerator-Photo electric
tachometer-toothed rotor variable reluctance tachometer.
UNIT 2- Measurement of Density and Viscosity Duration: 8Periods (L:6 - T :2)
Density-Displacement type density measurement-fluid dynamic type density measurement-Ultrasonic type
density measurement-Viscosity-Capillary Viscometer-Falling ball Viscometer-Rotational Viscometer.
UNIT 3-Humidity, Moisture and Special Sensors Duration: 12Periods (L:9- T :3)
Humidity-Moisture-Importance of humidity measurement-Classification of humidity-hair hygrometer-flame
sensor-leak detector-noise sensor
UNIT 4-Nuclear Instrumentation Duration: 6Periods (L:4.5- T :1.5)
Types of Ionization radiation- Alpha, Beta and Gamma Particles, Neutrons & their properties-Radiation
detectors- Geiger Muller counter - Ionization chamber-Scintillation counter.
UNIT 5- Smart sensors Duration: 12Periods (L:9- T :3)
Definition of smart sensor- block diagram and its architecture of smart sensor- Evolution of smart sensor-1 st,2nd ,
3rd,4th,5th generations & brief explanation of some examples as Proximity sensors- IR sensors, Motion
detection sensors- Accelerometer sensors- Gyroscope sensors- temperature- level sensors
445
UNIT 6- Advanced Applications of Industrial Instrumentation Duration:
14Periods (L:10.5 - T :3.5)
Altimeter-Bevameter-Electronic Tuner-Barkometer-Ceilometer-Actinometer
Reference Books
1. Principles of Industrial Instrumentation by Patranabis.

2. Industrial Instruments and Control by S.K.Singh
3. Electronics Instruments and Instrumentation Technology by M.M.S. Anand
4. Instrumentation Measurement, Devices and systems by Rangan Mani and Sharma
5. Electrical and Electronic Measurements and Instrumentation by A.K.Sawhney
6. Handbook of Instrumentation-Liptalk
1. www.egr.msu.edu
2. www.bme.rutgers.edu
3. www.BMES.org
4. www.Biospace.com
5. www.chromacademy.com
6. www.agilent.com
Suggested learning Outcomes
UNIT 1- Measurement of Speed, Velocity & Vibration

1.1 Mention the types of Velocity Transducers.
1.2 Explain the principle of operation of Moving coil type velocity transducer.
1.3 List the advantages of Moving coil type velocity transducer.
1.4 List the disadvantages of Moving coil type velocity transducer.
1.5 Explain the principle of operation of Moving iron type velocity transducer
1.6 List the advantages of Moving Iron type velocity transducer.
1.7 List the disadvantages of Moving Iron type velocity transducer.
446
1.8 Mention the types of angular velocity speed measurement Transducer.
1.9 Explain the principle of operation of A.C Tacho generators.
1.10 List the advantages of A.C Tacho generators.
1.11 List the disadvantages of A.C Tacho generators.
1.12 Explain the principle of operation of D.C Tacho generators.
1.13 List the advantages of D.C Tacho generators.
1.14 List the disadvantages of D.C Tacho generators.
1.15 Explain the principle of operation of Photo electric Tachometer.
1.16 List the advantages of Photo electric Tachometer.
1.17 List the disadvantages of Photo electric Tachometer.
1.18 Explain the principle of operation of toothed rotor variable reluctance Tachometer.
1.19 List the advantages of toothed rotor variable reluctance Tachometer.
1.20 List the disadvantages of toothed rotor variable reluctance Tachometer.
1.21 State the importance of vibration monitoring.
UNIT 2- Measurement of Density and Viscosity
2.1 Define Density.
2.2 State the importance of density measurement in industry.
2.3 Explain the principle of operation of Displacement type density measurement.
2.4 List the advantages of Displacement type density measurement.
2.5 Explain the principle of operation of Fluid dynamic type density measurement.
2.6 List the advantages of Fluid dynamic type density measurement.
2.7 Explain the principle of operation of Ultrasonic density measurement.
2.8 List the advantages of Ultrasonic density measurement.
2.9 Define Viscosity.
2.10 State the importance of Viscosity measurement in industry.
2.11 Explain the principle of operation of Capillary viscometer.
2.12 List the advantages of Capillary viscometer.
2.13 Explain the principle of operation of falling ball viscometer.
2.14 List the advantages of falling ball viscometer.
2.15 Explain the principle of operation of Rotational viscometer.
2.16 List the advantages of Rotational viscometer.
UNIT 3- Humidity, Moisture and Special Sensors:
3.1 Define Humidity.
3.2 Mention the Units for Humidity.
3.3 Define Moisture.
447
3.4 Mention the Units for Moisture.
3.5 State the importance of Moisture measurement in Industries.
3.6 State the importance of Humidity measurement in Industries.
3.7 List the types of Humidity
3.8 Define Absolute humidity
3.9 Define Relative Humidity.
3.10 Explain the operation of Hair hygrometer.
3.11 List the Applications of Hair hygrometer.
3.12 Explain the principle of operation of Flame sensors.
3.13 List the Applications of Flame sensors.
3.14 Explain the principle of operation of Leak detectors.
3.15 List the Applications of Leak detector.
3.16 Explain the principle of operation of Noise sensors.
3.17 List the Applications of Noise sensors
UNIT 4-Fundamentals of Nuclear Instrumentation
4.1 List the types of Radiations.
4.2 List the properties of Alpha Particles.
4.3 List the properties of Beta Particles.
4.4 List the properties of Gamma Particles.
4.5 List the properties of Neutrons.
4.6 List the types of radiation detectors.
4.7 Explain the Geiger Muller method of detection of radiation.
4.8 List the Advantages of Geiger Muller method of detection of radiation.
4.9 List the Disadvantages of Geiger Muller method of detection of radiation.
4.10 Explain the Ionization chamber method of detection of radiation.
4.11 List the Advantages of Ionization chamber method of detection of radiation.
4.12 List the Disadvantages of Ionization chamber method of detection of radiation.
4.13 Explain the Scintillation counter method of detection of radiation.
4.14 List the Advantages of Scintillation counter method of detection of radiation.
4.15 List the Disadvantages of Scintillation counter method of detection of radiation.
4.16 Explain the method of detection of neutrons.
UNIT 5- SMART SENSORS.
5.1 Define smart sensor.
5.2 Differentiate sensor and smart sensor
5.3 Draw the block diagram of smart sensor and explain its architecture.
448
5.4 Explain the evolution of smart sensor as 1 st,2nd ,3rd,4th,5thgenerations .
5.5 Define proximity sensor.
5.6 List proximity sensors.
5.7 Explain Proximity type inducti ve, capaciti ve, photoelectric, ultrasonic sensors.
5.8 List applicati ons of proximity sensors.
5.9 Defi ne IR sensor.
5.10Explain IR sensor and list its applicati ons.
5.11Defi ne moti on detecti on sensor.
5.12List applicati ons of moti on detecti on sensors..
5.13Defi ne Accelerometer sensor.
5.14List applicati ons of Accelerometer sensor.
5.15Explain about Hall Effect accelerometer and piezoelectric accelerometer
5.16Defi ne Gyroscope sensor.
5.17List the applicati ons of Gyroscope sensor.
UNIT 6-Applications of Industrial Instrumentation
6.1 Explain the principle of operation of Altimeter.
6.2 List the Advantages of Altimeter.
6.3 List the Disadvantages of Altimeter.
6.4 Explain the principle of operation of Bevameter.
6.5 List the Advantages of Bevameter.
6.6 List the Disadvantages of Bevameter.
6.7 Explain the principle of operation of Electronic Tuner.
6.8 List the Advantages of Electronic Tuner.
6.9 List the Disadvantages of Electronic Tuner.
6.10 Explain the principle of operation of Barkometer.
6.11 List the Advantages of Barkometer.
6.12 List the Disadvantages of Barkometer.
6.13 Explain the principle of operation of Ceilometer
6.14 List the Advantages of Ceilometer.
6.15 List the Disadvantages of Ceilometer.
6.16 Explain the principle of operation of Actinometer
6.17 List the Advantages of Actinometer.
6.18 List the Disadvantages of Actinometer.

449
1. List out the Transducers available in the market and collect the following information like name of the
transducer, comparisons, specifications, Price etc. The student should submit a handwritten report.
Documents have to be maintained as a record.
2. Conduct Quiz or tests / assignments in topics of Industrial Instrumentation. Documents have to be
3. Prepare power point presentation on current topics in Industrial Instrumentation. Documents have to be
4. Visit YouTube or any other sites on current topics in Industrial Instrumentation. Listen to the lectures
and submit a handwritten report and a soft copy (CD/DVD).
Ethics
n Communicatio
and practice Experiments
learning Lifelong
Tools Engineering
& Environment

knowledge Basic
Linked
10
CO1 2 2 2 2 2 1,2,3,4,10
CO2 2 2 2 2 2 1,2,3,4,10
CO3 2 2 2 2 2 1,2,3,4,10
CO4 2 2 2 2 2 1,2,3,4,10
CO5 2 2 2 2 2 1,2,3,4,10
CO6 2 2 2 2 2 1,2,3,4,10
Internal evaluation
450
Test Units Marks
Assignment 1 5
Seminars 1 5
Total 60

MID SEM-I EXAM

1 Unit-I 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-II 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM-II EXAM

451
1 Unit-III 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-IV 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)
The length of answer for each question framed in respect of Part-A, B&C shall not exceed ¼ of a page,1


Unit No
R U A
I
Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
II
III
Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
IV Q4
Q5,Q Q9(b), Q13(b),
V
6 Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Q3
Q7,Q Q10(b), Q14(b),
VI
8 Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)

Model Question paper
DEIE IV semester Mid Semester-I Examination
Corse Code: 18EI-404C Duration:1 hour

452
Course Name: Industrial Instrumentation Max.Marks:20
PART-A
Answer all questions, Each Question carries one mark 4x1 = 4 Marks
1) Mention the types of velocity transducers.
2) List the advantages of D.C tacho generators
3) Define density.
4) List the advantages of capillary viscometer.
PART-B
Answer two questions. Each question carries three marks 2x 3 = 6 Marks
5(a) List the advantages of Moving coil type velocity transducer.

(or)
5(b) State the importance of vibration monitoring.
6(a) List the advantages of ultra sonic density measurement.

(or)
6(b) State the importance of Viscosity measurement in industry
PART-C
Answer two questions. Each question carries five marks 2x 5 = 10 Marks
7(a) Explain the principle of AC tacho generator.

(or)
7(b) Explain the operation of toothed rotor variable reluctance tachometer.
8(a) Explain the operation of Displacement type density measurement.

(or)
8(b) Explain the operation of rotational viscometer.
453
DEIE IV semester Mid Semester-II Examination
Corse Code: 18EI-404C Duration:1 hour

PART-A
Answer all questions, Each Question carries one mark 4x1= 4 Marks
1. Define humidity
2. List the application of flam sensors.
3. List the types of Radiations
4. State the types of radiation detectors
PART-B
Answer two questions. Each question carries three marks 2x 3 = 6 Marks

5(a) State the importance moisture measurement in industries.
(or)
5(b) Mention the basic working principle of falling ball viscometer.
6(a) List the properties of Alpha and Beta particles

(or)
6(b) Explain the method of detection of neutrons.
PART-C
Answer two questions. Each question carries five marks 2x 5 = 10 Marks
7(a) Explain the operation of hygrometer.

(or)
7(b) Explain the operation of leak detectors.
8(a) Explain the operation of Geiger Muller method of detection of radiation.

(or)
8(b) Explain the operation of scintillation counter method of detection of radiation
454
DEIE IV Semester
Corse Code: 18EI-404C Duration:2 hours

PART-A
Answer all questions 8x1 =8 Marks

1) Mention the types of angular velocity speed measurement transducer.
2) List the types of Radiation detectors.
3) Define IR sensor.
4) List the application of Noise sensor.
5) Define smart sensor.
6) List the applications of Gyroscope sensor.
7) List the advantages of Altimeter.
8) State the disadvantages of Ceilometers.
PART-B
Answer four questions 4 x3 = 12 Marks
9(a) State the importance of vibration monitoring.

(or)
9(b)Differentiate sensor and smart sensor.
10(a)List the properties of Alpha and Beta particles

(or)
10(b) State the advantages of Bevameter.
11(a) List proximity sensors.
(or)
11(b) Describe Gyroscope sensor.
12(a) Define Electronic tuner.

(or)
12(b) Mention the advantages of Barkometer.
455
PART-C
Answer four questions 4 x 5 = 20 Marks
13(a) Explain the operation of toothed rotor variable reluctance tachometer.

(or)
13(b) Draw the block diagram of smart sensor and explain its architecture.
14(a) Explain the operation of Geiger Muller method of detection of radiation.

(or)
14(b) Explain the principle of Altimeter.
15(a)Explain the operation of proximity type inductive sensor.

(or)
15(b) Explain the operation of Accelerometer sensor.
16(a) Explain the operation of Barkometer.

(or)
16(b) Explain the operation of Actinometer.
456
PROCESS CONTROL
Course Title : PROCESS CONTROL Course Code 18EI-405C

Semester IV Course Group :Core
Teaching Scheme in
45:15:0 Credits :3
Periods(L:T:P)
Methodology Lecture + Assignments Total Periods : : 60
Pre requisites
This course requires the basic knowledge of Physics, Mathematics and Process Instrumentation.
Course Outcomes
Compare open loop and closed loop control systems and familiarize different types of systems.
CO1 :
Categorize the Process control
CO2 : Determine the various Control system parameters and compare the various Controller principles
CO3 : Analyze the concepts of Final Control Elements and Actuators
CO4 : Use standards for Process control and draw Process Instrument diagrams
CO5 : Determine and compare Controller Tuning methods
CO6 : Analyze the concepts of Advanced Process Control Systems
457
No
R U A
1. Introduction to basics of control systems &

process control 10
Q1 Q9A Q13A
2 Controller Principles 10
3 Final Control Elements 8
Q2 Q10A Q14A
4. Process Instrument diagrams and Standards 8
5. Analog controllers & Tuning methods of Q13B,
Q4 Q5,Q Q9B,Q11 Q15A
Controller
12 6 A,Q11B ,
Q15B
Q3
6. Advanced Process control systems Q10B,Q1 Q14B,
Q7,Q 2A, Q12B Q16A
12 8 ,
Q16B
Total 60 8 8 8
Course
UNIT Contents
1 –Fundamentals of Electricity Duration: 8 Periods (L: 4.8 –
UNIT 1-Introduction to basics of control systems and process control

Duration: 10 Periods(L:8– T:2)
Definition of control system-Importance of Control Engineering-Types of control system-
Block diagram- explanation and comparison of Open Loop and Closed Loop systems-Linear & non-linear- Time
variant & time invariant- Continuous data & sampled data- Digital control systems
Process control principle- process control block diagram -typical control variables - controlled variable-
manipulated variable- Continuous and Batch process- process characteristics
UNIT 2- Controller Principles Duration: 10 Periods(L:9– T:3)

Control system parameters: error, control lag, dead time, cycling- Controller modes- discontinuous, two-
position, multi-position, floating- Continuous control modes - proportional, integral, derivative control mode-
Composite control modes - PI, PD and PID-Controller
458
UNIT 3- Final Control Elements Duration: 8 Periods(L:5– T:3)
P/I and I/P converters-Different types of the Actuators-Pneumatic, Hydraulic, Electro pneumatic, Actuators-
different types of control valves.
UNIT-4- Process Instrument diagrams and Standards Duration: 8 Periods(L:7– T:1)

Line diagrams-Definition of P & I diagrams- Use of letter code of identification of Instruments- Introduction to
standards that are widely used in instrumentation Viz.- ISI ANSI, BIS, ISA.
UNIT-5- Analog controllers & Tuning methods of PID Controller

Duration: 12Periods (L: 10– T: 2)
Introduction- general features- electronic controller- implementation of two position Proportional, Integral,
Derivative, PI, PD and PID-Tuning methods- ultimate gain method and process reaction curve method.
UNIT 6- Advanced Process control systems Duration: 12 Periods(L:9– T:3)

Single variable, independent variable, interactive single variable, compound variable, multivariable control
systems, cascade control, feed forward control, ratio control, and adaptive control systems.
Recommended Books
1. Automatic process control by Donald.P.Eckmann
2. Control systems engineering by Nagrath and Gopal
3. Instrument Engineers Hand book by Liptak, Volume II
4. Instrument Technology by B.E.Jones, Volume I, II, III
5. Process Analysis & Control by Coughnour.
6. Process control instrumentation technology by Curtis .D.Johnson Seventh edition
7. Process Control by D.Patranabis
459
3. www.nptel.ac.in
1.0 Introduction to basics of control systems and process control
1.1 Define a control system

1.2 Explain the importance of control engineering in day to day life.
1.3 Explain the importance of control engineering in industry.
1.4 Classify control systems.
1.5 Define open loop control system.
1.6 Draw the block diagram of an open loop control system.
1.7 List the various parts in an open loop control system.
1.8 List the examples of open loop control systems
1.9 Define closed loop control system.
1.10 Draw the block diagram of a closed loop control system.
1.11 List the various parts of closed loop control system.
1.12 List the examples of closed loop control systems.
1.13 Distinguish between open loop and closed loop control systems.
1.14 Explain the need for feed back in a control system with example.
1.15 Explain briefly about the following system.
a) Linear and Non-linear control system.
b) Time variant and time invariant system.
c) Continuous data and sample data system
1.16 Digital control systems
1.17 Define process control.
1.18 Explain an automatic process control with example.
1.19 Draw the block diagram of a process control loop.
1.20 Describe each element in a process control loop
1.21 Explain batch process and continuous process.
1.22 Explain the concept of controlled variable and manipulated variable with an example.
1.23 Explain a physical control system with block diagram.
1.24 Explain the concept of control system objective.
1.25 List the requirements of control system objective.
1.26 Define process characteristics such as process equation, process load, process lag and self-
regulation.
460
2.0 Control system parameters and Controller principles
2.1 Define error, control lag, dead time, and cycling.

2.2 List the Discontinuous control modes.
2.3 Explain two positions control mode.
2.4 Explain multi position control mode.
2.5 Explain floating control mode.
2.6 List the continuous control modes.
2.7 Describe proportional control mode.
2.8 Define proportional band, and offset.
2.9 List the characteristics of proportional control mode.
2.10 Describe integral control mode.
2.11 List the characteristics of integral control mode
2.12 Describe the derivative control mode.
2.13 List the characteristics of derivative control mode.
2.14 List the composite control modes.
2.15 Describe the Proportional-Integral Control mode.
2.16 List the characteristics of Proportional-Integral Control mode.
2.17 Describe PD control mode.
2.18 Describe PID control mode.
2.19 List advantages and disadvantages of PI, PD & PID controllers
3.0 Final Control Elements and Actuators
3.1 Explain the principle of operation of final control element in a process with block diagram
3.2 State the need for electric to pressure and pressure to electric converters.
3.3 Explain the working of Nozzle-Flapper system with a diagram.
3.4 Explain the working of Electric to Pressure converter.
3.5 Explain the working of Pressure to Electric converter.
3.6 List the types of Actuators.
3.7 Explain the principle of Pneumatic Actuator with diagram.
3.8 Explain the principle of Hydraulic Actuator with diagram.
3.9 Explain the working of Electro Pneumatic Actuator with diagram.
3.10 Explain the working of Solenoid valve actuator
3.11 Explain the working Stepper motor actuator
3.12 Classification of Control valves.
3.13 Explain the construction and working of Sliding stem control valve
3.14 Explain the construction and working of Single seat Plug Control valve
461
3.15 Explain the construction and working of Rotating shaft Control valve
3.16 Explain the construction and working of Butterfly control valve
3.17 List the Flow-Lift characteristics of control valves such as quick opening, Linear, Equal
Percentage valves.
4.0 Process Instrument diagrams and Standards
4.1 State the importance of process line diagrams and symbols in process control.
4.2 Explain the representation of following in a process using line diagrams.
a) Process line, connection to process or instrument supply
b) Fluid pressure Line.
c) Electric signal
d) Pneumatic signal
e) Hydraulic signal
f) Capillary tube.
g) Electromagnetic or Sonic signal (guided and not guided).
h) Undefined signal.
i) Mechanical link
j) Internal system link (software or data link or computer signal)
k) Orifice installed line.
l) Point of measurement
4.3 Explain the representation of following controllers and transmitters using symbols.
a) Pressure transmitter
b) Flow Transmitter
c) Level Transmitter
d) Temperature Transmitter
e) Pressure Controller
f) Flow Controller
g) Level Controller
h) Temperature Controller
4.4 Explain the representation of following control valves using symbols.
a) Hydraulically operated control valve
b) Pneumatically operated control valve
c) Electrically operated control valve
d) Butterfly valve
e) Solenoid Valve
f) Gate valve
462
g) Gate valve-hand operated
h) Globe Valve
i) Globe valve- hand operated
4.5 Explain the representation of following general instruments by Balloon symbols
a) Instrument at locally mounted
b) Instrument at control centre
c) Instrument- bi-functional /two services
d) Instrument-transmitting type
4.6 Define piping and instrumentation diagram (P&I diagram).
4.7 Explain the simple application oriented P & I diagram.
4.8 Explain the use of letter codes for identification of instruments
4.9 Explain different standards used in Instrumentation.
a) ISI
b) ANSI
c) BS
d) ISA
f) DIN
5.0 Analog controller implementation and Controller tuning methods.

5.1 Introduction to electronic controllers
5.2 General features of electronic controllers
5.3 Explain the implementation of following controller modes using Op-Amps
a) Two – position controller modes
b) Proportional controller modes
c) Integral controller modes
d) Proportional Integral controller modes
e) PID Controller modes
5.4 State the need for tuning of PID controller
5.5 List methods of tuning of PID controllers
5.6 Explain about methods of tuning of PID controllers
a. Ultimate gain method
b. Process reaction curve method
6.0 Advanced Process Control Systems

6.1 Define single loop control system
6.2 Explain the following control system configuration.
463
a) Single variable control system.
b) Independent single variable control system
c) Interactive single variable control system
d) Compound variable control system and
e) Multivariable control system
6.3 Define cascade control system
6.4 Explain the block diagram of cascade control system.
6.5 Mention the merits of cascade control system over single loop control system
6.6 Explain the following with example
a. Cascade control
b. Single loop control system
6.7 Compare how the cascade control system is better than single loop control system with an
example.
6.8 List the applications of cascade control system.
6.9 Explain feed forward control system with block diagram.
6.10 Distinguish between feedback and feed forward control systems.
6.11 Explain the operation of Ratio control with a diagram.
6.12 List the applications of Ratio control system.
6.13 Define Adaptive control.
6.14 Explain programmed adaptive control system with block diagram.
6.15 Explain self- adaptive control system with block diagram.
6.16. List the applications of adaptive control system.
3. Visit nearby Industry to familiarize with controlling process ex: Power stations, Cement, paper
Industries
4. Quiz
5. Group discussion
6. Surprise test
464
Communication
Lifelong learning
Basic knowledge
Engineering Tools
Ethics
Linked PO

PO
CO PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9
10
CO1 2 2 2 2 1,2,5,10
CO2 2 2 2 2 1,2,5,6
CO3 2 2 2 2 1,2,4,5
CO4 2 2 2 2 1,2,5,7
CO5 2 2 2 2 2 1,2,4,5,8
CO6 2 2 2 2 1,2,3,8
Internal evaluation
Test Units Marks

Assignment 1 5
Seminars 1 5
Total 60
465

MID SEM-I EXAM

1 Unit-I 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-II 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM-II EXAM

1 Unit-III 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-IV 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)
The length of answer for each question framed in respect of Part-A, B&C shall not exceed ¼ of a page,1
466


Unit No
R U A
I
Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
II
III
Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
IV Q4
Q5,Q Q9(b), Q13(b),

V
6 Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Q3
Q7,Q Q10(b), Q14(b),
VI
8 Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)
467
BOARD DIPLOMA MID-SEMESTER- I EXAMINATIONS (C-18)
DEIE – IV SEMESTER EXAMINATION
PROCESS CONTROL (18EI-405C)

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PART –A
Instructions: Answer all the questions. Each question carries one marks. MARKS: 4X1 =4
1. Define a control system.

2. Draw the block diagram of an open loop control system.
3. Define Integral control mode.
4. List the advantages of PID controller.
PART –B
5. (a) Distinguish between open loop and closed loop control system.
(or)
5. (b) Explain briefly about Non –linear control system.
6.(a) Describe the derivative control mode

(or)
6.(b) Describe PID Control mode.
PART –C
7.(a) Explain the closed loop control system with the help of an example.
(or)
7.(b) Explain briefly about time variant and time invariant systems.
8. (a) Explain two position control mode
(or)
8. (b) Explain the Proportional Integral control modes and mention its advantages and
disadvantages.

468
BOARD DIPLOMA MID-SEMESTER-II EXAMINATIONS (C-18)
DEIE - IV SEMESTER EXAMINATION
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PART –A
Instructions: Answer all the questions. Each question carries one marks. MARKS: 4X1 =04
1. Define principle of final control element.

2.State the need for electric to pressure converter.
3. Draw the process line diagram for
a) Pneumatic signal.
b) Capillary tube
4. Define piping & instrumentation diagram.
PART –B
5.(a) Explain the principle of pneumatic actuator.

(or)
5.(b) Give the classification of control valves.
6.(a) Draw the balloon symbols for locally mounted and transmitted type instruments.
(or)
6.(b) List the types of standards used in instrumentation.
PART –C
Instructions: Answer two questions. Each question carries five marks MARKS: 2X5 =10
7.(a) Explain the working of stepper motor actuator.

(or)
7.(b) Explain the working and construction of butterfly control valve.
8.(a) Explain the use of letter codes for identification of instruments.
(or)
8.(b) Explain the ISI standard
469
BOARD DIPLOMA END SEMESTER EXAMINATIONS (C-18)
DEIE - IV SEMETER EXAMINATION
PART –A
1. Classify control systems.

2. Define principle of final control element.
3. State the need for tuning.
4. Define Integral control mode.
5. List any two general features of electronic controllers
6. List the types of Tuning methods for PID Controller.
7. Define ratio controller.
8. List any two application of adaptive control.
PART –B
Answer FOUR questions 4 x 3= 12
9.(a) Distinguish between open loop and closed loop control system.
(or)
9.(b).Draw proportional control mode using Op-Amp.
10.(a) Explain the principle of pneumatic actuator.
(or)
10.(b) List the applications of Cascade control system.
11.(a) Design the two position control using op-amp.
(or)
11.(b) Design the PI controller using op-amp.
12.(a) Explain the feed forward control with block diagram
(or)
12.(b) List the applications of adaptive control system.
470
PART –C
Answer FOUR questions 4 x 5 = 20
13.(a) Draw the Block diagram of process control loop and explain each element in it.
(or)
13.(b) Explain the ultimate gain method in detail.
14.(a) Explain the principle of Hydraulic Actuator with diagram.
(or)
14.(b) Draw and explain the block diagram of cascade control system.
15.(a) Explain the implementation of Integral control mode using Op Amp.
(or)
15.(b) Explain the process reaction curve tuning method of PID.
16.(a) Explain the programmed adaptive control system with block diagram.
(or)
16.(b) Explain the operation of Ratio control with diagram.
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUITS LAB PRACTICE

471
Course Title : Linear Integrated Circuits Lab Course Code 18EI-406P
Practice
Semester IV Course Group Practical

Periods(L:T:P)

Periods : 45
Pre requisites
This course requires the basic skills of Handling Basic Electronics tools and Components, knowledge of
connecting cables and meters
Unit Unit name Marks for SEE Marks

No
Periods weightage
Han Man Prec

dlin ipula ision
g tion
1 Op-amp circuits 15 4 2 6 12
2 Oscillators and 555 Timer 9 2 2 6 8
3 Phase Locked Loops 9 2 2 4 8
4 Op-amp applications 12 2 2 6 12
Total 45 10 8 22 40
Course Contents
List of Experiments
I. Operational Amplifier Circuits
1. Familiarize with Operational amplifier 741 and Quad Op amp LM 324 and comparator LM 339
ICs
2. Determine the CMRR and Slew Rate of the OP-AMP.
472
3) Implement and test 741 Op Amp as
a) Inverting amplifier
b) Non Inverting amplifier
c) Voltage follower (Buffer),
4) Implement and test 741 Operation amplifier as
a) Summing Amplifier
b) Difference amplifier
c) Scale changer (with two Op Amps)
5. Implement Wave shaping circuits using Op Amp
a) Implement &test Differentiator and Integrator circuits.
b) Implement & test a Voltage comparator Circuit
c) Implement &test Op amp Schmitt trigger and draw characteristics
II. Signal conditioning Circuits using Op amp
6) Implement &test Signal conditioning Circuits using Op amp
a) Interface op amp output with TTL gates with input amplitude limiting circuit
b) Implement &test Current to Voltage converter using Op amps
c) Implement &test Current to Voltage converter and use it to detect photodiode reverse current.
7. Implement &test Voltage to current converter
a) Implement & test a Voltage to current converter that produces a proportionate current in the range
of 4mA to 20mA corresponding to input voltages from 0 to 5V
III. Op amp Oscillators &555 Timer IC
8) Implement & test Sine wave Oscillator Circuits using OpAmp CA 3011
a) RC-phase shift oscillator
b) Wien bridge oscillator
) implement Op-Amp Relaxation Oscillators

473
a) Implement &test Monostable multivibrator circuit and observe output waveforms on CRO
b) Implement &test Astable multivibrator observe output waveforms on CRO
9) Verify different modes of 555 IC.
a) Implement Monostable multi vibrator and observe output waveforms on CRO
b) Implement Astable multivibrator and observe output waveforms on CRO
10) Verify functions of 565 Phase Locked loop IC
A) Implement 565 Phase locked loop circuit and determine VCO free running frequency Lock range ,
Capture Range Practically and observe output waveforms on CRO
b) Implement Frequency demodulator using 565 and observe output waveform on CRO.
11) Use 566 as a square and Triangular wave generator
a) Implement waveform /Function generator using 566 .
b) Produce Frequency modulation using 566 and observe output waveform on CRO.
12) Verify the features of Tone Decoder IC 567 IC
(Refer to the application notes and implement following circuits)
a) Implement 10 KHz signal detector and test
b) Implement frequency Doubler and test.
13) Implement &Test Precision Rectifier using Op amp
14) Assemble Audio Power Amplifier circuit using LM 380 IC and Test the performance.

(i) Collection of catalogues and specification sheets, preparation of a chart displaying symbols of passive
components and connectors/cables.
(ii) Collection of the contributors (scientists) and contribution details to the field of Electrical and Electronics
engineering
(iii) Any other such activities that can contribute to the student’s knowledge in respect of this course.
(iv)Record the best practices used in the disposal of E-waste and precautions in
the operation of electrical appliances.
474
CO1 Analyze op-amp characteristics and apply the knowledge of op-amp in 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8
basic applications
CO2 Apply the knowledge of Op-amp in Signal conditioning circuits 1,2,3,4
CO3 Design and test the working of Timers, PLL 1,2,3
CO4 Design simple circuits using op-amp and implement 1,2,3,10
E Learning Resources
3. www.nptel.ac.in
475
Semester MID-I Examination Model Question paper
DEIE IV semester practical Examination
Corse Code: 18EI-406P Duration: 1 hour
Course Name: Linear Integrated Circuits Lab Practice Max.Marks:20
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(iii) Draw the circuit diagram for illustration ,choose appropriate values when not mentioned in the question
1. Compare the features of Operational amplifier 741 and Quad Op amp LM 324 and comparator LM
339 ICs
2. Construct the circuit to determine the CMRR and Slew Rate of the OP-AMP and measure.
a) Inverting amplifier b) Non Inverting amplifier c) Voltage follower (Buffer),
a) Summing Amplifier b) Difference amplifier c) Scale changer (with two Op Amps)
b) Implement & test a Voltage comparator Circuit
6. Implement Wave shaping circuits using Op Amp as Schmitt trigger and draw characteristics
7. a) Interface op amp output with TTL gates with input amplitude limiting circuit
8. a) Implement &test Current to Voltage converter and use it to detect photodiode reverse current.
b) Implement &test Voltage to current converter
9. Implement &test a Voltage to current converter that produces a proportionate current in the range of 4mA to
20mA corresponding to input voltages from 0 to 5V
10 implement & test Sine wave Oscillator Circuits using OpAmp CA 3011
476
Semester MID-II Examination Model Question paper
Corse Code: 18EI-406P Duration:1 hour
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Implement Op-Amp Relaxation Oscillators
2 Verify different modes of 555 IC.
A) Implement 565 Phase locked loop circuit and determine VCO free running frequency Lock range , Capture
Range Practically and observe output waveforms on CRO
a) Implement waveform /Function generator using 566.
477
Corse Code: 18EI-406P Duration:2 hours
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Compare the features of Operational amplifier 741 and Quad Op amp LM 324 and comparator LM
339 ICs
2. Construct the circuit to determine the CMRR and Slew Rate of the OP-AMP and measure.
a) Inverting amplifier b) Non Inverting amplifier c) Voltage follower (Buffer),
a) Summing Amplifier b) Difference amplifier c) Scale changer (with two Op Amps)
b) Implement &test a Voltage comparator Circuit
6. Implement Wave shaping circuits using Op Amp as Schmitt trigger and draw characteristics
7. a) Interface op amp output with TTL gates with input amplitude limiting circuit
8. a) Implement &test Current to Voltage converter and use it to detect photodiode reverse current.
b) Implement &test Voltage to current converter
478
9. Implement &test a Voltage to current converter that produces a proportionate current in the range of 4mA
to 20mA corresponding to input voltages from 0 to 5V
10 implement & test Sine wave Oscillator Circuits using Op Amp CA 3011
11. Implement Op-Amp Relaxation Oscillators
12 Verify different modes of 555 IC.
A) Implement 565 Phase locked loop circuit and determine VCO free running frequency Lock range,
Capture Range Practically and observe output waveforms on CRO
a) Implement waveform /Function generator using 566.
479
Industrial Instrumentation lab Practice
Course Title Industrial Instrumentation lab Course Code 18EI-407P
Practice
Semester IV Semester Course Group Practical

Periods(L:T:P)
Methodology Lecture+Assignments Total Contact 45Periods

Periods
Pre requisites
This
Course Outcomes
CO1 Able to handle AC & DC Tachometers.
CO2 Identify and measure the Density and Viscosity of different samples.
CO3 Can measure Humidity and detect different parameters.
CO4 Analyze and observe the response of various fluids by pH and Conductivity meters.
Course Content and Blue Print
Unit Unit Name Period

No s
1 AC & DC Tachometers 10
2 Densitometer & Viscometer 10
3 Hygrometer, Smoke sensor ,
15
Audio sensor & leak detectors
4 Measurement of pH &
10
Conductivity
Total 45
480
Course Contents
UNIT-1AC & DC Tachometers (Able to handle AC & DC Tachometers).

1. Conduct an experiment to measure angular velocity using AC Tacho generator.
a) Identify the Tacho generator
b) Connect to a rotating device
c) Measure the speed of a rotating device
2. Conduct an experiment to measure angular velocity using DC Tacho generator.
a) Identify the Tacho generator
UNIT-2Densitometers & Viscometers. (Identify and measure the Density and Viscosity of
Different samples)
1. Viscosity measurement using falling Ball viscometer
a) Identify different Viscometers
b) Measure the viscosity of the given sample
2. To measure the Density of a given sample.
a) Identify different Densitometers
b) Measure the Density of the sample
UNIT-3 Hygrometer, Smoke sensor, Audio sensor & leak detectors. (Can measure Humidity and
Detect different parameters).
1. Conduct an experiment to measure Relative Humidity using Hygrometer
a) Identifying different Hygrometers. Place the meter in the environment where the humidity
Measurement is to be measured
b) Observe the Changing humidity
2. Study of smoke sensor characteristics
a) Identify different Smoke sensors
b) Study the characteristics
3. Study of leak detector and its procedures
a) Identify different Leak detectors
4. Study of Audio sensor characteristics
a) Identify different Audio sensors
UNIT-4Measurement of pH & Conductivity (Analyze and observe the response of various fluids
by pH and Conductivity)
1. Conduct an experiment to measure pH of the given sample using Analog pH Meter
481
a) Identify the pH meter & Place it in the solution
b) Measure the pH of the given sample
2. Conduct an experiment to measure pH of the given sample using Digital pH Meter
a) Identify the pH meter & Place it in the solution
b) Measure the pH of the given sample
3. Conduct an experiment to measure conductivity of the given sample
a) Place the conductivity meter in the Sample solution
b) Measure the Conductivity of a given solution
Reference Books
1. Instrumentation Devices & Systems – Rangan , Mani & Sharma

2. Transducers & Instrumentation - D V S Murthy
3. Introduction to Measurements & instrumentation – Arun K Ghosh
4. Electrical & Electronic Measurements – A K Sahney
5. Instrumentation handbook – Liptak
1. www.nptel.ac.in
1. Do Market survey on List of Electronic components available in the market and collect the following
information like name of the electronic component, specifications, Price etc. The student should submit
a handwritten report. Documents have to be maintained as a record.
2. Take Quiz tests / assignments in Semiconductor device experiments.Documentshave to be
3. Do power point presentations on Speed,Density, Viscosity, pH, Conductivity, Hygrometer,and
Sensors& Detectors.Documents have to be maintained as a record.
482
Engineering Tools
Ethics
Basic knowledge
Communication
Lifelong learning

Linked


PO
10
CO1 2 2 2 1,3,10
CO2 2 2 2 1,2,10
CO3 2 2 2 2 2 1,2,3,7,10
CO4 2 2 2 2 2 1,3,4,8,10
Internal Evaluation
Test Units Marks

Mid Sem 1 1, 2 20
Mid Sem 2 3,4 20

experiments(10)
Total 60
483
DEIE IV semester Mid Semester-I Examination

Course Name: Industrial Instrumentation lab Practice Max.Marks:20

(i)Answer any One of the following Questions. 1x20=20

a) Identify Tacho generator
c) measure the speed of a rotating device
b) Measure the viscosity
b) Measure the Density
484
State Board of Technical Education and Training,Telangana
DEIE IV semester Mid Semester-II Examination


a) Identifyingdifferent Hygrometers Place it in where the humidity measurement is required
5. Conduct an experiment to measure PH of the given sample using Analog PH Meter
a) Identify the PH meter & Place it in the solution
b) Measure the PH
6. Conduct an experiment to measure PH of the given sample using Digital PH Meter
b) Measure the PH

485
DEIE IV Semester
Corse Code: 18EI-407P Duration:2 hours



c) measure the speed of a rotating device
b) Measure the viscosity
b) Measure the Density
a) Identifying different Hygrometers Place it in where the humidity measurement is required
486
9. Conduct an experiment to measure PH of the given sample using Analog PH Meter
b) Measure the PH
10. Conduct an experiment to measure PH of the given sample using Digital PH Meter
b) Measure the PH
Microcontroller Programming lab Practice
Course Title : Microcontroller Programming lab Course Code 18EI-408P
487
Practice
Semester IV Course Group Practical

Periods(L:T:P)

Periods : :45
Pre requisites
This course requires the basic skills of Handling digital circuits and computer.
U Unit name Periods Marks for SEE Marks %Weightage

nit
N weightage
o Handli Man Prec
ng ipula ision
tion
1 Programs related to data

transfer instructions 12 8 2 0 10 25
2 Programs related to
15 0 12 0 10 30
arithmetic and logical group
3 Application programs 15 2 2 4 15 20
4 Implement Delays and Timers

3 2 4 4 5 25
Total 45 12 20 8 40 100
Course outcomes
488
PO Hours
CO1 Execute programs for data manipulation.

9
CO2 Execute programs to perform and arithmetic and

15
logical functions.
CO3 Write and execute programs to meet a requirement.. 9
CO4 Implement time delays by writing programs.

12
45
Course Contents
I. Programs related to data transfer instructions.
a. Write an assembly language program (ALP) to move the data from one register to another.
b. Write an ALP to move the data from internal RAM one location to another.
c. Write an ALP to move the data from external RAM one location to another.
d. Write an ALP to move the data from external RAM internal RAM and vice versa.
e. Write an ALP to exchange the data between two registers.
f. Write an ALP to exchange the data between two i-RAM locations.
g. Write an ALP to exchange the data between two i-RAM locations.
II. Programs related to arithmetic and logical group
1. Programs on arithmetic instructions.

g. Write an ALP to add two binary numbers in i-RAM location.
h. Write an ALP to add two binary numbers in OFF chip-RAM location.
i. Write an ALP to add two decimal numbers in OFF chip-RAM location.
j. Write an ALP to add two decimal numbers in OFF chip-RAM location and store the carry in any reg.
k. Write an ALP to add two 16-bit binary numbers in i-RAM location.
l. Write an ALP to subtract two binary numbers in registers and store the diff. In i-RAM.
m. Write an ALP to multiply two binary numbers.
n. Write an ALP to divide two binary numbers.
2. Programs on logical instructions.

a. Write an ALP to mask the higher order nibble.
b. Write an ALP to mask the lower order nibble.
c. Write an ALP to mask any one bit only of the binary number.
489
d. Write an ALP to rotate a number left twice with carry set.
e. Write an ALP to rotate a number right twice with carry reset.
f. Write an ALP to find the 1’s complement of a given number.
g. Write an ALP to find the 2’s complement of a given number.
III. Programs to perform function on block data using counters and conditions.
a. Write an ALP to transfer a block of data from internal RAM to external RAM with overlap.
b. Write an ALP to transfer a block of datafrom external RAM to internal RAM without overlap.
c. Write an ALP to add block of data present in internal RAM. Store the sum and carry in registers.
d. Write an ALP to add block of decimal numbers present in internal RAM. Store the sum and carry in
registers.
e. Write an ALP to test if a given number is present in the block of data.
f. Write an ALP to identify the even numbers from a block of given data.
g. Write an ALP to identify the odd numbers from a block of given data.
h. Write an ALP to find the largest number from a block of data.
i. Write an ALP to find the smallest number from a block of data.
j. Write an ALP to arrange a block of data in ascending order.
k. Write an ALP to arrange a block of data in descending order.
IV. Programs to Counters, Timers and delays.
a. Implement a HEX up/down counter - (Program should check value @R0=0X30, if 0X30=0 then up
counter else down counter)
b. Implement BCD(00-99) up/down counter - (Program should check value @R0=0X30, if 0X30=0 then up
counter else down counter)
c. Write a program in assembly language to produce required time delay a) by Using instructions only b)
by Using Timers
d. Write a program in assembly language to verify Logical or Delay loop using Call and return
instructions
Course Title : Process Control Lab Practice Course Code 18EI-409P
490
Semester IV Course Group :Practical
Teaching Scheme in
15:0:30 Credits : 1.5
Periods(L:T:P)
Methodology Lecture + Practical Total Periods : :45 periods
Process Control Lab Practice
Pre requisites
This course requires the basic knowledge of temperature, flow, level, pressure controllers and I to P & P to I
converters.
Course Outcomes
CO1 : Analyze and Evaluate the Temperature control using P ,PI,PID & EPID Controller
CO2 : Analyze and Evaluate the Flow control using P ,PI & PID Controller
Analyze , Observe and Record the Level control using P ,PI & PID Controller and closed loop
CO3 :
level control characteristics
Analyze , Observe and Record the Pressure control using P ,PI & PID Controller and open &
CO4 :
closed loop level control characteristics
CO5 : Analyze , Observe and Record the I to P, P to I converters performance characteristics
491
1. Temperature controller 12
2. Flow controller 8
3. Level controller 8
4 Pressure controller 11
5 I to P, P to I converters 6
45
Course Contents
1. Temperature controller Duration: 12Periods(L:3– P:9)
Conduct an experiment:
a) To control Temperature using P & PI

b) To control Temperature using PID.
c) To control Temperature in P& PI mode using EPID
d) To control Temperature in PID mode using EPID
2. Flow Controller Duration: 8Periods(L:2– P:6)
a) To control Flow using P & PI

b) To control Flow using PID
3. Level controller Duration: 8Periods(L:2– P:6)
a) To control Level using P&PI
b) To control Level using PID.
c) To draw the performance characteristics of Closed loop Level control
4. Pressure controller Duration: 11Periods(L:2– P:9)
a) To control Pressure using P& PI
492
b) To control Pressure using PID.
c) To draw the performance characteristics of Open loop Pressure Control
d) To draw the performance characteristics of Closed loop Pressure control
5. I to P, P to I Converters Duration: 6Periods(L:2– P:4)
a) To plot the performance characteristics of I / P converter

b) To plot the performance characteristics of P/I converter.
1. Automatic process control by Donald.P.Eckmann
2. Instrument Engineers Hand book by Liptak, Volume II
3. Instrument Technology by B.E.Jones, Volume I, II, III
4. Process Analysis & Control by Coughnour.
5. Process control instrumentation technology by Curtis .D.Johnson Seventh edition
2. Visit nearby Industry to familiarize with automation using plc/scada ex: Power stations, Cement, paper,
Chemical Industries
493
Engineering Tools
Basic knowledge
Communication
Lifelong learning
Ethics
Linked PO

CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CO1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1,2,3,4,8,10
CO2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1,2,3,4,8,10
CO3 2 2 2 2 2 2 1,2,3,4,810
CO4 2 2 2 2 2 2 1,2,3,4,810
CO5 2 2 2 2 2 2 1,2,3,4,8,10
Internal Evaluation
Test Units Marks
Mid Sem 1 1, 2 and 3 20
Mid Sem 2 4,5 20

experiments (10)
Total 60
Semester Mid-1 Examination Model Question paper

494
DEIE IV Semester Practical Examination
Course Code: 18EI-409P Duration:1 hour
Course Name: Process Control Lab Practice Max.Marks:20
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Conduct an experiment to Control the Temperature using P & PI controller

2. Conduct an experiment to Control Temperature using PID controller.
3. Conduct an experiment to Control Temperature in P& PI mode using EPID controller
4. Conduct an experiment to Control Temperature in PID mode using EPID controller
5. Conduct an experiment to Control Flow using P & PI controller

495
Course Code: 18EI-409P Duration:1 hour
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Conduct an experiment to Control Flow using PID controller

2. Conduct an experiment to Control Level using P&PI controller
3. Conduct an experiment to Control Level using PID controller
4. Draw the performance characteristics of Closed loop Level control controller
5. Conduct an experiment to Control Pressure using P& PI controller
496
Course Code: 18EI-409P Duration:2 hours
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Conduct an experiment to Control the Temperature using P & PI controller

2. Conduct an experiment to Control Temperature using PID controller.
3. Conduct an experiment to Control Temperature in P& PI mode using EPID controller
4. Conduct an experiment to Control Temperature in PID mode using EPID controller
5. Conduct an experiment to Control Flow using P & PI controller
6. Conduct an experiment to Control Flow using PID controller
7. Conduct an experiment to Control Level using P&PI controller
8. Conduct an experiment to Control Level using PID controller
9. Draw the performance characteristics of Closed loop Level control controller
10. Conduct an experiment to Control Pressure using P& PI controller
11. Conduct an experiment to Control Pressure using PID controller
12. Draw the performance characteristics of Open loop Pressure Control
13. Draw the performance characteristics of Closed loop Pressure control
14. Plot the performance characteristics of I / P converter
15. Plot the performance characteristics of P / I converter.
Advanced Communication Skills and Life Skills
497
Course Title Advanced Communication Skills and Course Code 18 EI- 410 P
Life Skills
Semester IV Course Group Foundation
Teaching 15:0:30 Credits 1.5

Scheme in
Periods- L:T:P
Methodology Lecture + Practical Total Contact 45 Periods

Hours (3 Periods per
Week)
Rationale:
This course is designed to impart writing skills and employability skills to the students of diploma
which will help them in obtaining and maintaining the employment.
Prerequisites:
This course requires the basic knowledge of vocabulary, grammar and four language learning
skills, viz. Listening, Speaking, Reading and Writing.
Course Outcomes:
Modules At the end of the course the students will have the ability
to:
Prepare a presentation.
Use presentation aids effectively.
Develop public speaking skills.
Presentation Skills Learn to make PowerPoint Presentations effectively.
Present a Paper using appropriate body language.
Learn kinds of reports.
Learn the format of a report.
Organise ideas.
Writing Reports Develop essential vocabulary useful to write scientific and
technical reports.
Learn the techniques to face an interview.
Learn the etiquette to communicate with employers.
Learn the dos and don’ts of an interview.
Interview Skills Learn the frequently asked questions in interviews.
Use appropriate body language.
Learn to face interviews telephonically.
Gain the confidence to face an interview by attending
mock interview.
498
Learn the dos and don’ts of a Group Discussion.
Participate in a Group Discussion in a healthy manner.
Group Discussion Use effective non-verbal communication.
Use appropriate phrases and expressions useful in a group
discussion.
Learn workplace etiquette.

Identify the knowledge, skills and attributes useful at
Workplace Awareness workplace.
Build strong workplace relationships.
Learn professional ethics.
Understand gender equality at the workplace
Develop a sense of responsibility towards the society.
Learn various writing formats useful at workplace.

Develop an ability to apply technical information in
documentation.
Revise and edit written documents effectively.
Develop corresponding skills - learn the kinds of business
letters - the format of a business letter.
Learn effective e-mail writing skills.
Learn Business Memos.
Writing Skills Useful at Workplace
Learn Notes and Narratives.
Learn Forms and Applications.
Prepare templates for different purposes.
Prepare an agenda of a meeting.
Prepare the minutes of a meeting.
Prepare Notices / Circulars for various purposes.
Prepare Press release.
CO-PO Matrix
499
CO 1 Making effective presentations R/U/A 1, 2, 3,4, 5,6,7,8,9,10
CO 2 Writing scientific and technical reports R/U/A 1,2,3,4, 5,6,7,8,9,10
CO 3 Learn to face oral and telephonic R/U/A 1,2,3,4, 7,9,
interviews
CO 4 Learn to face group discussion R/U/A 1,2,3,7,8,9
CO 5 Learn to write various formats useful R/U/A 1,2,3,5,7,8,9,10
at workplace
CO6 Learn workplace etiquette and ethics R/U/A 1,2,3,7,8,9,10
Course Contents:
I. Presentation Skills Duration: 6 periods

II. Writing Reports Duration: 9 periods
III. Interview Skills Duration: 9 periods
IV. Group Discussion Duration: 6 periods
V. Workplace Awareness Duration: 6 periods
VI. Writing Skills Useful at Workplace Duration: 9 periods
 Paper Presentations
 Seminars
 Mock Interviews
 Telephonic Interviews
 Group Discussions
 Role Plays
 Creating advertisements
 Five-minute activities
 Creating a model of workplace
500
Evaluation Pattern:
III. Continuous Internal Examination: 60 Marks
d. Mid Sem - I 20 marks

Syllabus:
i. Presentation Skills
ii. Writing Reports
e. Mid Sem – II: 20 Marks

Syllabus:
i. Interview Skills
ii. Group Discussion
f. Internal assessment: 20 marks
iv. Seminars: 10 marks

v. Assignments: 5 marks
vi. Lab record submission: 5 marks
IV. Semester End Examination : 40 Marks
a. Write an essay on a given topic or participate in an activity: 15 Marks

b. Interview or Group Discussion: 15 Marks
c. Viva Voce 10 marks
References:
Adair, John. Effective Communication. London: Pan Macmillan Ltd., 2003.
Ajmani, J. C. Good English: Getting it Right. New Delhi: Rupa Publications, 2012.
Amos, Julie-Ann. Handling Tough Job Interviews. Mumbai: Jaico Publishing, 2004.
Collins, Patrick. Speak with Power and Confidence. New York: Sterling, 2009.
Fensterheim, Herbert and Jean Baer. Don't Say Yes When You Want To Say No. New York:
D
Raman, Meenakshi & Sangeeta Sharma. Technical Communication: Principles and
Practice. Second Edition. New Delhi: Oxford University Press, 2011
E-Learning Resources:
http://www.dailywritingtips.com/
http://www.englishdaily626.com/c-errors.php
http://www.owlnet.rice.edu/~cainproj/
501
http://www.thehumorsource.com/
http://www.indiabix.com/group-discussion/topics-with-answers/
http://networketiquette.net/
https://public.wsu.edu/~brians/errors
http://www.bbc.co.uk/worldservice/learningenglish/radio/specials/15

FOURTH SEMESTER COMMON-410P
ADVANCED COMMUNICATION SKILLS AND LIFE SKILLS
MID SEM - I
Part – A 10 marks
502
Instruction: Answer any one of the following questions.
1. Write the guidelines for preparing a PowerPoint presentation.

2. How do you prepare yourself for presenting a technical paper?
3. Mention a few presentation aids and how do you use them effectively?
Part – B 10 marks
4. Write the format of a report and describe it.

5. Write a report on the accident you have seen recently.
6. Give the outline of a project report and describe it.

FOURTH SEMESTER COMMON-410P
MID SEM - II
Part – A 10 marks
503
1. What are the dos and don’ts for a formal interview?

2. What at least ten frequently asked questions in a formal interview?
3. How do you prepare for a telephonic interview?
Part – B 10 marks
4. What are the dos and don’ts of a group discussion?

5. Mention some phrases and expressions commonly used in a group discussion.
6. Write a short paragraph on the steps you take while participating in a group discussion.

FOURTH SEMESTER 18 COMMON-410P
SEMESTER END EXAM
504
Part – A 10 marks
Instruction: Pick any one question from the given lot.

1. Prepare the outline of a project report and describe it.
2. Write the guidelines for preparing the slides of a PowerPoint presentation.
3. Write the minutes of the meeting conducted at the Principal’s chamber to conduct the
annual day celebrations. Prepare the agenda of the annual day celebrations.
4. Describe the workplace etiquette.
5. Prepare a press note for the ‘Job Mela’ which is going to be conducted at your institute.
Part – B 15 marks
6. Interview / Group Discussion

Part – C 15 marks
7. Viva Voce

Unsatisfactory Developing Satisfactory Good Excellent
1mark 2marks 3marks 4marks 5marks
Note:
505
(2) As a record of the activity at least Rubric sheet for each student For every activity at least

Unsatisfactor Studen
Dimensio Developing Satisfactory Good Excellent
y t
n
1 2 3 4 5 Score
Collects Collect
Collects Collects a
Does not very much
some basic great deal
collect limited information
Collectio information of
any information ; Ex:
n ; information
information ; but very 4
of data most refer ;
relating to the some relate limited
to all refer to
topic to relate
the topic the topic
the topic to the topic
Does not
Performs Performs
Fulfill perform
very Performs Performs all
team’s any duties
little duties very nearly all duties of 5
roles assigned to
but little duties duties assigned
& duties the
Unreliable. team roles
team role
Always
Usually
does
Rarely does does
Always relies the
the the Normally
Shares on assigned
assigned assigned does the
work others to do work 3
work; often work; assigned
equally the without
needs rarely work
work having to
reminding needs
be
reminding
reminded
Usually
Is always does Talks good;
Listen to talking; most of the but never Listens, but Listens and
other never allows talking; show sometimes speaks a
2
Team anyone else rarely interest talk too fair
mates to allows in listening much amount
speak others others
to speak

Proficient
3 points 2 points 1 point 0 points
506
Research Accurately researched Recorded Misinterpreted Recorded __/3
and Note a variety of information relevant statements, information
Taking sources recorded and information graphics and from four or
interpreted significant from multiple questions and less resources,
facts, meaningful sources of failed to did not find
graphics, and information identify graphics and
evaluated alternative evaluated and relevant ignored
points of view. synthesized arguments. alternative
information.
planning
the slide presentation The thumbnail The thumbnail There a very
structure with sketches on sketches on few thumbnail
thumbnail sketches of the topic the topic are sketches on
each slide including: include titles not in a logical the topic and
title of slide, text, and text for sequence and do not provide
background color, each slide have an overview of
placement & size of and are in incomplete the
graphic, fonts - color, sequential information. presentation.
size, type for text and order.
headings. All slides
are numbered, and
there is a logical
sequence to the
presentation.
presents the overall introduction is introduction introduction
topic and draws the clear and shows some does not orient
audience into the coherent and structure but the audience to
presentation with relates to the does not what will follow.
compelling questions topic. create a strong
or by relating to the sense of what The
audience's interests or is to follow. sequencing is
goals. May be overly unclear and
detailed or does not
incomplete and appear
is somewhat interesting or
appealing to relevant to the
the audience. audience.

sense of
507
information. purpose.
The project includes Includes little
motivating questions Includes Includes some persuasive
and advanced persuasive persuasive information and
organizers. The information information only one or two
project gives the from reliable with few facts. facts about the
audience a clear sources. topic.
sense of the main Some of the
idea. information Information is
may not seem incomplete, out
Information is to fit. of date and/or
accurate, current and incorrect.
comes mainly from * Sources used
primary sources. appear Sequencing of
unreliable. ideas is
unclear.
The fonts are easy to Sometimes Overall The text is
read and point size the fonts are readability is extremely
varies appropriately for easy to read, difficult with difficult to read
headings and text. but in a few lengthy with long
places the paragraphs, blocks of text
Use of italics, bold, use of fonts, too many and small point
and indentations italics, bold, different fonts, size of fonts,
enhances readability. long dark or busy inappropriate
paragraphs, background, contrasting
Text is appropriate in color or busy overuse of colors, poor
length for the target background bold or lack of use of
audience and to the detracts and appropriate headings,
point. does not indentations of subheadings,
enhance text. indentations, or
The background and readability. bold formatting.
colors enhance the
readability of text.
contributes to the horizontal and structure, but confusing, and
overall message with vertical white appears does not use
appropriate use of space cluttered and spacing,
headings, appropriately. busy or headings and
subheadings and distracting with subheadings to
white space. large gaps of enhance the
uses a
distracting
background.
Graphics, 3 points 2 points 1 point 0 points
508
and/or The graphics, and/or The Some of the The graphics, , ___/3
Animation animation assist in graphics, /and graphics, , and/or
theme and enhance visually depict animations unrelated to the
understanding of material and seem content.
concept, ideas and assist the unrelated to
relationships. audience in the Graphics do
understanding topic/theme not enhance
Original images are the flow of and do not understanding
created using proper information or enhance the of the content,
size and resolution, content. overall or are
and all images concepts. distracting
enhance the content. Original decorations
images are Most images that create a
There is a consistent used. are clip art or busy feeling
visual theme. recycled from and detract
Images are the internet. from the
proper size, content.
resolution. Images are too
large/small in
size.
Images are
poorly cropped
or the
color/resolution
is fuzzy.
Skills
errors) reader, and
major editing
and revision is
required.
(more than five

errors)

509
C-18 DEIE IV SEMESTER
1. Visit the College library and prepare a list of at least 10 text books available in the library with author name
and publishing company for each subject of the semester. The student should submit a handwritten report.
(POs 8, 9, 10)
2. Do Market survey on List of Various Linear ICs and digital ICs available in the market and collect
the information like pin diagrams, specifications, Price etc. The student should submit a
handwritten report. Documents have to be maintained as a record. (POs 8, 9)
3. To Study using internet about the applications of various Linear ICs which are useful to the society,
design and demonstrate their working. Prepare a detailed report of their working and uses.
Documents have to be maintained as a record. (POs 5, 8, 9, 10)
4. To Study using internet about the applications of various Digital ICs which are useful to the
society, design and demonstrate their working. Prepare a detailed report of their working and uses.
Documents have to be maintained as a record. (POs 5, 8, 9, 10)
5. To Study using internet about the various equipment like Analog Instruments and Digital
Instruments available in the Lab and prepare a detailed report of their working and uses. Documents
have to be maintained as a record. (POs 8, 9, 10)
6. To Study using internet about the various equipment like Analog Instruments and Digital
Instruments available in the Lab and prepare a detailed report of their working and uses. Documents
7. To Study using internet about various equipment like function generators, CROs and various test
instruments available in the Lab and prepare a detailed report of their working and uses. Documents
8. To Study using internet about transducers like tacho generators and tacho meters / Speedo meters
available in the market and how they are calibrated in KMPH / RPM. The student should submit a
handwritten report. Documents have to be maintained as a record. (POs 8, 9, 10)
9. To Study using internet about transducers used for measurement of density. The student should
submit a handwritten report. Documents have to be maintained as a record. (POs 8, 9, 10)
10. To Study using internet about transducers used for measurement of viscosity. The student should
11. To Study using internet about transducers used for measurement of humidity. The student should
510
12. To Study using internet about various proximity sensors. The student should submit a handwritten
report. Documents have to be maintained as a record. (POs 8, 9, 10)
13. To Study using internet about various motion detection sensors. The student should submit a
handwritten report. Documents have to be maintained as a record. (POs 8, 9, 10)
14. Analyze the connections in the UPS available in the Institution. Documents have to be maintained
as a record. (POs 4, 8, 9)
15. Give Seminars on the topics of the concerned Course as allotted by the staff. Documents have to be
maintained as a record. (POs 8, 9)
16. Participate in Quiz in Concerned subjects. Documents have to be maintained as a record.

(POs 8)
17. Write assignments in Concerned subjects.. Documents have to be maintained as a record.

(POs 8, 9)
18. Prepare a power point presentation with full details about the Electronic components used in the
concerned subject experiments. Documents have to be maintained as a record.
(POs 8, 9)
19. Prepare a power point presentation with full details about the Digital ICs used in the concerned
subject experiments. Documents have to be maintained as a record.
(POs 8, 9)
20. Visit YouTube or any other sites on current topics in Digital electronics experiments.
Listen to the lectures and submit a handwritten report and a soft copy (CD/DVD).
(POs 8, 9, 10)
21. Design a mini project useful to the society based on the topics relevant to electronic circuits and
they have to be demonstrated. Student can search 5 min. /10 min. projects in you tube for this
purpose. (POs 5, 8, 9, 10)
22. Design a mini project useful to the society based on the topics relevant to Digital electronics and
they have to be demonstrated. Student can search 5 min. /10 min. projects in you tube for this
purpose. (POs 5, 8, 9, 10)
23. Visit YouTube or any other sites to study the manufacturing of various sensors and transducers like
LVDT, RVDT and Potentiometers etc. Submit a handwritten report.
(POs 8, 9, 10)
Sight glass, IR sensors, etc. Submit a handwritten report.
(POs 8, 9, 10)
Thermo couple, Thermistor, RTD etc. Submit a handwritten report.
(POs 8, 9, 10)
Bourdon tubes, Bellows Dead weight tester etc. Submit a handwritten report. (POs 8, 9, 10)
511
Orifice, Venturi tube, Rota meter, Electromagnetic flow meter etc. Submit a handwritten report.
(POs 8, 9, 10)
28. Design a mini project useful to the society based on the topics relevant to sensors and transducers
Thermistor, RTD, Float etc. and they have to be demonstrated. Student can search 5 min. / 10 min.
projects in you tube for this purpose. (POs 5, 8, 9, 10)
29. Do Market survey on commercially available micro processors microcontrollers in the market and collect
the following information like name specifications, Price etc. The student should submit a handwritten report.
29. Give a power point presentation on 8051 Microcontroller architecture and pins description. (POs 8,
9)
30. Visit YouTube or any other sites for Aurdiuno based eexperiments / mini projects interfacing
Sensors/Actuators as per your choice with Arduino and Breadboard.
(POs 8, 9)
512
V SEMESTER
513
Course Course Name Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme
Code
Instruction Total Credits Continuous internal Semester end examination
periods Periods evaluation
per per
week semest
L T P Mid Mid Internal Max marks Total Min
er
Sem1 Sem2 Evaluation Min marks Marks marks for
passing
including
internal
1 Industrial Management & 14
501F Entrepreneur Ship 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 100 35
2 Instrumentation in Process 14 35
502C Industries 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 100
3 Industrial Automation 14 35
503C 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 100
4 Elective - 1 14 35
504E 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 100
5 Elective - 2
505E 14 35
3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 100
6 MATLAB and Virtual

506P Instrumentation lab 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100
50
Practice
7 Industrial Automation Lab 2 45 20 50
507P practice 1 0 1.5 20 20 20 40 100
8 Analytical & Bio Medical

508P Instrumentation lab 1 0
2 45
1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100
50
Practice
9 Programming in ‘C’ Lab
509P practice 1 0
2 45
1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100
50
10 2 45 20
Project Work 1 0 1.5 20 20 20 40 100
510P
Skill Up gradation 0 0 7 105 2.5 0 0 Rubrics -- -
17 25 440
TOTAL 20 5 630 200 200 200 400 190 1000
S No. COURSE CODE COURSE NAME

18EI504E (A) Electronic Measuring Instruments
1 ELECTIVE - 1
18EI504E (B) Digital Circuit Design using Verilog
18EI505E (A) Analytical & Biomedical instrumentation
2 ELECTIVE - 2
18EI505E (B) Communication Engineering
514
INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT & ENTREPRENEURSHIP
Course Title : Industrial Management Course Code : 18EI-501F
Course Group : Foundation
& Entrepreneurship Credits :3
Semester :V Total Contact Periods : 60 Periods
Teaching Scheme in : 45:15:0 SEE : 40 Marks
Periods (L:T:P) (Semester End Examination)
Methodology : Lecture + Tutorial
CIE : 60 Marks
(Continuous Internal Evaluation)
This course is common for DCME, DEEE, DECE & DFWT
Pre requisites
This course requires the basic knowledge of management and Entrepreneur skills.
Course Outcomes
CO1 To become aware of business and management concepts.
CO2 Analyze the various rules and regulations required for the planning of factory and its staff.
CO3 Analyse balance sheet and various budget issues.
CO4 Analyse the material required and its management economically.
CO5 Analyze the quality management and know the analysis procedure for quality.
CO6 Able to establish a small scale industry by knowing the entrepreneur skills.
Blue Print of Marks for SEE
515
No
R U A
1 Overview of Business,
Management Process
8
and Organization
Management
Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
2 Human resource
Management 10
3 Finance Management
10 Q4
Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
4 Material Management
10
5 Project Management Q9(b), Q13(b),

10 Q5,Q6
Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Q3
6 Entrepreneurship and Q10(b), Q14(b),
12 Q7,Q8
Supporting Institutions Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)
Total 60 8 8 8
Course Content
UNIT 1 - Overview of Business, Management Process and Organization Management

Duration 8 (L: 6 T:2)
Business - types of business in various sectors- service, manufacturing & trade- Industrial sectors – Engineering,
process, Textile, Chemical, Agro industries – Globalization and effect of globalization – advantages and
Disadvantages- Intellectual Property Rights (I.P.R.)- Concept of management – levels of management –
Scientific management – by FW Taylor – Principles of management- functions of management – Administration
– management, Organization – types of organization( line, line & staff, staff & project) – Departmentation –
Classification (centralized, decentralized, Authority, Responsibility, and span of control – Forms of Ownership –
Proprietorship – Partnership – Joint stock – Co-operative society and Government sectors.
UNIT 2 - Human resource Management Duration 10 (L: 7.5 T: 2.5)

Personal Management – Staffing – Introduction to HR planning – Recruitment procedures – Types of Trainings
–Personal training – skill development training – Leaderships – types – Motivation – Maslow’s theory – Causes
of accidents – safety precautions – Indian Factory Act – Workmen’s compensation Act – Industrial disputes Act-
ESI Act.
516
UNIT 3 - Finance Management Duration 10 (L: 7.5 T: 2.5)
Introduction – Objectives of Financial Management – Types of capitals – sources of raising capital – Types of
budgets – production budgets – labour budgets – Concept of Profit loss Account – Concept of balance sheet –
proforma – types of taxes – brief concepts of – Income Tax, GST.
UNIT 4 - Material Management Duration 10 (L: 7.5 T: 2.5)

Inventory Management – objectives of Inventory Management – ABC Analysis – Economic order Quality –
Purchasing – Objectives of purchasing – Functions – Procedures – Material Management.
UNIT 5 - Project Management Duration 10 (L: 7.5 T: 2.5)

Introduction – CPM & PERT – concept of Break event Analysis – quality system - Definition of Quality ,
concept of Quality , Quality policy, Quality control, Quality Circle, Quality Assurance, Introduction to TQM-
Kaizen 5’s and 6 sigma concepts, ISO 9000 series standards- Merits and drawbacks of ISO series standards.
UNIT 6- Entrepreneurship and Supporting Institutions Duration 12 (L: 9 T: 3)

Qualities of entrepreneur-Manager- entrepreneur and technical entrepreneur-Advantages of being an
entrepreneur-Functions of entrepreneur-Types of entrepreneur and their meaning- Role of entrepreneurship in
economy development-Barriers to entrepreneurship-Mention different types of industries-Definitions of small
scale industry-Features of SSI-Mention the objectives of developing SSIs-Scope of SSI in terms of various
activities- Merits of SSIs-Explain the important steps involved in starting an SSI-Definition of startup company-
start up development basis-state level and national level sources of information-various central Government
institutions and their functions(like NSIC,SIDO,SISI and SSIB)- Telangana State industry policy-Demographic
merits of Telangana state to set up SSIs-Names of state level institutions and their functions(Like
SSIDC,DIC,APIITCO)-Banks that support SSIs like SIDBI,APSFC-Thrust areas and core sector as per
Telangana state industry policy-Classification of the projects as per TSIP-Special assistance schemes for women
and SC/ST entrepreneur -Features of TS-IPASS.
Recommended Books
1. Industrial Engg &Management by Dr. O.P. Khanna - Dhanpath Rai & sons New Delhi
2. Business Administration &Management Dr. S.C. Saxena & W.H. Newman &E.Kirby Warren- Sahitya
Bhavan Agra
3. The process of Management by Andrew R. McGill - Prentice Hall
4. Industrial Management by Rustom S. Davar - Khanna Publication
5. Total Quality Management, S Raja Ram, M Shivashankar
6. Industrial management and organizational behaviour, K.K.Ahuja
1. http:jiem.org/index.php/jiem
2. https://dipp.gov.in
3. www.worldwidelearn.com/online-education-guide/business/industrial-management-major.html
517
1.1 Define Business
1.2 State the Types of Business ( Service, Manufacturing, Trade)
1.3 Explain about the various industrial sectors like engineering, process, textile, Agro based industries.
1.4 State the need for Globalization.
1.5 List the Advantages & Disadvantages of globalization w.r.t. India.
1.6 Explain the importance of Intellectual Property Rights (I.P.R.)
1.6 Define Management.
1.7 Explain the concept of management
1.8 Explain the Different Levels of management
1.9 Explain Administration & management
1.10 State the principles of scientific management by F.W.Taylor
1.11 State the principles of Management by Henry Fayol (14 principles)
1.12 List the Functions of Management
i) Planning ii) Organizing iii) Directing iv) Controlling
1.13 Define Organization
1.14 List the Types of organization: a) Line b) Line & staff c) Functional d) Project
1.15 Explain the four types of organization.
1.16 Define departmentalization.
1.17 Explain the following types of departmentalizations
i) Centralized & Decentralized ii) Authority & Responsibility iii) span of Control
1.18 Explain the Forms of ownership
i) Proprietorship ii) Partnership iii) Joint stock iv) Co-operative Society v) Govt. Sector
2.1 Define Personal Management.

2.2 Explain the functions of Personal Management
2.3 Define Staffing.
2.4 State the importance of HR Planning.
2.5 Explain the various Recruitment Procedures.
2.6 Explain the need for Training &Development.
2.7 State the various types of training procedures (Induction, Skill Enhancement etc)
2.8 State the different types of Leaderships.
2.9 Explain the Maslow’s Theory of Motivation.
2.10 Explain the Causes of accident and the Safety precautions to be followed.
2.11 Explain the importance of various Acts – Indian Factory Act, ESI Act, Workmen Compensation Act,
Industrial Dispute Act etc.
518
3.1 State the Objectives of Financial Management.
3.2 State the Functions of Financial Management.
3.3. State the necessity of Capital Generation & Management.
3.4 List the types of Capitals.
3.5 List the Sources of raising Capital.
3.6 Explain the Types of Budgets
i) Production Budget (including Variance Report) ii) Labour Budget.
3.7 Explain Profit& Loss Account (only concepts) .
3.8 Explain the proforma of Balance Sheet.
3.9 Explain GST and Income Tax.
4.1. Define Inventory Management (No Numerical).

4.2 State the objectives of Inventory Management.
4.3 Explain ABC Analysis.
4.4 State Economic Order Quantity.
4.5 Explain the Graphical Representation of Economic Order Quantity.
4.6 State the objectives of Purchasing.
4.7 State the functions of Purchase Department.
4.8 Explain the steps involved in Purchasing.
4.9 State the Modern Techniques of Material Management.
5.1 State the meaning of Project Management.

5.2 Explain the CPM& PERT Techniques of Project Management.
5.3 Distinguish between CPM & PERT techniques.
5.4 Identify the critical path and find the project duration using CPM & PERT techniques (solve
problems on CPM and PERT).
5.5 Explain the concept of Break Even Analysis.
5.6 Define Quality.
5.7 State the concept of Quality.
5.8 Explain the various Quality Management systems.
5.9 Explain the importance of Quality policy, Quality control, Quality Circle.
5.10 State the principles of Quality Assurance.
5.10 State the concepts of TQM, Kaizen 5’s and 6 sigma.
5.12 State the constituents of ISO 9000 series standards.
5.13 Merits and draw backs of ISO 9000 series standards.
519
6.1 Explain the concept of entrepreneurship.
6.2 Mention the qualities of entrepreneur.
6.3 Distinguish between manager-entrepreneur and technical entrepreneur.
6.4 Mention the advantages of being an entrepreneur.
6.5 List the functions of entrepreneur.
6.6 Mention the important types of entrepreneur and their meaning.
6.7 Explain the role of entrepreneurship in economic development.
6.8 Mention the barriers to entrepreneurship.
6.9 Mention different types of Industries.
6.10 Define Small scale industry.
6.11 List the features of SSI.
6.12 Mention the objectives of developing SSIs.
6.13 Explain the scope of SSI in terms of various activities.
6.14 List the merits of SSIs.
6.15 Explain the important steps involved in starting an SSI.
6.16 Define a startup company.
6.17 Explain various start up development phases
6.18 Name the state level and National level sources of information
6.19 Mention the various Central government institutions and their functions
(Like NSIC, SIDO, SISI_SSIB)
6.20 Explain Telangana state industry policy.
6.21 Mention the demographic merits of Telangana state to set up SSIs.
6.22 Mention the names of State level institutions and their functions (like SSIDC, DIC, APITCO)
6.23 List the banks that support SSIs like SIDBI, APSFC.
6.24 List the thrust areas and Core sectors as per Telangana state industry policy.
6.25 Classify the projects as per TSIP.
6.26 Mention Special assistance schemes for women and SC/ST entrepreneurs.
6.27 Mention the features of TS-iPASS.
1. Student visits Library to refer to Management courses.

2. Student observes the solo and partnership business establishments nearby and prepare a report about
520
the activities.
3. Identify any one product, being manufactured in local industry; study the process they are following for
Manufacturing the product, submit handwritten report.
4. Visit a nearby industry, make a report on Plant layout, type of production, quality system is put in
Practice and quality tools they are using in work place.
5. Motivate student to take case study on plant maintenance of nearby industry, observe type of
Maintenance they undertake in their industry.
6. Each student should prepare a detailed project report on selected product.
7. Visit a local industry and list the safety precautions carried out there.
8. Meet a local Entrepreneur and prepare a report on his success story.
9. Quiz.
10. Group discussion.
11. Surprise test.
Execution Mode:
1. Maximum of 5 students in each batch should do any one of the following type activity or similar activity
related to the course and before take up, get it approved from concerned Teacher.
2. Each batch should conduct different activity and no repeating should occur.
3. Submit a brief report on the activity done on 4-6 pages, A4 size hand written paper. Papers should be simple
stapled or tagged. Avoid plastic based files for submitting of reports.
4. Activities can be carried off-class.
5. Assessment shall be made based on quality of activity/presentation/demonstration and report.
Communication
Lifelong learning
Basic knowledge
Engineering Tools
Ethics

Linked
PO
CO PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10
1,2
CO1 2 2 3
CO2 2 2 2 3 3 2 1,2,5,6,7
CO3 2 2 3 3 1,2,9
CO4 2 2 2 3 2 1,2,5,7
CO5 2 3 2 2 1,2,5,10
CO6 2 2 2 3 3 1,2,3,7,10
Internal Evaluation
Test Units Marks
521
Assignments - 5
Seminars - 5
Total 60
No of Marks for
Sl.No Description Level Choice Total Marks
MID SEM-I EXAM

S.No Unit No R U A
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1,2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3,4
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM-II EXAM

S.No Unit No R U A
1 Unit-III 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
522
2 Unit-IV 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)
The length of answer for each question framed in respect of Part-A, B&C shall not exceed
¼ of a page side, 1 page side and 2page sides respectively
No of Marks for
Sl.No Description Level Choice Total Marks

Unit No
R U A
I
Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
II
III
Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
IV Q4
Q9(b), Q13(b),
V Q5,Q6
Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Q3
Q10(b), Q14(b),
VI Q7,Q8
Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION &TRAINING ,TELANGANA

DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS & INSTRUMENTATION ENGG.
SUB CODE: 18EI-501F
MID SEM -I EXAM MODEL PAPER
523
TIME: 1 HR TOTAL MARKS: 20
_________________________________________________________________________________
Important Note: Wherever any question has choice, marks will be allotted only to first attempted question.
No marks will be allotted for extra questions answered
PART – A Marks: 4Q X 1= 04
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions
(2) Each question carries one marks.
1. Define business.
2. Define organization.
3. What are the different types of Leaderships?
4. Define personnel management.
PART - B Marks: 2Q x 3 = 06
(2) Each question carries three marks.
5. (a) State the need for Globalization.
OR
5. (b) Briefly explain Proprietor form of business ownership.
6. (a) Briefly explain the need for Training & Development.
OR
6. (b) What are the Causes of accident in an industry.
PART - C Marks: 2Q x 5= 10
(2) Each question carries five marks.
7. (a) State the principles of Scientific management by F.W.Taylor.
OR
7. (b) Explain the line and staff type of organisation.
8. (a) Explain the Maslow’s Theory of Motivation.
OR
7. (b) Explain various features of Indian Factory Act.
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION &TRAINING, TELANGANA

SUB CODE: 18EI-501F
524
MID SEM -II EXAM MODEL PAPER
TIME: 1 HR TOTAL MARKS: 20
_________________________________________________________________________________
Important Note: Wherever any question has choice, marks will be allotted only to first attempted question.
No marks will be allotted for extra questions answered
(2) Each question carries One marks.
1. List the types of Capitals.

2. Mention any two objectives of financial management.
3. Define inventory management.
4. List any two objectives of purchasing.
PART - B Marks: 2Q x 3 = 06
5. (a) What is the necessity of Capital Generation?
OR
5. (b) Briefly explain Profit & Loss Account.
6. (a) State the Modern Techniques of Material Management.
OR
6. (b) What are the steps involved in Purchasing?
PART - C Marks: 2Q x 5= 10
(2) Each question carries five marks.
7. (a) Explain about production budget.
OR
7. (b) Explain the proforma of balance sheet.
8. (a) Explain ABC analysis.
OR
8. (b) Explain the Graphical Representation of Economic Order Quantity.
18EI-501F
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION &TRAINING, TELANGANA
SUB CODE: 18EI-501F
525
SEMESTER END EXAM MODEL PAPER
TIME: 2 HOURS TOTAL MARKS: 40
________________________________________________________________________________
(2) Each question carries one mark.
1. Define Staffing.
2. List the types of Capitals.
3. State the concept of Quality.
4. List the functions of entrepreneur.
5. What is meant by Project Management?
6. What is meant by Quality Assurance?
7. Define Small scale industry.
8. Define a startup company.
PART - B Marks: 4Qx3=12
Instructions: (1) Answer any Four Questions

9. (a) Write salient features of partnership type of business ownership.
OR
9. (b) Explain briefly the importance of Quality policy.
10. (a) What is meant by GST?
OR
10. (b). Mention the barriers to entrepreneurship.
11. (a) What are the concepts of TQM?
OR
11. (b) Explain the importance of Quality control.
12. (a) Explain briefly the role of entrepreneurship in economic development.
OR
12. (b) Mention the features of TS-iPASS.
PART - C Marks: 4Qx5=20
Instructions: (1) Answer any Four Questions
526
(2) Each question carries five marks
13. (a) Explain the principles of Management by Henry Fayol.
OR
13. (b) Explain the concept of Break Even Analysis.
14. (a) Explain the labour budget.
OR
14. (b) Explain the important steps involved in starting an SSI .
15. (a) Draw a network diagram and find out project duration for the following activities.
Activity 1-2 1-3 1-4 2-6 3-5 4-5 5-6 6-7
Duration 4 2 3 5 1 2 2 7
in days
OR
15. (b) Explain the importance of quality circle.
16. (a) Explain briefly Telangana state industry policy.
OR
16. (b) What are the special assistance schemes provided for women entrepreneurs.
527
INSTRUMENTATION IN PROCESS INDUSTRIES
INSTRUMENTATION IN
Course Title : Course Code 18EI-502C
PROCESS INDUSTRIES
Semester V Course Group CORE
Teaching Scheme in
45:15:0 Credits 3
periods(L:T:P)
Methodology Lecture + Assignments Total Periods 60
Prerequisites
This course requires the basic knowledge of process instrumentation and industrial instrumentation.
Course outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the student shall be able to

CO1 : Determine Analyze and Observe the parameters related to power plant industries.
CO2 : Acquire knowledge to measure various parameters related to petro chemical industries.
CO3 : Determine, Analyze and Observe the measure various parameters related to iron and steel plant.
CO4 : Acquire knowledge to measure various parameters related to paper industry
CO5 : Determine ,Analyze and Observe the measure various parameters related to cement industry
CO6 : Determine, Analyze and Observe the measure various parameters related to textile industry.
528
No
R U A
1 Power Plant Instrumentation 12

Q1 Q9A Q13A
2 Petro Chemical plant Instrumentation 10
3 Iron and Steel Plant Instrumentation 8
Q2 Q10A Q14A
4 Pulp and Paper Plant Instrumentation 10
5 Cement plant Q13B,
Q4 Q5,Q Q9B,Q11
10 Q15A,
Instrumentation 6 A,Q11B
Q15B
Q3
6 Textile industry Q10B,Q1 Q14B,
Q7,Q
10 2A, Q12B Q16A,
Instrumentation. 8
Q16B
Total 60 8 8 8
UNIT 1 –Fundamentals of Electricity Duration: 8 Periods (L: 4.8 –

Course Contents
UNIT1.Power Plant Instrumentation: Duration: 12 Periods (L: 10 –T: 2)
Power generation method-Thermal power plant layout-generation process-Boiler process, P&I diagram-
Measurement of feed water, level, pressure, temperature of boiler-Turbine unit-condenser.
UNIT2.Petro-chemical Plant instrumentation: Duration: 10 Periods (L: 8 –T: 2)

Petro chemical etc.-Crude oil-Distillation column-PI diagram. Plant layout-Process-Units in plant-Thermal
cracking, Fluid catalytic cracking, polymerization. Measurement of pressure, density, flow of centrifugal pump.
UNIT3.Iron and Steel Plant Instrumentation: Duration: 8 Periods (L: 6 –T: 2)

Manufacturing process-Units in ISP-Raw materials-Furnace types-Measurement of molten metal level, pressure,
density of steel.
UNIT4.Pulp and Paper Plant Instrumentation: Duration: 10 Periods (L: 8 –T: 2)

Plant layout-Process of making paper-Raw materials-pulp production-Physical properties of paper-Grades of
paper-Measurement of weight, specific gravity, density, temperature-Control system units.
529
UNIT5. Cement Plant Instrumentation: Duration: 10 Periods (L: 8 –T: 2)
Plant layout-manufacturing process-types of cements- raw materials-working of crushers-level measurement-
lime formation-kiln temperature measurement-working of ESP-clinker kiln process-hardening of cement.
UNIT6.Textile industry instrumentation: Duration: 10 Periods (L: 8 –T: 2)
Plant layout-manufacturing process-types of fibers-raw materials used-properties of fibers. Measurement of
moisture, fiber length, fineness. Yarn strength testing, fiber quality index.
Reference Books
1. Bela G.Liptak: Instrumentation in Process Industries
2. D.M. Consodine: Hand book of applied Instrumentation
3. Austine G.T. Shreeves: Chemical Process Industries.
4. Gill A.B.Power Plant performance
5. Jervis M.J: Power Station Instrumentation
6. J.E.BOOTH-Principles of textile testing -3 edition..
Suggested e-learning References

1. www.nptel.ac.in
2. www.egr.msu.edu
3. www.bme.rutgers.edu
4. www.BMES.org
5. www.Biospace.com
6. www.chromacademy.com
7. www.agilent.com

Chapter 1: Power Plant Instrumentation (PPI)
1.1 Importance of measurements and instrumentation in power plant.

1.2 List various power generation methods.
1.3 Give the principle of power generation in thermal power plant
1.4 Draw the general layout of thermal power plant.
1.5 Explain the process of generation of power based on the layout of thermal power
Plant.
1.6 Give the building blocks of boiler process in thermal power plant.
1.7 Draw the PI diagram of boiler process.
1.8 Explain a method of measurement of feed water flow.
1.9 Explain the measurement of level, pressure and temperature of the boiler
530
1.10 List the safety measures in boiler control.
1.11 Give the interlocks for boiler operation.
1.12 List the turbine trip conditions.
1.13 Explain the working of turbine unit.
1.14 Explain the measurement of speed and Vibration of turbine.
1.15 Explain the working of condenser.
Chapter 2: Petro Chemical plant Instrumentation.(PCPI)
2.1. Draw the general layout of a Petro chemical plant.

2.2. Explain the process based on the layout of petro chemical plant.
2.3. .List any ten important petrochemicals and give their uses.
2.4. .List various units in petro chemical plant.
2.5. .Define the following unit operations
a) Thermal cracking
b) Catalytic cracking
c) Polymerization
d) Alkalization
e) Isomerisation
2.6. Explain the process of thermal cracking.
2.7. Explain the process of fluid catalytic cracking.
2.8 .List the bi products of crude oil.
2.9 .Explain the working of distillation column.
2.10. Draw the PI diagram of distillation column.
2.11. List various physical parameters to be measured in PCP
2.12. Explain the measurement of flow and pressure of petro chemical.
2.13. Explain the measurement of density of petrochemicals.
2.14. Explain the working of centrifugal pump used in PCP.
2.15. List safety measures in handling petrochemicals.
Chapter 3: Iron and Steel Plant Instrumentation (ISPI)
3.1. Draw general layout of iron and steel plant.

3.2. Explain the manufacturing process of iron and steel based on the layout.
3.3. Classify types of steel.
3.4. List various units in ISP
3.5. Explain the preparation of raw materials in ISP
3.6 .List different types of furnaces used in ISP
531
3.7. Explain the working of blast furnace with a diagram
3.8. Explain the process of making raw steel.
3.9. Explain the working of oxygen furnace with a diagram
3.10. Explain the working of electric arc furnace with a diagram
3.11. Explain the measurement of molten metal level using eddy current transducer.
3.12. Explain the measurement of density of steel using radiation methods.
3.13. Explain the measurement of temperature of furnace using pyrometer.
3.14. Explain the measurement of flow of molten metal.
3.15. Explain the measurement of weight and thickness of iron and steel products.
Chapter 4: Pulp and Paper Plant instrumentation (PPPI)

4.1. Draw the general layout of pulp and paper plant.
4.2. Explain the basic process of making the paper based on the layout.
4.3. List the raw materials for making paper.
4.4. List various steps in pulp production
4.5. Explain pulp bleaching.
4.6 .Explain wet end and dry end operations in making paper.
4. 7. List the various grades of paper.
4.8. List the physical properties of paper.
4.9. Explain the measurement of basis weight and specific gravity.
4.10. Explain the measurement of density of paper.
4.11. Explain the working of moisture analyzer.
4.12. Explain the measurement of paper thickness.
4.13 .Explain graphic displays used in PPP
4.14. List the types of alarms used in PPP
4.15. List various control systems units in PPP
Chapter 5.Cement plant instrumentation (CPI)
5.1. Draw the general layout of cement industry.
5.2. Explain the manufacturing process of cement based on Layout.
5.3. List the types of cement.
5.4. Give criteria for selection of site for locating cement plant.
5.5. List the various raw materials used in cement manufacturing.
5.6. List the types of crushers used in cement industry.
5.7. Explain the working of crusher.
5.8. Explain the process of Level measurement in cement industry.
5.9. Explain point level detection in rock crushers.
5.10. Explain how lime is formed from lime stone.
532
5.11. Explain the measurement of temperature in kiln process.
5.12. Explain the working principle of ESP.
5.13. Explain the Clinker Kilning process.
5.14. Explain the hardening of cement.
5.15. List safety measures to be taken in cement plant.
Chapter 6: TEXTILE INDUSTRY INSTRUMENTATION.
6.1. Draw the general layout of textile industry.
6.2. Explain the working of textile industry based on layout.
6.3. Classify various textile fibers.
6.4. List the raw materials used in textile industry.
6.5. Give various units in textile industry.
6.7. Explain measurement of humidity by wet and dry bulb hygrometer..
6.8. Give the effect of moisture regain on fiber properties.
6.9. Define fiber quality index.
6.10. Explain measurement of fiber length by digital fibro graph.
6.11. Explain measurement of fiber fineness using micronaire.
6.12. Explain yarn strength testing.
6.13. List the physical properties of fiber.
6.14. Give the importance of fiber maturity measurements.
6.15. List the objectives of fiber bleaching process.

1. Student visits Library to refer to Manual /books to search relevant material related to industries.
2. Students should collect all process industries data, district wise in telangana and other states
3. Prepare table with names of industries, required raw materials and available raw materials in that area
4. Visit nearby Industry to familiarize with manufacturing process.
5. Familiarize with power plant industry by visiting and understand different processes with machinery.
6. Familiarize with petrochemical industry by visiting and understand different processes with machinery
7. Familiarize with Iron and Steel industry by visiting and understand different processes with machinery
9. Familiarize with Pulp and Paper industry by visiting and understand different processes with machinery
10. Familiarize with Cement industry by visiting and understand different processes with machinery
11. Familiarize with Textile industry by visiting and understand different processes with machinery
12. Quiz/debates/seminars on industries near to your native place & native district by each student.
533
C0-PO Mapping Matrix
Communication
Lifelong learning
Basic knowledge
Engineering Tools
Ethics
Linked PO

10
CO 2 2 2 2 2 2
1,2,6,7,8,10
1
CO 2 2 2 2 2 2
1,2,6,7,8,10
2
CO 2 2 2 2 2 2
1,2,6,7,8,10
3
CO 2 2 2 2 2
1,2,4,5,9
4
CO 2 2 2 2 2
1,2,4,5,9
5
CO 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
1,2,4,5,8,9,10
6
Internal Evaluation

Mid Sem 1 1 and 2 20 Part A 4 Short answer questions
Part B 2 Questions out of 4 Questions
Part C 2 Essay questions out of 4 Questions
Slip Test 1 1 and 2 5 2 Essay Questions out of 3 Questions
Assignment 1 5 Different group assignments of Higher order
534
Questions that develop problem solving skills
Seminars 1 5
Total 60

MID SEM-I EXAM
1 Unit-I 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-II 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM-II EXAM
1 Unit-III 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-IV 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)


Unit No
R U A
I
Q1 Q9(a) Q9(a)
II
III
Q2 Q10(a) Q10(a)
IV Q4
Q5,Q Q9(b), Q9(b),
V
6 Q11(a), Q11(b) Q11(a), Q11(b)
Q3
Q7,Q Q10(b), Q10(b),
VI
8 Q12(a), Q12(b) Q12(a), Q12(b)
535
DEIE- V SEMESTER EXAMINATION
INSTRUMENTATION IN PROCESS INDUSTRIES (18EI-502C)
Time: 1hr. Max Marks: 20
PART –A MARKS: 4X1 =4
Instructions: Answer all the questions. Each question carries ONE mark.
1. List the various power generation methods

2. List the turbine trip conditions
3. List the bi products of crude oil
4. List various physical parameters to be measured in petro chemical plant
PART –B 2X3=6
5. (a) Draw the PI diagram of boiler process
(OR)
5. (b) List the safety measures in boiler control
6. (a) Explain the measurement of density of petro chemicals
(OR)
6. (b) List the various units in petrochemical plant
PART –C 2X5=10
7. (a) Explain the process of generation of power based on thermal power plant.
(OR)
7. (b) Explain the working of condenser
536
8. (a) Explain the process of fluid catalytic cracking
(OR)
8. (b) Explain the working of centrifugal pump used in petro chemical plant.
INSTRUMENTATION IN PROCESS INDUSTRIES (18EI-502C)
Time: 1Hr Max Marks: 20
1. List the raw materials used in iron and steel plant

2. List the types of furnaces used in iron and steel plant
3. List the raw materials for making paper
4. List any four grades of paper
PART –B 2X3=6
5. (a) List the various units in iron and steel plant.

(OR)
5. (b) classify the types of steel
6. (a). List various steps in pulp production

(OR)
6. (b). List the physical properties of paper
PART –C 2X5=10
7. (a) Explain the working of Electric arc furnace with diagram
(OR)
537
7. (b). Explain the process of making steel based on the layout of iron and steel plant
8. (a). Explain wet end and dry end operations in making paper
(OR)
8. (b) Explain the working of moisture analyser.
INSTRUMENTATION IN PROCESS INDUSTRIES (18EI502C)
Time: 2Hrs Max Marks: 40
1. List the bi products of crude oil

2. List the types of furnaces used in iron and steel plant
3. List the types of cement
4. List any four grades of paper
5. List the types of crushers used in cement industries
6. List the raw materials used in cement manufacturing
7. List the raw materials used in textile industry
8. Define fibre quality index.
PART –B Marks: 4X3=12
9(a) Draw the PI diagram of boiler process
(OR)
9(b) Mention the criteria for selection of site for locating cement plant
10(a) List various steps in pulp production
(OR)
10(b) Give the effect of moisture regain on fibre properties
11(a) List the safety measures to be taken in cement plant
538
(OR)
11(b) Explain how lime is formed from lime stone
12(a) List the various units in textile industry
(OR)
12(b) List the objectives of fibre bleaching process
PART –C 4X5=20
13(a) Explain the process of generation of power based on thermal power plant
(OR)
13(b) Explain the manufacturing process of cement based on the layout
14(a) Explain the process of making steel based on the layout of iron and steel plant
(OR)
14(b) Explain the working of textile industry with help of layout
15(a) Explain the measurement of temperature in kiln process
(OR)
15(b) Explain the point level detection in rock crusher
16(a) Describe the measurement of humidity by dry bulb hygrometer
(OR)
16(b) Explain the measurement of fibre fineness using micronaire
539
INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION
Pre requisites
Course Title : INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION Course Code 18EI-503C
Semester V Course Group Core
Teaching Scheme in
45:15:0 Credits 3
periods(L:T:P)
Methodology Lecture + Assignments Total Periods 60
Student requires the basic knowledge of computer architecture and basic programming concepts.
Course Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the student shall be able to
CO1 : Be familiar with the architecture, hardware and applications of PLC
CO2 : Understand the working of different instructions for programming the PLC
CO3 : Understand the various PLC programs

CO4 : Understand the various Computer Controlled Systems architecture and system elements
CO5 : Understand the major elements and application areas of SCADA
Understand the architecture, systems elements and applications of Robotics and CNC
CO6 :
machine

No s R U A
1 Introduction to PLC 6
Q1 Q9A Q13A
2 Basics of PLC programming 10 Q
3 Advanced PLC programming 12 4
Q2 Q10A Q14A
4 Computer Controlled Systems 8
5 Basics of SCADA & HMI in 12 Q Q5, Q9B,Q11A, Q13B,
540
Automation Q15A,
Q6 Q11B
Q15B
6 Robotics and CNC machine 3 Q10B,Q12A Q14B,
Q7,
12 , Q12B Q16A,
Q8
Q16B
Total 60 8 8 8
Course
UNIT Contents
1 –Fundamentals of Electricity Duration: 8 Periods
UNIT 1 - Introduction to PLC

Duration: 06 Periods (L: 5 –T: 1)
Definition of Automation-need for the industrial automation-relay based and PLC based control panel-
PLC definition -block diagram-explanation - PLC components - I/O - PLC operation cycle -
Advantages and Disadvantages of PLC - PLC applications. –Different types of PLC manufacturers –
interfacing of PLC and PC
UNIT 2 - Basics of PLC programming Duration: 10 Periods (L: 8 –T: 2)
Types of PLC programming methods – describe the methods - ladder diagram, Functional Block
Diagram, Sequential Function Chart, Structured Text, Instruction List - rules for programming - PLC
basic Instruction set:- Bit or Relay instruction, OSR Instruction, Output latching instructions, - Ladder
diagram for basic logic gates--universal logic gates-XOR and XNOR - Modes of PLC operation -
Program mode - Run mode - Remote mode- Interfacing start/stop push button switch and motor to PLC
UNIT 3 - Advanced PLC programming Duration: 12 Periods (L: 8 –T: 4)

Special programming Instructions - Timer and Counter Instructions - On delay and off delay and
retentive timer instructions - PLC counters up and down instructions - Program Control and Data
manipulation Instructions - Data handling instructions - Sequencer instructions - Programming
sequence output instructions - Ladder programs-based on counters-DOL starter- Star-Delta Starter-
Stair case lighting - Traffic light control - sequential control of induction motor-level control-conveyor
belt
Unit-4 - Computer Controlled Systems Duration: 08 Periods (L: 6 –T: 2)
Introduction –Role of computers in process control-Data logger – definition - explanation –application
–Data Acquisition system (DAS)– definition - explanation –application –Distributed control systems
(DCS) – definition - explanation – applications
541
Unit-5 - Basics of SCADA& HMI in Automation Duration: 12 Periods (L: 10 –T:2)
Definition of SCADA, need of SCADA-architecture of SCADA- Major elements of SCADA -
communication infrastructure of SCADA- Advantages and Disadvantages of SCADA- graphical
symbols used in SCADA – tags creation in SCADA-Interfacing of SCADA with PLC-Application
areas of SCADA - Comparison of SCADA, DCS, PLC and Smart Instrumentation -Basics of HMI-
Applications of HMI - Comparison of HMI with SCADA.
UNIT 6: Robotics and CNC machine Duration: 12 Periods (L: 10 –T: 2)
Definition of robotics - Asimov’s principles -types of robot—structure of a robot -operation of simple
robot-Block diagram of robot - advantages and disadvantages of robot-application of robot-
Introduction to Intelligent Robots-definition of CNC machine-Block diagram-advantages -working
-applications of CNC machine
Reference Books
1. PLC principles and applications by John webb & Ronald Reis

2. PLC principles and applications by NIIT, PHI
3. Introduction to Programmable Logic Controllers by Garry Dunning,Thomson,2nd
edition,Thomson,ISBN: 981-240-625-5
4. Practical SCADA for Industry, David Bailey and Edwin Wright, Newness An imprint of
Elsevier, 2003, ISBN 07506 58053
5. Programmable Logic Controllers, JR Hackworth, Frederick , Pearson Education
6. Programmable Logic Controllers, W Bolton, Elsevier
7. Learning Programmable Logic Controllers with Applications, PK Srivstava, BPB Publications.
Suggested e-Learning References
1. www.plcs.net
2. www.PLC circuits-tutorials.ws
2.0 Be familiar with the architecture, hardware and applications of PLC

1.1 Define automation
1.2 State the need for Industrial Automation
1.3 Give the concept of Relay based Control panel.
1.4 List the components of Relay based Control panel
542
1.5 Define Programmable Logic Controller(PLC)
1.6 List the components of PLC based Control panel
1.7 Compare Relay based and PLC based Control panel
1.8 Explain the block diagram of PLC
1.9 Explain the operation cycle of a PLC
1.10 List the different types of PLCs
1.11 List different types PLC manufacturers
1.12 Explain the interfacing of PLC with PC
2.0 Understand the working of different instructions for programming the PLC
2.28 List the Types of PLC programming methods.
2.29 Describe the ladder diagram method
2.30 Describe the Function Block Diagram method
2.31 Describe the Sequential Function Chart method
2.32 Describe the Structured Text method
2.33 Describe the Instruction List method
2.34 Mention the Rules to follow in drawing the Ladder diagram
2.35 Explain Bit or Relay instruction OSR Instruction, Output latching instructions
2.36 List the PLC instruction set
2.37 Draw the Ladder diagram for basic logic gates, universal logic gates-XOR and XNOR
2.38 Sates the Modes of PLC operation , Program mode , Run mode , Remote mode
2.39 Explain the Interfacing of start/stop push button switch and motor to PLC
3.0 Understand the various PLC programs

3.36 State the Special programming Instructions
3.37 Explain Timer Instructions - On delay and off delay and retentive timer instructions
3.38 Explain and Counter Instructions - counters up and down instructions
3.39 Draw the ladder diagram using On delay and off delay and retentive timer instructions
3.40 Draw the ladder diagram using CTU and CTD instruction
3.41 Describe Program Control and Data manipulation Instructions
3.42 Describe Data handling instructions
3.43 Describe Sequencer instructions
3.44 Describe Programming sequence output instructions
3.45 Draw the ladder diagram for DOL starter
3.46 Draw the ladder diagram for Star-Delta starter
3.47 Draw the ladder diagram for stair case lighting
3.48 Draw the ladder diagram for traffic light control
3.49 Draw the ladder diagram for sequential control of induction motor
3.50 Draw the ladder diagram for level control
3.51 Draw the ladder diagram for conveyor belt
9.0 Knowing the major elements Understand the various Computer Controlled Systems architecture and
system elements
4.43 Explain the role of computers in process control
4.44 Define Data logger
4.45 Explain the block diagram of Data logger
4.46 List the application of Data logger
4.47 Define Data Acquisition System
4.48 Explain the block diagram of Data Acquisition System
543
4.49 List the applications of Data Acquisition System
4.50 Define Distributed Digital Control system
4.51 Explain the block diagram of Distributed Digital Control system
4.52 List the applications of Distributed Digital Control system
5.0Understand the major elements and application areas in SCADA

5.1 Define SCADA
5.2 State the need of SCADA in industry
5.3 Draw the hardware architecture of SCADA
5.4 Explain the hardware architecture of SCADA
5.5 Explain the software architecture of SCADA
5.6 List the three components of a SCADA
5.7 Explain Remote Terminal Unit(RTU) of SCADA
5.8 Explain Master Station of SCADA
5.9 Explain communication infrastructure of SCADA
5.10 Explain the Creation of graphical symbols using Graphic Display Builder
5.11 Explain the creation of tags using SCADA
5.12 State the need of SCADA with PLC
5.13 Explain the interfacing of SCADA with PLC
5.14 List the applications of SCADA
5.15 Compare of SCADA, DCS, PLC and Smart Instrumentation
5.16 Define HMI
5.17 Applications of HMI
5.18 Compare of HMI with SCADA.
6.0 Understand the architecture, systems elements and applications of Robotics and CNC
machine
6.1 Define a Robot
6.2 State the Asimov’s principles in robotics
6.3 State the types of robot
6.4 Explain the operation of simple robot with block diagram
6.5 List the advantages and disadvantages of robot
6.6 List the applications of a Robot
6.7 Explain material handling applications of robot
6.8 Explain machine loading and unloading applications of robot
6.9 Explain arc welding and spot welding applications of robot
6.10 Explain assembly operation applications of robot
6.11 Define the Intelligent Robots
6.12 State the importance of Robots in manufacturing automation
6.13 Define CNC machine
6.14 State the advantages of CNC machine
6.15 Explain the working of CNC Machine
6.16 List the applications of CNC Machine
1. Use free simulator PLC , available PLC and construct any one of the Industrial applications
2. Interface PLC with automatic water level / Temperature control / conveyor belt control / Elevator
system (any one)
3. Compare makes of different PLCs and submit a handwritten report
544
4. Visit on your own a nearby industry and submit a handwritten report on PLC/SCADA
5. Power point presentation or YouTube lecture on PLC, HMI, DCS, SCADA
C0-PO Mapping Matrix
Lifelong learning
Basic knowledge
workIndividual and Team

Communication
Engineering Tools
Ethics
Linked
sustainabilityEnvironment &
practiceExperiments and
KnowledgeDiscipline
PO
10
CO1 2 2 2 1,2,3
CO2 2 2 2 2 1,2,5,6
CO3 2 2 2 2 1,2,4,5
CO4 2 2 2 1,2,5
CO5 2 2 2 2 1,2,4,5
CO6 2 2 2 1,2,3
Internal Evaluation
Assignmen 1 5 Different group assignments of Higher
t order Questions that develop problem
solving skills and critical thinking should
be given
Seminars 1 5
Total 60
545
Sl.No Description Level No of Marks for Choice Total
Questions each Marks
question

MID SEM-I EXAM

1 Unit-I 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-II 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM-II EXAM

1 Unit-III 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-IV 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)

question

Unit No
R U A
I
Q1 Q9(a) Q9(a)
II Q4
III Q2 Q10(a) Q10(a)
546
IV
Q9(b), Q9(b),
V Q5,Q6
Q11(a), Q11(b) Q11(a), Q11(b)
Q3
Q10(b), Q10(b),
VI Q7,Q8
Q12(a), Q12(b) Q12(a), Q12(b)
INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION 18EI-503C

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9. State the need for industrial automation

10. Define PLC
11. List the types of PLC programming methods.
12. State the PLC operation Modes.
PART –B 2X3=6
5. (a) Compare Relay based and PLC based control Panel

(OR)
5. (b) Explain the operation cycle of a PLC
6. (a) Explain about Bit instructions.

(OR)
6.(b) List the PLC instruction set.
PART –C 2X5=10
7. (a) Explain the block diagram of PLC.
547
(OR)
7. (b) Explain the interfacing of PLC with PC
8. (a) Describe the ladder diagram programming of PLC

(OR)
8(b) Explain the interfacing of start stop button switch to a PLC

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Draw the ladder diagram for DOL Starter.

2. List the timer instructions.
3. List the applications of Data acquisition systems
4. Define Distributed Digital Control system.
PART –B 2X3=6

5. (a) Draw the ladder diagram for level control.
(OR)
5. (b) Describe Sequential instructions
6. (a) Draw the block diagram of data logger.

(OR)
6. (b) List the applications of distributed digital control systems
PART –C 2X5=10
7. (a) Draw the ladder diagram for conveyor belt.

548
(OR)
7. (b). Draw the ladder diagram for Traffic light control
8. (a). Explain the block diagram of Data Acquisition system

(OR)
(b) Explain the block diagram of Distributed digital control system.

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Define PLC
2. List the Timer instructions
3. Define SCADA
4. State the PLC operation modes
5. Define HMI
6. List the applications of SCADA
7. Define a Robot
8. Define CNC Machine
PART –B Marks: 4X3=12

9(a) Compare Relay based and PLC based control panel
(OR)
9(b) State the need for interfacing SCADA with PLC
10(a) Draw the Ladder diagram for level control
(OR)
10(b) State the types of Robot
549
11(a) Draw the Hardware architecture of SCADA
(OR)
11(b) Compare HMI with SCADA
12(a) List the advantages and Disadvantages of Robot
(OR)
12(b) List the applications of CNC Machine
PART –C 4X5=20
13(a) Describe the block diagram of PLC
(OR)
13(b) Explain the software architecture of SCADA
14(a) Explain the block diagram of Data Acquisition System
(OR)
14(b) Explain the operation of simple robot with block diagram
15(a) Explain the Master station of SCADA
(OR)
15(b) Explain the creation of Tags using SCADA
16(a) State the Asimov's principles of Robotics
(OR)
16(b) Explain the working of CNC Machine
550
ELECTRONIC MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
Course Title : ELECTRONIC MEASURING INSTRUMENTS

Course Code 18EI-504E(A)
Semester V Course Group ELECTIVE
Teaching Scheme 45:15:0 Credits 3
in Periods(L:T:P)
Periods : 60
Common with 18EC-504E(A)
Pre requisites
This course requires the basic knowledge of Analog and digital circuits
Course Outcomes

Course Outcome
CO1
Use Analog instruments for measuring Basic Electrical Quantities
CO2 Use ac and dc bridges for determining unknown parameters
CO3 Use digital instruments for measuring the given electrical quantities
CO4 Understand the working of AF, RF signal generators and power meters
CO5 Understand the working principles of CRO and its applications
CO6 Use the Test instruments in Laboratory applications
Course Contents
551
1.0 Analog instruments
Characteristics of ideal Voltmeter and ideal Ammeter- Construction and principle of operation of PMMC
instrument- Principle of extending the range of DC ammeter- Principle of extending the range of DC voltmeter-
Principle and working rectifier type voltmeter and ammeter- Construction and principle of series and shunt type
ohmmeters- Use of Megger for measuring the insulation resistance- loading effect with an example- Need for
high input impedance for Voltmeters- working of FET input voltmeter with a circuit diagram- Drift problem in
FET Voltmeters- Working of differential voltmeters-
2.0 DC & AC bridges

Use of high voltage probe and clamp-on current probe- Construction of AC Bridge- Conditions for bridge
balance- Types of DC bridges and AC bridges- Use of above bridges- Resistance measurement using Wheat
Stone Bridge- Inductance measurement using Maxwell’s Bridge- capacitance measurement using Schering
Bridge- important errors and their prevention in bridge measurements- Limitations of AC bridge method for
measurement of small inductances and capacitances
3.0 Digital instruments
Advantages of digital instruments over Analogue instruments- Working of Ramp type digital voltmeter with
block diagram- Successive approximation type digital voltmeters with block diagram- Specifications of digital
voltmeters- Working of digital frequency meter with block diagram- Important specifications of digital
frequency meter- Accuracy and Resolution of a meter- Factors effecting the accuracy and Resolution of a
frequency meter- Working of digital LCR meter with block diagram- specifications of digital LCR meter.
4.0 working principle of AF, RF signal generators and power meters
Working of AF Oscillator (sine & square) - Block diagram- Front panel controls and specifications of AF
Oscillator- Working of function generator with block diagram- Applications of AF oscillators and function
generators- Working of RF signal generator- Specifications of RF signal generator- Important Applications of
RF signal generators- Importance of shielding in RF generators- Working of AF power meter- Applications of
power meters.
5.0 Working principle and use of CRO
Block diagram of general purpose CRO - Function of each block- Necessity of time base and deflection
amplifiers- Deflection sensitivity of CRO- Conditions for stationary waveforms- Conditions for flicker free
waveforms- Triggered sweep with necessary circuit- Advantages of triggered sweep- Function of various
552
controls on front panel of CRO- Procedure for measurement of - Voltage (DC & AC) b) frequency - Phase
angle - Time interval - Depth of modulation-Define a pulse - Waveform of a pulse-Define the pulse parameters
- Pulse width - Rise time - Fall time - Duty cycle-delay time- procedure for measuring above pulse parameters
with CRO- Different types of probes and connectors used in oscilloscopes.
6.0 Test instruments
- Stray inductance and stray capacitance of a coil- Q meter with a block diagram- Parameters that can be
measured using Q meter- Distortion factor- Distortion Factor Meter with block diagram- Digital IC tester with
block diagram- Working of logic analyser with block diagram- Working principle of spectrum analyser and
uses- Plotters and Recorders- XY recorders- plotter- logic probe.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Modern Electronic Instrumentation and Measurement techniques - Albert D. Helfrick William David Cooper-
PHI Publications
2. Electrical and Electronics Measurements and Instrumentation - A.K. Sawhney , Puneet SawhneyDhanpatRai&
Company, 2010
Electronic Instrumentation - HS Kalsi ,-Tata McGraw Hill
After completing this course the student will be able to
1.1. Understand the working of analog instruments.

1.2. List the characteristics of ideal volt meter and ideal ammeter.
1.3. Explain the construction and principle of operation of PMMC instrument.
1.4. Explain the principle of extending range of DC ammeter.
1.5. Explain the principle of extending range of DC voltmeter.
1.6. Explain the principle & working of rectifier type voltmeter.
1.7. Explain the principle of series & shunt type ohmmeters.
1.8. Explain the use of Megger for measuring the insulation resistance.
1.9. Explain loading effect of voltmeter with an example circuit
1.10.Explain the need for high input impedance for voltmeters.
1.11.Explain the working of FET input voltmeter with a circuit diagram.
1.12.Explain the drift problems in FET voltmeters.
1.13.Explain the working of differential voltmeters.
1.14.Explain the use of high voltage probe & clamp-on current probe.
553
2.0 DC bridges and AC Bridges
2.1 Explain the construction of AC bridge.
2.2 State the conditions for AC bridge balance.
2.3 List 4 types of AC bridges.
2.4 Mention the use of above bridges.
2.5 Explain the resistance measurement using Wheatstone bridge.
2.6 Explain the inductance measurement using Maxwell’s Bridge.
2.7 Explain the capacitance measurement using Schering Bridge.
2.8 List 4 important errors and their prevention in bridge measurements.
2.9 Mention the limitations of AC bridge method for measurement of small
Inductances and capacitances.
3.0 Understand the working of Digital Instruments.

3.1 List 4 advantages of digital instruments over analog instruments.
3.2 Explain the working of RAMP type digital voltmeter with block diagram.
3.3 Explain the working of Successive approximation type digital voltmeter with block diagram.
3.4 List 4 important specifications of digital voltmeter.
3.5 Explain the working of digital frequency meter with block diagram.
3.6 List 4 important specifications of digital frequency meter.
3.7 Define accuracy and resolution of a meter.
3.8 Explain factors effecting the accuracy and resolution of a frequency meter.
3.9 Explain the working of digital LCR meter with block diagram.
3.10 List 4 specifications of digital LCR meter.
4.0 Understand the construction and working of signal generators &power meters.
4.1 Explain the working of AF oscillator with block diagram.
4.2 List the front panel controls and specifications of AF oscillator.
4.3 Explain the working of function generator with block diagram.
4.4 List the applications of AF oscillators and function generators.
4.5 Explain the working of RF signal generator with block diagram.
554
4.6 List the specifications of RF signal generator.
4.7 Mention 3 important applications of RF signal generator.
4.8 Explain the importance of shielding in RF generators.
4.9 Explain the working of AF power meter.
4.10 List the applications of power meter
5.0 Understand construction and working of CRO.

5.1 Draw the block diagram of general purpose CRO and describe the function of each block.
5.2 Explain the necessity of time base and deflection amplifiers.
5.3 Define deflection sensitivity of CRO.
5.4 List the conditions for stationary waveforms.
5.5 Mention the conditions for flicker free waveforms.
5.6 Explain the triggered sweep with necessary circuit.
5.7 Mention the advantages of triggered sweep.
5.8 Explain the function of various controls on front panel of CRO.
5.9 Explain the procedure for measurement of a) voltage (DC & AC) b) frequency c) phase
angle d) time interval e) depth of modulation.
5.10 Define a pulse.

5.11 Draw the waveform of a pulse.
5.12 Define the pulse parameters a) pulse width b) rise time c) fall time d) duty cycled) delay
time.
5.13 Explain the procedure for measuring above pulse parameters with CRO.
5.14 List different types of probes and connectors used in CRO’s.
6.0 Understand the construction and working of test instruments.

6.1 Define stray inductance and stray capacitance of a coil.
6.2 Explain the working of Q-meter with a block diagram.
6.3 List various parameters that can be measured using Q-meter.
6.4 Define distortion factor.
6.5 Explain the working of distortion factor meter with block diagram.
555
6.6 Explain the working of distortion factor meter with block diagram.
6.7 Explain the basic working principle of spectrum analyser and mention its use.
6.8 State the need for plotters and recorders.
6.9 Explain the working of XY recorders.
6.10 Explain the working of plotters.
6.11 Explain the working of logic probe
1. Student visits Library to refer to Manuals and related books of electronic instruments
2. Student inspects the available equipment in the Lab
3. Visit nearby Industry to familiarize with working of various electronic instruments
4. Participate in the Quiz &discussion
5. Search internet for knowing latest trends in electronic instruments
Model of rubrics for assessing student activity
Scale
Dimension 1 2 3 4 5
Unsatisfactory Developing Satisfactory Good Exemplary
1.Information Does not collect Collects very Collects basic Collects more Collects a
search and information limited information, information, great deals of
documentation relate to topic information, most refer to most refer to information,
some relate to the topic the topic all refer to
topic the
topic
Does not Performs Performs Performs Performs all
2. Full-fills perform any very little nearly all almost all duties of
team roles and duties assigned duties duties duties assigned
duties to the team role team
roles
3. Shares Always relies on Rarely does Usually does Always does Always does
work equality others to do the the assigned the assigned the assigned the assigned
work work, often work, rarely work, rarely work,
needs needs needs without
reminding reminding reminding. needing
reminding
4. Listening Is always Usually does Listens, but Listens and Listens and
skills talking, never most of the sometimes talks a little talks a fare
allows anyone to talking, rarely talk too much, more than amount
else to speak allows others needed.
to speak
2. www.nptel.ac.in
3.www.Techopedia.com
556
4.www.circuitdigest.com
Course Outcome Linked

PO
CO1 1,2
Use Analog instruments for measuring Basic Electrical
Quantities
CO2 Use ac and dc bridges for determining unknown parameters 1,2,3,5,
CO3 Use digital instruments for measuring the given electrical 1,2,5,9
quantities
CO4 Explain the working of AF, RF signal generators and power 1,2,5,7
meters
CO5 Understand the working principles of CRO and its 1,2,5,7
applications
CO6 Use the Test instruments in Laboratory applications 1,2,3,7,10
557
MID SEM-I EXAM
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM –II EXAM
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)

S No Unit No.
R U A
1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 II
3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 IV
9(b) 13(b)
4
5 V 5, 6 11(a) 15(a)

11(b) 15(b)
3
10(b) 14(b)
6 VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)

12(b) 16(b)
558
Legend:
C18EI-504E (A), V SEMESTER

C18EI-504E (A), V SEMESTER, ELECTRONIC MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
MID EXAM - I MODEL QUESTION PAPER
PART-A
1. List the characteristics of ideal ammeter
2. State the importance of high input impedance of voltmeter
3. State the conditions for AC bridge balance
4. List the limitations of AC bridge for measuring of small inductance.
PART-B
Note: Answer any TWO questions. Each carries 3marks. 2X3=6 Marks
5. (a) Explain loading effect of volt meter
(or)
5. (b) Explain the principle of extending range of DC voltmeter
6. (a) Explain the resistance measurement using Wheatstone Bridge
(or)
6. (b).Explain the capacitance measurement using Schering bridge
PART-C
Note: Answer any TWO questions. Each carries 5 marks. 2X5=10 Marks
7. (a) Explain the construction and principle of operation of PMMC instrument

(or)
7. (b) Explain the principle & working of rectifier type voltmeter
8. (a) Explain the inductance measurement using Maxwell’s Bridge
(or)
8. (b).State the conditions for AC bridge balance and Explain the construction of AC bridge
559

MID EXAM - II MODEL QUESTION PAPER
PART-A

1. List two advantages of digital instruments over analog instruments
2. Define accuracy of a meter
3. List the front panel controls of AF oscillator.
4. Mention 3 important applications of RF signal generator.
PART-B
Note: Answer any TWO questions. Each carries 3marks. 2X3=6 Marks
5. (a) Explain factors effecting the accuracy and resolution of a frequency meter
(or)
5. (b)Explain the working of RAMP type digital voltmeter with block diagram.
6. (a) Explain the importance of shielding in RF generators

(or)
6. (b).Explain the importance of shielding in RF generators
PART-C
Note: Answer any TWO questions. Each carries 5 marks. 2X5=10 Marks
7. (a) Explain the working of Successive approximation type digital voltmeter with block diagram
(or)
7. (b) Explain the working of digital frequency meter with block diagram.
8. (a) Explain the working of function generator with block diagram.

(or)
8. (b).Explain the working of AF power meter.
560
PART-A
1. List the characteristics of ideal volt meter.

2. Define resolution of a digital instrument.
3. List any two applications of a power meter.
4. Define pulse parameters like rise time and duty cycle.
5. Define deflection sensitivity of CRO.
6. State the conditions for stationary wave forms.
7. Define distortion factor.
8. State the need for plotters.
PART-B
Answer any four questions. Each carries three marks.
4X3=12Marks
9. (a) Explain loading effect of voltmeter
(or)
9. (b) Explain the procedure for measurement of voltage (AC) and Frequency using CRO.
561
10. (a) Explain factors effecting the accuracy and resolution of a frequency meter
(or)
10. (b) Draw the block diagram of Q-meter.
11. (a) Mention the function of various controls on front panel of CRO.
(or)
11. (b) Explain the triggered sweep with necessary circuit.
12. (a) Draw the block diagram of distortion factor meter.
(or)
12. (b) State the basic working principle of spectrum analyzer and mention its use.
PART-C
Answer any four questions. Each carries 5 marks 4X5=20Marks
13. (a) Explain the capacitance measurement using Schering Bridge.
(or)
13. (b) Draw the block diagram of general purpose CRO and describe the function of each block.
14. (a) Explain the working of function generator with block diagram.
(or)
14. (b) Explain the working of XY recorders
15. (a) Explain the necessity of time base and deflection amplifiers.
(or)
15. (b) Explain the procedure for measuring pulse parameters like parameters a) pulse width b)
rise time c) fall time d) duty cycle e) delay time with CRO
16. (a) Explain the working of logic probe
(or)
562
16. (b) Explain the working of plotters.
18EC-504E (B)- Digital circuit design using Verilog
Course Title : Digital circuit design using Verilog Course Code 18EI-504E (B)
Semester V Course Group Elective

Periods(L:T:P)
Methodology Lecture + Assignments Total Contact Periods : 60Pds
1) Concepts of switching theory and logic design.
2) Familiarity with a programming language like C or C++.

Unit Unit name Periods Questions for SEE Marks %Weightage
No weightage
R U A
1. Basic Concepts of VLSI
12 1 1 1 17 15.5
Circuits
Pre requisites
2 Introduction to Verilog
8 1 1 0 12 11
HDL
3 Language constructs and
12 1 3 0 19 17
conventions
4. Gate level, Data Flow and
8 1 0 1 7 6.5
Behavioral modeling
5. Modeling of
combinational and 13 1 3 3 36
33
Sequential Logic circuits
6. System design concepts 7 2 1 1 19 17
Total 60 7 9 6 110 100
563
Course Outcomes
CO1 : Use Layout design rules; Draw stick diagrams; Interpret fabrication process, timing simulation.
CO2 : Apply the basics of Hardware Description Languages and use Verilog modules, instantiation
process.
CO3 : Use Verilog HDL constructs and conventions.
CO4 : Develop Simple logic circuits using various levels of Abstraction in Verilog HDL.
CO5 : Design and Simulate Combinational and sequential circuits using Verilog HDL.
CO6 : Apply Verilog HDL principles to develop various real time applications using FSM and FPGA.
Course Content
Unit 1: Basic Concepts of VLSI Circuits: Duration: 12 Periods
MOS Transistor fabrication-Merits of CMOS technology-CMOS fabrication process-Layout design rules-Stick

diagrams-VLSI design flow-VLSI design specification and design entry-Functional simulation-Planning Placement
and Routing (PPR)-Timing simulation-Fusing/Fabrication into the chip-Use of Verilog HDL in VLSI simulation.
Unit 2: Introduction to Verilog HDL: Duration: 8 Periods
Steps involved in the design flow for the VLSI IC design-Importance of Hardware Description Languages in VLSI
design-Compare VHDL and Verilog HDL-Features of Verilog HDL-Difference between an instantiation and
inference of a component-Differences between modules and module instances in Verilog-Levels of abstraction
to represent the internals of s module-Identify the components of a Verilog module definition-Port connection
rules in module instantiation.
Unit 3: Language constructs and conventions: Duration:12 Periods
Lexical conventions like number specification, Identifiers, Keywords, etc-Different data types like value set,
nets, registers, vectors, integer, real and time register data types, arrays, memories and strings-Defparam and
localparam keywords-System tasks and compiler directives-Expressions, operators and operands-Types of
operators used in the Verilog HDL
564
Unit 4: Gate level, Data Flow and Behavioural modelling: Duration: 8 Periods
Logic gates primitives provided in Verilog-Instantiation of gates, gate symbols, and truth tables for and/or and
buf/not types gates-Rise, fall and turn off delays in gate level design-Initial and Always statements-Assignment
statements in data flow modelling-Different types of delays used in the data flow level modelling-Blocking and
Non blocking procedural assignments with examples-Timing controls like delay based timing control and event
based timing control-Conditional statements-Multiway branching-Use of case, casex and casez statements-
Difference between conditional if statement and case statements-Looping statements such as while, for,
repeat and forever-Sequential and parallel blocks- User Defined Primitives (UDP)-Hierarchical modelling-
Advantages of hierarchical modeling-Modeling techniques in Verilog HDL-Design simple logic circuits like
adders, subtractors using Behavioural, Dataflow and Structural modelling.
Unit 5: Modelling of combinational and Sequential Logic circuits: Duration: 13 Periods
Modelling of combinational and sequential circuits-Design combinational circuits like multiplexers, decoders,
encoders, comparators and ALU-Design RS, JK, T and D flip flops with asynchronous and synchronous clock and
reset- Explain implementation of shift registers like SISO, SIPO, PISO, PIPO, etc-Design synchronous and
asynchronous counters-Design a divide by 3 counter-Design shift register counters like ring counter, etc-Design
memories like RAM and ROM-Compare RTL level and structural level modelling. Test Bench module-Need of a
stimulus module-Structure of stimulus module-stimulus modules for combinational and sequential circuits of
Verilog designs.
Unit 6: System Design Concepts: Duration: 7 Periods
Concept of Finite State Machines-Mealy and Moore types of state machines-Problems on Mealy and Moore
state machines-Design of Mealy state machine using Verilog HDL. Various design tools which are useful in
different stages of design-Important programmable logic devices- Architecture of PLAs -Architecture of CPLD-
Architecture of FPGAs-Comparison-Applications-Design of UART using FPGA board-Design of Traffic Light
controller using FPGA board.
Recommended Books
Digital systems design by Morris Mano
1. Verilog HDL: A guide to digital design and synthesis by S. Palnitkar
2. Advanced Digital Design with the VERILOG HDL by Michael D. Ciletti
3. Switching and finite automation theory by Zvi Kohavi
4. Digital state machine design by David J. Comes
5. Digital Systems by Ronald Tocci
6. Digital design principles and practice- John F Wakerly, PHI / Pearson education Asia 3 rd Edn,2005
7. Design through Verilog HDL – T.R. Padmanabhan and B. Bala Tripura Sundari, WSE, IEEE Press, 2004.
565
8. A Verilog Premier – J. Bhasker, BSP, 2003.
9. Fundamentals of Logic Design with Verilog – Stephen. Brown and Zvonko Vranesic, TMH, 2005.
10. Advanced Digital Design with Verilog HDL – Michael D. Ciletti, PHI, 2005.
1.1 Basic Concepts of VLSI Circuits
1.2 Explain the processes of MOS Transistor fabrication
1.3 List the merits of CMOS technology
1.4 Explain CMOS fabrication process
1.5 List Layout design rules
1.6 Explain layout design rules
1.7 Explain stick diagrams
1.8 Explain VLSI design flow
1.9 Explain VLSI design specification and design entry
1.10 Explain functional simulation
1.11 Explain Planning placement and Routing (PPR)
1.12 Explain timing simulation
1.13 Explain Fusing/Fabrication into the chip
1.14 Explain the use of Verilog HDL in VLSI simulation
2.0 Introduction to Verilog HDL
2.1 Explain the steps involved in the design flow for the VLSI IC design
2.2 Explain the importance of Hardware Description Languages in VLSI design
2.3 Compare VHDL and Verilog HDL
2.4 List the features of Verilog HDL
2.5 Explain the difference between an instantiation and inference of a component.
566
2.6 Explain differences between modules and module instances in Verilog.
2.7 Explain four levels of abstraction to represent the internals of a module
2.8 Identify the components of a Verilog module definition
2.9 Explain the port connection rules in a module instantiation
3.1 Language constructs and conventions
3.2 Explain the lexical conventions like number specification, Identifiers keywords, etc
3.3 Explain different data types like value set, nets, registers, vectors, integer, real and time register data
types, arrays, memories and strings.
3.4 Explain defparam and localparam keywords
3.5 Explain about system tasks and compiler directives
3.6 Define expressions, operators and operands.
3.7 Explain all types of operators used in the Verilog HDL
4.1 Understand concepts of Gate level, Data flow and behavioral modeling
4.2 Identify the logic gate primitives provided in Verilog
4.3 Explain the instantiation of gates, gate symbols, and truth tables for and/or and buff/not type gates.
4.4 Explain Rise, fall and turn-off delays in the gate level design
4.5 Explain about the initial and always statements.
4.6 Explain the assignment statements in data flow modeling
4.7 Explain different types of delays used in the data flow level modeling
4.8 Explain blocking and non blocking procedural assignments with examples
4.9 Explain timing controls like delay based timing control and event based timing control
4.10 Explain conditional statements.
4.11 Explain multiway branching – use case, casex, and casez statements.
4.12 Explain the difference between conditional if statement and case statements.
4.13 Explain looping statements such as while, for, repeat, and forever.
4.14 Explain sequential and parallel blocks.
567
4.15 Explain about user defined primitives (UDP).
4.16 Explain about the hierarchical modeling.
4.17 List the advantages of hierarchical modeling.
4.18 Explain about modeling techniques in Verilog HDL.
4.19 Design simple logic circuits like Half Adder, Full Adder, Half Subtractor, and Full Subtractor using
Behavioral, Data Flow and Structural Modeling.
5.1 Understand modeling of combinational and sequential logic circuits
5.2 Design combinational circuits like multiplexers, decoders, encoders, Comparators and ALU
5.3 Design RS, JK, T and D flip flops with Asynchronous and Synchronous Clock and reset
5.4 Explain implementation of shift registers like SISO, SIPO, PISO, PIPO, etc.
5.5 Design synchronous and asynchronous counters
5.6 Design a divide by 3 counter
5.7 Design shift register counters like ring counter, etc.
5.8 Design memories like RAM and ROM.
5.9 Compare RTL level and structural level modelings.
5.10 Define test bench module.
5.11 Explain the need of a stimulus module.
5.12 Explain the structure of stimulus module.
5.13 Apply the stimulus modules for combinational and sequential circuits of Verilog designs
6.1 Understand the system design concepts
6.2 List different Finite State Machines.
6.3 Explain the Mealy and Moore types of State Machines.
6.4 Explain the design of Mealy state machine using Verilog HDL
6.5 Explain the design of Moore state machine using Verilog HDL
6.6 Explain various design tools which are useful in different stages of design.
6.7 List 4 important programmable logic devices.
6.8 Explain the architecture of PLAs.
568
6.9 Explain the architecture of PALs
6.10 Explain the architecture of CPLD.
6.11 Explain the architecture of FPGA.
6.12 Compare the programmable logic devices.
6.13 List any 3 applications of programmable logic devices.
6.14 Explain the design of UART using FPGA.
6.15 Explain the design of Traffic Light Controller using FPGA board.
Internal Evaluation
Part B 2 Essay questions out of 3 Questions Part

C 2 Essay questions out of 3 Questions
Part B 2 Essay questions out of 3 Questions Part

C 2 Essay questions out of 3 Questions
Assignment 1 5 Different group assignments of Higher order

Questions that develop problem solving skills
Seminars 1 5
Total 60

1. Quiz
2. Group discussion
3. Surprise test

1. http://electrical4u.com
569
3. www.nptel.ac.in
4. www.allaboutcircuits.com
On Successful completion of the course, the student will be able to attain the following Course Outcomes
(COs):

PO Periods
CO1 Use Layout design rules; Draw stick diagrams; Interpret R/U/A 1,2,10
12
fabrication process, timing simulation.
CO2 Apply the basics of Hardware Description Languages and use R/U 1,2,5,6,7
8
Verilog modules, instantiation process.
CO3 Use Verilog HDL constructs and conventions. R/U 1,2,9 12
CO4 Develop Simple logic circuits using various levels of Abstraction R/U/A 1,2,5,7
8
in Verilog HDL.
CO5 Design and Simulate Combinational and sequential circuits using R/U/A 1,2,5
13
Verilog HDL.
CO6 Apply Verilog HDL principles to develop various real time R/U/A 1,2,3,7
7
applications using FSM and FPGA.
570
Model Paper for Mid-I,
V SEMESTER, 18EI-504E (B)
DIGTAL CIRCUIT DESIGN USING VERILOG
Time: 1 Hr Total Marks: 20Marks
PART-A
Answer all questions. Each carries one mark 4 X 1 = 04
1. List the merits of CMOS technology
2. Explain the need for stick diagrams
3. List types of design entry methods in VLSI. .
4. Write the difference between module and instance.
5. Explain the importance of HDLs in VLSI design.
PART-B
Answer any two questions. Each carries five marks 2X3=6
6. Explain Layout Design rules.
7. Mention the differences between Verilog HDL and VHDL.
8. Explain about connecting ports by ordered list and ports by name in module instantiation.
PART-C
Answer any two questions. Each carries ten marks 2 X 10 = 20
9. Draw the stick diagram of CMOS transistor
10. Explain VLSI design flow.
11. Explain about the four levels of abstraction Supported by Verilog HDL
571
Model Paper for Mid-II,
Time :1 Hrs Total Marks:20Marks
PART-A
Answer all questions, each carries two marks 5 X 2 = 10
1. Explain about concatenation operator.
2. Mention the difference between $display and $monitor.
3. Explain about “= =” and “= = =” operators.
4. Define Rise time delay and fall time delay in gate level design.
5. Explain about initial statement
PART-B
Answer any two questions, each carries five marks 2 X 5 = 10
6. Explain about defparam and localparam keywords.
7. Explain about System tasks in Verilog HDL.
8. Design 1-bit half subtractor using gate level modelling.
PART-C
Answer any two questions, each carries ten marks 2 X 10 = 20
9. Explain about the following operators
a) Logical operators b) Bit wise operators c) Binary arithmetic operators
d) Unary reduction operators
10. Design 1-bit full adder logic circuit using Gate level and Dataflow level modeling.
11. Explain about casex, casez and case statements.
572
Model Paper for SEE
Time: 2Hrs Total Marks : 40Marks
PART-A
Answer all questions, each carries two marks 10 X 2 =20
1. List the Layout design rules.
2. List the features of Verilog HDL.
3. List any three system tasks in Verilog HDL.
4. Explain about always statement.
5. List the advantages of hierarchical modelling.
6. Write the need for stimulus module.
7. Write the test bench module for 2 X 1 Mux.
8. Define test bench module.
9. List programmable logic devices.
10.Write any three applications of PLD’s.

PART-B
GROUP-1 Answer any TWO questions 2 x 5 = 10
11.Draw the stick diagram of two inputs NMOS NAND gate.
12.Explain about compiler directives.
13.Design 1 bit half adder using behavioural modelling.
573
GROUP-2 Answer any TWO questions 2 x 5 = 10
14.Design 3 X 8 decoder using behavioural modelling.
15.Design 4 X 1 Mux using data flow level modelling.
16.Explain the architecture of FPGA.
PART-C
GROUP-1 Answer any TWO questions 2x10=20
17. Explain the process of NMOS transistor fabrication.
18. Explain about the various components of a verilog module with an example.
19. Explain about casex, casez and case statements.
GROUP-2 Answer any TWO questions 2 x 10= 20
20. Design up/down counter using Verilog HDL.
21. Design a D flip-flop with asynchronous reset and its Test bench using verilog HDL.
22. Explain the architecture of PLA’s.
574
Analytical & Biomedical Instrumentation
Analytical & Biomedical

Course Title : Course Code 18EI-505E(A)
Instrumentation
Semester V Course Group :Elective
Teaching Scheme
45:15:0 Credits :3
in Periods(L:T:P)
Pre requisites
This course requires the basic knowledge of Instrumentation.
Course Outcomes
CO1 : Study of Analytical Instrumentation using radiation properties

CO2 : Use various analyzers.
CO3 : Interpret the terminologies in Biomedical Instrumentation and ECG wave forms.
CO4 : Use the principles of life assisting and therapeutic devices

CO5 : Analyze using Mass Spectroscopy and Chromatography techniques.
CO6 : Use the basic principles of imaging techniques
575
No s
R U A
Introduction to Analytical
1. 8 Q1 Q9A Q13A
Instrumentation & Spectrophotometers
2 Analyzers 10
Introduction to Bio-medical
3 12
Instrumentation
Q2 Q10A Q14A
Blood Pressure and Blood Flow
4. Measurement and Therapeutic 10
Instruments
Q9B,
Q4 Q5, Q13B,
5. Mass spectrometry and Chromatography 8 Q11A, Q15A,
Q6 Q15B
Q11B
Q3
Q10B, Q14B,
Q7,
Q16A,
6. Modern Imaging Systems 12 Q12A, Q16B
Q8
Q12B
TOTAL 60 8 8 8
Course
UNIT Contents
1 –Fundamentals of Electricity Duration: 8 Periods
UNIT 1- Introduction to Analytical Instrumentation & Spectrophotometers:
Block diagram of Analytical Instrumentation, Electromagnetic spectrum, Beer lamberts law,

monochromators, light sources and detectors - UV, IR, and Visible Spectro photometers.
UNIT 2- Analyzers: Duration: 10Periods (L: 8– T:2)

Analyzer-Flame Photometer, Spectro flourometer, Refracto meter, Interferometer, Polarimeter,
Paramagnetic, Zirconia type and Thermal conductivity gas analyzers, Auto analyzer.
UNIT 3- Introduction to Bio-medical Instrumentation:

576
Bio electricity – Resting and action potential - transmission of impulses - Electrodes used for
Bio potential measurement-Electrical activity of the heart-ECG waveform-EEG-Electrical
Activity of Brain-EMG-Electrical activity of Muscles.
UNIT 4- Blood Pressure and Blood Flow Measurement and Therapeutic Instruments:
Duration: 10Periods (L: 7– T:3)
Direct Blood pressure measurement - Indirect Blood pressure measurement a) Electromagnetic

Blood flow meters b) Ultrasonic Blood flow meters.-Therapeutic Instruments (Basic Principles
only) – Cardiac Pacemakers - Defibrillators -Dialysis machine.
UNIT 5- Mass spectrometry and Chromatography:
Mass Spectroscopy: Principle of operation, advantages and applications - Absorption and

Adsorption, Chromatography- Principle of operation, advantages and applications of Gas and
Liquid chromatography.
UNIT 6: Modern Imaging Systems: Duration: 12 Periods(L:9– T:3)
X-Ray Imaging - properties, interaction, production, and significance of grid, Applications,

Limitations, Construction and operation of an X-Ray machine, C.A.T. Scanner-MRI Scanner-
Telemedicine-Introduction-working-applications.
Recommended Books
1. Instrumental Methods of Chemical Analysis by Willard, Merritt, Dean, Settle (CBS Publications &
Distributors Pvt. Ltd.)
2. Instrumental Methods of Chemical Analysis by Chatwal & Anand (Himalaya Publishing house)
3. Hand Book of Analytical Instrumentation by R.S. Khandpur
4. Industrial Instrumentation by Donald P.Eckman.
5. Industrial Instruments and Control by S.K.Singh.
6. Instrument Engineer Hand Book by Liptak.
7. Handbook on Bio-medical Instrumentation RS Khandpur
8. Introduction to Medical Electronics SK Guha
9. Bio-medical Instruments and measurements Cromwell, Weisel
577
10. Bio-medical Instrumentation Armugam
www.egr.msu.edu
www.bme.rutgers.edu
www.BMES.org
www.Biospace.com
www.chromacademy.com
www.agilent.com
1.0 Introduction to Analytical instrumentation and Spectrophotometer

1.1 Draw and explain the block diagram of Analytical instrumentation.
1.2 Define the term spectroscopy.
1.3 Define the terms atomic spectroscopy and molecular spectroscopy.
1.4 Draw and explain Electromagnetic spectrum.
1.5 State the Beer Lamberts law.
1.6 List the components of a Monochromators.
1.7 List types of Monochromators (Prism and Grating).
1.8 Explain
a) Prism
b) Grating Monochromators.
1.9 List different types of light sources for
a) Visible
b) UV
c) IR
1.10 List different types of light detectors for
a) Visible
b) UV
c) IR
1.11 Explain the operation of U.V Spectrophotometer
1.12 List the applications of U.V Spectrophotometer
1.13 Explain the operation of Visible Spectrophotometer
578
1.14 List the applications of Visible Spectrophotometer
1.15 Explain the operation of IR Spectrophotometer
1.16 List the applications of IR Spectrophotometer
2.0 Introduction to Analysers

2.1 Define Analyser.
2.2 State the necessity of analysers.
2.3 Explain the operation of Flame Photometer
2.4 List the applications of Flame Photometer
2.5 Explain the operation of Spectro flourometer
2.6 List the applications of Spectro flourometer
2.7 Explain the operation of Refractometer
2.8 List the applications of Refractometer
2.9 Explain the operation of Interferometer
2.10 List the applications of Interferometer
2.10 Explain the operation of Polarimeter
2.11 List the applications of Polarimeter
2.12 Explain the operation of Paramagnetic gas analyzer.
2.13 List the applications of Paramagnetic gas analyzer.
2.14 Explain the operation of Zirconia gas analyzer.
2.15 List the applications of Zirconia gas analyzer.
2.16 Explain the operation of Thermal conductivity type gas analyzer.
2.17 List the applications of Thermal conductivity type gas analyzer.
2.18 Explain the operation of Auto analyzer.
2.19 List the applications of Auto analyzer.
3.0 Introduction to Bio-Medical Instrumentation

3.1 Introduction to human body system.
3.2 Describe human Cell and their structure.
3.3 Components of bio medical instrumentation.
3.4 Explain resting and action potentials. Sodium pump and transmission of impulses. Describe the
wave forms.
3.5 State the need of bio potential electrodes.
3.6 Give the equivalent circuit of electrodes.
3.7 Explain the following types of electrodes.
579
a) Surface electrodes
b) Cup type electrodes
c) Disposable electrodes
d) Microelectrodes
3.8 List the Diagnostic Medical Equipment.
3.9 Draw the diagram and explain electrical activity of heart.
3.10 Explain the significance of ECG wave form.
3.11 Draw the electrocardiogram and indicate its amplitude and duration and state
their importance.
3.12 Draw the building Blocks of an electro cardio graph (ECG)
3.13 Explain ECG leads Configuration.
3.14 Compare the bipolar and unipolar leads.
3.15 List the applications of ECG.
3.16 Explain electrical activity of Brain. Indicate frequency regions.
3.17 Explain the bio potential electrodes associated with muscle activity (EMG).
4.0 Blood Pressure and Blood flow Measurement and Therapeutic Instruments.
4.1 State the necessity of blood pressure measurement.
4.2 List the various methods of blood pressure measurement.
4.3 Describe indirect blood pressure measurement (sphygmomanometer) with a diagram.
4.4 List the advantages and disadvantages of indirect blood pressure measurement.
4.5 Describe direct blood pressure measurement.
4.6 List the advantages and disadvantages of direct blood pressure measurement.
4.7 Explain the working principle of electromagnetic blood flow meter with diagram.
4.8 Explain the working principle of ultrasonic blood flow meter with diagram.
4.9 State the need of pacemakers.
4.10 Classify different types of pacemakers.
4.11 Compare the advantages of implantable pacemakers over external pacemakers.
4.12 Draw the block diagram of a ventricular synchronous demand pacemaker and explain its
operation.
4.13 State the need of defibrillators.
4.14 List the types of defibrillators.
4.15 Draw and explain the circuit diagram of capacitive discharge DC defibrillators.
4.16 Compare AC defibrillators and DC defibrillators.
580
4.17 Explain the importance of dialysis.
4.18 Explain the function of Haemodialysis machine.
5.0 Mass spectrometry and Chromatography

5.1. State the principle of Mass spectrometry.
5.2. List the advantages of mass spectrometer.
5.3. Derive the expression for mass charge ratio (m/e).
5.4. Draw and explain the block diagram of mass spectrometer.
5.5. List the applications of mass spectrometer.
5.6. Define the terms absorption and adsorption.
5.7. Differentiate between the terms absorption and adsorption.
5.8. Define chromatography.
5.9. Classify chromatography.
5.10. List the components of a Gas Chromatography.
5.11. Explain the principle of operation of the Gas Chromatography.
5.12. List the applications of Gas Chromatography.
5.13. List the advantages of the Gas Chromatography
5.14. Explain the principle of operation of the Liquid Chromatography.
5.15. List the applications of Liquid Chromatography.
5.16. List the advantages of Liquid Chromatography
6.0 Modern Imaging Systems.

6.1 X-Ray imaging
a) Explain the properties of X-Rays

b) Explain about the interaction of X-Rays with matter, explain Compton effect.
c) Explain the Production of X-Rays
d) Grids and their significance
e) Applications of X-Ray imaging
f) Limitations of X-Ray imaging
6.2 Describe the construction and operation of an X-ray machine with a block diagram.
6.3 State the need for computer axial tomography (CAT).
6.4 Describe the working principle of C.A.T Scanner.
6.5 List the applications of the C.A.T Scanner.
581
6.6 Define magneto resonance image (MRI).
6.7 Describe the working principles of MRI.
6.8 List the advantages of MRI.
6.9 State the importance of Telemedicine.
6.10 Explain the working principle of telemedicine.
6.11 List the applications of telemedicine.
1) The student has to Study the different types of Analytical and Biomedical Instruments by
doing a survey and then submit a handwritten report. Documents have to be maintained as a
record.
2) Take Quiz tests / assignments in topics based on Analytical and Biomedical

Instrumentation .Documents have to be maintained as a record.
3) Do a power point presentation on any type of Analytical instrument and biomedical instrument.
Documents have to be maintained as a record.
4) Visit YouTube sites relevant to topics on Analytical Instrumentation. Listen to the lectures and
submit a handwritten report.
5) Submit a report on where Gas Chromatography / Refractrometry can be used.
6) Visit a nearby hospital / diagnostic centre & submit a report on the various Biomedical
instruments used.
582
Lifelong learning
Engineering Tools
Basic knowledge
Communication
Ethics
Linked PO

CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CO1 2 2 2 1,2,4
CO2 2 2 2 2 1,2,4,6
CO3 2 2 2 2 1,2,3,5
CO4 2 2 2 2 2 1,2,3,4,5
CO5 2 2 2 2 1,2,3,4
CO6 2 2 2 2 1,2,3,4
Internal evaluation
Test Units Marks

Assignment 1 5
Seminars 1 5
Total 60
583

question
MID SEM-I EXAM

1 Unit-I 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-II 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM-II EXAM

1 Unit-III 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-IV 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)
584

question

Unit No
R U A
I
Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
II
III
Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
IV Q4
Q9(b), Q13(b),
V Q5,Q6
Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Q3
Q10(b), Q14(b),
VI Q7,Q8
Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)

BOARD DIPLOMA MID-SEMESTER EXAMINATIONS (C-18)
585
DEIE - V SEMESTER EXAMINATION
ANALYTICAL AND BIOMEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION (18EI-505E (A))

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PART –A
1. Define Spectroscopy
2. State Beer’s Lambert law.
3. Define Analyser.
4. List two applications of refractometer.
PART –B
5. (a) Draw the block diagram of Analytical Instrumentation.

(or)
5. (b) List the applications of UV Spectrophotometer
6. (a) Draw the diagram of a thermal conductivity gas analyser.
(or)
6. (b) List the components of Flame Photometer.
PART –C
7. (a) Explain the construction and working of visible spectro photometer with a
diagram.
(or)
7. (b) Explain the operation of UV Spectrophotometer.
8. (a) Explain the operation of auto analyser.
(or)
8. (b) Draw and explain the principle and operation of Paramagnetic gas analyser.
586

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PART –A
1. Define bioelectric potential.

2. List the diagnostic medical equipment.
3. List the methods of blood pressure measurement.
4. Define dialysis.
PART –B
5. (a) Draw and label the ECG waveform.

(or)
5. (b) Explain the electrical activity of Brain with frequency ranges.
6. (a) Compare AC and DC defibrillators.
(or)
6. (b) Compare the advantage of internal pacemakers over external pacemakers.
PART –C
7. (a) Explain the working of ECG recording setup with a diagram.

(or)
7. (b) Explain about Resting and action potentials with the help of wave forms.
8. (a) Explain the working of ventricular synchronous demand pacemaker with a
diagram.
(or)
8. (b) Explain the working of Electromagnetic blood flow meter.
587
PART –A
1. State Beer Lambert Law.

2. Define resting and action potential.
3. List the applications of Telemedicine.
4. Classify the different types of pacemakers.
5. State the principle of Mass spectroscopy.
6. Define chromatography.
7. Give the frequency range of X-rays.
8. Define MRI.
PART –B
Answer FOUR questions 4 x3 = 12
9. (a) Draw and explain the block diagram of Analytical instrumentation.

(or)
9. (b) Classify chromatography. List the components of a Gas Chromatography.
10. (a) Draw the electrocardiogram and indicate its amplitude and duration and state
their importance.
(or)
10. (b) State the need for computer axial tomography (CAT).
11. (a) List the advantages of Mass Spectrometer.
(or)
11. (b) List the applications of Gas Chromatography.
588
12. (a) State the need of Grids and their significance in X-Ray machine.
(or)
12. (b) List the advantages of MRI.

PART –C
13. (a) Draw and explain the principle and operation of Paramagnetic gas analyser.
(or)
13. (b) Draw and explain the block diagram of mass spectrometer.
14. (a) Explain the function of Haemodialysis machine.
(or)
14. (b) Describe the construction and operation of an X-ray machine with a block
diagram.
15. (a) Explain the principle of operation of the Gas Chromatography.
(or)
15. (b) Explain the principle of operation of Liquid Chromatography.
16. (a) Explain the working principle of telemedicine.
(or)
16. (b) Draw and explain the block diagram of MRI.
589
Communication Engineering
Course Title : Communication Engineering Course Code 18EI-505E(B)

Semester V Course Group :Elective
Teaching Scheme in
45:15:0 Credits :3
Periods(L:T:P)
Pre requisites
This course requires the basic knowledge of Electronics, Circuits and Control Systems.
Course Outcomes
CO1 : Categorize the modulation using communication system principles
CO2 : Compare AM and FM detectors, receivers
CO3 : Develop the basic knowledge on Digital modulation
CO4 : Determine modern communications techniques
CO5 : Use the functionalities of Computer Network layers
CO6 : Analyze the Advanced Wireless communication Techniques

No
R U A
1. Introduction to Communication System 6 Q1 Q9A Q13A
590
& Noise
2 AM and FM detectors, receivers 10
3 Digital modulation
9 Q2 Q10A Q14A
4. Modern Communication Q4
9
5. Computer Communication Q13B,
Q9B,Q11A,
Q5,Q6 Q15A,
12 Q11B
Q15B
Q3
6. Wireless communication Q10B,Q12A Q14B,
Q7,Q8 , Q12B Q16A,
14 Q16B
Total 60 8 8 8
Course Contents
UNIT 1- Introduction to Communication System & Noise

Communication system- Transmitter, receiver, channel- Different blocks of communication system
explanation- Modulation- need for Modulation in communication system- amplitude modulation-
waveform of AM wave- frequency modulation- waveform of FM wave- phase modulation- different
types of noise- internal and external Noise
UNIT 2- AM and FM Detectors / Receivers Duration: 10Periods (L: 8– T: 2)

Demodulation principle of TRF Receiver- need for heterodyning in a Radio Receiver. Block diagram
of super heterodyne Receiver. Need of RF & IF amplifier stages. Selectivity-,Sensitivity and fidelity-
basic principle of AM and FM detector- explanation of diode detector(envelope detector) circuit- List
of FM demodulator circuits- Explanation of Fosters – Seely Demodulator.
UNIT 3- Digital Modulation Duration: 9Periods (L: 6– T: 3)

Digital modulation techniques- ASK, FSK and PSK- Multiplexing techniques-FDM and TDM and
explain them with neat sketches- principle of pulse modulation- types of pulse modulation methods-
591
Sketch the waveforms of PAM, PPM, PWM and PCM- Compare between PAM, PPM, PWM and
PCM- applications of the above four types of modulation.
UNIT-4- Modern Communication Systems Duration: 9Periods (L: 7– T: 2)

Principle of Radar with a block diagram- Derivation of the basic Radar range equation- applications of
various Radar systems- need for satellite communication- advantages of satellite communication over
terrestrial radio communication- applications of satellites-working principle of transmitter and
Receivers used in fiber optic communication system-use of fibres in local telephone and cable T.V
(FTTH)
UNIT-5: Computer Communication Duration: 12Periods(L:9– T:3) Data

communication- need for data communication networking- Distinguish between analog and digital
data- Definition of computer network and state its use- ISO: OSI 7 layer architecture and explain the
function of each layer- different types of physical transmission media- use of UTP, STP, Coaxial and
Fiber optic cable in networking- simplex, half-duplex and full-duplex communication- definition of
bandwidth and throughput of a physical medium- three types of switching techniques used in
networking - circuit switching
UNIT 6: Demonstrate advancedWireless Communication System

Limitations of conventional mobile phone system- Evolution of cellular mobile communication
system- mobile station and base station- functions of Mobile switching centre (MSC)- channels in
mobile communication- voice and control channels in mobile communication- features of various
mobile radio systems around the world- simplex- half duplex and full duplex channels- frequency
division duplex (FDD) and time division duplex (TDD)- uplink and downlink channels in mobile
communication- block diagram of a basic cellular system.
Recommended Books
1. Mobile Cellular Telecommunications by William C.Y. Lee

2. Satellite Communication by Martin
3. Communication systems by Simon Hwikins
4. Electronic Communication Systems by Blake
592
5. Wireless communication Systems by William shallings
6. Fiber Optic Communication by Gover

3. www.nptel.ac.in
1.0 Communication Systems
1.1 Define communication system.

1.2 Explain Different blocks of communication system.
1.3 Define Modulation
1.4 State the need for Modulation in communication system.
1.5 Define amplitude modulation
1.6 Draw the waveform of AM wave
1.7 Define frequency modulation
1.8 Draw the waveform of FM wave
1.9 Define phase modulation
1.10 Classify different types of noise
1.11 Describe internal and external Noise
2.0 AM and FM Detectors / Receivers.
2.1 Define Demodulation .

2.2 Explain the principle of TRF Receiver
2.3 Identify the need for heterodyning in a Radio Receiver.
2.4 Draw the block diagram of super heterodyne Receiver.
2.5 State the need of RF & IF amplifier stages.
2.6 Define Selectivity, Sensitivity and fidelity.
2.7 Explain basic principle of AM detector
2.8 Explain basic principle of FM detector.
2.9 Draw and explain diode detector (Envelope detector) circuit.
2.10 List FM demodulator circuits.
2.11 Draw and Explain Fosters – Seely Demodulator.
3.0 Digital Modulation
3.1 Define ASK

3.2 Explain ASK modulator with block diagram.
593
3.3 Define FSK and PSK
3.4 Compare ASK, FSK and PSK
3.5 List the Multiplexing techniques
3.6 Explain FDM and TDM with neat sketches.
3.7 Explain the principle of Pulse modulation.
3.8 List the different types of pulse modulation methods.
3.9 Sketch the waveforms of PAM, PPM, PWM and PCM.
3.10 Compare PAM, PPM, PWM and PCM methods
3.11 List the applications of the above four types of modulation.
4.0 Modern Communication System
4.1 Define Radar.

4.2 State the basic principle of Radar with a block diagram.
4.3 Derive the basic Radar range equation.
4.4 List the applications of various Radar systems.
4.5 State the need for satellite communication
4.6 List the advantages of satellite communication over terrestrial radio
communication.
4.7 List the applications of satellites
4.8 Explain the working principle of transmitter and Receivers used in fiber optic
communication system.
4.9 Explain the use of fibres in local telephone and cable TV (FTTH)
5.0 Computer Communication
5.1 Define data communication

5.2 State the need for data communication networking.
5.3 Distinguish between analog and digital data.
5.4 Define computer network and state its uses.
5.5 Draw the ISO: OSI architecture
5.6 Explain the function of each layer.
5.7 List the different types of physical transmission media.
5.8 Explain the use of UTP, STP, Coaxial and Fiber optic cable in networking.
5.9 List the various communication methods
5.10 Define simplex, half-duplex and full-duplex communication.
5.11 Define bandwidth and throughput of a physical medium.
5.12 List the three types of switching techniques used in networking.
5.13 Explain about circuit switching
6.0 Demonstrate advancedWireless Communication System
6.1 List the limitations of conventional mobile phone system.

6.2 Evolution of cellular mobile communication system.
594
6.3 Define the terms mobile station and base station
6.4 State the functions of Mobile Switching Centre (MSC)
6.5 List various channels in mobile communication
6.6 Define voice and control channels in mobile communication
6.7 List the features of various mobile radio systems around the world
6.8 Distinguish between Frequency Division Duplex (FDD) and
Time Division Duplex (TDD).
6.9 Define uplink and downlink channels in mobile communication
6.10 Draw the block diagram of a basic cellular system.
3. Visit nearby Industry to familiarize with communication systems like
i) TV Station ii) FM Radio Station iii) Telephone exchange office
4. Analyze the connections and channels, cables available in the Institution facility
5. Quiz
6. Group discussion
7. Surprise test
Communication
Lifelong learning
Basic knowledge
Ethics
Linked PO
ToolsEngineering
societyEngineer and
Team workIndividual and

KnowledgeDiscipline
PO
CO PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9
10
CO1 2 2 2 1,2,10
CO2 2 2 2 2 1,2,5,6
CO3 2 2 2 2 1,2,4,5
CO4 2 2 2 2 1,2,5,7
CO5 2 2 2 2 2 1,2,4,5,8
CO6 2 2 2 2 1,2,3,8
Internal evaluation
595
Test Units Marks
Assignment 1 5
Seminars 1 5
Total 60

question
MID SEM-I EXAM

1 Unit-I 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-II 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM-II EXAM

1 Unit-III 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-IV 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)

596
question

Unit No
R U A
I
Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
II
III
Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
IV Q4
Q9(b), Q13(b),
V Q5,Q6
Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Q3
Q10(b), Q14(b),
VI Q7,Q8
Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)

597
COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING (18EI-505E (B))

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PART –A
1. Define Modulation.
2. Draw the waveform of FM wave.
3. Define demodulation?
4. State the need of RF in amplifier stages
PART –B
5. (a) State the need for Modulation in communication system.

(or)
5. (b) Classify different types of Noise.
6. (a) Draw and explain diode detector (envelope detector) circuit.
(or)
6. (b) Draw the block diagram of super heterodyne Receiver.
PART –C
7. (a) Describe internal and external Noise.
(or)
7. (b) Explain different blocks of communication system.
8. (a) Explain basic principle of AM and FM detector.
(or)
8. (b) Explain the principle of TRF Receiver.

598

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PART –A
Instructions: Answer all the questions. Each question carries one mark MARKS: 4X1 =4
1. List the applications of the PPM.

2. List different types of pulse modulation methods.
3. List the applications of various Radar systems.
4. List the advantages of satellite communication.
PART –B
5. (a) Explain the principle of pulse modulation.
(or)
5. (b) Compare PWM and PCM methods.
6. (a) Explain the working principle of transmitter and Receivers used in fiber optic
Communication system.
(or)
6. (b) State the basic principle of Radar with a block diagram.
PART –C
7. (a) Explain FDM with neat sketches.

(or)
7. (b) Explain ASK Modulator with block diagram.
8. (a) Explain the use of fibres in local telephone and cable T.V (FTTH).
(or)
8. (b) Derive the basic Radar range equation.

BOARD DIPLOMA END-SEMESTER EXAMINATIONS (C-18)
599
PART –A
1. Define communication system.

2. Define demodulation?
3. Define simplex.
4. State the need of RF Amplifier stage.
5. Define data communication.
6. Define computer network and state its use.
7. List the limitations of conventional mobile phone system.
8. List various channels in mobile communication.
PART –B
Answer FOUR questions 4 x3 = 12
9. (a) Explain Different blocks of communication system.

(or)
9. (b) Explain about circuit switch.

10. (a) Compare between PAM, PPM, PWM and PCM.
(or)
10. (b) List the limitations of conventional mobile phone system.
11. (a) Distinguish between analog and digital data.

(or)
11. (b) State the need for Data communication networking.

12. (a) State the functions of Mobile switching centre (MSC).
(or)
12. (b) Define terms Mobile station and Base station.
PART –C
600
13. (a) Draw and Explain Fosters – Seely Demodulator.

(or)
13. (b) Draw the ISO: OSI 7 layer architecture and explain the function of each
layer.
14. (a) Explain ASK modulator with block diagram.

(or)
14. (b) Distinguish between frequency division duplex (FDD) and time division
duplex (TDD).
15. (a) Explain the use of UTP, STP in networking.

(or)
15. (b) Explain about Half duplex and Full duplex communication.
16. (a) State the functions of Mobile switching centre (MSC).
(or)
16. (b) Write about Evolution of cellular mobile communication system.
MATLAB &Virtual Instrumentation

Lab Practice
Semester V Course Group Practical
601
Teaching Scheme in
15:0:30 Credits 1.5
Hrs(L:T:P)
Total Contact
Methodology Lecture + Practicals 45
Hours :
MATLAB &Virtual Instrumentation Lab Practice
This course requires the basic knowledge of Mathematics and Virtual Instrumentation software environment-
Lab view basics.
Course Outcomes
Pre requisites
CO1 : Able to get familiarize with MATLAB environment and its programming fundamentals
CO2 : Ability to write Programs using data types
CO3 : Able to write Programs using control structures
CO4 : Able to write Programs using Input-Output functions
CO5 : Able to write Programs using Vectors and Matrices
CO6 : Unitnew concept

Able to use the Unit name
in measurement and automation. Periods
No
CO7 : Able to control an external measuring device by interfacing a computer
CO8 : Able to use the Components in data acquisition and instrument control.
1. Familiarize with Mat lab environment 05
2 Mat lab Data types 05
3 Mat lab Control structures 06
4 Mat lab Input-Output functions 05
5. Mat lab Vectors and Matrices 06
Lab View basics

6 09
Debugging
7 06
VI tool602
set
8 03
Total: 45
Course Contents
1. Familiarize with Mat lab environment : Duration:5Periods(L:2– P:3)
Practicing MATLAB environment with simple exercises to familiarize Command Window, History,
workspace, Current Directory, Figure window, Edit window, Shortcuts, Help files.
2. Mat lab Data types : Duration:5Periods(L:2– P:3)
Simple exercises to familiarize Data types, Constants and Variables, Character constants, operators,
Assignment statements.
3. Mat lab Control structures : Duration:6Periods(L:2– P:4)
Simple exercises to familiarize Control Structures: For loops, While, If control structures, Switch, Break,
Continue statements.
4. Mat lab Input-Output functions : Duration:5Periods(L:2– P:3)
Simple exercises to familiarize Input-Output functions, Reading and Storing Data.
603
5. Mat lab Vectors and Matrices : Duration:6Periods(L:2– P:4)
Simple exercises to familiarize Vectors and Matrices, commands to operate on vectors and matrices,
matrix Manipulations.
6. Lab View basics

e) To familiarize with Virtual Instrumentation software Environment –Lab View.
f) To practice Lab View Editing Techniques.
g) To implement a VI to convert Degree Celsius to Fahrenheit.
h) To implement Logic gates using Lab View.
i) To construct basic ON-OFF control.
7. Debugging
c) To practice debugging features of Lab View.
d) To implement VI with two blinking indicator lights with a delay of two seconds.
e) To create a case structure using Switch.
f) To create a simple calculator using Lab view.
8. VI tool set
d) To practice working with VI tool set.
e) To create a program to plot data stored in an array.
f) To use a While Loop and a chart for acquiring and displaying data in real time.
Reference books
1. Gary Johnson, Lab VIEW Graphical Programming, 2nd edition, McGraw Hill, Newyork, 1997.
2. Lisa K. wells & Jeffrey Travis, Lab VIEW for everyone, Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 1997.
3. Jerome J., Virtual Instrumentation using Lab VIEW, Prentice Hall India Private Ltd., New Delhi,2010.
4. Kevin James, PC Interfacing and Data Acquisition: Techniques for Measurement, Instrumentation and
Control, Newnes, 2000.
5. Sanjay Gupta, Virtual Instrumentation using Lab view, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2010.
6. Bansal. R.K, Goel. A.K,Sharma. M.K, “MATLAB and its Applications in Engineering”, Pearson Education,
2012.
7. Amos Gilat, “MATLAB-An Introduction with Applications”, Wiley India, 2009. 3
8. Stephen.J, & Chapman, “Programming in MATLAB for Engineers”, Cengage Learning, 2011.
E-learning References
604
1.http://www.ni.com

1. Do Market survey on different Virtual Lab Software available in the market and collect the information
and compare. The student should submit a handwritten report. Documents have to be maintained as a
record.
2. Take Quiz tests / assignments on lab experiments. Documents have to be maintained as a record.
3. Design a Level measurement VI with simulated sensor input (4 mA to 20 mA) that raises an alarm when
the level crosses a fixed (user defined) limit.
4. Use Data Acquisition in LabVIEW - Acquiring analog signal from a function generator through NI-
USB-6210 into LabVIEW using DAQ Assistant Express VI.
5. Plot Dynamic Characteristics of a Spring-Mass Damper system using control Design & simulation
module.

Teaching
Course Outcome CL Linked PO periods
Able to get familiarize with MATLAB environment and its

CO1 1,3,10
programming fundamentals R/U 05
CO2 Ability to write Programs using data types 1,2,10

R/U/A 05
CO3 Able to write Programs using control structures 1,2,3,7,10
R/U/A 06
CO4 Able to write Programs using Input-Output functions 1,3,4,8,10
R/U/A 05
1,2,3,4,7,
CO5 Able to write Programs using Vectors and Matrices R/U/A 06
8,10
1,2,3,4,8,1 12
R/U
CO6 Able to use the new concept in measurement and automation. 0
Able to control an external measuring device by interfacing a 1,2,3,4,8,1 12
CO7 R/U/A
computer. 0
Able to use the Components in data acquisition and 12
CO8 R/U/A 1,2,3,4,810
instrument control.
Total 45
Internal Evaluation
Test Units Marks

Mid Sem 1 1, 2 ,3,4 20
Mid Sem 2 5,6,7,8 20
Internal Evaluation Attendance (5) 605 20
experiments (10)
Total 60
18EI-506P – MATLAB and Virtual Instrumentation Lab Practice

606

1. Create a Simple Matlab script file to aassign the values of 3 and 4 to the variables x and y,
respectively, then calculate the value of z where z = 2x − 7 y.
2. Create a Simple Matlab script file to Perform the multiple operations (15 – 4 + 12)/5 – 2*(7^4)/100.
3. Create a Simple Matlab script file to solve the quadratic equation x2 -7x +12 = 0.
4. Create a Simple Matlab script file to Generate the row vector x with integer values ranging from 1
to 9.
5. Create a Simple Matlab script file to compute the factorial of 7.
6. Generate the following rectangular matrix in MATLAB. What is the size of this matrix?
A= 3 0 −2
[
1 3 5 ]
7. Create a Simple Matlab script file to Combine the three vectors [1 3 0 -4], [5 3 1 0], and [2 2 -1 1] to
obtain a new matrix of size 3x4.
607

1. Implement a VI to convert Degree Celsius to Fahrenheit.

2. Implement Logic gates using Lab View.
3. Construct basic ON-OFF control.
4. Implement VI with two blinking indicator lights with a delay of two seconds.
5. Create a case structure using Switch.
6. Create a simple calculator using Lab view
DEIE V Semester Practical Examination

608
Course Code: 18EI-506P Duration: 2 hours
Course Name: MATLAB and Virtual Instrumentation Lab Practice Max.Marks:40
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

1. 1. Create a Simple Matlab script file to aassign the values of 3 and 4 to the variables x and y,
respectively, then calculate the value of z where z = 2x − 7 y.
2. Create a Simple Matlab script file to Perform the multiple operations (15 – 4 + 12)/5 – 2*(7^4)/100.
3. Create a Simple Matlab script file to solve the quadratic equation x2 -7x +12 = 0.
4. Create a Simple Matlab script file to Generate the row vector x with integer values ranging from 1
to 9.
5. Create a Simple Matlab script file to compute the factorial of 7.
6. Generate the following rectangular matrix in MATLAB. What is the size of this matrix?
A= 3 0 −2
[
1 3 5 ]
7. Create a Simple Matlab script file to Combine the three vectors [1 3 0 -4], [5 3 1 0], and [2 2 -1 1] to
obtain a new matrix of size 3x4.
8. Implement a VI to convert Degree Celsius to Fahrenheit.
9. Implement Logic gates using Lab View.
10. Construct basic ON-OFF control.
11. Implement VI with two blinking indicator lights with a delay of two seconds.
12. Create a case structure using Switch.
INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION LAB
Course Title : INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION LAB Course Code 18EI-507P
609
Semester V Course Group :Practical
Teaching Scheme in
15:0:30 Credits :3
Periods(L:T:P)
Methodology Lecture + Practicals Total Periods : :45 periods
Pre requisites
This course requires the basic knowledge of PLC and SCADA.
Course Outcomes
CO1 : Analyze and test the Logic Gates.
CO2 : Develop & Test the programs on Timer.
CO3 : Develop & Test the programs on counters.
CO4 : Develop and implement the PLC concepts with Applications.
CO5 : Analyze, apply and observe the interfacing of PLC and SCADA.
1. Logic Gates 9
2. Timer Programs 6
3. Counter Programs 3
4 Applications 15
5 SCADA 12
Total: 45
Course Contents
I. UNIT 1 –Fun
610
I. Logic Gates
1. Test the basic gates using PLC.
2. Test the universal gates using PLC.
3. Test the EX-OR gate and EX-NOR gates using PLC.
II. Timer Programs
1. Programs on ON-Delay Timer and OFF-Delay Timers.
2. Programs on Retentive and Non-Retentive Timers.
III. Counter programs
1. Programs on up counter.
2. Programs on down counters.
IV Applications
1. Star-Delta starter control using PLC
2. Lift control using PLC
3. Traffic light controller using PLC.
4. Conveyor controller using PLC.
5. Sequential control of Induction motors using PLC
6. Level control using PLC
7. Bottle filling using PLC timer
V. SCADA
1. Using SCADA software create graphic symbols and associate tags with memory tags.
2. Interface SCADA with PLC and associate tags with memory and I/O and operate the LC inputs
through the switch symbol from the computer screen and view the status of the outputs using
lamp and motor graphics symbols in the screen.
Reference books
1. Introduction to Programmable Logic Controllers by Garry Dunning,Thomson,2nd

edition, Thomson, ISBN: 981-240-625-5
2. Practical SCADA for Industry, David Bailey and Edwin Wright, Newnes An imprint
of Elsevier, 2003, ISBN 07506 58053
3. Programmable Logic Controllers, JR Hackworth, Frederick , Pearson Education

4. Programmable Logic Controllers, W Bolton, Elsevier
5. Learning Programmable Logic Controllers with Applications, PK Srivastava, BPB Publications
Suggested e-Learning References
611
1. www.plcs.net
2. www.PLC circuits-tutorials.ws
1. Student inspects the available equipment in the Lab to identify the components.
2. Visit nearby Industry to familiarize with automation using PLC/SCADA ex: Power stations, Cement
Paper and Chemical Industries.

Teaching
Course Outcome CL Linked PO periods
CO1 Analyze and test the Logic Gates. 9

R/U 1,2,3,4,8,10
CO2 Develop & Test the programs on Timer. R/U/ 1,2,3,4,8,10 6

A
CO3 Develop & Test the programs on counters. R/U/ 1,2,3,4,810 3

A
CO4 Develop and implement the PLC concepts with Applications. R/U/ 1,2,3,4,810 15
A
CO5 Analyze, apply and observe the interfacing of PLC and R/U/ 1,2,3,4,8,10 12
SCADA. A
Total 45
612
Internal Evaluation
Test Units Marks
Mid Sem 1 1, 2 and 3 20
Mid Sem 2 4,5 20

experiments (10)
Total 60
613
INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION LAB (18EI-507P)
Time: 1 hrs. Max Marks: 20

1. Develop the ladder diagram to Test the basic gates using PLC
2. Develop the ladder diagram to Test the universal gates using PLC.
3. Develop the ladder diagram to Test the EX-OR gate and EX-NOR gates using PLC.
4. Develop the ladder diagram on ON-Delay Timer and OFF-Delay Timers
5. Develop the ladder diagram on Up counter counters
6. Develop the ladder diagram on Down counters
7. Develop the ladder diagram with PLC for Star Delta starter.
614
Time: 1 hr. Max Marks: 20

1. Develop the ladder diagram with PLC for Lift control.

2. Develop the ladder diagram with PLC for Liquid level control.
3. Develop the ladder diagram with PLC for Bottle filling using timer. .
4. Develop the ladder diagram with PLC for Traffic light controller.
5. Develop the ladder diagram with PLC for Conveyor controller.
6. Develop the ladder diagram with PLC for Sequential control of Induction motors
7. Using SCADA software create graphic symbols and associate tags with memory Tags
8. Interface SCADA with PLC and associate tags with memory and I/O and operate the PLC inputs
lamp and motor graphics symbols in the screen
615

1. Develop the ladder diagram to Test the basic gates using PLC
2. Develop the ladder diagram to Test the universal gates using PLC.
3. Develop the ladder diagram to Test the EX-OR gate and EX-NOR gates using PLC.
4. Develop the ladder diagram on ON-Delay Timer and OFF-Delay Timers
5. Develop the ladder diagram on Up counter counters
6. Develop the ladder diagram on Down counters
7. Develop the ladder diagram with PLC for Star Delta starter.
8. Develop the ladder diagram with PLC for Lift control.
9. Develop the ladder diagram with PLC for Liquid level control.
10. Develop the ladder diagram with PLC for Bottle filling using timer. .
11. Develop the ladder diagram with PLC for Traffic light controller.
12. Develop the ladder diagram with PLC for Conveyor controller.
13. Develop the ladder diagram with PLC for Sequential control of Induction motors
14. Using SCADA software create graphic symbols and associate tags with memory Tags
15. Interface SCADA with PLC and associate tags with memory and I/O and operate the PLC inputs
lamp and motor graphics symbols in the screen
616
Analytical & Biomedical Instrumentation Lab Practice
Analytical & Biomedical

Course Title : Pre requisites Course Code 18EI-508P
Instrumentation Lab Practice
Teaching Scheme in
15:0:30 Credits : 1.5
Periods(L:T:P)
Methodology Lecture + Practicals Total Periods : :45
This course requires the basic knowledge of Analytical and Biomedical Instruments.
Course Outcomes
CO1 : Experiments are carried out for the application and usage of absorption and emission spectroscopy
CO2 : Experiments are carried out for the application and usage of analyzers.
CO3 : Experiments are carried out for the application and usage of gas chromatography.
CO4 : Cardiovascular instrument is connected to the patient and measurements are taken and
recorded.
CO5 : Blood pressure measurement using sphygmomanometer.
CO6: Experiments are carried out for the equipment for critical care and x-ray imaging.
1. Spectrophotometers 6
2. Analyzers 6
3. Chromatographic Technique 3
4 CardiovascularCourse Content and Blue Print

instrument 6
5 Blood Pressure and Blood flow measurement 9

617
6 Critical care equipment and X-ray imaging 15
45
Course
II. Contents
UNIT 1 –Fun
1. Spectrophotometers Duration: 6Periods(L:2– P:4)
1. Identification of atoms and its concentration through absorption spectra with VIS
Spectrophotometer.
2. Using UV Spectro Photo Meter, analyse the composition of the given sample.
2. Analyzers Duration: 6Periods(L:2– P:4)
3. Determining the refractive index of the given sample using refractometer.
4. Determination of percentage of oxygen using Paramagnetic gas analyzer.
3. Chromatographic technique Duration: 3Periods(L:1– P:2)
5. Separation of different constituents in a mixture of chemical using gas chromatography
4. Cardiovascular Instrument Duration: 6Periods(L:2– P:4)
6. Concept of ECG system and placement of electrodes.

5. Blood Pressure and Blood flow Measurement Duration: 9Periods(L:2– P:7)
7. Use of sphygmomanometer for measurement of blood pressure.
8. Use of Electromagnetic blood flow meter.
6. Critical care equipment and X-ray imaging Duration:15Periods(L:3– P:12)
9. Study of DC Defibrillator.
10. Study of Pacemakers.
618
11. Study and Demonstration of X-ray-Machine.
12. Study of C.A.T scanner.
Suggested students Activities:

6. Do Market survey on different Analytical and biomedical instruments available in the market and
collect the information and compare. The student should submit a handwritten report. Documents
have to be maintained as a record.
7. Take Quiz tests / assignments on lab experiments. Documents have to be maintained as a record.
1. Handbook of Analytical Instrumentation, R.S. Khandpur, TMH.

2. Instrumental Method of Analysis- by Willard.H.H, Merit L.L,Dean,
3. Hand-book of Biomedical Instrumentation – by R.S. Khandpur, McGraw-Hill, 2003.
4. Medical Instrumentation, Application and Design – by John G. Webster, John Wiley.

Ethics
Communication
Linked PO
Environment &
knowledge Basic

Tools Engineering
learning Lifelong
sustainability
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
CO PO 6
1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 10
CO1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1,2,3,4,8,10
CO2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1,2,3,4,8,10
CO3 2 2 2 2 2 2 1,2,3,4,810
CO4 2 2 2 2 2 2 1,2,3,4,810
CO5 2 2 2 2 2 2 1,2,3,4,8,10
Internal Evaluation
619
Test Units Marks
Mid Sem 1 1, 2 and 3 20
Mid Sem 2 4,5 and 6 20

experiments (10)
Total 60
Course Code: 18EI-508P Duration: 1 hour
Course Name: Analytical and Biomedical Instrumentation Lab Practice Max.Marks:20
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Identify the atoms and mention their concentrations using visible spectrophotometer.
4. Determination of percentage of oxygen using Paramagnetic gas analyser.
620
Course Code: 18EI-508P Duration: 1 hour
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
621
Course Code: 18EI-508P Duration: 2 hours
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Identify the atoms and mention their concentrations using visible spectrophotometer.
4. Determination of percentage of oxygen using Paramagnetic gas analyser.
9. Study of DC Defibrillator.
10. Study of Pacemakers.
11. Study and Demonstration of X-ray-Machine.
12. Study of C.A.T scanner.
622
PROGRAMMING IN C LAB PRACTICE
Course Title : Programming in C lab practice Course Code 18EI-509P
Semester V Course Group Practical
Teaching Scheme in
15:0:30 Credits 1.5
Periods(L:T:P)
Methodology Lecture + Practical Total Contact Hours : 45 Periods
Pre requisites
Basic knowledge of Computer Operation.
Course outcomes
Course Outcome
CO1
Write programs using input/output statements, variables and operators
CO2
Work on Constants, Variables, Data Types, Operators and Expressions in C
CO3
Construct programs on Decision making and Looping statements.
CO4
Develop programs using arrays, Strings and structures
Course Content
1. Programming Methodology and Introduction to C Language Duration: 5 Periods

Program - Define High level language and low level language-history of C language - importance of C
language – Define & Differentiate Compiler, Assembler - structure of C language - programming style
of C language - steps involved in executing the C program
2. Understand Constants, Variables and Data Types in C and Understand Operators and Expressions in C
Duration: 15 Periods
Character set - C Tokens - Keywords and Identifiers- Constants and Variables - data types and
classification - declaration of a variable - Assigning values to variables - Define an operator - Define an
expression -Classify operators - List and explain various arithmetic operators with examples -Illustrate
the concept of relational operators - List logical operators - various assignment operators - Increment
and decrement operators - Conditional operator - List bitwise operators -List various special operators-
623
Arithmetic expressions- precedence and associativity of operators- Evaluation of expressions -
formatted input and output.
3. Decision making and Looping statements Duration: 10 Periods

Simple if statement with sample program – if else statement – else if statement – switch statement -
Classification of various loop statements- while statement – do-while statement - for loop statement -
break and continue statements.
4. Arrays and Structures Duration: 15 Periods

Arrays - declaration and initialization of One Dimensional - Accessing elements in the Array -
Declaration and initialization of two Dimensional Arrays - sample programs on matrix addition and
matrix multiplication –Strings – String handling functions - Declaration of a Structure – Structure
members – Array of structures.
Teaching
Course Outcome CL Linked PO
Hours
CO1 Write programs using input/output statements, variables R, U, A 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 5

and operators
CO2 Work on Constants, Variables, Data Types, Operators and R, U, A 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 15

Expressions in C
CO3 Construct programs on Decision making and Looping R,U, A 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 10

statements.
CO4 U, A 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 15
Develop programs using arrays, Strings and structures
Total Sessions 45
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Let Us C -- YeshwanthKanetkar BPB Publications

2. Programming in ANSI C -- E. Balaguruswamy Tata McGrawHill
3. Programming with C -- Gottfried Schaum’outline
4. C The complete Reference -- Schildt Tata McGraw Hill
List of Experiments
1. Exercise on structure of C program

2. Exercise on Keywords and identifiers
3. Exercise on constants and variables
4. Execution of simple C program
5. Exercise on operators and expressions
624
6. Exercise on special operators
7. Exercise on input and output of characters
8. Exercise on formatted input and output
9. Exercise on simple if statement
10. Exercise on if else statement
11. Exercise on else if ladder statement
12. Exercise on switch statement
13. Exercise on conditional operator
14. Exercise on while statement
15. Exercise on for statement
16. Exercise on do...while statement
17. Exercise on one dimensional arrays
18. Exercise on two dimensional arrays
19. Exercise on string handling functions.
20. Exercise on structure
21. Exercise on array of structures
625
PROJECT WORK
Course Title : Project Work Course Code 18EI-510P
Teaching Scheme in
Periods(L:T:P)
15:0:30 Credits : 1.5
Methodology Lecture + Practical Total Periods : :45
S. Max Marks
Subject Items
No
1. project work I spell (Abstract

submission) 20
2. project work II spell (Final

submission) 20
3.a) Maintenance of Log

PROJECT Book 10
1
WORK
b) Record work 10
4.a) Seminar 20
b) Viva Voce 20
TOTAL 100
The Project work carries 100 marks and pass marks is 50% of the Total marks.If a candidate
failing to secure the minimum marks should repeat the Project work.
626

Note:
(2) As a record of the activity at least Rubric sheet for each student For every activity at least

Unsatisfactor
Dimensio Developing Satisfactory Good Excellent Student
y
n Score
1 2 3 4 5
Collects
Collect Collects
Does not very
much some basic Collects a
collect limited
information; information great deal of
but very ; information;
of data information ; 4
limited most refer all refer to
relating to the some relate
relate to the topic
topic to
to the topic the topic
the topic
Does not
Performs
Fulfill perform Performs all
very Performs Performs
team’s any duties duties of
little duties very nearly all 5
roles assigned to assigned
but little duties duties
& duties the team roles
unreliable.
team role
Always
Usually
Always relies Rarely does does
does Normally
Shares on the assigned the assigned
the assigned does the
work others to do work; often work 3
work; rarely assigned
equally the needs without
needs work
work reminding having to be
reminding
reminded
Usually
does Talks good;
Is always
Listen to most of the but never Listens, but
talking; Listens and
other talking; show sometimes
never allows speaks a fair 2
Team rarely interest talk too
anyone else to amount
mates allows in listening much
speak
others others
to speak
627

Proficient
and Note
Taking Accurately researched Recorded Misinterpreted Recorded
a variety of information relevant statements, information
sources recorded and information graphics and from four or
interpreted significant from multiple questions and less resources
facts, meaningful sources of failed to did not find
graphics, and information identify graphics and
evaluated alternative evaluated and relevant ignored
points of view. synthesized arguments. alternative
information.
planning
the slide presentation The thumbnail The thumbnail There a very
structure with sketches on sketches on few thumbnail
thumbnail sketches of the topic the topic are sketches on
each slide including: include titles not in a logical the topic and
title of slide, text, and text for sequence and do not provide
background color, each slide have an overview of
placement & size of and are in incomplete the
graphic, fonts - color, sequential information. presentation.
size, type for text and order.
headings. All slides
are numbered, and
there is a logical
sequence to the
presentation.
presents the overall introduction is introduction introduction
topic and draws the clear and shows some does not orient
audience into the coherent and structure but the audience to
presentation with relates to the does not what will follow.
compelling questions topic. create a strong
or by relating to the sense of what The
audience's interests or is to follow. sequencing is
goals. May be overly unclear and
detailed or does not
incomplete and appear
is somewhat interesting or
appealing to relevant to the
the audience. audience.
3 points 2 points 1 point 0 points
628
Content The content is written The content is The content is The content ___/3
information. sense of
The project includes purpose. Includes little
motivating questions Includes persuasive
and advanced persuasive Includes some information and
organizers. The information persuasive only one or two
project gives the from reliable information facts about the
audience a clear sources. with few facts. topic.
sense of the main
idea. Some of the Information is
information incomplete, out
Information is may not seem of date and/or
accurate, current and to fit. incorrect.
comes mainly from *
primary sources. Sources used Sequencing of
appear ideas is
unreliable. unclear.
The fonts are easy to Sometimes Overall The text is
read and point size the fonts are readability is extremely
varies appropriately for easy to read, difficult with difficult to read
headings and text. but in a few lengthy with long
places the paragraphs, blocks of text
Use of italics, bold, use of fonts, too many and small point
and indentations italics, bold, different fonts, size of fonts,
enhances readability. long dark or busy inappropriate
paragraphs, background, contrasting
Text is appropriate in color or busy overuse of colors, poor
length for the target background bold or lack of use of
audience and to the detracts and appropriate headings,
point. does not indentations of subheadings,
enhance text. indentations, or
The background and readability. bold formatting.
colors enhance the
readability of text.
contributes to the horizontal and structure, but confusing, and
overall message with vertical white appears does not use
appropriate use of space cluttered and spacing,
headings, appropriately. busy or headings and
subheadings and distracting with subheadings to
white space. large gaps of enhance the
629
uses a
distracting
background.
and/or
Animation The graphics, and/or The Some of the The graphics,
animation assist in graphics, /and graphics, and/or
theme and enhance visually depict animations unrelated to the
understanding of material and seem content.
concept, ideas and assist the unrelated to
relationships. audience in the Graphics do
understanding topic/theme not enhance
Original images are the flow of and do not understanding
created using proper information or enhance the of the content,
size and resolution, content. overall or are
and all images concepts. distracting
enhance the content. Original decorations
images are Most images that create a
There is a consistent used. are clip art or busy feeling
visual theme. recycled from and detract
Images are the internet. from the
proper size, content.
resolution. Images are too
large/small in
size.
Images are
poorly cropped
or the
color/resolution
is fuzzy.
Skills
errors) reader, and
major editing
and revision is
required.
(more than five

errors)
630
INDUSTRIAL TRAINING
Course Title : Industrial Training Course Code : :18EI-60IP

Semester :Traction
VI Course :P
Teaching Scheme / week : 48 Hrs Group
Credits : 25
Methodology : Training Total Contact : 6 months
Period
CIE : 300 SEE : 100
Industrial Evaluation : 600
Rationale: Industrial training is introduced in the VI semester for the students as a part of the program to make
the passed out students shall be industry ready thus saving the time for training and apprenticeship needs in the
industry and also help in capacity building of the Telangana state and the country.
Course Objective:
To enable the students to
1. Acquaint with Industry environment and culture.

2. Acquires latest technology available in the Industry
3. Develop professional skills
4. Enhance the usage skills of modern tools
5. Develop Communication and leadership skills.
6. Encourage entrepreneurship
Course Outcomes:
CO Outcome CO/PO
Mapping
CO Appreciate the organizational setup and hierarchy 2,8
1
CO Practice the use of Resource optimization techniques 1,2,3,4,10
2
CO Develop core engineering skills 2,4,5
3
CO Develop an understanding of solutions for Environmental issues 6
4 in the industry
CO Get acquainted to industry culture and professionalism 5,8,10
5
CO Trained in entrepreneur skills 5,7
6
CO Acquire the knowledge in latest Technology 4,10
7
CO Team leadership 8
8
Evaluation:
1. The student should submit a report describing the profile of the company, Nature of the job assigned
to him /her and other details in a standard format duly attested and approved by the head of the
industry after two weeks and before Four weeks from the date of joining through e mail. Hard copy of
the report may be submitted in person or by post.
631
2. A candidate shall be assessed twice in the spell of industrial training i.e. at the end of Second month
and fourth month in the Industry and Final Exam will be conducted at Institution.
3. The assessment shall be carried out by a committee comprising of a representative of the Industry
where the candidate is undergoing training and a faculty member from the respective program from
the Polytechnic. One faculty member is allotted for Ten students and that faculty has to visit the
industry minimum Three times i.e. first visit at the time of allotment, second visit at the time of first
assessment and third visit for second assessment
For Institution level evaluation of industrial training, a committee consisting following faculty
members (1) Head of Dept. concerned. (2) Faculty member who assessed the student in the industry (3)
External examiner from the Industry/Institution.
 Evaluation and assessment of Industrial Training, shall be done and marks be awarded in the following
manner, provided the candidates concerned have put up minimum 90% attendance of Industrial
Training.
Industrial assessment at Industry : 600 marks (in two spells of 300 marks each)
Institutional Evaluation : 300 marks
Semester End Examination : 100 marks

(Seminar/viva-voce at Institution)
_________
TOTAL 1000 marks
Assessment parameters at Industry

Assessment
Assessment I
Sl No II (Second
Learning Parameter (First Quarter)
Quarter)
1 Attendance and punctuality 20 20
2 Familiarity of tools and material 30 30
3 Engineering skills 50 50
4 Application of knowledge & Problem solving skills 50 50
5 Comprehension and observation 10 10
6 Professionalism/Professional ethics 20 20
7 Safety and environmental consciousness 10 10
8 Communication skills 20 20
9 Supervisory skills 50 50
10 General conduct during the period 40 40
Total marks for Industry Evaluation 300

300
600 marks
632
Assessment parameters at Institution (End Examination)
Institution Level Evaluation Scheme
Sl Criteria Marks Time

No
1 1st Report Submission 50 within 4 Weeks
2 Seminar-I 50 9th to 10th week
3 2nd Report Submission 50 Within 12 weeks
4 Log book 100 --
5 Seminar-II 50 Before Viva-Voce
Institute Evaluation 300

Total
1 Viva-Voce 50 After 24 weeks
2 Presentation/Demonstration 50
of skills
Total 100
The assessment at the institute level will be done by a minimum of three members i.e. Internal Faculty,
Industrial Experts/External Examiner and H.O.D. and the shall be averaged
Learning Outcomes
1.0 Observe Safety Precautions and rules of the industry
1.1. Know the importance of safety in industries

1.2. Understand the safety about personnel protection, equipment protection
1.3. Know the usage of various safety devices
1.4. Precautionary measures to be taken.
2.0 Appreciate organizational set up from top executive to workmen level
2.1. Acquaint with the function of each department/section

2.2. Comprehend the inter relationship among various department/sections.
3.0. Observe the end product and variousComponents/ materials used in the production and
Identify their source.
633
3.1. Identify the various stages involved in the assembly and production of end product.
3.2. List the final products, their composition and its commercial importance, uses and Applications.
4.0. Develop an Understanding the various stages involved in processing, sequential arrangement of
different equipment.
4.1. Represent the whole process and each sub processes with a flow diagram, detail
Flow diagram
4.2. Observe and appreciate the resource optimization of space (the arrangement of various equipment
and machinery in systematic manner in a less possible area of site), Electricity, Men, machinery, money
and Time.
5.0 Explain various analytical methods used in the quality control department
5.1. Practice the Testing methods for quality assurance and bench mark standards
5.2. Practice use of various tools, instruments used for quality checking.
6.0. Observe trouble shooting /servicing /maintenance techniques used during the production
6.1. Observe preventive precautions and maintenance of each equipment in the unit
6.2. Follow Staring andshutting down procedures for the equipment in the unit.
7.0 Identify the various pollutants emitted from the plant/Industry.

7.1 State effects of pollutants.
7.2 Explain handling methods of E waste and pollutants disposal


Basic knowledge
Communication
Lifelong learning
Engineering Tools
Ethics
workIndividual and Team
Linked PO
10
CO1 3 1 3 3 3 1 1 2 1 3 2,8
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 - - 1 2 3 1,2,3,4,10
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 - - 2 - 3 2,4,5
CO4 - - - - - 3 2 - - - 6
CO5 - - - 2 3 - 2 3 3 - 5,8,10
CO6 2 2 3 3 3 1 2 3 3 3 5,7
CO7 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - 2 3 4,10
CO8 - - 2 - 3 - 2 3 3 - 8
634

DEIE

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DEIE

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

DEIE

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

C-18 - CURRICULUM

FOR DIPLOMA PROGRAMMES IN TELANGANA

1. Duration of course is 3 years of Regular Academic instruction.

II. RULES AND REGULATIONS

1. 2 PROCEDURE FOR ADMISSION INTO THE DIPLOMA COURSES:

1.3 MEDIUM OF INSTRUCTION

The medium of instruction and examination shall be English.

1.4 PERMANENT IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (PIN)

the 31st March of the succeeding year.

c). Candidates having less than 65% attendance shall be detained.

a) Within 15 days after commencement of class work in any semester

2.1 I, II, III, IV, V and VI Semesters:

THEORY EXAMINATION: Each semester end examination carries 40 marks in respect of

2.2 ASSESSMENT SCHEME

 The Regular Examinations and Backlog Examinations shall be conducted separately.

Part 3 Unit 5&6 ‘Remember’ based questions V.

2. Hybrid grading system for regular students:

a) The students are permitted to choose two electives in V semester.

Industrial Training (VI Semester)

Swapping of Industrial Training in C-18 Curriculum in V and VI Semesters

Institutional Evaluation : 300 marks

Semester End Examination : 100 marks

2 Familiarity of tools and material 30 30

Application of knowledge & Problem solving 50

5 Comprehension and observation 10 10

7 Safety and environmental consciousness 10 10

10 General conduct during the period 40 40

Total marks for Industry Evaluation 300

Assessment parameters at Institution (End Examination)

Institution Level Evaluation Scheme

Promotion rules for C-18 (IVC)

S No. From To Attendance Cumulative Remarks

4.1 EXAMINATION FEE SCHEDULE:

4.2 ISSUE OF GRADE CARD:

4.5.2 MALPRACTICE CASES:

18EI- Basics of Electrical and 14 35

20 5 17 630 25 200 200 200 400 170 1000 425

Course Title : Basic English Course Code : 18EI-101F

Semester : I Course Group : Foundation

Teaching Scheme in Periods (L:T:P:) : Credits :3

Methodology : Communicative Language Total Contact Periods : 60 periods

CIE : 60 Marks SEE : 40 Marks

Prerequisites: Basic knowledge of English Language

101.2 listen and reciprocate appropriately

101.3 use a dictionary and acquire vocabulary for social interaction

101.4 speak and write grammatically correct sentences

101.5 analyse and evaluate the written material

101.6 convey ideas in the form of paragraphs and letters

UNIT – 1: SPEAKING Duration: 12 Periods

1. Need For English

4. Expressing Likes & Dislikes

UNIT –3: VOCABULARY Duration: 8 Periods

7. How to use a Dictionary

8. Words Often Confuse

UNIT -4 : GRAMMAR Duration: 16 Periods

10. Basic Sentence Structures

12. Asking Questions

UNIT - 5: READING Duration: 6 Periods

9. The Mighty Mountain and Little Lads of Telangana

10. The Adventures of Toto

My friend is __. She bought a _ house.